JP7457442B2 - Slot Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as slot machines and pachinko machines.

Conventionally, gaming machines include slot machines (reel type gaming machines), pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, and jankyu gaming machines, and among these types of gaming machines, there is a slot machine such as that shown in Patent Document 1.

JP 2017-144015 Publication

In conventional gaming machines, various improvements have been made in order to improve the gameplay and increase the interest of the game, and to make the game smoother, but there is still room for further improvement.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

The present invention has the following features. In addition, in the following description of the characteristic configuration, an example of a corresponding configuration in the embodiment described later is shown in parentheses.

The slot machine according to the present invention includes a winning ratio monitor capable of displaying the winning ratio and a set value display, and when the winning ratio monitor is not lit, the surface color of each segment is determined by the setting value display when the winning ratio monitor is not lit. It is configured so that it can be recognized as a different color from the surface color of each segment when it is lit, and the surface color of the lit segment when the ratio monitor is lit is the same as the setting value display. It is configured so that it can be recognized as being approximately the same color as the surface color of the lit segment when the set value display is lit, and the size of the predetermined number that can be displayed in each segment of the set value display is This is a mode that is larger than the size of a predetermined number that can be displayed in each segment of the role ratio monitor .
Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes a board (for example, an LED board 310) provided at a predetermined location, and a plurality of light emitting components mounted on a component surface of the board, and the board includes When viewed from the front, the light-emitting component is formed into a curved shape, and includes a plurality of light-emitting elements of different colors (for example, a red LED element 344R, a green LED element 344G, and a blue LED element 344B) whose relative positions are determined. ), and a predetermined proportion or more of the light-emitting components among the plurality of light-emitting components may be mounted in the same attitude with respect to the component surface.

A gaming machine with the above configuration can increase the enjoyment of the game.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a slot machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a block diagram schematically showing the configuration of the slot machine. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on the reels of the slot machine. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining background patterns drawn on the reels of the slot machine. A diagram showing symbol combination 1 in the above slot machine. It is a diagram showing symbol combination 2 in the slot machine. It is a diagram showing symbol combination 3 in the slot machine. It is a diagram showing symbol combination 4 in the slot machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram conceptually showing the functions of the slot machine. A diagram showing the relationship between each RT state in the above-mentioned slot machine. It is a diagram showing the relationship between each game mode in the slot machine. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing variables used in controlling the slot machine. In the above slot machine, (A) is a figure showing the contents of the lottery for transition to the advantageous zone, (B) is a lottery for chance mode 1, (C) is a lottery for chance mode 2-1, (D) is a lottery for chance mode 2-2, and (E) is a figure showing the contents of the lottery for chance game 3. In the above slot machine, (A) is chance game number lottery, (B) is chance cycle lottery, (C) is EX1 mode lottery, (D) is EX2 mode lottery, (E) is AT mode lottery -1, (F) (G) is a diagram showing the contents of AT Mode Lottery-2 and (G) is the content of AT Mode Lottery-3, respectively. In the above slot machine, (A) is 7 1 draw, (B) is 7 2 draw, (C) is AT mode rewrite draw, (D) is 7 loop draw, (E) is gold 7 loop draw, (F) is Gold Seven Loop Rewrite Lottery and (G) are diagrams showing the contents of the additional mode lottery. In the above slot machine, (A) is a diagram showing the contents of the bell count change lottery, (B) is a Seven Stock 1 lottery, (C) is a Seven Stock 2 lottery, and (D) is a diagram showing the contents of the performance lever weight lottery. In the above slot machine, (A) is an AT cycle drawing-1, (B) is an AT cycle drawing-2, (C) is a pullback 1 draw-1, and (D) is a drawing showing the contents of a pullback 1 draw-2. be. In the above slot machine, (A) shows the contents of the pullback 1 draw -3, (B) the pullback 2 draw, and (C) the AT cycle preferential game number draw. (A) is a diagram showing the contents of the Seven Table 1 lottery, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of the Seven Table 2 lottery in the slot machine. In the above slot machine, (A) shows the contents of the bell number 1 drawing - 1, (B) the bell number 1 drawing - 2, (C) the bell number 2 drawing, and (D) the contents of the bell number 3 drawing. be. In the slot machine, (A) shows the correspondence between the bonus condition device and the performance group A number, and (B) shows the correspondence between the winning replay condition device and the performance group B number. It is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between performance group numbers and condition device group numbers in the slot machine. It is a diagram showing winning numbers assigned to each condition device in the slot machine. In the above slot machine, (A) shows a bonus condition device, and (B) shows a winning replay condition device (1). It is a diagram showing a winning replay condition device (2) in the slot machine. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a winning re-play condition device (3) in the slot machine. It is a diagram showing a winning replay condition device (4) in the slot machine. It is a diagram showing a winning replay condition device (5) in the slot machine. It is a diagram showing a winning replay condition device (6) in the slot machine. (A) is a flowchart showing the flow of a setting change process, (B) is a game progress control process, and (C) is a game start waiting process in the slot machine. (A) is a flowchart showing the flow of internal lottery processing and (B) is a flowchart showing the flow of group number set processing in the slot machine. It is a flowchart showing the flow of section type number management lever processing in the slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the above-mentioned section type number management lever processing. (A) is a flowchart showing the flow of advantageous section transition processing, and (B) is a flowchart showing the flow of chance game number lottery processing in the slot machine. It is a flowchart showing the flow of processing when AT is won in the slot machine. (A) is a flowchart showing the flow of the seven number correction process, (B) is the correction counter process, and (C) is the arrival flag process in the slot machine. It is a flowchart showing the flow of lever processing at the time of AT entry in the slot machine. (A) is a flowchart showing the flow of the loop CU rank set process, (B) is the seven loop lottery process, and (C) is the gold seven loop lottery correction process in the slot machine. It is a flowchart showing the flow of bell number counter correction processing in the slot machine. It is a flowchart showing the flow of wait processing at lever in the slot machine. 13 is a flow chart showing the flow of the lever processing for the main game state number 1, the flow of the chance mode number determination processing, and the flow of the lever processing for the main game state numbers 2 and 5 in the above slot machine. It is a flowchart showing the flow of lever processing after AT winning in the slot machine. 13A is a flow chart showing the flow of the main game state number 3 lever processing in the above slot machine, and FIG. 13B is a flow chart showing the flow of the gold seven loop rewrite lottery correction processing. (A) is a flowchart showing the flow of the main game state number 4 lever process and (B) is the flow of the AT cycle preferential game number lottery process in the slot machine. It is a flowchart showing the flow of standby performance processing in the slot machine. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of section type number management game ending processing in the slot machine. 13 is a flowchart showing a flow of an accumulation counter process in the slot machine. 13 is a flowchart showing a flow of main game state number 0 complete stop processing in the slot machine. It is a flowchart showing the flow of the end processing after AT entry in the slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the above-mentioned AT entry end processing. (A) is a flowchart showing the flow of main gaming state number 1 full stop processing, and (B) shows the flow of main gaming state numbers 2 and 5 full stop processing in the slot machine. This is a flowchart showing the flow of main gaming state number 3 complete stop processing in the slot machine. It is a flowchart showing the continuation of the main game state number 3 full stop processing described above. It is a flowchart showing another continuation of the above main game state number 3 full stop processing. It is a flowchart showing the flow of main gaming state number 4 complete stop processing in the slot machine. 13A is a flow chart showing the flow of the main game state number 6 full stop processing, and FIG. 13B is a flow chart showing the flow of the main game state number 7 full stop processing in the above slot machine. This is a flowchart showing the flow of advantageous section clear counter management processing in the slot machine. 13 is a flowchart showing a flow of a timer interrupt process in the slot machine. In the slot machine, (A) is a diagram showing a first conversation effect display, and (B) is a diagram showing a second conversation effect display. In the above-mentioned slot machine, (A) is a diagram showing another aspect of the range image in the dialogue display of the conversation effect display, and (B) is a diagram showing a mode in which the dialogue expressions of the conversation effect display are displayed in an overlapping manner. In the above-mentioned slot machine, (A) is a diagram illustrating another mode in which dialogue display of the conversation production display is displayed in an overlapping manner, and (B) is a diagram showing a mode in which an error notification display is displayed in superimposition on the conversation performance display. In the above slot machine, (A) shows a mode in which a conversation effect display is displayed while a push navigation effect display is being displayed, and (B) shows another mode in which a conversation effect display is displayed while a push navigation effect display is being displayed. It is a diagram. In the slot machine, (A) is a diagram showing a first subtitle effect display, and (B) is a diagram showing a second subtitle effect display. In the slot machine, (A) is a diagram showing another aspect of the first subtitle effect display, and (B) is a diagram showing another aspect of the second subtitle effect display. In the slot machine, (A) shows a mode in which a background frame is attached to the characters of the second subtitle effect display, and (B) shows a mode in which an error notification display is displayed together with the second subtitle effect display. In the above slot machine, (A) is a diagram showing a mode in which a subtitle effect display is displayed while a push navigation effect display is being displayed, and (B) is a diagram showing a mode in which characters in the subtitle effect display are displayed as if they are garbled. . It is a diagram showing an expectation effect display in the slot machine. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing, in the order of (A) to (F), the transition of the display when executing the GET performance in the slot machine. It is a timing chart showing the relationship between the timings of the third stop operation, push navigation effect display, game value provision, GET effect sound, GET effect display, and subtitle effect display when executing the GET effect in the slot machine. In the above slot machine, (A) is a diagram showing a first scene switching effect, and (B) is a diagram showing a second scene switching effect. In the slot machine, (A) is a diagram showing the display state of the image display section immediately before the dark change effect is executed, and (B) is a diagram showing the display state of the image display section when the dark change effect is executed. It is a timing chart when the clearing switch in 2nd Embodiment is operated independently. It is a timing chart when the max bet switch in 2nd Embodiment is operated independently. It is a timing chart when the max bet switch is operated during the operation of the settlement switch in the second embodiment. It is a timing chart when a subswitch is operated during operation of the clearing switch in 2nd Embodiment. In the second embodiment, (A) is a timing chart when the stop switch is operated while the settlement switch is being operated, and (B) is a timing chart when the settlement switch is operated while the stop switch is being operated. It is a timing chart when an error occurs during operation of the clearing switch in the second embodiment. It is a timing chart when a reset switch is operated during the operation of the clearing switch operated during the error in 2nd Embodiment. In the second embodiment, (A) is a figure showing an example of the change in the push order navigation display image when the push order for the first stop operation is correct, and (B) is a figure showing an example of the change in the push order navigation display image when the push order for the first stop operation is incorrect. In the second embodiment, (A) is an example of the transition of the press order navigation effect image when the press order of the first to third stop operations is correct, and (B) is the press order when the press order of the first to third stop operations is incorrect. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of a navigation effect image. A figure showing an example of the execution timing of the GET effect and the back lamp effect when the button press order is correct in the second embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution timing of GET effect and back lamp effect, and the display update timing of the number of credits in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of reel control in a 2nd embodiment. In the second embodiment, (A) is a flowchart showing the flow of control processing when a power outage occurs after the third stop operation is received, (B) is a flowchart showing the flow of re-rotation processing A, and (C) is a flowchart showing the flow of re-rotation processing B. It is a figure which shows an example of the lighting state of the stop switch lamp during re-rotation of the reel in 2nd Embodiment. A diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel in a gaming machine of a third embodiment. A diagram showing pattern combinations in a gaming machine of a third embodiment. A diagram showing pattern combinations in a gaming machine of a third embodiment. It is a diagram showing symbol combinations in the gaming machine of the third embodiment. It is a diagram showing symbol combinations in the gaming machine of the third embodiment. It is a diagram showing types of condition devices in the gaming machine of the third embodiment. In the gaming machine of the third embodiment, it is a diagram showing a number table according to the winning probability of the winning number to which the small winning combination replay condition device number is linked. In the gaming machine of the third embodiment, it is a diagram showing a number table according to the winning probability of the winning number to which the bonus condition device number is linked. In the gaming machine of the third embodiment, it is a diagram showing the correspondence between various condition devices, performance group numbers, and condition device group numbers. FIG. 7 is a transition diagram showing conditions for transitioning to an RT state in a gaming machine according to a third embodiment. In the gaming machine of the third embodiment, it is a diagram showing various variables referred to in main gaming state transition control. A transition diagram showing the transition conditions of the main game state in a gaming machine of a third embodiment. A diagram showing the types of lotteries executed in each main game state in a gaming machine of a third embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing types of instruction contents to a player in a gaming machine according to a third embodiment. In the gaming machine of the third embodiment, it is an explanatory diagram for explaining the timing that is considered as a beat push. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the contents notified to a player in a normal big game in the gaming machine of the third embodiment. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the procedure for transitioning to a practice mode in a gaming machine of a third embodiment. FIG. In the gaming machine of the third embodiment, it is a diagram showing the contents of a click image displayed to the player during the practice mode. A figure showing the content of a pressing image displayed to a player during practice mode in a gaming machine of a third embodiment. In the gaming machine of the third embodiment, it is a diagram showing the contents of a click image displayed to the player during the practice mode. In the gaming machine of the third embodiment, it is a diagram showing the success determination symbol number of the hit press and the difficulty level of the press of the eye of the eye press image displayed to the player. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining specifications for calculating a score according to the accuracy of a beat press in a gaming machine according to a third embodiment. In the gaming machine of the third embodiment, it is a diagram showing the difference in the notification mode when single-shot notification is performed in the non-practice mode and the practice mode. A figure showing the difference in the notification manner when a third drum notification is performed in non-practice mode and practice mode in a gaming machine of the third embodiment. In the gaming machine of the third embodiment, it is a flowchart showing the contents of a full stop process at gaming state 3, which is executed by the main control means when all the reels stop during a type 1 BB game. In the gaming machine of the third embodiment, it is a flowchart showing the contents of the first stop score calculation process executed by the sub-control means when the reels stop for the first time when the reel is notified of a single hit. In the gaming machine of the third embodiment, it is a flowchart showing the contents of the second stop score calculation process executed by the sub-control means when the second reel stops at the time of single-roll notification. In the gaming machine of the third embodiment, it is a flowchart showing the contents of the third stop score calculation process executed by the sub-control means when the last reel stops at the time of single-time roll notification. In the gaming machine of the third embodiment, it is a flowchart showing the contents of the first stop score calculation process executed by the sub-control means when the reels stop for the first time when the third time is announced. In the gaming machine of the third embodiment, it is a flowchart showing the contents of the second stop score calculation process executed by the sub-control means when the second reel stops when the third reel is notified. In the gaming machine of the third embodiment, it is a flowchart showing the contents of the third stop score calculation process executed by the sub-control means when the last reel stops at the time of third-time reward notification. In the gaming machine of the third embodiment, it is a flowchart showing the content of the score calculation process at the time of winning the number adjustment combination, which is executed by the sub-control means when the number adjustment combination wins. In the gaming machine of the third embodiment, it is a flowchart showing the content of the score calculation process when no instruction is given, which is executed by the sub-control means when no instruction is given. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining display contents related to a national ranking regarding click accuracy displayed on a screen of an information terminal in a third embodiment. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining display contents related to regional rankings regarding click accuracy displayed on the screen of an information terminal in the third embodiment. In the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment, it is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display timing of the reel stop suggestion screen and the game standby screen. In the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment, it is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display timing of the reel stop suggestion screen and the game standby screen. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display timing of a reel stop suggestion screen and a game standby screen in a gaming machine of a fourth embodiment. FIG. It is an explanatory view for explaining a system menu screen in a gaming machine of a fourth embodiment. In the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment, it is an explanatory diagram for explaining the timing at which an event that occurs during setting confirmation is reflected in the error history. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the timing at which an event that occurs during setting confirmation is reflected in the error history in the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment. FIG. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how events that occur during setting confirmation are reflected in the error history in the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how events that occur during setting confirmation are reflected in the error history in the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how events that occur during setting confirmation are reflected in the error history in the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of an error history display screen when an error occurs during reel rotation in the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of an error history display screen when an error occurs during reel rotation in the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of an error history display screen when a plurality of errors occur during setting confirmation in the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the error history display screen when multiple errors occur during play and setting confirmation in the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a front view of the slot machine according to the fifth embodiment. A front view showing the state where the front door is removed from the slot machine of the fifth embodiment. It is a perspective view of the Pachinko game machine concerning a 5th embodiment. It is a back view of the Pachinko game machine of 5th embodiment. A diagram showing LED boards arranged around the display screen of the slot machine of the fifth embodiment. 13A is a diagram showing a modified example of the LED board in the slot machine of the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing another modified example of the LED board. It is a figure showing the light emitting component in the slot machine of a 5th embodiment. In the slot machine of the fifth embodiment, (A) is a diagram showing a modification of the light emitting component, and (B) is a diagram showing another modification of the light emitting component. In the slot machine of the fifth embodiment, (A) is a figure showing an example of the installation posture of the light-emitting components, (B) is a figure showing another example of the installation posture of the light-emitting components, and (C) is a figure showing yet another example of the installation posture of the light-emitting components. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a biased state of a red LED element of a light emitting component in a slot machine according to a fifth embodiment, in which (A) is a diagram showing an example of a state in which a red LED element is biased to the right, and (B) is a diagram illustrating a state in which a red LED element is biased to the right; FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of a state in which the element is biased downward. In the slot machine of the fifth embodiment, (A) is a diagram showing a state in which an LED element of a different color is installed between each red LED element of two light-emitting components arranged in the left-right direction, and (B) is a diagram showing a state in which an LED element of a different color is installed between each red LED element of two light-emitting components arranged in the up-down direction. In the slot machine of the fifth embodiment, (A) is a diagram showing a state in which no LED element of a different color is installed between the red LED elements of two light-emitting components arranged in the left-right direction, and (B) is a diagram showing a state in which an LED element of a different color in another light-emitting component is installed between the red LED elements of two light-emitting components arranged in the left-right direction. It is a perspective view of the board case unit in the Pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment, seen from the rear. It is a figure which looked at the board case unit in the Pachinko game machine of 5th embodiment from the back. It is a front view of the board case unit in the pachinko game machine of the fifth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the main control board accommodated in the board case of the board case unit in the pachinko game machine of 5th embodiment. In the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment, (A) is a diagram showing a case where all the LED segments of the LED indicator light constituting the set value display monitor are in a non-lit state, and (B) is a diagram showing all the LED segments of the LED indicator light. A diagram showing a case where the segments are in a lighting state, and (C) a diagram showing a case where some LED segments of the LED indicator light are in a lighting state. In the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment, (A) is a diagram showing a case where all the LED segments of the LED indicator light constituting the performance display monitor are in a non-lit state, and (B) is a diagram showing all the LED segments of the LED indicator light. (C) is a diagram showing a case in which some LED segments of the LED indicator light are in a lighting state. It is a figure showing the relationship between the height of the caulking member of the board case unit and the CPU in the pachinko game machine of the fifth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the step part formed in the board case in the pachinko game machine of 5th Embodiment, (A) is a figure which shows the shape of a step part, and (B) is a figure which shows the step part in the direction of the right edge of a board case. (C) is a diagram showing a state in which a colored seal member is attached to a stepped portion. It is a figure showing the relationship between the screws of the main control board and the connector in the Pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment.

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the above drawings.
In addition, in the following explanation, "winning combination processing" refers to winning from among a plurality of preset winning combination result numbers (consisting of one or more game winning combinations or losses (excluding when no losses are set)). , refers to a selection act such as a lottery (also referred to as "role determination") that is performed using electronic equipment, etc. to randomly select one or more role determination result numbers (winning items) . Here, the role determination result number refers to one or more gaming roles that are allowed to be realized in the game for which the role determination result number has been determined (selected) (also referred to as a "permitted role" or "winning role"). (named) or loss. Note that the determination of the winning position is also referred to as an ``internal lottery'' or ``winning lottery'', and the ``selection'' in a lottery or winning is also referred to as ``lottery'' or ``sen''.

In addition, when describing "a gaming combination is established," "a gaming combination is established," etc., "established" means a gaming combination corresponding to the determined winning combination result number (a gaming combination with a payout of gaming medals). The symbol combinations (corresponding symbols) constituting a game role (regardless of whether it is a small role) or a game role that does not pay out (replay role or special role) are stopped in a predetermined manner (for example, a manner in which they are lined up on the active line described below) It is used as a concept to indicate that it is displayed in . However, regarding the timing of establishment, for example, when the reel stop operation is performed at a timing that allows the symbols corresponding to a gaming combination to be stopped and displayed on the active line, or when the corresponding symbols of a gaming combination stop on the active line. It can be set at an appropriate timing, such as the time when the symbol is displayed, the time when the slot machine identifies that the symbol corresponding to the game winning combination is stopped and displayed on the active line, or the time when the identified result is stored in the storage area. .

In addition, in the following explanation, the operation of inserting (maintaining) game medals into the medal slot 21 (described later) by the player, and the regulations necessary for playing games among the credited (accumulated) game medals will be explained. The operation of pressing the 1-BET switch 22 or the MAX-BET switch 23 to provide a number of game medals for a game is collectively referred to as a bet operation. In addition to this bet operation, the player presses a settlement switch 24 (described later), tilts a start lever (also referred to as a "start switch") 25, and stops switches (also referred to as a "stop button") 26a, 26b, 26c. The pressing operations are collectively referred to as gaming operations. Generally speaking, "insertion" in a slot machine is used to mean "putting game medals into the slot machine" and when it is used to mean "putting game medals into the slot machine". There is. In the following explanation, the word "investment" will basically be used in the former sense, and the word "bet" will be used in the latter sense.

Further, the "number of paid out game medals" (also referred to as "number of paid out medals") means the number of game medals given to a player in one game. In addition, the act of paying out game medals includes the act of actually paying out game medals from the slot machine to the outside (also referred to as "actual payout"), and the act of electromagnetically paying out game medals as game medals stored in the slot machine. There is an act of increasing the memorized numerical value (also referred to as "storage addition payout").

Furthermore, the "number of game medals acquired" (also referred to as the "number of acquired medals") refers to the number of game medals that the player has acquired (also referred to as the "number of acquired medals") during a predetermined period (can be set arbitrarily, for example, AT period or bonus period). A numerical value counted as the total number of gaming medals (paid out to players). In addition, the "difference number" (also referred to as the "difference number") of game medals is the value obtained by subtracting the total number of game medals bet from the total number of game medals paid out during a predetermined period (a negative value). (sometimes). Although the "acquired number" and "difference number" of game medals can be used as different concepts, they will be treated as having the same meaning below.

Furthermore, "freeze" means that the execution of a predetermined control process related to the progress of the game is delayed for a certain period of time. Freezes include freezes that are set when the operation of the start lever 25 is accepted (also referred to as "freeze when reel rotation starts"), and freezes that are set after all reels have stopped rotating ("freeze when reel rotation stops"). ) may be provided as appropriate. During the freeze period, game operations by the player cannot be effectively accepted. Additionally, during the freeze period, a spinning drum performance (also referred to as a "reel performance") may be performed. The rotating performance is a performance that rotates the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c, which will be described later, to stop and display an arbitrary symbol combination, regardless of the game operation by the player.

In the following explanation, "push navigation" refers to a process (action) that notifies the player of the order and position to press in order to assist in the realization of the game role selected by role determination. Among push navigations, those that specifically assist in the realization of a replay role are called "RP navigation" (RP is an abbreviation for replay), those that assist in the realization of a winning role (minor role) are called "prize navigation", and those that assist with the position to press to stop a specific symbol on an active line are called "eye push navigation" (mainly performed by the secondary control means). From another perspective, assisting with the position to press can also be said to assist the player with the timing at which to operate the stop switch. Furthermore, when it is necessary to distinguish between the push navigation performed on the main control means side and the push navigation performed on the sub-control means side, the former is also referred to as the "main side push navigation" ("main side RP navigation", "main side winning navigation", "main side eye push navigation") and the latter is also referred to as the "sub side push navigation" ("sub side RP navigation", "sub side winning navigation", "sub side eye push navigation") or as the "push navigation effect" ("RP navigation effect", "winning navigation effect", "eye push navigation effect"). The former and latter are also collectively referred to as the stop switch operation mode notification effect.

In addition, in the following description and drawings, numerical values may be expressed in binary or hexadecimal numbers in addition to decimal numbers. Therefore, in order to distinguish between these, "B" is added to the end of the numerical value when expressed in binary, and "H" is appended to the end of the numerical value when expressed in hexadecimal. Also, when writing in decimal numbers, nothing special should be added at the end of the number.

[First embodiment]
FIG. 1 shows a slot machine (referred to as "slot machine 1") as a first embodiment of a gaming machine according to the present invention, and the basic configuration of this slot machine 1 will be explained below with reference to FIGS. I will explain while referring to it.
≪Appearance of slot machine≫
As shown in FIG. 1(A), the slot machine 1 includes a front door 2 that is attached to the front of the main body so that it can be opened and closed. Assembly 10, middle panel assembly 20, lower panel assembly 30, and saucer assembly 40 are attached.

In the center of the upper panel assembly 10, there is a display screen 11a (also referred to as "image display section DP") of an image display device (also referred to as "liquid crystal display device") 11 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back side thereof. It is arranged so as to face the front, and around it, a first effect lamp 12, second effect lamps 13a, 13b, and third effect lamps 14a, 14b are arranged. Furthermore, a pair of upper speakers 15a and 15b are arranged below the display screen 11a on the left and right sides.

A display window W is provided in the center of the middle panel assembly 20, from which the surfaces of the three reels 3a, 3b, and 3c arranged side by side inside the main body housing are visible. , a medal slot 21 for inserting game medals (game media), a 1-BET switch 22 for betting one game medal within the credited range, a maximum allowable number of bets (also referred to as a "specified number") A MAX-BET switch 23 for betting 3 game medals at once, a settlement switch 24 for paying out betted game medals and/or credited game medals, and all reels 3a, 3b. , 3c (the reel is also referred to as a "reel"), a start lever 25 that is operated to start the rotation, three stop switches 26a for individually stopping the rotation of each reel 3a, 3b, 3c, 26b, 26c (the stop switch 26a on the left in the figure corresponds to the reel 3a, the stop switch 26b in the center corresponds to the reel 3b, and the stop switch 26c on the right corresponds to the reel 3c), and the medal slot 21. A reject switch 27 and the like are provided for returning game medals that have been rejected and accumulated.

Each stop switch has a button-like operation receiving section that retracts when the player presses it with his/her hand and returns to its original position due to spring force, etc. when the player releases his or her hand. When the button is pressed), the electrical circuit contacts close and switch from the OFF state to the ON state, and when the pressing operation is released (your hand leaves), the contacts open and switch from the ON state to the OFF state. It has become.

Between the medal slot 21 and the MAX-BET switch 23, there are a selection button (also referred to as a "direction button" or "cross key") 54 for the player to input information into the slot machine 1, and a decision button. (Also referred to as a "menu button" or "PUSH button") 55 is provided. Hereinafter, the selection button 54 and the decision button 55 will also be collectively referred to as "sub-buttons." As shown in FIG. 1B, the selection button 54 is composed of four buttons: an upper button 54U, a lower button 54D, a left button 54L, and a right button 54R, which specify the up, down, left, and right directions. Then, one of the upward direction, downward direction, leftward direction, and rightward direction is designated in accordance with the button operated by the player. The decision button 55 is made of a material that transmits light, and is provided with a light source such as an LED inside. When the operation of the decision button 55 is disabled, the light source inside the switch is turned off, and when it is enabled, it blinks (or may be lit).

When the sub-button is pressed (pushed by hand), the contacts of the electric circuit close and the state changes from OFF to ON, and when the pressing operation is released (hand is removed), the contacts open and the state changes from ON to OFF. When the sub-button is operated effectively, the sub-control means 200, which will be described later, may execute a predetermined presentation process according to the operation. There may also be a presentation process that prompts the player to operate the sub-button. Furthermore, by operating the sub-button in a predetermined procedure, it is possible to display an adjustment screen for adjusting the brightness of the screen of the image display device 11 and the volume of the speaker.

Here, the upper button 54U, lower button 54D, left button 54L, and right button 54R that constitute the selection button 54 may be turned on/off individually, or may have a cross-shaped key top (cross key). may be provided so that the button in the direction in which the cross key is tilted is turned on. When the up button 54U, down button 54D, left button 54L, and right button 54R can be turned on/off using the cross key, two adjacent buttons (up and right, right and down, down and left, left and (top) can be turned on at the same time, but opposing buttons (top and bottom, right and left) may not be turned on at the same time.

The inside of the medal slot 21 includes a receiving passage (which leads to a hopper 50, which will be described later), through which the inserted game medals pass when the game medals are effectively accepted, and a reception passage (which leads to the hopper 50, which will be described later), and a passageway through which the inserted game medals pass when the game medals are not accepted. It branches into a return path (which leads to a game medal payout port 41, which will be described later) through which game medals pass, and a blocker 48 (see FIG. 2) is provided at the branch. This blocker 48 guides the game medals inserted into the medal slot 21 to the receiving path during a period in which the inserted game medals can be effectively accepted, and in other periods, the blocker 48 guides the game medals inserted into the medal slot 21 into the receiving path. The receiving passage and the return passage are configured so that one can be selectively opened and the other closed so as to guide the game medals to the return passage. In the following explanation, when the blocker 48 is in the ON state, it means that the game medals inserted into the medal slot 21 are guided to the receiving path (a state where game medals can be accepted), and when the blocker 48 is in the OFF state, it means that the medals are inserted into the medal slot 21. This shows a state in which game medals inserted into the slot 21 are guided to the return path (game medals cannot be accepted).

Further, inside the medal slot 21, three inserted medal sensors 28a, 28b, and 28c (see FIG. 2) are provided for detecting game medals. The inserted medal sensor 28a detects that game medals have been inserted into the medal slot 21, and is located at a position upstream of the position where the blocker 48 is installed on the path through which the inserted game medals flow down. It is installed in The inserted medal sensor 28b detects that the game medals inserted into the medal slot 21 are led to the receiving path and are effectively received, and is located downstream of the position where the blocker 48 is installed (a hopper described later). 50). The inserted medal sensor 28c detects when the game medals inserted into the medal slot 21 have passed through the branching part between the receiving passage and the return passage, and detects when the gaming medals inserted into the medal slot 21 have passed through the branching part (the position where the blocker 48 is installed). It is located at a position slightly closer to the input medal sensor 28b than the input medal sensor 28b.

If both the inserted medal sensor 28a and the inserted medal sensor 28b detect game medals, it means that the game medals have been inserted into the medal slot 21 and that the inserted game medals have been effectively received. On the other hand, if the inserted medal sensor 28a detects a game medal, but the inserted medal sensor 28b does not detect a game medal, a game medal has been inserted into the medal slot 21, but the inserted game medal has not been effectively accepted. This means that the item was returned without any damage. In addition, when the three inserted medal sensors 28a, 28b, and 28c detect the passing of game medals in an order different from the predetermined order (the order of 28a, 28c, and 28b), or when some inserted medal sensors detect the passing of game medals, If it is not detected, it means that an abnormal passage such as a backward flow of game medals has occurred.

The display window W is configured so that when all three reels 3a to 3c have stopped, three symbols per reel are displayed so that a total of nine symbols are visible to the player. The winning line 29 that horizontally connects the symbol display areas in the middle rows of the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c is activated when a specified number of game medals are bet, and is configured so that the presence or absence of a game combination can be determined based on the symbol combinations that are stopped and displayed on the activated winning line. The activated winning line is also called the "active line." In addition to the winning line 29, the line that horizontally connects the symbol display areas in the upper rows of the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c is called the upper line, and the line that horizontally connects the symbol display areas in the lower rows of the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c is called the lower line. In addition, the line connecting the symbol display areas of the upper section of reel 3a, the middle section of reel 3b, and the lower section of reel 3c is called a right-downward line, and the line connecting the symbol display areas of the lower section of reel 3a, the middle section of reel 3b, and the upper section of reel 3c is called a right-upward line.

Further, the slot machine 1 is provided with various display lamps including LED lamps and the like. In this embodiment, the display lamps include a MAX-BET switch display lamp 46a, a BET number display lamp 46b, a possible bet display lamp 46c, a game start display lamp 46d, a replay display lamp 46e, a status display lamp 46f, and a number of times display lamp. 46g, a storage number display lamp 46h, and a payout number display lamp 46j. These display lamps are configured to be controlled by a main control board 60 (main control means 100), which will be described later.

The MAX-BET switch indicator lamp 46a is lit under a situation in which game medals can be bet, and is arranged inside the MAX-BET switch 23, and when lit, the MAX-BET switch 23 is partially or completely turned on. It is designed to illuminate the target. Other display lamps are arranged on the side or below the display window W in the middle panel assembly 20.

The BET number indicator lamp 46b (hereinafter also referred to as "BET lamp 46b") indicates the number of game medals bet, and is composed of a 1-BET indicator lamp 46bC that is lit when one or more game medals are bet, a 2-BET indicator lamp 46bB that is lit when two or more game medals are bet, and a MAX-BET indicator lamp 46bA that is lit when three game medals are bet. The insertion possible indicator lamp 46c is lit when game medals can be inserted, and the game start indicator lamp 46d is lit when a game can be started by operating the start lever 25. The replay indicator lamp 46e is lit when a replay role described below is established in any game and game medals are automatically bet by the automatic bet process described below.

The status indicator lamp 46f is turned on when the accumulated (credited) game medals are to be cleared, and the number indicator lamp 46g indicates the number of possible push navigations (which is decremented by one each time a push navigation is executed, and may also be increased by a lottery or the like) when, for example, AT is set. The number of accumulated medals indicator lamp 46h (hereinafter also referred to as "CRE lamp 46h") indicates the number of accumulated game medals by incrementing one at a time, and the number of payouts indicator lamp 46j indicates the number of game medals to be paid out when a minor winning combination described below is achieved by incrementing one at a time. The number of accumulated medals indicator lamp 46h and the number of payouts indicator lamp 46j each consist of two 7-segment displays (consisting of 7 segment lamps for displaying numbers and one segment lamp for displaying a decimal point (dot)) to display the upper and lower digits of the numbers.

In addition, this payout number display lamp 46j is also configured to display letters (alphabet) or numbers (hereinafter also referred to as "error code") indicating the type of error when some abnormality (error) occurs in the slot machine 1. Errors that can be set in this embodiment include HP error, HE error, H0 error, CE error, CP error, CH error, C0 error, C1 error, FE error, E1 error, E5 error, E6 error, E7 error, etc. The HP error is an error that occurs when it is determined that game medals are stuck at the medal payout outlet of the hopper 50 described later, the HE error is an error (hopper empty error) that occurs when it is determined that the game medals in the hopper 50 are empty, and the H0 error is an error that occurs when it is determined that the game medals have abnormally passed the payout sensor. The CE error is an error (game medal retention error) when the inserted medal sensor judges that a game medal has been retained, the CP error is an error when it is judged that an inserted game medal has passed illegally, the C0 error is an error when it is judged that an abnormal input has been made to the inserted medal sensor, and the C1 error is an error when it is judged that an abnormality has occurred in the passage of the inserted medal sensor. The FE error is an error (full error) when it is judged that the auxiliary storage 85 described later is full, the E1 error is an error (RAM error) when the contents of the memory device (RAM) are not normal when the power is turned on, and the E5 error is an error (reel stop error) when the combination of patterns when all the reels stop is abnormal (the corresponding patterns constituting roles other than the role that can be established are stopped and displayed). The E6 error is an error (setting value error) when the value of the setting value (setting value) described later for determining the role determination probability is out of range, and the E7 error is an error (built-in random number error) when an abnormality is detected in the update state of the built-in random number used in each lottery, etc. Errors E1, E5, E6, and E7 (collectively referred to as "E-system errors") can be cleared by changing the settings, as described below, and other errors can be cleared by operating the reset switch 82, as described below.

Furthermore, this payout number display lamp 46j also has a function of displaying a navigation number, which will be described later, which indicates the order of operation (press order) of the stop switches 26a to 26c. The payout number display lamp 46j used to display the navigation number is also referred to as a "main push order display". The payout number display lamp 46j also has a function of displaying a set value, which will be described later, when confirming the setting and changing the setting, which will be described later. The payout number display lamp 46j used to display the set value is also referred to as a "set value display".

A transparent lower panel cover 31 is attached to the center of the lower panel assembly 30, and decorative lamps 32a and 32b are arranged at both left and right ends of the lower panel cover 31. Note that a translucent lower panel base with a predetermined pattern and a lower panel illumination light (both not shown) are attached to the back side of the lower panel cover 31, and this lower panel illumination light is turned on. By doing so, the pattern on the lower panel base is illuminated from the rear side.

The tray assembly 40 has a game medal payout port 41 for paying out game medals, and a game medal storage tray 42 for storing game medals facing the game medal payout port 41. An ashtray 43 is provided on the left side of this game medal storage tray 42. Further, on the left and right sides of the game medal payout port 41, speaker ports 45a consisting of a large number of small holes are arranged opposite to the front surface of a pair of lower speakers 44a, 44b (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back side of the tray assembly 40. , 45b are formed.

In addition, a hopper 50 (see FIG. 2) is provided inside the main body cabinet for dispensing game medals that are acquired when a predetermined winning mode is achieved as a result of playing, and this hopper 50 is provided with a medal detection unit 51 (see FIG. 2) for detecting game medals. This hopper 50 also has the function of physically storing game medals that have been inserted and validly accepted. Furthermore, an auxiliary storage 85 (see FIG. 2) is provided near the hopper 50 for storing game medals that have overflowed from the hopper 50, and a fullness detection unit 86 (see FIG. 2) is provided for detecting whether this auxiliary storage 85 is full (a state in which game medals may overflow from the auxiliary storage 85).

≪Connection between control board and each device≫
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, there are three main control boards that control the slot machine 1: a main control board 60, a sub-main control board 70A, and a sub-sub control board 70B. The main control board 70A and the sub-sub control board 70B are collectively referred to as the sub-control board 70). The main control related to the progress of the game (including drive control of the reels 3a to 3c, role determination processing, etc.) is performed by a control circuit provided on the main control board 60, and illumination by lamps such as back lamps 38a to 38c. Control etc. are configured to be performed by a control circuit provided on the sub-main control board 70A. Further, the display control of the effect image by the image display device 11 and the control of sound generation from speakers such as the upper speakers 15a and 15b are mainly performed by a control circuit disposed on the sub-sub control board 70B. There is. Further, information transmission between the main control board 60 and the sub-control board 70 can be performed only in one direction from the main control board 60 to the sub-main control board 70A, and Information can be transmitted in both directions with the control board 70B.

<Configuration of main control board 60>
The main control board 60 includes a main CPU 61 that performs various calculation processes related to the game, a ROM 62 that is a read-only storage device that stores control programs, etc., and a RAM 63 that is a storage device that can write and read information. RAM (also referred to as RWM) is provided. The main CPU 61 controls each drive circuit and the like according to a control program stored in the ROM 62, thereby controlling the progress of the game in the slot machine 1. Note that the ROM 62 and the RAM 63 are nonvolatile storage devices, and are configured to retain stored information even when power is not supplied.

The main CPU 61 includes a clock pulse generator 64 for generating clock pulses (clock signals), a frequency divider 65 for dividing the clock pulses generated by the clock pulse generator 64, and a clock pulse (or frequency-divided clock pulse). A random number generator 66 for generating random numbers for use in determining winning combinations based on the clock pulse generated by the random number generator 66, and a random number capturing circuit 67 for capturing the random numbers generated by the random number generator 66 are connected. The clock pulse generator 64 is composed of two oscillators (not shown), and each oscillator outputs a mutually asynchronous clock signal. Hereinafter, the clock signal with a predetermined frequency output from one oscillator will be referred to as the internal clock, and the clock signal with a predetermined frequency (different frequency than the internal clock, but may be the same) output from the other oscillator will be referred to as the internal clock. is called an external clock. For example, the internal clock is used as an operating clock of the main CPU 61 and a clock for updating random numbers used in a predetermined lottery other than determining a winning combination, and the external clock is used as an updating clock for random numbers used in determining a winning combination. Note that the main CPU 61, ROM 62, RAM 63, frequency divider 65, random number generator 66, random number acquisition circuit 67, interface circuit 68, etc. may be mounted on one IC chip to form a one-chip microcomputer. The main CPU 61 also transmits signals to the motor drive circuit 36, display lamp control circuit 47, hopper drive circuit 52, and sub-control board 70 via the interface circuit 68, and also sends signals to the reel position detection circuits 37a, 37b. , 37c, and is configured to receive signals from the payout detection signal circuit 53 and the storage state signal circuit 87.

The motor drive circuit 36 is a circuit for controlling the rotation and stopping of the stepping motors 35a, 35b, and 35c that rotationally drive the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c, respectively. This is a circuit for controlling the lamp. The reel position detection circuits 37a, 37b, and 37c are circuits that transmit detection signals from reel sensors (not shown) installed on each of the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c to the main control board 60 (the detection circuit 37a corresponds to the reel 3a, the detection circuit 37b corresponds to the reel 3b, and the detection circuit 37c corresponds to the reel 3c). The hopper drive circuit 52 is a circuit that drives the hopper 50 to pay out game medals when a small winning combination is established, and the payout detection signal circuit 53 detects that game medals have been paid out from the hopper 50. This circuit transmits a payout detection signal to the main control board 60 when detected by the medal detection unit 51. The storage status signal circuit 87 is a circuit that transmits a storage status signal indicating whether or not the auxiliary storage 85 is full to the main control board 60 in accordance with the detection result of the full detection unit 86.

Further, power is supplied to the slot machine 1 from a power supply device 80 via a main control board 60. A power switch 81, a reset switch 82, and a setting key type switch 83 are connected to the power supply device 80, and the configuration is such that signals from these switches are transmitted to the main CPU 61 via an interface circuit 68. ing. Further, the main CPU 61 is configured to receive a signal from the setting change switch 84 via the interface circuit 68.

The power switch 81 is a switch that accepts power-on and power-off operations from the power supply device 80 to the slot machine 1, and the reset switch 82 is a switch that accepts operations to power on and power off the slot machine 1 from the power supply device 80. This is a switch that is operated by a game store clerk or the like when an error occurs and the cause of the error is removed and the error is resolved. By operating this reset switch 82, the error occurrence information stored in the main control board 60 and the sub-control board 70 is cleared, and accordingly, the main control board 60 and the sub-control board 70 perform processing when the error is resolved. executed. Further, the setting key type switch 83 is a switch operated to confirm and change the settings of the setting values that determine the level (rank) of the winning probability, and the setting change switch 84 is used to change the setting values. This is a switch for changing in stages (six stages in this embodiment).

When the front door 2 is open (also referred to as the "door open state") and power is being supplied to the slot machine 1 (the power switch 81 is in the ON state), the setting key type switch 83 is in the ON state. When operated, the mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode, and the settings can be confirmed. Further, when the door is open and power is not supplied to the slot machine 1 (the power switch 81 is OFF), the setting key type switch 83 is operated to the ON state, and the power switch 81 remains in that state. When the slot machine 1 is turned on (power is turned on to the slot machine 1), the slot machine 1 enters a setting change mode, and the settings can be changed. Furthermore, each time the setting change switch 84 is operated in this state, the setting value can be updated one step at a time. Furthermore, after updating the set value, the updated set value is confirmed by tilting the start lever 25, and after the update is confirmed, the work of changing the setting is completed by operating the setting key type switch 83 to the OFF state. It is supposed to be done.

The setting key switch 83 can be switched between ON and OFF by inserting a specified key (setting key) into a specified lock provided on the main body and rotating it. Also, setting confirmation and setting change cannot be performed while a game is being played (when game medals have been bet (including automatic bets) or when the reels are spinning), but can only be performed while the game is in standby. In the setting confirmation mode and setting change mode, the setting value is displayed on the payout number display lamp 46j using six integer values from "1" to "6" (a separate lamp for displaying the setting value may be provided inside the cabinet of the slot machine 1, etc.).

Power from the power supply device 80 is supplied to the sub-main control board 70A via the main control board 60, and further to the sub-sub control board 70B via the sub-main control board 70A (power may be supplied directly from the power supply device 80 to the sub-main control board 70A and the sub-sub control board 70B). A supply voltage monitoring circuit (not shown) that monitors the supply state of voltage is provided on the circuit that supplies power from the power supply device 80 to the main control board 60 and on the circuit that supplies power to the sub-main control board 70A via the main control board 60. Each supply voltage monitoring circuit is configured to determine that a power supply has been cut off when the supply voltage has dropped to a predetermined voltage value and output a power cut detection signal to the main CPU 61 and the sub-main CPU 71 described below. In addition, each supply voltage monitoring circuit is configured to determine that a power supply has been turned on when the supply voltage has returned to a predetermined voltage value (a value different from the voltage value for power cut determination (for example, a higher value), but may be the same value), and output a power-on detection signal to the main CPU 61 and the sub-main CPU 71. The voltage value when power loss is detected for the main control board 60 is set to a value higher than the voltage value when power loss is detected for the sub-main control board 70A, and the main control board 60 is configured to perform the process (power loss process) that it is programmed to execute when power is lost before the sub-main control board 70A (the same may be true for powering on).

The main CPU 61 also includes a reel stop signal circuit 91, a start lever 25, inserted medal sensors 28a, 28b, 28c, and a 1-BET switch 22, which are connected to or mounted on the switch board 90. , MAX-BET switch 23 and clearing switch 24 are inputted via an interface circuit 68.

Further, a blocker 48 is connected to the main CPU 61 via an interface circuit 68, and is configured to turn on/off the blocker 48. In the following description, the signal for controlling the on/off of the blocker 48 will also be referred to as a "blocker signal." Furthermore, although not shown, the slot machine 1 is provided with a door sensor that detects the open/closed state of the front door 2, and a signal from this door sensor is input to the main CPU 61 via the interface circuit 68. It has become so. The main CPU 61 determines whether the front door 2 is in a closed state (also referred to as a "door closed state") or an open state (door open state) based on a signal from a door sensor.

Although not shown, the main CPU 61 connects the data counter, hall computer, etc. via an external connection terminal board etc. when a predetermined gaming state (for example, AT state or bonus state) is reached. It is configured to output a predetermined signal (also referred to as an "outer end signal"), and use this outer end signal to manage the number of times a predetermined gaming state has been set and to present it to the player.

<Configuration of sub-control board 70>
The sub-control board 70 includes a sub-main control board 70A and a sub-sub control board 70B. The sub-main control board 70A includes a sub-main CPU 71 that mainly performs various arithmetic processing related to performance management, a ROM 72 that is a read-only storage device that stores control programs, etc., and a memory that can write and read information. A RAM 73 which is a device is disposed, and by operating each drive circuit etc. according to the control program stored in the ROM 72, control related to the management of image effects and audio effects, control related to lamp effects, etc. in the slot machine 1 are performed. It is about to take place. Note that the ROM 72 and the RAM 73 are nonvolatile storage devices, and are configured to retain stored information even when power is not supplied. Further, a clock pulse generator and a frequency divider (not shown) are connected to the sub-main CPU 71, and a predetermined process is executed according to the clock signal generated by the clock pulse generator and frequency divider. It has become.

The sub-main CPU 71 is configured to receive various signals from the main control board 60 via the interface circuit 74 and to transmit signals to the lamp control circuit 18. The lamp control circuit 18 is a circuit that controls lighting of lamps such as the back lamps 38a to 38c. The sub-main CPU 71 also receives output signals from the selection button 54 and the decision button 55 via the interface circuit 74, and displays a menu on the image display device 11 by the sub-sub control board 70B in accordance with the received output signals from each button. The screen is displayed to provide information according to the player's selection operation, or to change the content of the performance displayed on the image display device 11 during the game.

The sub-main CPU 71 is configured to transmit various signals to the sub-sub control board 70B via the interface circuit 74, and to receive various signals from the sub-sub control board 70B. Hereinafter, the signal (control signal) transmitted from the main control board 60 to the sub-main control board 70A will also be referred to as a "control command", and the signal (notification signal or production signal) transmitted from the sub-main control board 70A to the sub-sub control board 70B. ) are also called "direction commands." Further, a signal (status signal) transmitted from the sub-sub control board 70B to the sub-main control board 70A is also referred to as a "status command."

The sub-sub control board 70B includes a sub-sub CPU 75 that mainly performs various arithmetic processing related to controlling image effects and audio effects, and a ROM 76 that is a read-only storage device that stores control programs and the like, and is capable of writing and reading information. A RAM 77, which is a storage device, is provided, and by operating each drive circuit etc. in accordance with a control program stored in the ROM 76, control regarding image production and audio production is performed. Note that the ROM 76 and the RAM 77 are nonvolatile storage devices, and are configured to retain stored information even when power is not supplied.

The sub-sub CPU 75 receives a notification signal or an effect signal from the sub-main control board 70A via the interface circuit 78, transmits the signal to the display device control circuit 16 and the speaker control circuit 17, and also sends the signal to the sub-main control board 70A. configured to send a status signal to. The display device control circuit 16 is a circuit that controls the image display device 11 to display a predetermined effect image, and the speaker control circuit 17 controls the type and volume of sounds generated from speakers such as the upper speakers 15a and 15b. This is a control circuit. The image display device 11 is configured to also function as a push display (also referred to as a "sub-side push order display") that displays the operation order (press order) of the stop switches 26a to 26c.

<Reel>
Each of the reels 3a, 3b, 3c is configured to rotate by driving a stepping motor 35a, 35b, 35c. Each of the reels 3a, 3b, 3c is configured of a cylindrical member having translucency, and a translucent reel tape on which a plurality of types of symbols shown in FIG. 3 are displayed is attached to the outer circumferential surface of each of the reels. Each of the reels 3a, 3b, 3c is provided with a back lamp 38a, 38b, 38c on the inner surface thereof. By turning on the back lamp 38a, 38b, 38c, the area of each of the reels 3a, 3b, 3c facing the display window W is entirely illuminated from the inner surface, or only a part of each of the reels 3a, 3b, 3c is illuminated so as to highlight a predetermined symbol combination (for example, a symbol corresponding to a game role arranged on the pay line 29 or a position other than the pay line 29) displayed in a stopped state on each of the reels 3a, 3b, 3c.

<Reel symbol arrangement>
In this embodiment, the symbols displayed on each reel 3a to 3c are arranged as shown in FIG. 3(a). Here, the "left reel" in FIG. 3(a) represents the reel 3a, the "middle reel" represents the reel 3b, and the "right reel" represents the reel 3c. In this way, each reel 3a to 3c has "red seven", "gold seven", "black bar", "blue bar", "blank A", "blank B", " A predetermined number of ten types of symbols, ``Bell A'', ``Bell B'', ``Watermelon'', and ``Replay'', are arranged. For each pattern arranged on the reel tape, one pattern is printed in each pattern area divided into 20 equal parts in the longitudinal direction of the reel tape. Hereinafter, the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c are also referred to as a left reel (left spinning drum), a middle reel (middle spinning drum), and a right reel (right spinning drum), respectively. The symbols shown in Figure 3 are for explaining the symbol arrangement on each reel 3a to 3c, and the size of the symbols actually drawn on the reel tape (the relative ratio of the sizes of each symbol) is Not reflected. As shown in Fig. 3(a), this reel tape has a symbol at the top end in the longitudinal direction as a "Bell A" symbol with symbol number 19, and a symbol at the bottom end as a "replay" symbol with symbol number 0. . Therefore, when the reel tape is attached to the reel, the seam between the "Bell A" symbol with symbol number 19 and the "Replay" symbol with symbol number 0 becomes the seam of the reel tape.

(Reel tape background pattern)
A background pattern is displayed (drawn) on each left and right edge of the reel tape of each reel 3a to 3c of this embodiment. Here, an example of a background pattern is shown in FIG. As shown by hatching in FIG. 4A, in this embodiment, a background pattern BPT with a wave motif is drawn on the left and right edges of the reel tape RTP. Further, the background pattern BPT is a seamless continuous pattern in which one unit (one pattern) is the length of four reel symbols in the longitudinal direction of the reel tape RTP. Therefore, the pattern portion at the top end UE of the background pattern BPT and the pattern portion at the bottom end LE form a continuous pattern that is seamlessly connected. However, at the seam portion of the reel tape described above, a deviation may occur at the seam of the background pattern due to an error in pasting the reel tape.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the number of symbols on each reel in this embodiment is 20, and the length of one unit of background symbols BPT (more precisely, the length in the rotation direction of the reel) is 4 symbols. Since it is a minute, 20/4=5 units of the background pattern BPT are drawn continuously. That is, the length of one unit of background symbols is determined so that when the total number of symbols on the reels is divided by the number of symbols corresponding to the length of one unit of background symbols, the number is evenly divisible. In other words, the total number of symbols on the reels is an integral multiple of the number of symbols corresponding to the length of one unit of background symbols.

In this way, while the number of symbols displayed in the display window W is three, the length of the background symbol for one pattern is the length of four symbols (that is, more than three symbols). Therefore, even if a plurality of units of the background pattern BPT are drawn on the reel tape, the same pattern portion does not exist in the background pattern BPT that can be seen from the display window W when the reel is stopped. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to realize that the background pattern is a repeating pattern, and it is possible to show the background pattern that is visually rich in variety to the player without disappointing the player.

In addition, the number of symbols equivalent to the length of one unit of background symbols is determined to be divisible when dividing the total number of symbols on the reels by that number, so multiple units of background symbols placed on the reel tape Since the background symbols that are less than one unit in length are not included in the background symbols, the symbols can be evenly and uniformly arranged within the background symbols for one rotation of the reel without causing any imbalance. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a biased portion of the background pattern from being momentarily displayed on the display window W while the reels are rotating, and from being used as a landmark to assist in pointing.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 4(a), the background pattern drawn on the left edge of the reel tape RTP and the background pattern drawn on the right edge are asymmetrical patterns with respect to the center C of the reel tape RTP. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the background pattern from becoming monotonous and to display an interesting background pattern to the player. Here, the "asymmetrical pattern" may be a pattern in which the background pattern on the right edge and the background pattern on the left edge are completely different, as shown in FIG. The background pattern may be rotated 180 degrees (upside down) and drawn on the other edge. Furthermore, the number of units of the background pattern per reel rotation is the same 5 units for both the background pattern on the left edge and the background pattern on the right edge, so the background pattern drawn on the left edge of the reel tape RTP and the background pattern on the right side Since the correspondence with the background pattern drawn on the edges is always constant, it is possible to give a sense of unity to the background patterns on both sides. Thereby, it is possible to avoid the possibility that the background pattern drawn on the reel tape makes the player feel uncomfortable and this affects the player's reel stop operation.

Next, the relationship between the reel pattern drawn on the reel tape and the background pattern will be explained with reference to FIG. 4(b). FIG. 4(b) shows symbol numbers 19 and reel symbols 0 to 8 of the symbol arrangement shown in FIG. 3 on the reel tape RTP of the left reel 3a. In FIG. 4(b), the area from the left edge of the reel tape RTP to the point where the background pattern most protrudes toward the center C of the reel tape RTP (the crest of the background pattern) is the left side area La. Further, the area from the right edge of the reel tape RTP to the point where the background pattern most protrudes toward the center C of the reel tape RTP (the crest portion of the background pattern) is the right side area Ra. Furthermore, the area between the left side area La and the right side area Ra is a central area Ca. In this embodiment, the width of the left side area La (the length in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the reel tape (rotation direction of the reel)) and the width of the right side area Ra are the same size.

As shown in FIG. 4(b), the "replay" symbol with symbol numbers 19 and 4, the "bell A" symbol with symbol numbers 0 and 5, the "blank A" symbol with symbol number 3, and the "blank B" symbol with symbol number 8. ” The symbols are all drawn in a size that fits within the central area Ca of the reel tape. That is, these symbols are symbols that do not overlap with the background symbol, and such symbols are also referred to as independent symbols. On the other hand, the "watermelon" symbol with symbol numbers 1 and 6, the "red 7" symbol with symbol number 2, and the "blue bar" symbol with symbol number 7 move from the center area Ca to both the left area La and the right area Ra. It is depicted in sizes ranging from That is, these patterns are patterns that overlap the background pattern, and such patterns are also referred to as overlapping patterns.

In this way, a part of the background pattern is hidden by the overlapping pattern, which breaks the continuity of the background pattern, making it difficult for the player to notice that the background pattern is a repetition of one pattern. Therefore, the appearance of the background pattern does not become monotonous, and it is possible to present a background pattern that is not boring. In addition, by arranging the background symbols of one pattern continuously, for example, the appearance of the background symbol during the rotation of the reels shows periodic changes, and the periodic changes in appearance are used as landmarks. If this is possible, by breaking the continuity of the background pattern with overlapping patterns, it is possible to make it difficult to press the background pattern. Therefore, the length of the background pattern for one pattern may be changed to two patterns, or the background pattern drawn on the left edge and the background pattern drawn on the right edge may be made symmetrical. In such a case, the above-mentioned effect can be achieved by arranging a certain number of overlapping symbols on the reel tape.

Note that in the background pattern shown in FIG. 4, the width of the left side area La and the width of the right side area Ra are the same size, but the width of either one may be wider than the other. Moreover, although the size of the overlapping symbol shown in FIG. 4 covers both the left side area La and the right side area Ra, it may be made to cover only one of the areas. Further, for example, a white reel tape may be colored and a background pattern and a reel pattern may be drawn thereon. In this case, the coloring applied to the reel tape may have a gradation that gradually becomes lighter from both sides of the reel tape to the center (in this case, the original color (white) of the reel tape is exposed in the center of the reel tape). . However, the coloring applied to the reel tape is not included in the background pattern, and the coloring has no effect on the boundary between the left area La and the center area Ca or the boundary between the right area Ra and the center area Ca. Further, the same background pattern as shown in FIG. 4 may be drawn on the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R, or an individual background pattern may be drawn on each reel.

<Types of game roles>
In this embodiment, the symbol combinations that are stopped and displayed on each reel 3a to 3c are set as shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, and these are symbol combinations (corresponding symbols) that constitute a gaming combination. There is. The game roles in this embodiment include two types of special roles: BB role 1 and 2 (BB role; BB is an abbreviation for big bonus. Also referred to as "Type 1 BB" or "bonus role"), and re-gaming role 1. A total of 51 types are set, including 5 types of replayable roles from 1 to 5 and 44 types of winning combinations (minor roles) from 1 to 44. The symbol combinations (corresponding symbols) for each game combination to be established, the number of game medals to be paid out when the game combination is established, etc. are as shown in FIGS. 5 to 8.

BB roles 1 and 2 are game roles (bonus roles) that indicate that no game medals are paid out even if they are formed, but that their formation triggers the activation of a specified bonus (also referred to as "BB" in this embodiment) as a special role, and that the player is transitioned to a special game state (also referred to as "BB in operation") that is advantageous to the player, in which a specified bonus game (also referred to as "BB game") that is executed under conditions different from normal games can be started from the next game. BB role 1 corresponds to the symbol combination of "blue bar, blue bar, red seven," and BB role 2 corresponds to the symbol combination of "black bar, black bar, red seven" (the names of the symbols that make up the game roles are written in the order of reels 3a, 3b, and 3c. The same applies below). The bonus game that can be started by the establishment of BB role 1 or BB role 2 ends when a predetermined number of game medals (for example, 70 medals in this embodiment, but the number can be changed as appropriate) are acquired (as an alternative, it may end when a predetermined number of games (for example, 30 games) have been played). BB roles 1 and 2 can be established in non-RT and RT1 (within BB) described below, but cannot be established in RT2 (when BB is operating) ("-" in Figures 5 to 8 indicates that they cannot be established).

In this embodiment, only the BB role is provided as a special role, but other special roles include RB role (RB is an abbreviation for regular bonus) and MB role (MB is an abbreviation for middle bonus. Also known as "2nd type BB") ) may also be provided. Then, it may be set so that when the RB combination is established, the RB game as a bonus game is started from the next game, and when the MB combination is established, the MB game as a bonus game is started from the next game. In this case, the RB game is set to end, for example, when a small winning combination is achieved a predetermined number of times (e.g., 8 times) or when a predetermined number of games (e.g., 12 times) are completed, and the MB game is For example, the process may end when a predetermined number (for example, more than 200) of game medals are paid out. Also, a plurality of special roles (for example, multiple types of BB roles may be provided, or both BB roles and MB roles may be provided).

For re-gaming combinations 1 to 5, no game medals are paid out if they are established, but the next game is played without reducing the number of game medals held by the player (without inserting new game medals). This is a gaming combination (replay combination) that is allowed. In addition, for replay combination 1, its corresponding symbol “Bell A Replay (Blue Bar/Black Bar/Gold Seven/Red Seven)” (“/” in parentheses means “or”) is active line 29. When the symbol is stopped and displayed above, the symbol "Replay" is arranged so as to be lined up on a line descending to the right within the display window W. For this reason, the replay combination 1 is also referred to as a "downward replay" (replay is also referred to as "RP"). For the same reason, re-gaming combinations 2 to 4 are also referred to as upward-right RP, upper stage RP, and middle stage RP, respectively. In addition, the replay combination 5 is displayed in the display window W when its corresponding symbol “Bell A, (Blue Bar/Black Bar/Gold Seven/Red Seven), Bell B” is stopped and displayed on the active line 29. The design is such that the "watermelon" designs are lined up on the upper line. For this reason, replay winning combination 1 is also referred to as "upper watermelon RP."

As shown in FIG. 3 (reel symbols), the "Replay" symbols on the left reel 3a, center reel 3b, and right reel 3c that constitute the replay role 4 are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols or less on each reel. As a result, when the replay role 4 is won, the corresponding symbol "Replay, Replay, Replay" can be displayed stopped (also called "pulled in") on the pay line 29 regardless of the push order or push position (see the explanation of the reel rotation stop control by the reel control means 134 described later). A role that can pull in the corresponding symbol (any of multiple pairs, if there are multiple pairs) onto the pay line 29 regardless of the operation timing of each stop switch, like this replay role 4, is also called a "100% pull-in possible game role" or a "game role with no misses". Note that replay roles 1 to 3 and 5 are also 100% pull-in possible game roles, like the replay role 4. In addition, replay roles 1 to 5 can be achieved in non-RT and RT1, which will be described later, but cannot be achieved in RT2.

Small winning combinations 1 to 44 are gaming winning combinations (winning combinations) configured such that a predetermined number of game medals are paid out when the winning combination is established. Among the small winnings 1 to 44, small winnings 1 to 36 can be achieved in non-RT, RT1, and RT2, which will be described later, while small winnings 37 to 39 can be achieved in RT2 (BB in operation). It is a role that can only be achieved. In addition, the small winning combinations 1 to 23 and 40 to 43 are also referred to as "one-card winnings" because the number of payouts when they are established is set to one. Similarly, the minor winnings 24 to 37 are also referred to as the "15-card winnings," and the minor winnings 38 and 39 are also referred to as the "three-card winnings." Note that the 15-card hand is also referred to as the "Bell small hand."

Small win 37 is configured so that when its corresponding symbol "Bell A, watermelon, (blue bar/black bar/gold seven/red seven)" is stopped and displayed on pay line 29, the symbol "watermelon" is lined up on a line sloping to the right in display window W. For this reason, small win 37 is also called "watermelon small win." Small win 40 is a one-coin win whose corresponding symbols are "red seven, red seven, red seven." For this reason, small win 40 is also called "red sevens, one-coin win." Small wins 1 to 7 and 24 to 37 are gaming roles that can be drawn in 100%.

<Basic operations for playing games>
To play with the slot machine 1, first, a player inserts a game medal into the medal insertion slot 21 to place a bet, or operates either the 1-BET switch 22 or the MAX-BET switch 23 to bet a specified number of game medals within the credit range, thereby activating the winning line 29. In this embodiment, the specified number of game medals required to activate the winning line 29 is set to three medals in each of the RT states of non-RT, RT1, and RT2 described later. However, the specified number is not limited to this, and can be changed as appropriate, such as by setting the specified number to a different value depending on the RT state. In addition, a plurality of winning lines may be provided, and the number of activated winning lines may be changed depending on the number of game medals bet.

Next, when the player operates the start lever 25, the number of bets is confirmed (the bet game medals are used for play) and the role determination process described below is carried out. After that, it is confirmed that the minimum play time has elapsed, and each of the reels 3a to 3c begins to spin. Here, the minimum play time refers to the minimum time that must be secured from when all the reels have started to spin in one game until when all the reels start to spin in the next game, and in this embodiment, it is set to 4.1 seconds. When each of the reels 3a to 3c begins to spin, the multiple types of symbols displayed on the outer surfaces of the reels 3a to 3c are displayed moving up and down (usually from top to bottom) within the display window W. When the rotation of reels 3a-3c reaches a predetermined speed and starts rotating at a constant speed, each stop switch 26a-26c is enabled (the operation of the stop switch can be validly accepted), and when the player operates stop switch 26a, the rotation of reel 3a stops, when stop switch 26b the rotation of reel 3b stops, and when stop switch 26c the rotation of reel 3c stops.

Here, if it is determined that the symbol combination stopped and displayed on the active line 29 is a predetermined winning mode (symbols corresponding to a game role that can earn game medals), each winning mode A number of game medals corresponding to the number are paid out by the hopper 50 or added as credits.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with additional reference to FIGS. 9 to 29. ≪Functional block≫
As shown in FIG. 9, from a functional point of view, the slot machine according to the present embodiment mainly performs a bet operation for betting game medals (for example, an operation for inserting game medals into the medal slot 21). , pressing operation of 1-BET switch 22 or MAX-BET switch 23), reel rotation start operation (for example, tilting operation of start lever 25) to rotate each stopped reel 3a to 3c, and multiple types of symbols. Each reel rotation stop operation (for example, pressing operation of stop switches 26a, 26b, 26c) to stop the rotation of the three reels 3a, 3b, 3c that variably display a bet or accumulated (credit) game medals. an operation signal output means 95 that outputs a signal (also referred to as a "gaming operation signal") corresponding to each gaming operation performed by the player, such as a settling operation for paying out a coin (for example, a pressing operation of the settling switch 24); , a main control means 100 (corresponding to the main control board 60) that performs main control related to the progress of the game, and a sub-control means 200 (corresponding to the sub-control board 70) that performs predetermined effect control according to the game situation. ).

(1) Functional block of the main control means 100 The main control means 100 can be roughly divided into a game state management means 110 that mainly manages the game state, a game progress management means 130 that mainly manages the game progress, and a main controller. The main communication control means 150 controls communication in the means 100. Of these, the game state management means 110 includes a set value control means 111, an RT state control means 112, a replay operation control means 113, a bonus operation control means 114, a freeze control means 115, a game mode control means 116, and a random number generation/control means 116. It is equipped with a take-in means 117.

Further, the game progress management means 130 includes an accepted medal management means 131, a role determination means 132, a production group number determination means 133, a reel control means 134, a stop display symbol determination means 135, a payout medal management means 136, a blocker control means 137, The main communication control means 150 includes a display lamp control means 138, a press order management means 139, and a condition device group number determination means 140, and a control command transmission means 151 and an outer end signal transmission means 152. Each of the above-mentioned means in the main control means 100 includes hardware such as a main CPU 61, ROM 62, RAM 63, and electronic circuits arranged on the main control board 60 shown in FIG. This is a functional representation of something configured by software.

(1-1) Each means constituting the gaming state management means 110 The setting value control means 111 is a numerical value (" (also referred to as "management setting values"). In this embodiment, consecutive integer values from 1 to 6 (the integer values from 1 to 6 correspond to settings 1 to 6, respectively) are used as management setting values. The management setting value data is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 63, and is referred to when confirming the setting value in the role determination process, and is also used when confirming the setting or changing the setting. It is referenced when displaying the set value on the value display (payout number display lamp 46j). Further, the management setting values are changed in accordance with a setting change operation by a game store clerk. Specifically, each time the setting key type switch 83 is operated to the ON state and the setting change switch 84 is operated in that state, the set value is updated by 1.

The RT state control means 112 is configured to control the settings of three RT states: non-RT, RT1, and RT2. Non-RT is an RT state that is set when the RAM (RAM 63) is initialized. RT1 is the RT state (also known as "BB inside") that is set when the selection of the 1st type BB-A condition device or the 1st type BB-B condition device (winning of BB role 1 or BB role 2) is carried over. ). RT2 is an RT state (also referred to as "BB in operation") that is set from the next game when BB combination 1 or BB combination 2 is established, and a bonus game can be executed during this RT2. In RT2, the replay combination is not won, and it is set so that any of the winning J to Q condition devices is selected (no loss). The transition control of each RT state described above will be explained in detail later.

The replay operation control means 113 operates in a state (also known as a "replay operation state") in which the player is permitted to play the next game without betting the game medals owned by the player, triggered by the establishment of a replay combination. ). When the replay operating state is set, information indicating that the replay operating state is set (also referred to as a "replay operating state flag") is set in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 63 (for example, the value "1" is stored). be done. The set replay operation state flag is cleared (for example, the value "0" is stored) at a predetermined time point until the replay operation state is canceled.

The bonus operation control means 114 is configured to execute a predetermined process during the period from when a bonus role (in this embodiment, BB role 1 or BB role 2) is won (when the type 1 BB-A condition device or type 1 BB-B condition device is selected) to the end of the bonus game that is executed when BB role 1 or BB role 2 is established. Specifically, when BB role 1 or BB role 2 is won, information indicating that BB role 1 or BB role 2 has been won (also called the "type 1 BB win flag") is set (for example, the value "1" is stored) in a predetermined storage area of RAM 63. In addition, when BB role 1 or BB role 2 is established, information indicating that BB is in operation (also called the "type 1 BB operation flag") is set (for example, the value "1" is stored) in a predetermined storage area of RAM 63.

The freeze control means 115 is a freeze control unit that delays execution of control processing related to the progress of the game (for example, processing for accepting bet operations, reel rotation start operations, reel rotation stop operations, etc.) for a predetermined period of time, triggered by the establishment of a predetermined condition. is configured to set. In this embodiment, there are four types of freezes: winning weight (freeze time 2 seconds), fake weight (freeze time 5 seconds), notification weight (freeze time 2 seconds), and total stop end weight (freeze time 5 seconds). It is now executable.

The game mode control means 116 is configured to control the settings of eight game modes from game mode 0 to game mode 7. The gaming mode means a gaming state (also referred to as a "main gaming state") that is controlled by the main control means and is mainly related to the setting state of AT, in addition to the RT state. Furthermore, the game mode control means 116 manages whether to stay in either the normal section or the advantageous section, which will be described later, based on the section type number (takes a value of 0 or 1). Here, the section type number = 0 indicates that the vehicle stays in the normal section, and the section type number = 1 indicates that the vehicle stays in the advantageous section. Furthermore, the gaming mode control means 116 manages the AT winning flag (takes a value of 0 or 1). Here, the AT winning flag=0 indicates that the AT has not been won, and the AT winning flag=1 indicates that the AT has been won.

Game mode 0 is a normal (non-advantageous) game state. Game mode 0 is a mode in which the player stays in the normal section, and is a mode in which lottery etc. related to AT games (assist games) are not performed. Game mode 1 is mainly a game state in which the section type number is 1, but is also called a "chance" to stay when AT has not been won. Game mode 2 is a gaming state also called "AT post-winning 1" that mainly stays when the section type number=1 and AT winning has been made but BB winning has not been made. Game mode 3 is an AT game state that is mainly triggered by a BB win in an AT win state. During this game mode 3, the push navigation described later is executed, resulting in a very advantageous game state for the player.

Game mode 4 is a game state also called "after AT" in which the player stays after a BB is established in game mode 7, which will be described later. Game mode 5 is a game state also called "AT post-win 2" in which the player stays after winning AT in game mode 4. Game mode 6 is a game state also called "chance time interior" in which the player mainly stays inside the BB in a state where the section type number=1 and the AT is not won. Game mode 7 is a game state also called "internal after AT" that mainly stays after one AT ends when the arrival flag=0.

The above-mentioned eight game modes 0 to 7 are divided into game modes belonging to the normal zone (game mode 0) and game modes belonging to the advantageous zone (game modes 1 to 7). The normal zone is a period during which push navigation (prize-winning navigation, RP navigation, and eye-pushing navigation) is not performed, and is also a period during which information that can determine the push order (information such as condition device number and instruction number) is not transmitted from the main control means to the sub-control means. The normal zone is also a period during which a lottery can be held to determine whether or not to move to the advantageous zone (for example, a lottery for moving to the advantageous zone).

The advantageous section is a period during which push navigation can be performed, and is also a period during which information for determining the push order may be transmitted from the main control means side to the sub control means side. In addition, in the advantageous section, a lottery that changes the performance of the advantageous section (for example, AT mode lottery) or a process that adds to the number of AT games in the advantageous section (for example, 7 stock 1 lottery, 7 stock 2 lottery), etc. is performed. This is also the period when you can do it. Furthermore, in the advantageous section, a section display (for example, a DP segment lamp other than the 7 segment lamp (also referred to as an "advantageous section lamp") among the payout number display lamps 46j to notify the player that the player is in the advantageous section) ) lights up.While staying in the advantageous section, you may perform the winning navigation at least once (in this case, if you have not performed the winning navigation even once, you cannot move to the normal section. ).

Furthermore, an upper limit (1500 games) is set for the period during which a player can stay in the advantageous section continuously. Further, when the upper limit is reached and the advantageous section ends, all information related to the advantageous section (for example, information such as the AT winning flag, the value of the seven stock number counter, etc.) is cleared. Note that when the upper limit is reached and the advantageous section ends, it is not necessary that winning navigation has been performed even once during the stay in the advantageous section. In addition, if a lottery to determine whether to move to an advantageous section or a lottery to change the performance of an advantageous section is performed based on the winning combination result (condition device), the winning selection result without setting differences will be applied. In particular, the lottery for changing the performance of advantageous sections may be performed based on conditions other than the winning combination results. In this case, it may be done without referring to the setting values.

The random number generating and taking-in means 117 is composed of the above-mentioned CPU 61, clock pulse generator 64, frequency divider 65, random number generator 66, and random number taking-in circuit 67, and generates and takes in random numbers used in various lotteries. In this embodiment, it has four 16-bit random number means (4ch: ch is an abbreviation of "channel") capable of generating a random number sequence with a maximum value range of "0 to 65535", and four 8-bit random number means (4ch) capable of generating a random number sequence with a maximum value range of "0 to 255", and each of them is capable of generating a random number sequence independently. The random numbers generated by these 16-bit random number means or 8-bit random number means are updated based on the clock signal generated by the clock pulse generator 64, so they are also called hardware random numbers (hard random numbers). Although not shown, in this embodiment, a random number generating means other than the random number generating and taking-in means 117 is provided. This random number generation means is composed of the above-mentioned CPU 61 and RAM 63, and has a random number means capable of generating a sequence of random numbers within a predetermined numerical range as random numbers to be used for determining roles, etc. These random numbers are also called software random numbers (soft random numbers) because they are updated based on a program.

(About RT state transition control)
The RT state transition control by the aforementioned RT state control means 112 will be explained with reference to FIG. 10. As shown in this figure, when a type 1 BB-A condition device or a type 1 BB-B condition device is selected during non-RT, condition P1 is satisfied, and this triggers the RT state control means 112 to control the RT state. from non-RT to RT1. Also, during RT1, when BB combination 1 or BB combination 2 is established (also referred to as "BB establishment" or "BB operation"), condition P2 is satisfied, and this triggers the RT state control means 112 to change the RT state to RT1. to RT2.

RT2 is an RT state (also referred to as "BB in operation") that is set from the next game when BB combination 1 or BB combination 2 is established, and a bonus game can be executed during this RT2. In RT2, the replay combination is not won, and it is set so that any of the winning J to Q condition devices is selected (no loss). During RT2, when more than a predetermined number (70 coins) of game medals are acquired and the bonus game ends (also referred to as "BB operation end"), condition P3 is satisfied, and with this as a trigger, the RT state control means 112 , transitions the RT state from RT2 to non-RT.

(Game mode transition control)
Game mode transition control by the game mode control means 116 described above will be explained with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12. As shown in FIG. 11, in gaming mode 0, when condition Q1 is satisfied, gaming mode 0 shifts to gaming mode 1, and when condition Q2 is satisfied, gaming mode 0 changes to gaming mode 1. 2, and when condition Q3 is satisfied, gaming mode 0 shifts to gaming mode 3, and when condition Q4 is satisfied, gaming mode 0 shifts to gaming mode 6. ing. The content of each transition condition (conditions Q1 to Q15) is shown in a simplified manner in FIG. 11, but more detailed content is shown in the flowchart described later.

During gaming mode 1, when condition Q5 is satisfied, gaming mode 1 shifts to gaming mode 0, when condition Q6 is satisfied, gaming mode 1 shifts to gaming mode 6, and when condition Q7 is met, gaming mode 1 shifts to gaming mode 6. When the condition Q8 is satisfied, the game mode 1 shifts to the game mode 2, and when the condition Q8 is satisfied, the game mode 1 shifts to the game mode 3. Here, the chance game number counter included in condition Q5 is a counter (takes a value of 0 to 30) that manages the number of games staying in gaming mode 1, and when transitioning to gaming mode 1, the chance game number counter is a counter that manages the number of games staying in gaming mode 1. is set to 30 and is decremented by 1 every game thereafter (see also Figure 12). In addition, the 1st type BB winning flag included in conditions Q6 to Q8 is a flag (takes a value of 0 or 1) that manages whether or not BB has been won in the winning lottery in the game. The flag=0 indicates that the player has not won the BB in the game, and the flag=1 indicates that the player has won the BB in the game (see also FIG. 12).

During game mode 2, when condition Q9 is satisfied, a transition is made to game mode 3. In game mode 3, when condition Q11 is satisfied, the game mode 0 is entered, and when condition Q12 is satisfied, game mode 7 is entered. Here, the bell number counter included in conditions Q11 and Q12 is a counter (takes a value of 0 to 134) that manages the number of times (also referred to as "bell number") that push navigation (winning navigation) can be performed in AT. , and when the value of the bell number counter is 1 or more, the winning navigation becomes executable (see also FIG. 12).

In addition, the seven numbers included in conditions Q11 and Q12 are numbers that manage the type of AT (red seven or gold seven), where seven number = 1 indicates red seven and seven number = 2 indicates gold seven (Figure 12 (see also). The seven counter is a counter (takes a value of 0 to 26) that manages the number of red sevens in stock, and the cumulative counter is a counter that manages the number of game medals acquired (difference number) in one advantageous section ( The attainment flag is a flag (takes a value of 0 or 1) for adjusting whether the number of game medals acquired (difference number) reaches the upper limit (takes a value of 0 or 1) (see also FIG. 12). .

During game mode 6, when condition Q10 is satisfied, the game mode 1 is shifted to game mode 1. During game mode 7, when condition Q10 is satisfied, the game mode is shifted to game mode 4. During gaming mode 4, when condition Q8 is satisfied, gaming mode 4 shifts to gaming mode 3, and when condition Q13 is satisfied, gaming mode 4 shifts to gaming mode 0, and condition Q14 When the above is satisfied, the game mode 4 shifts to the game mode 7. Here, the AT cycle counter included in conditions Q13 and Q14 is a counter (takes a value of 0 to 3) that manages the stay cycle during AT.

Furthermore, in game mode 4, satisfaction of condition Q7 triggers a transition from game mode 4 to game mode 5, and in game mode 5, satisfaction of condition Q9 triggers a transition to game mode 3.

Further, while staying in any of gaming modes 1 to 7 (that is, an advantageous section), when condition Q15 is satisfied, the game mode is shifted to gaming mode 0. The advantageous section clear counter included in condition Q15 is a counter (takes a value of 0 to 1500) that manages the number of games that are consecutively staying in the advantageous section. is set, and is subtracted by 1 each time a game is played in an advantageous period (see also FIG. 12). In addition, the net increase counter is a counter (takes a value of 0 to 2412) that manages the number of tickets acquired (difference number) during the advantageous section, and is set to 0 when the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section. It is updated according to the number (see also FIG. 12).

In this way, when transitioning from the normal section to the advantageous section, the value of the advantageous section clear counter is set to "1500", and each time the game is played in the advantageous section, the value of the advantageous section clear counter is subtracted by 1. Then, when the value of the advantageous section clear counter becomes "0", the vehicle is forcibly shifted to the normal section. In addition, if you move from an advantageous section to a normal section before the value of the advantageous section clear counter reaches "0", the value of the advantageous section clear counter is cleared (set to "0"), and from the normal section to the advantageous section again. , the value of the advantageous section clear counter is reset to "1500".

The present embodiment also includes a net increase counter that counts the number of game medals acquired (difference in number) during the advantageous period. This net increase counter sets the counter value to "0" at the beginning of the advantageous section (it may also be set to "0" at the end of the advantageous section), and thereafter changes the counter value in accordance with the result of each game. Update. When updating, if the difference in number of sheets is less than 0, the counter value is corrected to "0", and if the difference in number of sheets is a positive value, it is accumulated and updated as is. ). Then, when the accumulated difference number of sheets exceeds 2,400 sheets, the advantageous section ends and shifts to the normal section. Note that the cumulative counter is functionally a counter that performs the same counting as the pure increase counter. When checking the number of game medals acquired (difference number) during control processing, there are times when the value of the cumulative counter is referred to and times when the value of the net increase counter is checked depending on the processing content.

In addition, a correction counter is also provided as a counter that performs counting related to the number of game medals won (difference in number) during the favorable zone. This correction counter is a counter (taking a value between 0 and 2101) that counts the number of game medals that can be won during one favorable zone (also called the "expected number won" or "expected number of medals that can be won"), which is calculated by adding the number of AT stocks such as red sevens and gold sevens and the value of the bell count counter to the value of the net increase counter (accumulation counter). When the value of the correction counter (expected number won) exceeds a predetermined value (2100), this may be used as a trigger to end the favorable zone at a predetermined timing and transition to the normal zone.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand when the advantageous section ends. For example, if you decide when to end an advantageous section only by the value of the advantageous section clear counter or the value of the net increase counter, if you display those values to the player, the player can confirm the advantageous section by checking them. It is possible to easily grasp the end date of the project. However, when a correction counter is provided, even though the value of the advantageous section clear counter or net increase counter has not reached the upper limit, the advantageous section ends when the value of the correction counter reaches a predetermined value. Something happens. Therefore, it becomes difficult to know when the advantageous section ends, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, by setting the predetermined value (2100) in the correction counter to a value smaller than the upper limit value (2400) in the net increase counter, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the advantageous section ends during AT. For example, if the value of the correction counter (expected number of acquisitions) exceeds a predetermined value (2100) during an AT, and if the next AT is also allowed to be executed after the end of that AT, the net increase counter will reach the upper limit during the execution of the next AT. There is a high possibility that the value (2400) will be exceeded and the advantageous section will end. If the advantageous section ends during AT, there is a risk that the player will be disappointed, but if the value of the correction counter (expected number of wins) exceeds the predetermined value (2100), the advantageous section ends. It is possible to avoid such a situation from occurring.

(Lottery executed in each game mode)
Next, various lotteries performed by the game mode control means 116 in the above-mentioned game modes 0 to 7 will be described with reference to Figures 13 to 20. The advantageous zone shift lottery shown in Figure 13(A) is a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to an advantageous zone, and selects either a win (1) or a loss (0) based on the condition device group A number (condition device group numbers will be described later). The number of wins corresponding to each condition device group A number is as shown in the figure.

The chance mode 1 lottery shown in FIG. 13(B) is a lottery that determines the chance mode number (a number that manages the ease of winning in the lottery during chance (gaming mode 1)), and is based on the condition device group H number. to select one of chance mode numbers 0 to 4. The winning numbers corresponding to each conditional device group H number are as shown in the figure.

Chance mode 2 lottery-1 shown in FIG. 13(C) is a lottery to determine the chance mode number during the BB operation in chance (gaming mode 1), and the chance mode number is determined based on the condition device group D number. Select one from 0 to 4 (actually 0 or 4). The winning numbers corresponding to each condition device group D number are as shown in the figure.

Chance mode 2 lottery-2 shown in FIG. 13(D) is a lottery to determine the chance mode number while the BB is inactive during chance (gaming mode 1), and based on the condition device group B number, chance mode Select one of the numbers 0 to 4 (actually 0 or 4). The winning numbers corresponding to each condition device group B number are as shown in the figure.

The chance mode 3 lottery shown in FIG. 13(E) is a lottery to determine a new chance mode number at the end of the stay period during chance (gaming mode 1). A new chance mode number 0 to 4 (actually 0 or 4) is selected based on the number (not drawn). The number of winning bets corresponding to each chance mode number is as shown in the figure. Note that chance mode number 4 indicates AT winning. Each chance mode lottery shown in FIGS. 13B to 13E is also collectively referred to as an AT lottery.

In the chance game number lottery shown in FIG. This is a lottery to determine the number of games to be played, and based on the selected chance mode numbers 1 to 3, the number of games is 0, 10, 20, or 30. The winning numbers corresponding to each chance mode number are as shown in the figure.

The chance cycle lottery shown in FIG. 14(B) is a lottery that determines the number of cycles when a chance mode is won. Based on the chance mode numbers 1 to 3 selected in the chance mode 1 lottery, one of the cycle numbers 0 to 4 is selected. Select. The winning numbers corresponding to each chance mode number are as shown in the figure.

The EX1 mode lottery shown in FIG. 14(C) is a lottery to determine the additional mode number (number that manages the stock additional state during AT) after winning AT, and based on the condition device group F number, the additional mode number 0 is selected. -2 (actually 1 or 2). The winning numbers corresponding to each conditional device group F number are as shown in the figure.

The EX2 mode lottery shown in FIG. 14(D), like the EX1 mode lottery, is a lottery that is held while staying in game mode 2 or 5 in order to determine the additional mode number after AT winning, and the condition device group F number Based on this, one of the additional mode numbers 0 to 2 (actually 0 or 2) is selected. The winning numbers corresponding to each conditional device group F number are as shown in the figure.

AT mode lottery-1 shown in FIG. 14(E) determines the next AT mode number (a number that manages the ease of winning in the lottery during AT) when AT is won, so it is especially important to stay in game modes 0 to 2. This is a lottery held during the event, and one of the AT mode numbers 0 to 5 is selected based on the condition device group J number. The winning numbers corresponding to each conditional device group J number are as shown in the figure.

AT mode lottery-2 shown in FIG. 14(F), like AT mode lottery-1, determines the next AT mode number (a number that manages the ease of winning in the lottery during AT) when an AT is won, so in particular, This is a lottery held during the stay in gaming modes 3 to 5, and one of AT mode numbers 0 to 5 is selected based on the condition device group J number. The winning numbers corresponding to each conditional device group J number are as shown in the figure.

The AT mode lottery-3 shown in Figure 14 (G) is the same as AT mode lottery-1 and -2, in that it determines the next AT mode number (a number that controls the likelihood of winning in the lottery during the AT) when an AT is won, and is held after all reels have stopped (also called "after all stops"), and selects one of the AT mode numbers 0 to 5 based on the condition device group J number. The winning number corresponding to each condition device group J number is as shown in the figure.

The Seven 1 drawing shown in FIG. 15(A) is a drawing that is conducted during play mode 1 or 4 and after a full stop in order to determine the type of AT (red seven or gold seven), and one of the seven numbers 0 to 2 is selected based on the condition device group F number. The winning number corresponding to each condition device group F number is as shown in the figure.

The Seven 2 lottery shown in FIG. 15(B), like the Seven 1 lottery, is a lottery held especially during the stay in game mode 2 or 5 in order to determine the type of AT, and based on the condition device group F number, Select one of seven numbers 0 to 2. The winning numbers corresponding to each conditional device group F number are as shown in the figure.

The AT mode rewriting lottery shown in FIG. 15(C) is a lottery in which the AT mode number is rewritten after the AT ends. Choose one. The winning numbers corresponding to the values of each advantageous section clear counter are as shown in the figure.

The Seven Loop Lottery shown in Figure 15 (D) is a lottery to decide whether or not to continue Red Seven, and it is a lottery that determines whether or not to continue playing Red Seven, and it is determined whether you win (1) or lose (1) based on the loop number (the number that manages the continuation rate of Red Seven). 0). The winning numbers corresponding to each loop number are as shown in the figure.

The gold seven loop lottery shown in FIG. 15(E) is a lottery to determine whether or not to continue the gold seven, and either a winner (1) or a loser (0) is selected. The winning numbers assigned to winning (1) and losing (0) are as shown in the figure.

The gold seven loop rewriting lottery shown in Figure 15 (F) is a lottery to rewrite the continuation rate of gold seven, and either a winner (1) or a loser (0) is selected based on the condition device group E number. do. The winning numbers corresponding to each condition device group E number are as shown in the figure.

The add-on mode lottery shown in Figure 15 (G) is a lottery to determine the add-on mode number during the AT, and selects one of the add-on mode numbers 0 to 2 (actually 1 or 2). The winning number assigned to each add-on mode number is as shown in the figure.

The bell number switching lottery shown in FIG. 16(A) is a lottery for rewriting the number of bells, and either a winner (1) or a loser (0) is selected based on the value of the number of bells counter. The winning numbers corresponding to the values of each bell counter are as shown in the figure.

The Seven Stock 1 drawing shown in FIG. 16(B) is a drawing to decide whether or not to add the AT stock number, and based on the conditional device group C number, either a win (1) or a loss (0) is drawn. elect. The winning numbers corresponding to each condition device group C number are as shown in the figure.

The Seven Stock 2 lottery shown in Figure 16(C) is a lottery to decide whether or not to add the AT stock number, similar to the Seven Stock 1 lottery, and there is a winner (1) or a loser based on the condition device group E number. Select one of (0). The winning numbers corresponding to each condition device group E number are as shown in the figure.

The production lever weight lottery shown in FIG. 16(D) is a lottery to decide whether or not to perform a fake weight as a freeze, and based on the condition device group J number, there will be either a win (1) or a loss (0). Select. The winning numbers corresponding to each conditional device group J number are as shown in the figure.

AT cycle lottery-1 shown in FIG. 17(A) is based on the number of stay cycles during AT (BB operation required from game mode 3 to return to game mode 3 via game modes 7 and 4) at the end of AT. This is a lottery that is held especially when the AT mode number is 1 or 2 to determine the number of stay cycles (number of stays), and based on the value of the bell number counter, the number of stay cycles is either 0 to 3 (actually 1 to 3). Select. The winning numbers corresponding to the values of each bell counter are as shown in the figure.

The AT Cycle Lottery-2 shown in FIG. 17(B) is the same as the AT Cycle Lottery-1, and is a lottery held when the AT mode number is 3 or 4 to determine the number of stay cycles during the AT at the end of the AT, and selects one of the stay cycle numbers 0 to 3 (actually 1 to 3) based on the value of the bell count counter. The winning number corresponding to each bell count counter value is as shown in the figure.

The pullback 1 lottery-1 shown in FIG. 17(C) is a lottery that is held particularly when the AT mode number is 1 to 3 to decide whether or not to win AT again after the AT ends. Based on the C number, either a winner (1) or a loser (0) is selected. The winning numbers corresponding to each conditional device group C number are as shown in the figure.

The pullback 1 lottery-2 shown in FIG. 17(D), like the pullback 1 lottery-1, is especially performed when the AT mode number is 4 in order to decide whether or not to win the AT again after the AT ends. Based on the condition device group C number, either the winner (1) or the loser (0) is selected. The winning numbers corresponding to each condition device group C number are as shown in the figure.

Like Pullback 1 Lottery-1 and 2, Pullback 1 Lottery-3 shown in FIG. This is a lottery in which either a winner (1) or a loser (0) is selected based on the condition device group C number. The winning numbers corresponding to each condition device group C number are as shown in the figure.

The pullback 2 lottery shown in FIG. 18(B) is a lottery to decide whether or not to win AT again after the number of stay cycles during AT reaches 0. Select one of the losers (0). The winning numbers corresponding to each AT mode number are as shown in the figure.

The AT cycle preferential game number lottery shown in FIG. 18(C) is a lottery to determine the number of games to be set in a predetermined preferential state (also referred to as the "number of preferential state games") after the end of AT, and is based on the AT mode number. The number of preferential state games is 0, 10, 20, or 30. The winning numbers corresponding to each AT mode number are as shown in the figure.

The Seven Table 1 lottery shown in Figure 19(A) is a lottery to determine the Seven Table number (the number that manages the table that determines the continuation rate in the Red Seven), and the Seven Table Number 0 to 15 is determined based on the AT mode number. Choose one. The winning numbers corresponding to each AT mode number are as shown in the figure.

The Seven Table 2 lottery shown in FIG. 19(B) is a lottery to determine the Seven Table number, similar to the Seven Table 1 lottery, and one of the Seven Table numbers 0 to 15 is selected based on the condition device group G number. . The winning numbers corresponding to each conditional device group G number are as shown in the figure.

The Bell Number 1 Lottery-1 shown in FIG. The number of bells from 0 to 4, 6, 10, 11, or 20 is selected based on the number that controls ease of play. The winning numbers corresponding to each CU rank number are as shown in the figure.

Bell Number 1 Lottery-2 shown in FIG. 20(B), like Bell Number 1 Lottery-1, is a first lottery particularly held when the game mode is 4 or 5 to determine the number of bells. , the number of bells from 0 to 4, 6, 10, 11, or 20 is selected based on the CU rank number. The winning numbers corresponding to each CU rank number are as shown in the figure.

The number of bells 2 lottery shown in FIG. 20(C) is a lottery for the second and subsequent rounds conducted to determine the number of bells, and is based on the CU rank number from 0 to 4, 6, 10, 11, 20. Choose one. The winning numbers corresponding to each CU rank number are as shown in the figure.

The Bell Number 3 drawing shown in FIG. 20(D) is the same as the Bell Number 2 drawing, and is a drawing for the second or subsequent times to determine the number of bells, and selects one of the bell numbers 0 to 4, 6, 10, 11, or 20. The winning numbers assigned to each bell number are as shown in the figure.

(1-2) Means Constituting the Game Progress Management Means 130 Returning to FIG. 9, the received medal management means 131 is configured to control whether the actually accepted medals (the medals that are guided to the receiving passage and detected by the inserted medal sensor 28b, also referred to as "accepted medals") among the medals inserted from the medal insertion port 21 (also referred to as "inserted medals") are to be directly bet or credited. In this embodiment, when the number of bets does not reach the maximum bet allowable number (the number of bets required to execute a game (the specified number "3")), the accepted medals are to be directly bet, and when the number of bets reaches the maximum bet allowable number and the number of credits does not reach the maximum credit allowable number (for example, "50"), the accepted medals are to be credited.

In addition, the received medal management means 131 performs automatic bet processing (without reducing the number of game medals held by the player, in a game set to the replay operation state, the same number of game medals as the number of bets in the previous game is generated). The system is configured to perform a process of setting a bet state. Even in the replay operation state, if the number of credits has not reached the maximum allowable number of credits, the inserted game medals are accepted as game medals to be credited (or may not be accepted). If the number of bets has reached the maximum allowable bet number and the number of credits has reached the maximum allowable number of credits, the inserted game medals will not be accepted and will be returned.

The winning combination determining means 132 determines a plurality of winning combinations based on a preset probability of winning a winning combination (the number of lottery entries) when the start lever 25 is operated (the operation of the start lever 25 is effectively accepted). It is configured to perform a winning combination determination process (internal lottery) for selecting at least one winning combination result from among the results (condition device). This winning combination determination process is performed using random numbers generated by the above-mentioned 16-bit random number means. Specifically, when the start lever 25 is operated, a 16-bit random number means takes in a generated random number. Then, when performing the winning combination determination process, the loaded random number is read out, a predetermined soft random number is added to the read random number, and the added random number is used to select a conditional device. A conditional device may be selected using read random numbers without adding a predetermined soft random number.

The winning combination determination process is performed with reference to a predetermined winning combination table (not shown) set in advance. The winning combination table has a structure in which lottery number data corresponding to each condition device is stored in a predetermined storage area (a plurality of addresses) in the ROM 62 for each set value. In the winning combination determination process, when one or more conditional devices are selected, the gaming combination corresponding to the selected conditional device becomes the permissible winning combination in the game. Information on the selected conditional device (winning combination) is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 63, but if the information on the winning item stored in one game is information regarding the winning of a minor combination or a replay combination. is cleared (reset to "0") after the end of the game, regardless of whether or not these small winning combinations and replaying winning combinations are established. On the other hand, if the BB winning combination is not established even if the BB winning combination is won, the information regarding the winning of the BB winning combination is not cleared and held in memory until the BB winning combination is established.

The performance group number determination means 133 is configured to perform a process of associating a performance group number with the condition device selected by the role determination process. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21, the performance group A group number (0 or 1) is associated with the bonus condition device, and the performance group B group number (0 to 29) is associated with the winning replay condition device. For example, as shown in FIG. 21(A), the performance group A group number 1 is commonly associated with the 1st type BB-A condition device and the 1st type BB-B condition device. Also, as shown in FIG. 21(B), the performance group B group number 13 is commonly associated with the winning-A1 to A12 condition devices, in which differences in the push order can cause advantages or disadvantages in the game (effect on ball payout) and differences in the number of game medals paid out (number of medals won) occur, and the performance group B group number 14 is commonly associated with the winning-B1 to B12 condition devices.

On the other hand, there is a re-gaming-A to L condition device that corresponds to the winning of a re-gaming combination that does not affect the advantage or disadvantage in the game (does not affect the balls put out) due to the difference in the order of pressing, and Winning re-gaming conditions corresponding to the winning of a small role (winning role) where there is no difference in the number of game medals paid out (number acquired) or the number of game medals that can be acquired is small (for example, less than the specified number of bets) Regarding the devices, different performance group B numbers are associated with each condition device.

Returning to FIG. 9, the reel control means 134 uses the operation of the start lever 25 (the operation of the start lever 25 has been effectively accepted) as a trigger, and after confirming that the minimum playing time has elapsed. , after the reels 3a to 3c have started rotating and all the reels that have started rotating are in a constant speed rotation state, the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c have been sequentially operated (each operation of the stop switches 26a to 26c is valid). The system is configured to sequentially stop the rotation of the corresponding reels 3a to 3c when the reel is accepted.

The rotation stop control of each reel 3a to 3c is based on each stop table (not shown) that is set according to the winning combination result selected in the winning combination determination process, and the operation mode (pressing) of the stop switch 26a to 26c is (order, operation timing, etc.). Each reel 3a to 3c is configured such that each reel 3a to 3c stops within a predetermined allowable stop time (for example, 190 milliseconds) from the timing when the stop switch 26a, 26b, 26c is operated (in this embodiment, (within the maximum number of sliding frames of 5 frames).

In other words, if a specific game role is selected as a role that is allowed to be achieved as a result of the role determination process, the reels 3a to 3c are controlled to stop so that the symbols corresponding to the selected game role are stopped and displayed on the pay line 29 as much as possible within the allowable stop time, and in the case of a miss, none of the symbols corresponding to the game roles are stopped and displayed on the pay line 29. Note that if a replay role or small role is won while a special role is being carried over, or if a special role and a replay role or small role are both won, the reel spin stop control may be performed with priority given to the replay role, special role, and small role in that order (small roles may be given priority over special roles).

The stop display symbol determining means 135 determines which symbols are stopped and displayed on the reels 3a to 3c based on the timing when the stop switches 26a to 26c are operated, and determines which symbols are stopped and displayed on the active line 29. It is configured to determine whether a gaming combination has been established based on the symbol combination determined to be the same (which may be different from the symbol combination actually stopped and displayed).

The payout medal management means 136 performs a storage addition payout that adds the number of game medals corresponding to the established minor role when the minor role is established to the number of credits when the number of credits has not reached the maximum allowable number of credits. Therefore, when the number of credits reaches the maximum allowable number of credits, the actual payout is performed by driving the hopper 50 via the hopper drive circuit 52. In addition, the payout medal management means 136 transfers the betted number of game medals or the credited number of game medals to the hopper 50 when the settlement operation (pressing operation of the settlement switch 24) is accepted effectively. It is designed to be driven and refunded.

The blocker control means 137 is configured to output a blocker signal for controlling the blocker 48 described above, and switch the blocker 48 between an ON state (a state in which game medals can be accepted) and an OFF state (a state in which game medals cannot be accepted). When the blocker 48 is in the OFF state, game medals inserted into the medal insertion port 21 are guided to the return passage and returned. However, the insertion of game medals is detected by the inserted medal sensor 28a.

The display lamp control means 138 includes the various display lamps described above (MAX-BET display lamp 46a, BET lamp 46b, input possible display lamp 46c, game start display lamp 46d, replay display lamp 46e, status display lamp 46f, number of times The display lamp 46g, the CRE lamp 46h, the payout number display lamp 46j) are controlled to turn on and off through a display lamp control circuit 47. In addition, when the payout number display lamp 46j is made to function as a main side push order indicator, the push order management means 139 controls the payout number display lamp 46j.

The push order management means 139 selects an instruction number (any one of 0 to 6) corresponding to the push order to be notified, depending on the winning combination result (condition device) selected in the winning combination processing. Instruction number 0 is selected when the pressing order is not to be reported, and instruction numbers 1 to 6 are selected when the pressing order is to be notified. In this embodiment, instruction number 1 is "left center right," instruction number 2 is "left center center," instruction number 3 is "center left right," instruction number 4 is "center right left," and instruction number 5 is "right left center." , instruction number 6 is associated with each pressing order of "right middle left".

The push order management means 139 is also configured to perform push navigation (main push navigation) by causing the payout number display lamp 46j to function as a main side push order alarm and notify the selected instruction number. There is. This push navigation notifies the navigation number using two 7 segment lamps (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as "7 segments") provided on the payout number display lamp 46j. For example, "=" is displayed in the left 7 segments, and the numerical value of the instruction number (for example, "2" for instruction number 2) is displayed in the right 7 segments. The "=" displayed in the seven segments on the left is for distinguishing from when the number of payouts is displayed on the payout number display lamp 46j. When navigation number 0 is selected, the payout number display lamp 46j is not displayed, but as another aspect, "=" is displayed in the left 7 segments and "0" is displayed in the right 7 segments. "0" may be displayed on both the left 7 segments and the right 7 segments, or "0" may be displayed on only one of the left and right 7 segments.

The conditional device group number determining means 140 determines the conditional device group number used for selecting the winning value in various lotteries according to the performance group A group number and the performance group B group number determined by the performance group number determination means 133. is configured to determine. Specifically, the condition device group numbers are divided into 10 types from the condition device group A number to the condition device group J number, and for each combination of the effect group A group number and the effect group B group number, the condition Each number value from the device group A number to the condition device group J number is associated in advance. The specific correspondence is as shown in FIG. 22. For example, for a combination of effect group A group number 1 and effect group B group number 0, condition device group A number 1, condition device group B number 2, condition device group C number 2, condition device group D number 0, condition device Group E number 0, condition device group F number 1, condition device group G number 0, condition device group H number 1, condition device group I number 0, and condition device group J number 1 are associated with each other. In addition, in the remarks column in the table of FIG. 22, abbreviations representing the contents of each combination of the presentation group A group number and the presentation group B group number are described.

(Detailed explanation regarding role determination processing)
The role determining process executed by the role determining means 132 involves drawing a winning combination once per game based on a predetermined probability (winning determination probability), and based on the winning number determined by the winning combination drawing. This is a series of processes for determining symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line. More specifically, first, a winning combination is drawn based on the winning probability, and one winning number is determined from among a plurality of winning numbers (including losers) through this winning drawing. Each winning number is linked in advance to a bonus condition device number or winning replay condition device number, and when one winning number is determined, the bonus condition device number or winning replay condition device number linked to that winning number is The replay condition device number is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM. Here, the bonus condition device number and the winning replay condition device number are stored in different storage areas. As a result, the symbol combinations associated with the condition devices of various condition device numbers stored in the RAM can be aligned on the active line.

In addition, in the above example, either the bonus condition device number or the winning replay condition device number was linked to the one winning number, but the bonus condition device number and the winning replay condition device number were linked to the one winning number. Both gaming condition device numbers may be linked.

The above-mentioned winning combination probability can be set arbitrarily. Further, the winning combination probability can be configured to be changed according to the above-mentioned setting value set by a game store clerk or the like. In this embodiment, the setting value is configured in six stages from settings 1 to 6, and there are winning numbers whose winning probability varies depending on the setting value, and winning numbers whose winning probability does not change even if the setting value changes. and. Hereinafter, setting the winning combination probability to change according to the setting value will be referred to as "setting a setting difference." It is possible to arbitrarily determine whether or not to provide a setting difference for each winning number. As an example, a winning number is linked to the condition device number of a condition device that is the trigger for a lottery that affects the payout rate (the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of game medals used for the game) in the slot machine 1. For example, a setting difference may or may not be provided for a winning number to which a condition device number of a condition device that is not a lottery trigger is linked.

FIG. 23 shows the winning numbers assigned to each winning number (a total of 65,536 numbers) as an example of the winning probability in the slot machine 1. In FIG. 23, the winning numbers are not shown, but the conditional devices with the conditional device numbers linked to each winning number are shown. Further, in this example, the winning numbers in each RT state of non-RT, RT1, and RT2 are shown for three setting values, setting 1, setting 3, and setting 6. According to this example, during non-RT, the probability that a winning number associated with a type 1 BB-A condition device number or a winning number associated with a type 1 BB-B condition device number is selected is, respectively. It is set relatively high at around 7/100. Furthermore, during non-RT or during RT1, the probability that any of the winning numbers corresponding to the winning-A1 to A12 condition device numbers will be selected is set to be approximately 7/10, which is quite high.

The table in FIG. 24(A) shows the type of bonus condition device, the bonus condition device number assigned to that bonus condition device, and the symbol combinations associated with each condition device (in FIG. ”), and the tables in FIGS. 24(B) and 25 to 29 show the types of winning replay condition devices and the winning replay conditions attached to the winning replay condition devices. The device number, the symbol combination (denoted as "winning combination" in FIG. 24(B) and FIGS. 25 to 29) associated with each condition device, etc. are shown. Hereinafter, the contents of some condition devices will be specifically explained.

In the bonus condition devices shown in FIG. 24(A), bonus condition device number 1 is assigned to the type 1 BB-A condition device, and bonus condition device number 2 is assigned to the type 1 BB-B condition device. . Bonus condition device number 0 indicates that it does not correspond to any bonus condition device. The type 1 BB-A condition device is associated with the symbol combination of BB combination 1, and this symbol combination can be stopped and displayed during non-RT, which will be described later. Furthermore, if the symbol combination of BB combination 1 cannot be aligned on the active line, the process moves to RT1, which will be described later, and the state in which the symbol combination can be aligned is carried over. On the other hand, in RT2, the symbol combination of BB combination 1 cannot be aligned on the active line, and therefore, this state is not carried over (in Figure 24 (A), "RT2 (BB activation The ``-'' in the "Middle)" column indicates that the symbol combination will not be aligned, and the aligned state will not be carried over). The type 1 BB-B condition device is associated with the symbol combination of BB combination 2, and this symbol combination can be stopped and displayed during non-RT. Furthermore, if the symbol combination of BB combination 2 cannot be aligned on the active line, the process moves to RT1, and the state in which the symbol combination can be aligned is carried over. Further, in RT2, the symbol combination of BB combination 2 cannot be aligned on the active line, and therefore, this state is not carried over.

The winning replay condition device numbers 1 to 12 are respectively assigned to the replay-A to L condition devices shown in FIG. 24(B). These conditional devices are conditional devices that are associated with symbol combinations for replaying, and during non-RT and during RT1, it may be possible to match the symbol combinations for replaying, but during RT2, such Constructed to have no state. In addition, if any of the winning replay device numbers 1 to 12 in Figure 24 (B) is linked to the winning number determined by the winning combination lottery, the "winning combination" corresponding to the conditional device of that number A state is reached in which the symbol combinations shown in the column can be aligned on the active line. For example, if winning number 1 is determined in a lottery, match any one of the symbol combinations 1 to 4 of the replay combinations associated with the winning replay condition device number 1 replay-A condition device. Becomes in a state of being exposed. In addition, if winning number 12 is determined in the lottery, match any one of the symbol combinations of re-gaming combinations 2 to 5 associated with the re-gaming-L condition device of winning re-gaming condition device number 12. Becomes in a state of being exposed. The number 0 shown in FIG. 24(B) indicates that a winning number has been determined that makes it impossible to match any winning or replay symbol combinations, that is, a loss. In this embodiment, the losing state can occur only during non-RT, but it may also occur during RT1 or RT2.

The win-A1 to A12 condition devices shown in FIGS. 24(B), 25, and 26 are given respective winning replay condition device numbers from 13 to 24. These condition devices are condition devices associated with symbol combinations of small winnings. Also, during non-RT and during RT1, there may be a situation where the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning-A1 to A12 condition devices can be arranged, but during RT2, the system is configured so that such a situation does not occur. . The win-B1 to B12 condition devices shown in FIGS. 26 to 28 are given respective winning replay condition device numbers from 25 to 36. These condition devices are condition devices that are associated with symbol combinations of small roles, and during non-RT and RT1, it may be possible to arrange the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning-B1 to B12 condition devices. RT2 is configured so that such a state does not occur. Winning replay condition device numbers 37 to 39 are assigned to the win-C to E condition devices shown in FIG. 29 in correspondence with each other. These conditional devices are conditional devices that are associated with symbol combinations of minor roles, and during non-RT and RT1, it may be possible to arrange the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning-C to E conditional devices. , RT2 is configured so that such a state does not occur.

(Detailed explanation of reel control according to the result of lottery)
Next, the reel control executed by the reel control means 134 when the symbol combinations corresponding to the above-mentioned condition devices can be arranged will be explained.
(a) Reel control related to 1st type BB During non-RT or in a state where the symbol combination corresponding to the 1st type BB-A condition device shown in Fig. 24 (A) can be arranged, or in response to the 1st type BB-A condition device During RT1, when the state in which the symbol combinations can be arranged is carried over, if the corresponding symbols of BB combination 1 "Blue Bar, Blue Bar, Red Seven" can be drawn onto the active line 29 depending on the player's pressing position, the BB combination is carried over. 1 holds true. Similarly, during non-RT when the symbol combination corresponding to the 1st type BB-B condition device can be arranged, or during RT1 when the state where the symbol combination corresponding to the 1st type BB-B condition device has been carried over, If the corresponding symbols of BB combination 2 "black bar, black bar, red seven" can be drawn onto the active line 29 depending on the pressing position by the player, BB combination 2 is established.

(b) Reel control related to re-gaming When the symbol combinations corresponding to the re-gaming-A to D condition devices shown in FIG. Regardless, reel control is performed so that replay combination 4 (middle stage RP) is always achieved. In addition, when the symbol combinations corresponding to the re-gaming E to G condition devices are aligned during non-RT or during RT, reel control is performed so that re-gaming combination 1 or 3 is established. . In addition, if the symbol combinations corresponding to the re-gaming H to J condition devices are aligned during non-RT, re-gaming combination 2 (RP upwards to the right) will always appear regardless of the order or position of the presses. On the other hand, if the reels are aligned during RT1, reel control is performed so that the replay combination 4 (middle RP) is always achieved, regardless of the order or position of the presses. Furthermore, if the symbol combinations corresponding to the replay-K and L condition devices are aligned during non-RT, the replay combination 5 (upper watermelon RP) will always be played regardless of the order or position of the presses. On the other hand, if the reels are aligned during RT1, reel control is performed so that the replay combination 4 (middle RP) is always achieved, regardless of the order or position of the presses.

In addition, if the winning number that will be a loss is determined during RT1, when the winning number that will be a loss is determined, the pressing order may be reversed (the pressing order in which the stop switch 26c is operated first), etc. In the case of a predetermined push order, depending on the push position, a symbol combination of "red seven, red seven, red seven" (also referred to as "red seven matching symbols") is displayed in the display window W (for example, on the active line 29). It may be configured so that This red 7 matching symbol is common to the corresponding symbol of the small winning combination 40 (red 7 matching small winning combination), but the small winning combination 40 is only realized during RT2 (see FIG. 8). Therefore, the red 7-matched symbol that is stopped and displayed during RT1 is a losing symbol.

(c) Reel control related to winnings If the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning-A1 to A12 condition devices shown in FIGS. 24(B), 25, and 26 are aligned during non-RT, the pressing order and A predetermined one-card winning combination is always achieved regardless of the pressing position, and when the combination is made during RT1, reel control is performed such that the winning combination differs depending on the pressing order and the pressing position. For example, the winning-A11 condition device shown in FIG. 26 is a condition device that corresponds to the symbol combinations of small winnings 6, 10, 15, 16, 21, and 34, and it is possible to match these symbol combinations during non-RT. If this happens, reel control is performed such that the small winning combination 6, which is a single winning combination, is always achieved regardless of the pressing order or the pressing position.

On the other hand, if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning-A11 condition device is aligned during RT1, when the pressing order is "middle right left", a small winning combination 6 with 15 cards will be created with a probability of 1/1. However, when the push order is "right middle left", the small winning combination 34 with 15 cards is established with a probability of 1/1, and the other push orders ("left middle right", "left middle right", "center left right") , "middle right left"), reel control is performed such that one of the small winning combinations 10, 15, and 16, each of which is a single winning combination, is realized with a probability of 1/8. Note that "left", "middle", and "right" mean the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c, and the order in which they are arranged indicates the order in which they are operated. For example, "middle right left" indicates the order in which the stop switches are pressed in the order of 26b, 26c, and 26a. In FIGS. 25 to 28, the pressing order is shown in the order of numbers "1", "2", and "3". "123", "132", "213", "231", "312", "321" in the diagram are "left center right", "left center center", "center left right", "center right left", respectively. Corresponds to the pressing order of "middle right left" and "right middle left".

During RT1, the state where the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus condition device can be aligned is carried over, so depending on the push order and push position, BB role 1 or BB role 2 may be established. For example, if the symbol combination corresponding to the prize-winning-A11 condition device can be aligned during RT1 in which the state where the symbol combination corresponding to the 1st type BB-B condition device (i.e. the symbol combination of BB role 2) is carried over, when the push order is "middle right left" or "right middle left", small role 6 and small role 34 are always established, respectively, so BB role 2 will not be established. On the other hand, when the push order is other than "left middle right", "left left middle", "middle left left", "middle right left"), if the corresponding symbol of small role 10, 15, or 16 can be drawn depending on the push position, BB role 2 will not be established, but if these corresponding symbols cannot be drawn, and conversely, if the corresponding symbol of BB role 2, "black bar / black bar / red seven", can be drawn, BB role 2 will be established.

To be more specific, let us take the example of the "left, center, right" push order. First, let us explain the case where the push position on the first left reel is within the range where the symbol "red seven" can be drawn. In this case, reel control is performed on the left reel to draw the symbol "red seven", so at that stage, there remains the possibility of either small win 16 or small win 21 being achieved. Next, if the push position on the second center reel is within the range where the symbol "blue bar" can be drawn, reel control is performed on the center reel to draw the symbol "blue bar", so at that stage, there remains the possibility of small win 16 being achieved, and finally, if the push position on the third right reel is within the range where the symbol "blue bar" can be drawn, reel control is performed on the right reel to draw the symbol "blue bar", so finally, small win 16 (corresponding symbols "red seven, blue bar, blue bar") is achieved. On the other hand, if the push position on the second middle reel is within a range that can pull in the "red seven" symbol, reel control is performed on the middle reel to pull in the "red seven" symbol, and a miss (no winning combination is achieved) is confirmed at that stage (there remains a possibility that the "red seven red seven red seven" symbol combination will ultimately be displayed), and finally, if the push position on the third right reel is within a range that can pull in the "red seven" symbol, reel control is performed on the right reel to pull in the "red seven" symbol, and the "red seven red seven red seven" symbol combination will ultimately be displayed.

Next, a case will be explained in which the first push position on the left reel is within the range where the symbol "black bar" can be pulled in. In this case, since reel control is performed to draw in the symbol "black bar" on the left reel, there remains a possibility that either BB combination 2, small combination 10, or small combination 15 will be realized at that stage. Next, if the push position on the second middle reel is within the range where the symbol "black bar" can be pulled in, reel control is performed to pull in the symbol "black bar" on the middle reel, so at that stage the BB role 2 If there remains a possibility that this will occur, and finally the third right reel press position is within the range where the symbol "Red Seven" can be pulled in, reel control will be performed to pull in the symbol "Red Seven" on the right reel. Therefore, BB combination 2 (corresponding symbols "black bar, black bar, red seven") is finally established. On the other hand, if the push position on the second middle reel is within the range where the symbol "Gold Seven" can be drawn in, reel control is performed to draw the symbol "Gold Seven" on the middle reel, so at that stage the small If there is still a possibility that a winning combination of 10 will be formed and the third press position on the right reel is within the range where the symbol "Gold Seven" can be drawn, the reel control to draw the symbol "Gold Seven" on the right reel is As a result, a small winning combination of 10 (corresponding symbols "black bar, gold seven, gold seven") is finally established.

Whether the symbol combinations of the winning-B1 to B12 condition devices shown in Figures 26 to 28 are aligned during non-RT or during RT1, depending on the pressing order and position. Reel control is performed such that the winning combinations differ. For example, the winning-B7 condition device shown in FIG. 27 is a condition device to which the symbol combinations of small winnings 4, 5, 8, 13, 18, 23, and 30 are associated, and these symbol combinations are When the order is aligned, if the push order is "Medium first", a small winning combination of 15 cards, 30, will be created with a probability of 1/1, and if the push order is "Left first" or "Right first", the probability is 1/1. ”, reel control is performed such that the small winning combination 5, which is a single winning combination, is realized with a probability of 1/1. Note that "first on the left" is the push order in which the stop switch 26a is operated first, "first in the middle" is in the push order in which the stop switch 26b is operated first, and "first right" is in the push order in which the stop switch 26c is operated first. Indicates the pressing order. In Figures 26 to 29, the pressing order of "Left 1st", "Middle 1st", and "Right 1st" is respectively "1・-・-", "-・2・-", "-・-・3" is displayed.

On the other hand, if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning-B7 condition device is aligned during RT1, when the pressing order is "middle left/right", the probability of a small winning combination of 4 or 5, which is a 1-card winning combination, is 1. /1 is established, and when the push order is "right left middle", a small winning combination of 15 cards, 30, is achieved with a probability of 1/1, and other push orders ("left middle right", "left right middle", " In the case of "center right left" or "right center left", reel control is performed such that any of the small winning combinations 8, 13, 18, and 23, which are one winning combination, will be realized with a probability of 1/8. Also, during RT1, where the state in which the symbol combination corresponding to the 1st type BB-A condition device (i.e., the symbol combination of BB combination 1) can be arranged is carried over, the state in which the symbol combination corresponding to the winning-B7 condition device is arranged. In this case, when the pressing order is "middle left/right" and "right left/middle", the small winning combinations 4, 5, and 30 will always be formed, respectively, so the BB winning combination 1 will never be formed. On the other hand, for other pressing orders ("left middle right", "left middle right", "center right left", "right middle left"), depending on the pressed position, one of the small roles 8, 13, 18, and 23 will be supported. If you can draw the symbols, BB role 1 will not be established, but if you cannot draw these corresponding symbols, and conversely, if you can draw the corresponding symbols of BB role 1 "Blue Bar / Blue Bar / Red Seven", then Reel control is performed so that BB winning combination 1 is established.

The symbol combinations of the winning-C to E condition device shown in Figure 29 are designed to always produce a minor prize 36, which is a 15-coin prize, regardless of the order or position of the buttons pressed, whether they are matched during a non-RT or RT1.

The winning-F to Q condition devices shown in FIG. 29 are configured so that the associated symbol combinations are not aligned during non-RT and during RT1, but are selected during RT2. Among these, the winning-F, G, L, M condition device is a watermelon that is always a 15-card combination, regardless of the pressing order or pressing position, if the associated symbol combinations are aligned during RT2. Reel control is performed so that small winnings (small winnings 24 to 37) are realized. Winning - I, J, K, O, P, Q Conditions When the symbol combinations associated with the device are aligned during RT2, depending on the pressing position, the symbol combinations associated with the I, J, K, O, P, Q condition devices will be 1-card winnings (minor winnings 1 to 23, 40). Reel control is performed so that the following equations .about.44) are satisfied. When the symbol combinations associated with the winning-H condition device are aligned during RT2, reel control is performed so that a three-piece combination (minor combinations 38, 39) is established depending on the pressing position. Winning - If the symbol combinations associated with the N condition device are aligned during RT2, if the pressing order is "first on the left" or "first on the middle", depending on the pressing position, one card will be awarded. is established, and when the pressing order is "right first", reel control is performed such that a set of 7 and 1 winning combination (small winning combination 40) is established depending on the pressing position.

(1-3) Each means constituting the main communication control means 150 The control command transmitting means 151 is configured to transmit control commands including various information regarding the game at a predetermined timing. For example, the control commands sent before the start lever 25 is operated include a control command that includes information indicating which gaming mode is set (also referred to as a "gaming mode command"), and which RT state is set. There are two types of control commands: one is a control command (also called an "RT command") that includes information indicating whether the replay is active, and the other is a control command that includes information that indicates the operating state of replay (also called an "operating state command"). Further, as control commands that are transmitted in response to the start lever 25 being operated, for example, a control command that includes instruction number information (also referred to as an "instruction number command"), a production group number (production group A number and production There is a control command (also referred to as "effect group number command") that includes information about the group B number. In addition, there are control commands that include setting value information, control commands that include information on the values of various counters such as a bell counter, control commands that include information that instructs the content of effects to be executed in the sub-control means, and bonus games that will be described later. Control commands and the like containing information to be transmitted may be transmitted before the start lever 25 is operated, triggered by the operation of the start lever 25, or triggered by other triggers.

In this way, when the operation of the start lever 25 is effectively accepted, the control command transmitting means 151 sends an instruction number command and an effect in the slot machine 1 to the sub-control means 200 (more specifically, the sub-main control means 200A), which will be described later. Various control commands (also collectively referred to as "lever operation reception commands") corresponding to the group number command are transmitted. By receiving this lever operation acceptance command, the sub-control means 200 can identify that the operation of the start lever 25 has been effectively accepted (that the start lever 25 has been effectively operated).

Furthermore, upon confirmation of the elapse of the minimum gaming time, the control command transmitting means 151 sends a control command (" (also referred to as "full rotation start command"). Furthermore, upon receiving the first stop operation (operation of the stop switch to stop the reels for the first time), a control command containing information indicating that the first stop operation has been received (``First stop reception command At the same time, when the first reel stop (stopping of the reel corresponding to the first stop operation) is triggered, a control command (also referred to as the "first stop command") containing information on the first reel stop is transmitted. ) to send. Similarly, upon reception of the second stop operation (operation of the stop switch to stop the reels next), a control command containing information indicating that the second stop operation has been received (``Second stop reception At the same time, when the second drum stop (the reel stops corresponding to the second stop operation) is triggered, a control command (also called a "second stop command") containing information about the second drum stop is sent. ). Similarly, upon receiving the third stop operation (operation of the stop switch to finally stop the reels), a control command ("Third stop reception command") containing information indicating that the third stop operation has been received is triggered. At the same time, when the third drum stop (stopping of the reel corresponding to the third stop operation) is triggered, a control command (also referred to as the "third stop command") containing information on the third drum stop is transmitted. ) to send.

In this way, when each stop switch effectively receives a stop operation and switches from the off state to the on state, each time the control command transmission means 151 sends a control command to the sub control means 200 (more specifically, the sub main control means 200A), which will be described later. Then, control commands (first, second, and third stop acceptance commands) including information indicating that the stop operation has been accepted are transmitted. By receiving these stop acceptance commands, the sub-control means 200 can identify that each stop switch has effectively accepted the stop operation (first, second, and third stop operation).

Further, after each stop switch has effectively received a stop operation, when the stop operation is canceled and each stop switch is switched from an on state to an off state, the control command transmitting means 151 cancels the received stop operation. A control command (stop operation release command) including information indicating that the stop operation has been performed is transmitted. Specifically, a control command that includes information indicating that the first stop operation has been canceled (referred to as a "first stop operation cancellation command"), and a control command that includes information that indicates that the second stop operation has been canceled. (referred to as a "second stop operation cancellation command"), and a control command (referred to as a "third stop operation release command") including information indicating that the third stop operation has been canceled. By receiving these stop operation cancellation commands, the sub-control means 200 can identify that the stop operation that has been effectively accepted by each stop switch has been canceled (the player's hand has left the stop switch). can. Note that the first and second stop operation release commands may not be sent, and only the third stop operation release command may be sent.

Furthermore, the control command sending means 151 sends a control command including information on all reels stopping (also called a "all stop command") before determining the stopping pattern, and a control command including information on the number of game medals to be paid out (also called a "payout number command") after determining the stopping pattern. In addition, at a predetermined timing after all reels have stopped, it sends a control command including information on the winning determination result (also called a "role determination result command"). Communication between the main control means 100 and the sub-control means 200 (sub-main control means 200A) is only possible in one direction, from the former to the latter.

The outer end signal transmitting means 152 is configured to transmit an outer end signal to an external device such as a data counter or hall computer when a predetermined gaming state is reached. In this embodiment, when the symbol combinations associated with the win-A1 to A12 condition devices or the win-B1 to B12 condition devices are aligned while staying in the game mode 3 of the advantageous section, 15 When a situation occurs in which game medals are paid out twice (consecutive), an outer end signal is output. Such a situation can occur even when inside the BB or when not inside the BB (non-BB inside). If the configuration is such that the outer end signal is output only when such a situation occurs inside the BB, it will be possible to determine that the BB is inside the BB by outputting the outer end signal. On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the above-mentioned situation occurs, whether inside the BB or not inside the BB, the outer end signal is output. Therefore, even if the outer end signal is output, it is difficult to reliably determine whether the signal is inside the BB or not. However, the possibility that 15 game medals will be paid out when the BB is not inside is considerably lower than when inside the BB. Therefore, when the outer end signal is output, there is a high possibility that it is output inside the BB. Therefore, even if the player checks the number of times the outer end signal has been output using an external device, etc., and determines that number to be the number of times the signal has moved inside the BB, that judgment may deviate greatly from the actual situation. (Reliability can be ensured when the outer end signal is taken as a signal indicating that it is inside the BB).

(2) Functional blocks of the sub-control means 200 The sub-control means 200 includes a sub-main control means (also referred to as "first sub-control means") 200A that mainly manages (instructs) lamp effects, image effects, and audio effects. , and sub-sub control means (also referred to as "second sub-control means") 200B that mainly controls (executes) image effects and audio effects.

(2-1) Each means constituting the sub-main control means 200A The sub-main control means 200A is broadly divided into an effect management means 210 and a sub-main communication control means 230. The performance management means 210 includes a game performance management means 211, a notification performance management means 212, and a lamp performance control means 213, and the sub-main communication control means 230 includes a control command reception means 231, a performance command transmission means 232, and a status command. A receiving means 233 is provided. Note that each of the above-mentioned means in the sub-main control means 200A includes hardware such as a sub-main CPU 71, ROM 72, RAM 73, electronic circuits, etc. arranged on the sub-main control board 70A shown in FIG. 2, and control stored in the ROM 72. It is a functional representation of something configured by software such as a program.

(Each means constituting the production management means 210)
The game effect management means 211 mainly controls the execution timing of the image and sound effects (also referred to as "game effects") executed by the sub-sub control means 200B, mainly for the purpose of increasing the interest and gameplay of the game. It is configured to manage based on control commands from the means 100. Examples of game performances include continuous performances, single-shot performances, and assist performances.

A continuous performance is a performance that continues over a plurality of game periods, and mainly uses the image display device 11 to display images that form a continuous story over a plurality of game periods, Examples include displaying an effect image or the like that symbolizes staying in a predetermined game mode (for example, game mode 5). In addition, when performing a continuous performance or a single performance described below, it is possible to perform a performance using the performance lamps 12, 13a, 13b, 14a, 14b or decorative lamps 32a, 32b, or use the speakers 15a, 15b, 44a, 44b. You may also perform a combination of performances.

A one-off effect is an effect that is executed one-off when a specific situation arises during the progress of the game. For example, an example is an effect in which the image display device 11 displays an image that suggests the expected winning probability of the game role as each reel spins. Another example of a one-off effect is an effect in which, when the number of AT games (number of bells) is added by the main control means 100, the value of the added number of AT games (for example, characters such as "+10") is displayed on the display screen 11a of the image display device 11.

The assist performance is a performance to support the player, and in this embodiment, the push navigation performance is mainly performed in accordance with the information on the navigation number transmitted by the navigation number command from the main control means 100. This push navigation effect (sub-side push navigation) uses the image display device 11 as a sub-side push order display to show the player the push order (correct answer push order) according to the navigation number on the display screen 11a. This is a one-shot performance displayed on the screen. In this embodiment, the RP navigation performance (sub-side RP navigation) corresponding to the above-mentioned RP navigation, the winning navigation performance (sub-side winning navigation) corresponding to the winning navigation, and the eye-pressing navigation performance (corresponding to the eye-pressing navigation) are provided. The sub-side push navigation) is now executed.

A specific form of the push navigation performance (RP navigation performance, winning navigation performance) that notifies the push order is a mode that displays numbers indicating the corresponding push order (for example, in the case of the push order of "first on the left", "1" is displayed at the bottom left of the display screen 11a, and if the push order is "middle left/right", numbers indicating the push order are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 11a from the left as "2", "1", and "3". An example of this is a mode in which notifications are made by arranging the information in the following order. When displaying the order from the first press to the third press, when the player operates the first stop switch according to the displayed first press order, the first press order disappears, and the displayed second press order disappears. When the player operates the second stop switch according to the pressing order, the display for the second pressing order disappears, and when the player operates the third stop switch according to the displayed third pressing order, the display for the third pressing order disappears. The display may also be turned off.

Further, if the player operates the stop switch in a different order from the displayed push order, the push navigation performance may be immediately ended. Furthermore, when displaying the pressing order, the sounds "Naka", "Hidari", and "Migi" are output from the speakers 15a, 15b, etc. in association with the next operation to be performed. It's okay. Furthermore, the effect lamp 13a may be made to correspond to the "left", the effect lamp 12 to the "middle", and the effect lamp 13b to the "right", and may be emitted or blinked in association with the next operation to be performed. Further, a display device for performing sub-side push navigation may be provided. For example, if a display consisting of three 7-segment lamps arranged horizontally is provided below the display window W, and the pressing order is "right middle left," each of the 7-segment lamps on the left, center, and right side will be pressed. Examples include displaying the numbers ``3'', ``2'', and ``1'', respectively.

The notification effect management means 212 is configured to manage the execution timing of image and audio effects (hereinafter referred to as "notification effects") executed by the sub-sub control means 200B based on control commands from the main control means 100, mainly for the purpose of notifying the player of information related to the game. Examples of notification effects include an error notification effect that notifies the player of the occurrence of an error with text information such as "Error Occurred" and an effect that notifies the player of the preparation of an image when the power is restored after a power outage with text information such as "Image Preparing". Another example of a notification effect is an effect that displays an image (also referred to as "attention calling image") containing text information to call the player's attention in order to prevent the player from becoming overly absorbed in the game (addiction).

The lamp effect control means 213 is configured to control various lighting effects using the effect lamps 12, 13a, 13b, 14a, 14b, decorative lamps 32a, 32b, and back lamps 38a to 38d. It is also configured to perform suggestive effects, which will be described later.

(Each means constituting the sub-main communication control means 230)
The control command receiving means 231 is configured to receive a control command from the main control means 100 and store it in a predetermined storage area such as the RAM 73 (for example, a command buffer for the received control command).

The performance command transmission means 232 is configured to transmit a performance command including various information related to the performance (e.g., a performance command including image information) to the sub-sub control means 200B based on a control command from the main control means 100.

The status command receiving means 233 receives a status command (for example, a status command including information that a reception error of a production command has occurred) from the sub-sub control means 200B, and stores it in a predetermined storage area such as the RAM 73 (for example, the received command buffer for status commands).

(2-2) Each means constituting the sub-sub control means 200B In contrast to the sub-main control means 200A configured as described above, the sub-sub control means 200B can be roughly divided into effect execution control means 250 and sub-sub communication control means 270. It is equipped with The performance execution control means 250 includes a game performance execution control means 251 and a notification performance execution control means 252, and the sub-sub communication control means 270 includes a performance command reception means 271 and a status command transmission means 272. Note that each of the above-mentioned means in the sub-sub control means 200B includes hardware such as a sub-sub CPU 75, ROM 76, RAM 77, and electronic circuits arranged on the sub-sub control board 70B shown in FIG. 2, and software such as a control program stored in the ROM 76. This is a functional representation of what is made up of clothing.

(Each means constituting the production execution control means 250)
The game effect execution control means 251 is configured to control the image display device 11, the speakers 15a, 15b, etc. based on the effect command from the sub-main control means 200A, and execute the above-mentioned game effect.

The notification performance execution control means 252 is configured to control the image display device 11, speakers 15a, 15b, etc. based on performance commands from the sub-main control means 200A, and execute the above-mentioned notification performance.

(Each means constituting the sub-sub communication control means 270)
The effect command receiving means 271 is configured to receive the effect command from the sub-main control means 200A and store it in a predetermined storage area such as the RAM 77 (for example, a command buffer for the received effect command).

The status command sending means 272 is configured to send the above-mentioned status command to the sub-main control means 200A.

The above-mentioned transmission of control commands from the control command transmission means 151, transmission of production commands from the production command transmission means 232, and transmission of status commands from the status command transmission means 272 are all performed by a serial communication method (parallel communication method). (This may be done using a communication method.) Each of the transmitting means 151, 232, and 272 has a similar configuration, including a command buffer (also referred to as "CB") as a storage area for temporarily storing commands to be transmitted, and a command buffer for writing and reading commands to be transmitted. The device is configured to include a command processing unit that performs processing such as the following, and a command transmission unit that transmits commands through serial communication.

The CB has multiple memory areas, each distinguished by an address, and is configured to be able to store one byte of command data in each memory area. The command processing unit is configured to generate command data to be sent and write it to the address area indicated by the write pointer of the CB, and also to read previously written command data from the address area indicated by the read pointer of the CB and write it to the TDR (transmit data register) of the command sending unit. The command sending unit is configured to transfer the command data written to the TDR to the TSR (transmit shift register), where it is converted to serial data and sent.

Note that when using the parallel communication method, the previously written command data is read from the address area indicated by the read pointer of the CB, and the command data is sent to a predetermined output port (output port for transmitting to the sub-control means). is configured to send by writing to . One command in this embodiment usually has a 2-byte structure (the checksum has a 1-byte structure). Further, the communication method is an asynchronous method, and has one stop bit and one parity bit (even parity) (the communication method and command configuration can be changed as appropriate).

≪Main control processing≫
Hereinafter, among the control processes performed by the main control means 100 of the slot machine 1, particularly the setting change process, the game progress control process, and the timer interrupt process will be explained with additional reference to FIGS. 30 to 58. A brief explanation of variables such as counters and flags used in the following explanation is given in the variable list shown in FIG.

<Settings change process>
First, the basic flow of the setting change device process will be described with reference to Fig. 30 (A). The setting change device process is executed when the setting is changed, and stores "0" in all storage areas (addresses in RAM 63 that store information about advantageous zones) that affect the performance of the instruction function (step K1).

<Game progress control processing>
Next, the basic flow of the game progress control process will be explained with reference to FIGS. 30(B) to 57. The game progress control process is a process that is repeatedly executed during the game, and as shown in FIG. 30(B), first, a standby process at the start of the game is performed (step S1). In this game start standby process, as shown in FIG. 30(C), it is determined whether the full stop wait number is 0 (step S11). Here, if the all-stop wait number is not 0, wait for the waiting time corresponding to the all-stop wait number (step S12), and proceed to step S13; if the all-stop wait number is 0, The process directly advances to step S13. Then, in step S13, 0 is stored in the all-stop wait number, the game start standby process is ended, and the process returns.

After the game start standby process ends, the process advances to step S2 in FIG. 30(B). Here, the process waits in that state until the operation of the start lever 25 is accepted, and when the operation is accepted, internal lottery start processing is performed (step S3). In this internal lottery start process, as shown in FIG. 31(A), an internal lottery is performed (step S21). In this internal lottery, a bonus condition device number and a winning replay condition device number are determined. After executing the internal lottery, proceed to group number set processing.

In the group number setting process, as shown in FIG. 31(B), a value corresponding to the bonus condition device number (see FIG. 21(A)) is stored in the effect group A number (step S31), and the effect group B number is A value corresponding to the winning replay condition device number (see FIG. 21(B)) is stored in (step S32). Next, values corresponding to the effect group A number and effect group B number (see FIG. 22, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the condition device group A number (step S33), and the effect group A number and effect are stored in the condition device group D number. A value corresponding to the group B number is stored (step S34), and a value corresponding to the performance group A number and the performance group B number is stored in the condition device group G number (step S35).

Similarly, values corresponding to the performance group A number and performance group B number are stored in the condition device group B number (step S36), and values corresponding to the performance group A number and performance group B number are stored in the condition device group C number. A value corresponding to the performance group A number and the performance group B number is stored in the condition device group E number (step S38). Furthermore, values corresponding to the performance group A number and performance group B number are stored in the condition device group I number (step S39), and values corresponding to the performance group A number and performance group B number are stored in the condition device group F number. (step S40), and stores a value corresponding to the performance group A number and the performance group B number in the condition device group H number (step S41). Then, a value corresponding to the effect group A number and effect group B number is stored in the condition device group J number (step S42), and the process proceeds to the section type number management lever process.

In the section type number management lever process, as shown in FIG. 32, first, it is determined whether the section type number is 0 (normal section) (step S51). Here, if the section type number is 0, the process advances to step S52 and it is determined whether the BB is not activated. Here, if the BB is not activated, it is determined whether or not the BB is inside (step S53). If the BB is not inside, the process directly proceeds to step S55, and if the BB is inside, the condition device group It is determined whether the A number is 1 (step S54), and if the conditional device group A number is 1, the process advances to step S51. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S52 that the BB is in operation, or if the conditional device group A number is not 1 in the determination in step S54, the process does not proceed to step S51 and proceeds to a standby effect process to be described later.

In step S51, advantageous section transition processing is performed. In this advantageous section transition process, as shown in FIG. 34(A), it is determined whether the conditional device group A number is 0 (step S71), and if it is 0, the advantageous section transition process is immediately terminated. and return. On the other hand, if the condition device group A number is not 0, an advantageous section lottery is performed (step S72), and the lottery result is stored in the section type number (step S73). Next, it is determined whether or not the section type number is 0 (step S74), and if it is 0, the advantageous section transition process is directly terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the section type number is not 0, chance mode 1 lottery is performed (step S75), and the lottery result is stored in the chance mode number (step S76). Furthermore, a seven table 1 lottery is performed (step S77), and the lottery result is stored in the seven table number (step S78).

Next, it is determined whether the chance mode number is 4 (step S79). Here, if the chance mode number is not 4, the process advances to step S83 and a chance game number lottery process is performed. In this chance game number lottery process, as shown in FIG. 34(B), a chance game number lottery is performed (step S91), the lottery result is stored in the chance game number counter (step S92), and the process returns. Upon return from the chance game number lottery process, the process proceeds to step S84 in FIG. 34(A), where a chance cycle lottery is performed. Then, the lottery result is stored in the chance cycle counter, the advantageous section transition process is completed, and the process returns.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S79 that the chance mode number is 4, the process proceeds to step S80, and AT winning processing is performed. In this AT winning process, as shown in FIG. 35, first, 1 is stored in the AT winning flag (step S101). Next, an AT mode lottery is performed and the lottery result is stored in the AT mode number (step S102), and a 71 lottery is performed and the lottery result is stored in the 7 number (step S103). Next, seven number correction processing is performed (step S104).

In this seven number correction process, as shown in FIG. 36(A), first, correction counter processing is performed (step S121). In this correction counter processing, as shown in FIG. 36(B), correction counter data (a counter that adds up the value of the gold seven counter and the value of the seven counter) is set to 0 (step S131), and the seven number is 2. It is determined whether there is one (step S132). Here, if the seven number is 2, the value of the gold seven counter is set in the correction counter data (step S133), 1 is added to the correction counter data (step S134), and the process proceeds to step S135. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S132 that the number seven is not 2, the process directly proceeds to step S135. In this step S135, the value of the seven counter is added to the correction counter data, and the process proceeds to step S136. In step S136, the value calculated based on each value of the cumulative counter, the correction counter data, and the number of bells counter is stored in the correction counter data, and the process returns from the correction counter process.

Upon return from the correction counter process, the process advances to step S122 in FIG. 36(A), and it is determined whether the value of the correction counter is 1901 or more. Here, if the value of the correction counter is 1901 or more, store 1 in the seven number (step S123), then end the seven number correction process and return; if the value of the correction counter is not 1901 or more, Return as is. In the arrival flag processing to be described later, the processing procedure is branched depending on whether the value of the correction counter is 2101 or more. On the other hand, in this process, it is determined whether or not to store 1 in the seven number depending on whether the value of the correction counter is 1901 or more. ) are different. This is because by storing 1 in the 7 number, it is possible to play AT games at least once next time, so the number of game medals that can be acquired in the future will increase accordingly, and the discriminant value will be used in the attainment flag processing. This is set to be less than 2101. In this way, by changing the discrimination value according to the situation, the number of game medals that can be acquired in the future can be managed without excessively counting more than necessary.

Upon return from the seven number correction process, the process proceeds to step S105 in FIG. 35, where it is determined whether the seven number is 1 or not. Here, if the seven number is not 1, 3 is stored in the gold seven counter (step S106), and the process proceeds to step S107. If the seven number is 1, the process directly proceeds to step S107. In this step S107, arrival flag processing is performed.

In this arrival flag processing, as shown in FIG. 36(C), first, correction counter processing is performed (step S141). After the correction counter processing is completed, it is determined whether the correction counter is 2101 or more (step S142), and if it is 2101 or more, 1 is stored in the arrival flag (step S143), and the arrival flag processing is ended. and return. On the other hand, if the correction counter is not 2101 or more, it is determined whether the main game state number is 3 or not (step S144). If it is 3, the process returns as is. If it is not 3, 0 is saved in the arrival flag. From (step S145), the process returns.

When returning from the arrival flag processing, proceed to step S108 in FIG. 35 and determine whether or not the condition device group A number is 1. If the condition device group A number is 1, the AT winning processing ends and returns. On the other hand, if the condition device group A number is not 1, an EX mode 1 drawing is performed (step S109), the drawing result is saved in the EX mode number (step S110), and then the AT winning processing ends and returns.

Upon return from the AT winning process, the process advances to step S81 in FIG. 34(A), and it is determined whether the conditional device group A number is 1 or not. Here, if the conditional device group A number is not 1, the process immediately ends the transition to an advantageous section and returns, and if the conditional device group A number is 1, the AT entry lever process is performed (step S82).

In this AT entry lever process, as shown in FIG. 37, first, a loop CU rank set process is performed (step S151). In the loop CU rank set process, as shown in FIG. 38(A), the seven set counter is incremented by 1 (step S171), and the value corresponding to the seven table number and the seven set counter is stored in the loop number (step S172). , stores the seven table number and the value corresponding to the seven set counter in the CU rank number (step S173), and returns.

Upon return from the loop CU rank set process, the process advances to step S152 in FIG. 37, and it is determined whether the seven number is 1 or not. Here, if the seven number is 1, the process advances to step S154 and a seven loop lottery process is performed. In the seven loop lottery process, as shown in FIG. 38(B), a seven loop lottery is performed (step S181), the lottery result is stored in the seven counter (step S182), and the process returns. Upon return from the seven loop lottery process, the process proceeds to step S155 in FIG. 37, where the arrival flag process is executed and the process proceeds to step S156. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S153 that the value of the seven counter is not 0, the process directly proceeds to step S156. Further, in the determination in step S152, if the seven number is not 1, the value of the gold seven counter is subtracted by 1 (step S158), and the gold seven loop lottery correction process is performed (step S159).

In this gold seven loop lottery correction process, as shown in FIG. 38(C), it is determined whether the arrival flag is 0 or not, and if it is not 0, the gold seven loop lottery correction process is terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the arrival flag is 0, the correction counter process is performed (step S192), and after the correction counter process is terminated, it is determined whether the value of the correction counter is smaller than 1900 (step S193). Here, if the value of the correction counter is 1900 or more, the gold seven loop lottery correction process is terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the value of the correction counter is smaller than 1900, the gold seven loop lottery is performed (step S194), and it is determined whether the result is 0 or not (step S195). Here, if the result of the gold seven loop lottery is 0, the gold seven loop lottery correction process is terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the result of the gold seven loop lottery is not 0, 3 is stored in the gold seven counter (step S196), the arrival flag process is performed (step S197), and the process returns.

Upon return from the gold seven loop lottery correction process, the process proceeds to step S156 in FIG. 37, where an additional mode lottery is performed and the result is stored in the additional mode number (step S157). Next, a correction counter process is performed (step S160), and after the completion of the process, one drawing of the number of bells is performed (step S161), and the result is stored in the number of bells counter (step S162). Next, a bell number counter correction process is performed (step S163).

In this bell number counter correction process, as shown in FIG. The value of the number of bells allowed until the value is reached is stored (step S201). Next, it is determined whether or not the arrival flag is 0 (step S202), and if it is not 0, the process directly proceeds to step S203, and if it is 0, the value of the correction counter is smaller than the value of the number of bells counter. It is determined whether or not (step S206), and if it is small, the process advances to step S203. In step S203, 7 is saved in the bell number counter, and after saving, the bell number counter correction process is ended and the process returns. Upon return from the bell number counter correction process, the process proceeds to step S164 in FIG. 37, where the arrival flag process is executed, the AT entry lever process is completed, and the process returns. Upon return from the AT entry lever processing, the advantageous section transition processing of FIG. 34(A) is also completed and the process returns, proceeding to step S56 of FIG. 32, where the lever wait processing is executed.

In this lever wait process, as shown in FIG. 40, first, it is determined whether the condition device group A number is 1 (step S211). Here, if the conditional device group A number is 1, it is determined whether the AT winning flag is 0 or not (step S212), and if the AT winning flag is 0, 2 is stored in the lever weight number. (Step S213), and if it is not 0, 1 is stored in the lever weight number (Step S214). After saving, the lever wait process is completed and the process returns. On the other hand, if the condition device group A number is not 1 in the determination at step S211, the process advances to step S215, and it is determined whether the main game state number is smaller than 2 or not. Here, if the main gaming state number is smaller than 2, the process directly advances to step S217, and if the main gaming state number is 2 or more, it is determined whether the main gaming state number is 4 (step S230), If it is 4, the process advances to step S217. On the other hand, if the main game state number is not 4, the lever wait process is ended and the process returns.

In step S217, it is determined whether the AT winning flag is 0 or not, and if it is 0, the lever wait process is immediately terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the AT winning flag is not 0, a production lever weight lottery is performed (step S218). Then, it is determined whether or not the result is 0 (step S219), and if it is 0, the lever wait process is immediately terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the result of the production lever weight lottery is not 0, the process advances to step S213 and stores 2 as the lever weight number. After storing, the lever weight process is finished and the process returns. Upon return from the lever wait process, the process returns to the section type number management lever process in FIG. 32, and proceeds to the standby effect process to be described later.

On the other hand, if the section type number is not 0 in the determination in step S51 of FIG. 32, 0 is stored in the lever full stop flag (step S57), and it is determined whether the condition device group A number is 1 ( Step S58). Here, if the condition device group A number is 1, 1 is stored in the 1st type BB winning flag (step S59), and if it is not 1, 0 is stored in the 1st type BB winning flag (step S60). ). After saving, it is determined whether the winning replay condition device number is one of 13 to 36 (step S61). Here, if the winning replay condition device number is one of 13 to 36, the instruction number stores a value corresponding to the winning replay condition device number (step S62), and then goes to step S63 in FIG. If the winning replay condition device number is not one of 13 to 36, the process directly advances to step S63.

In step S63, the main game state number is determined, and according to the main game state number, if the main game state number is 1, the main game state number 1 lever process is performed (step S64), and if the main game state number is 2, the main game state number is 2. If so, main game state number 2 and 5 lever processing is performed (step S65). Also, if the main game state number is 3, the main game state number 3 lever process is performed (step S66), and if the main game state number is 4, the main game state number 4 lever process is performed (step S67), and the main game state number 3 lever process is performed (step S67). If the state number is 5, main game state number 2, 5 lever processing is performed (step S68). After each lever process is executed, the process advances to step S56 in FIG. 32. On the other hand, if the main game state number is any other number, no particular processing is performed and the process directly advances to step S56.

In the main game state number 1 lever process, as shown in FIG. 41(A), a chance mode 2 lottery is performed (step S241), and then a chance mode number determination process is performed (step S2421). In this chance mode number determination process, as shown in FIG. 41(B), it is determined whether the lottery result of chance mode 2 lottery or chance mode 3 lottery is 0 (step S251). Here, if the lottery result is 0, the process immediately ends the chance mode number determination process and returns; if the lottery result is not 0, the lottery result is saved in the chance mode number (step S252), and then the process returns. do.

When the chance mode number determination process is returned, the process proceeds to step S243 in FIG. 41 (A) to determine whether the chance mode number is 4 or not. If the chance mode number is not 4, the process proceeds to step S247 to determine whether the 1st type BB winning flag is 0 or not. If it is 0, the process ends the main game state number 1 lever process and returns. If it is not 0, the chance game number lottery process is performed, and after that, the main game state number 1 lever process is terminated and returns. On the other hand, if the chance mode number is 4 in the determination of step S242, the process proceeds to step S244 to perform AT winning process. After that, the process determines whether the 1st type BB winning flag is 0 or not (step S245). If it is 0, the process ends the main game state number 1 lever process and returns. If it is not 0, the AT entry lever process is performed, and then returns.

In the main game state number 2 and 5 lever processing, as shown in FIG. 41(C), first, the lever processing is performed after AT is won (step S261). In this AT post-winning lever process, as shown in FIG. 42, first, it is determined whether or not the arrival flag is 0 (step S271). Here, if the arrival flag is not 0, the lever process is finished after AT is won and the process returns. If the arrival flag is 0, the process advances to step S272 and it is determined whether the EX mode number is 1 or not. do. Here, if the EX mode number is 1, an EX mode 2 lottery is performed (step S273), and it is determined whether the lottery result is 2 (step S274). Here, if the lottery result is 2, 2 is stored in the EX mode number (step S275), and the process proceeds to step S276. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S272 that the EX mode number is not 1, the process directly proceeds to step S276, and if the result of the EX mode 2 lottery is not 2 in the determination in step S274, the process directly proceeds to step S276. Proceed to.

In step S276, it is determined whether the seven table number is smaller than 13. Here, if the seven table number is smaller than 13, it is determined whether the drawn flag is 0 (step S277), and if it is 0, it is further determined whether the conditional device group G number is 0 or not. is determined (step S278), and if the condition device group G number is not 0, the process advances to step S279. In step S279, a Seven Table 2 lottery is performed, and it is determined whether or not the lottery result is 0 (step S280). Here, if the result of the Seven Table 2 lottery is 0, the process directly advances to step S282, and if the result of the Seven Table 2 lottery is not 0, the lottery result is saved in the Seven Table number (step S281). The process advances to step S282. In step S282, 1 is stored in the lottery completed flag, and the process proceeds to step S283. On the other hand, if the seven table number is 13 or more in the determination in step S276, if the drawn flag is not 0 in the determination in step S277, or if the conditional device group G number is 0 in the determination in step S278, From there, the process proceeds to step S283.

In step S283, it is determined whether the seven number is 1 or not. Here, if the Seven number is 1, a Seven 2 lottery is performed (step S284), and it is determined whether the lottery result is 2 (step S285). Here, if the result of the 72 lottery is 2, the lottery result is stored in the 7 number (step S286), and a 7 number correction process is performed (step S287). After executing the seven number correction process, it is determined whether the seven number is 2 (step S288), and if it is 2, 3 is stored in the gold seven counter (step S289), and the process proceeds to step S290. On the other hand, if the Seven number is not 1 in the determination at step S283, if the result of the Seven 2 lottery is not 2 in the determination in step S285, or if the seven number is not 2 in the determination in step S289, then The process advances to step S291. In step S291, a seven stock 1 drawing is performed, and the drawing result is added to the seven counter before proceeding to step S290. In this step S290, the arrival flag process is performed, and then the AT winning lever process is ended and the process returns.

Upon return from the lever process after AT winning, the process proceeds to step S262 in FIG. 41(C), and it is determined whether the first type BB winning flag is 0 or not. Here, if the 1st type BB winning flag is 0, the main game state number 2 and 5 lever processing is finished and the process returns; if it is not 0, the AT entry lever processing is performed, and then the game state number Finish the 2nd and 5th lever processing and return.

In the main game state number 3 lever process, as shown in FIG. 43(A), first, it is determined whether or not the instruction number is 0 (step S301). Here, if the instruction number is not 0, the value of the bell number counter is subtracted by 1 (step S302), and then the process proceeds to step S303. If the instruction number is 0, the process directly proceeds to step S303. In step S303, it is determined whether the arrival flag is 0 or not. Here, if the reaching flag is not 0, the main game state number 3 lever processing is immediately finished and the process returns. If the reaching flag is 0, a seven stock 2 drawing is performed (step S304), and the drawing result is It is added to the seven counter (step S306). Next, a reach flag process is performed (step S306), and it is determined whether the reach flag is 0 (step S307). Here, if the arrival flag is not 0, the main game state number 3 lever processing is finished and the process returns. If the arrival flag is 0, check whether the value of the gold seven counter is 1 or 2. Determination is made (step S308). Here, if the value of the gold seven counter is not 1 or 2, the main game state number 3 lever processing is immediately finished and the process returns, and if the value of the gold seven counter is 1 or 2, the gold seven loop rewriting lottery is performed. Proceed to correction processing.

In the money seven loop rewriting lottery correction process, as shown in FIG. 43(B), first, correction counter processing is performed (step S311), and then it is determined whether the value of the correction counter is smaller than 1900 (step S312). ). Here, if the value of the correction counter is 1900 or more, the gold seven loop rewriting lottery correction process is immediately terminated and the process returns; if the value of the correction counter is less than 1900, the gold seven loop rewriting lottery is performed (step S313 ), it is determined whether the lottery result is 0 (step S314). Here, if the result of the gold seven loop rewriting lottery is 0, the process immediately ends the gold seven loop rewriting lottery correction process and returns; if it is not 0, 3 is stored in the gold seven counter (step S316). Then, the arrival flag process is performed (step S316), and then the money seven loop rewrite lottery correction process is ended and the process returns. Upon return from the gold seven loop rewrite lottery correction process, the main game state number 3 lever process in FIG. 43(A) is also completed and the process returns.

In the main game state number 4 lever process, as shown in FIG. 44(A), a pullback 1 drawing is performed, and it is determined whether or not the drawing result is 0 (step S321). Here, if the result of the pullback 1 drawing is not 0, an AT winning process is performed (step S323), and then it is determined whether the 1st type BB winning flag is 0 or not (step S324). Here, if the 1st type BB winning flag is 0, the main game state number 4 lever processing is immediately finished and the process returns; if the 1st type BB winning flag is not 0, the AT entry lever processing is performed. After that (step S325), the main game state number 4 lever process is ended and the process returns. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S322 that the result of the pullback 1 drawing is 0, the process proceeds to step S326, and it is determined whether the 1st type BB winning flag is 0 or not. Here, if the 1st type BB winning flag is 0, the main game state number 4 lever process is immediately finished and the process returns, and if the 1st type BB winning flag is not 0, the AT cycle preferential game number lottery process is executed. Proceed to. In this AT cycle preferential game number lottery process, as shown in FIG. 44(B), the number of AT cycle preferential games is drawn (step S331), and the lottery result is stored in the AT cycle preferential game number counter (step S332). , the AT cycle preferential game number lottery process ends and returns. Upon return from this AT cycle preferential game number lottery process, the main game state number 4 lever process in FIG. 44(A) is also completed and the process returns.

Next, the standby effect process performed after the section type number management lever process in FIG. 32 will be explained. In this standby effect processing, as shown in FIG. 45, first, it is determined whether or not the section type number is 0 (step S341). Here, if the section type number is not 0, it is determined whether the main game state number is 3 (step S342), and if the main game state number is 3, the value of the seven set counter is further set to 1. It is determined whether or not (step S344). Here, if the value of the seven set counter is 1, it is determined whether the seven table number is smaller than 15 (step S344), and if it is smaller than 15, the process advances to step S345, and if it is 15 or more, step S347 is performed. Proceed to. In step S347, it is determined whether the winning replay condition device number is one of 1 to 12 or 37 to 39. If it is determined that it is not one of them, the process advances to step S345, and one of them is determined. If it is determined that this is the case, the standby effect processing is ended and the process returns. On the other hand, if the section type number is 0 as determined in step S341, or if the main game state number is not 3 as determined in step S342, the process directly advances to step S345.

In step S345, it is determined whether the lever weight number is 0. If the lever weight number is 0, the process proceeds to step S345. If the lever weight number is not 0, the process waits for a time period corresponding to the lever weight number, saves 0 as the lever weight number (step S349), and then proceeds to step S346. In step S346, it is determined whether the standby effect number is 0. If the standby effect number is 0, the process ends the standby effect process and returns. On the other hand, if the standby effect number is not 0, the process executes a standby effect (step S349), then ends the standby effect process and returns.

Upon returning from the end of the standby performance process, the section type number management lever process in FIG. 32 is also terminated, and thereby the internal lottery start process in FIG. 31(A) is also terminated, and the process proceeds to step S4 in FIG. 30(B). In this step S4, it is continuously determined whether or not all the spinning drums have stopped, and if all the spinning drums have stopped, game medals are paid out (only when a winning combination is achieved) (step S5), Further, in accordance with the number of game medals paid out, count management is performed such as updating the number displayed on a display (not shown) that displays the number of game medals acquired during AT (step S6). Thereafter, a section type number management game end process is performed (step S8).

In this section type number management game end process, as shown in FIG. 46, first, it is determined whether or not the section type number is 0 (step S361). Here, if the section type number is 0, the section type number management game end process is directly ended and the process returns. On the other hand, if the section type number is not 0, 1 is stored in the lever full stop flag (step S362), and cumulative counter processing is performed (step S363). In the cumulative counter process, as shown in FIG. 47, it is determined whether or not a replay activation symbol (corresponding symbol of a replay combination) is displayed (step S381), and if it is displayed, the cumulative counter process is performed as is. Finish and return. On the other hand, if the replay activation symbol is not displayed, the number of game medals paid out (including the case of 0) is added to the value of the cumulative counter (step S382), and the value of the cumulative counter is subtracted by 3. (Step S383), the cumulative counter processing is ended and the process returns.

After returning from the cumulative counter process, the process proceeds to step S364 in FIG. 46 to determine the main game state number. Then, depending on the main game state number, if the main game state number is 0, main game state number 0 full stop process is performed (step S365), if the main game state number is 1, main game state number 1 full stop process is performed (step S366), and if the main game state number is 2, main game state number 2, 5 full stop process is performed (step S367). Also, if the main game state number is 3, main game state number 3 full stop process is performed (step S368), if the main game state number is 4, main game state number 4 full stop process is performed (step S369), and if the main game state number is 5, main game state number 2, 5 full stop process is performed (step S370). Furthermore, if the main game state number is 6, main game state number 6 full stop process is performed (step S371), and if the main game state number is 7, main game state number 7 full stop process is performed (step S372).

In the main game state number 0 full stop process in step S365 of FIG. 46, as shown in FIG. 48, first, it is determined whether or not the AT winning flag is 0 (step S391). Here, if the AT winning flag is 0, it is determined whether the conditional device group A number is 1 (step S392), and if the conditional device group A number is 1, BB is not established. It is determined whether or not (step S392). If the BB is not established, 6 is saved as the main gaming state number (step S394), the main gaming state number 0 complete stop processing is completed, and the process returns. On the other hand, if the condition device group A number is not 1 in the determination in step S392, and if BB is established in the determination in step S393, 0 is stored in the main game state number (step S396), and the main game state number is 0. Completes the total stop processing and returns. Further, if the AT winning flag is not 0 in the determination in step S391, the process advances to step S396, where it is determined whether the conditional device group A number is 1 or not. Here, if the conditional device group A number is not 1, 2 is saved as the main gaming state number (step S398), the main gaming state number 0 complete stop processing is completed, and the process returns. On the other hand, if the conditional device group A number is 1, the process advances to step S397, and a game end process is performed at the time of AT entry.

In this AT entry game end process, as shown in FIG. 49, 0 is saved in the chance mode number (step S401), 0 is saved in the chance game number counter (step S402), and 0 is saved in the chance cycle counter. (Step S403). Thereafter, 0 is stored in the EX mode number (step S404), 0 is stored in the AT cycle counter (step S405), and 0 is stored in the lottery completion flag (step S406). Furthermore, 3 is saved as the main game state number (step S407), and the advantageous section lamp is turned on (step S408).

Next, as shown in FIG. 50, it is determined whether three symbols "Red Seven" are stopped and displayed on the upper line in the display window W (step S409), and if they are stopped, step The process advances to step S410, and if the stopped display is not performed, the process advances to step S412. In step S412, it is determined whether or not three symbols "red seven" are displayed in a line on the active line 29 in the display window W, and if they are displayed in a stopped manner, the process proceeds to step S410, and the symbols are not displayed in a stopped manner. If so, the process advances to step S413. In step S413, it is determined whether or not the three symbols "Red Seven" are stopped and displayed on the lower line in the display window W. If they are stopped, the process proceeds to step S410, and if they are not stopped, the process proceeds to step S410. The process advances to step S414. In step S414, it is determined whether or not the three symbols "Red Seven" are lined up and stop-displayed on a line descending to the right in the display window W. If they are stop-displayed, the process advances to step S410, and the symbols are not stopped-displayed. If so, the process advances to step S415. In step S415, it is determined whether or not the three symbols "Red Seven" are lined up and stopped and displayed on the upward-rightward line in the display window W. If they are stopped and displayed, the process proceeds to step S410, and the symbols are not stopped and displayed. If so, the process advances to step S416.

If the process proceeds to step S410 (if three symbols of "Red Seven" are stopped and displayed in a line in the display window W), 1 is saved in the all-stop wait number, and 0 is saved in the standby performance number. (step S411), and the process advances to step S418 in FIG. On the other hand, if the process proceeds to step S416 (if the three symbols "Red Seven" are not stopped and displayed in a row in the display window W), 0 is stored in the all-stop wait number, and the standby performance number is 1 is stored in (step S417), and the process proceeds to step S418 in FIG. In this step S418, it is determined whether the seven number is 2 or not. Here, if the seven number is not 2, the process ends the game end process when AT enters and returns. If the seven number is 2, 2 is added to the standby performance number (step S419), and then AT Finish the game end processing at the time of entry and return. Upon return from the AT entry game end process, the main game state number 0 full stop process in FIG. 48 is also completed and the process returns.

In the main game state number 1 complete stop process in step S366 of FIG. 46, as shown in FIG. It is determined whether the game is a game in which the operation ends (step S432). Here, if it is not a BB operation-ending game, the process directly advances to step S435, and if it is a BB operation-ending game, 0 is stored in the chance game counter (step S433), and the chance cycle counter is subtracted by 1 (step S433). S434), the process advances to step S435. In step S435, it is determined whether the AT winning flag is 0 or not. Here, if the AT winning flag is 0, it is determined whether or not the value of the chance game number counter is 0 (step S436), and if the value of the chance game number counter is 0, the chance period is further It is determined whether the value of the counter is 0 (step S437). Here, if the value of the chance cycle counter is 0, a chance mode 3 lottery is performed (step S438), and further a chance mode number determination process is performed (step S439).

Next, it is determined whether the chance mode number is 4 (step S441). Here, if the chance mode number is not 4, 1 is stored in the advantageous section counter (step S441), the main game state number 1 complete stop processing is completed, and the process returns. On the other hand, if the chance mode number is 4, perform the AT winning process (step S445), then save 2 as the main game state number (step S448), and perform the main game state number 1 complete stop process. Finish and return. On the other hand, if the value of the chance game number counter is not 0 in the determination in step S436, and if the value of the chance cycle counter is not 0 in the determination in step S437, the process advances to step S442, and the first type BB winning flag is set to 0. Determine whether or not. Here, if the 1st type BB winning flag is 0, the main gaming state number 1 complete stop processing is immediately terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the 1st type BB winning flag is not 0, it is determined whether the 1st type BB activation symbol is hidden (step S443), and if the 1st type BB activation symbol is hidden, the main After storing 6 in the game state number (step S444), if the 1st type BB activation symbol is not hidden, the main game state number 1 complete stop process is immediately terminated and the process returns.

Further, if the AT winning flag is not 0 in the determination in step S435, the process proceeds to step S446, and it is determined whether the 1st type BB winning flag is 0 or not. Here, if the 1st type BB winning flag is 0, 2 is saved as the main gaming state number (step S448), the main gaming state number 1 complete stop processing is completed, and the process returns. On the other hand, if the 1st type BB winning flag is not 0, the AT entry game end process is performed (step S447), and then the main game state number 1 full stop process is ended and the process returns.

In the main game state numbers 2 and 5 complete stop processing in step S367 of FIG. 46, as shown in FIG. 51(B), it is determined whether the 1st type BB winning flag is 0 (step S421) Type BB Winning If the relevant flag is 0, leave it as is; 1st Type BB Winning If the relevant flag is not 0, perform the game end processing upon AT entry (step S422), and then perform the main game state number 2, 5 complete stop processing. Finish and return.

In the main game state number 3 full stop process in step S368 of FIG. 46, as shown in FIG. 52, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the bell number counter is 0 (step S451). Here, if the value of the bell number counter is not 0, the main game state number 3 complete stop processing is immediately terminated and the process returns. If the value of the bell number counter is 0, the process advances to step S452 and the seven number is Determine whether it is 1 or not. Here, if the seven number is 1, the process proceeds to step S452, and it is determined whether the value of the seven counter is 0. If the value of the seven counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S454, and the cumulative counter is It is determined whether the value of is smaller than 2001. Here, if the value of the cumulative counter is smaller than 2001, it is determined whether the value of the arrival flag is 0 (step S455), and when the value of the arrival flag is 0, AT mode rewriting lottery is performed (step S455). S456). Next, it is determined whether the lottery result is 0 or not (step S457), and when the lottery result is 0, the process directly proceeds to step S459, and when the lottery result is not 0, the lottery result is saved in the AT mode number. From (step S458), the process advances to step S459.

At step S459, an AT cycle lottery is performed, and the lottery result is stored in the AT cycle counter (step S460). Furthermore, a seven table 1 lottery is performed (step S462), and the lottery result is stored in the seven table number (step S463). Next, the AT cycle preferential game number lottery process is performed (step S464), and then 0 is stored in the AT winning flag (step S465), 0 is stored in the seven number (step S466), and 0 is stored in the seven counter. (Step S467). Next, 0 is stored in the gold seven counter (step S468), 0 is stored in the seven set counter (step S469), and 0 is stored in the loop number (step S470). Subsequently, 0 is stored in the CU rank number (step S471), 0 is stored in the arrival flag (step S472), and 0 is stored in the additional mode number (step S473). Further, 0 is stored in the bell number counter (step S474), and 0 is stored in the total acquisition counter (step S475). Then, 7 is saved as the main gaming state number (step S476), 2 is further saved as the full stop wait number (step S477), the main gaming state number 3 full stop process is completed, and the process returns.

On the other hand, if the seven number is not 1 in the determination in step S452, and if the seven counter is not 0 in the determination in step S453, the process advances to step S481 in FIG. 53, and it is determined whether the value of the seven set counter is 7 or not. Determine. Here, if the value of the seven set counter is not 7, the process directly advances to step S484, and if the value of the seven set counter is 7, 15 is stored in the seven table number (step S482), and 0 is further added to the seven set counter. After saving (step S483), the process advances to step S484. In step S484, a loop CU rank set process is performed, and then it is determined whether the seven number is 1 (step S485). Here, if the seven number is not 1, it is determined whether the value of the gold seven counter is 0 (step S487), 1 is stored as the seven number (step S488), and the process proceeds to step S489. On the other hand, if the seven number is 1, the value of the seven counter is subtracted by 1 (step S488), and the process advances to step S489.

In step S489, it is determined whether the value of the seven counter is 0, and when the value of the seven counter is 0, it is determined whether the arrival flag is 0 (step S490). Here, if the attainment flag is 0, seven loop lottery processing (step S491) and attainment flag processing (step S492) are performed, and then the process proceeds to step S493. On the other hand, if the value of the seven counter is not 0 as determined in step S489, and if the arrival flag is not 0 as determined in step S490, the process directly proceeds to step S493. Further, if the value of the gold seven counter is not 0 in the determination in step S487, the process proceeds to step S495, and it is determined whether the value of the gold seven counter is 3 or not. Here, when the value of the gold seven counter is not 3, the process directly proceeds to step S497, and when the value of the gold seven counter is 3, 3 is stored in the standby performance number (step S496), and then the process proceeds to step S497. In step S497, the value of the gold seven counter is subtracted by 1, and further gold seven loop lottery processing is executed (step S498), and then the process proceeds to step S493.

In step S493, an additional mode lottery is performed, and the lottery result is stored in the additional mode number (step S494). Thereafter, the process advances to step S501 in FIG. 54, and correction counter processing is performed. Next, a bell number switching lottery is performed (step S502), and it is determined whether the lottery result is 0 (step S503). Here, if the result of the bell number switching lottery is 0, the number of bells 2 is drawn (step S504), the drawing result is stored in the bell number counter (step S505), and the process proceeds to step S508, where the number of bells is drawn. If the result of the switching lottery is not 0, a 3-bell lottery is performed (step S506), the lottery result is stored in the bell counter (step S507), and the process proceeds to step S508.

In step S508, a bell number counter correction process is performed, and then, an arrival flag process is performed (step S509). Next, 3 is stored in the lever weight number (step S510), and it is determined whether the standby effect number is 0 (step S511). Here, if the standby performance number is 0, 1 is saved as the standby performance number (step S512), and the process proceeds to step S477 in FIG. 52. On the other hand, if the standby performance number is not 0, the process directly advances to step S477. Then, 2 is saved as the wait number at full stop, the main game state number 3 complete stop processing is completed, and the process returns.

In the main game state number 4 full stop process in step S369 of FIG. 46, as shown in FIG. 55, the value of the number of AT cycle preferential games counter is subtracted by 1 (step S521), and the game is checked as a BB operation ending game. It is determined whether or not (step S522). Here, if the game is not a BB operation-ending game, the process directly advances to step S525, and if the game is a BB operation-ending game, 0 is stored in the AT cycle preferential game counter (step S523), and further AT cycle After decrementing the counter value by 1 (step S524), the process proceeds to step S525. In step S525, it is determined whether the AT winning flag is 0 or not. Here, if the AT winning flag is 0, it is determined whether the value of the AT cycle counter is 0 (step S526), and if the value of the AT cycle counter is also 0, a pullback 2 lottery is performed ( Step S527). Then, it is determined whether the lottery result is 0 or not (step S528), and when the lottery result is 0, 1 is stored in the advantageous section clear counter (step S529), and the main game state number 4 complete stop processing is executed. Finish and return.

On the other hand, if the value of the AT cycle counter is not 0 in the determination at step S526, the process proceeds to step S534, and it is determined whether the 1st type BB winning flag is 0 or not. Here, when the 1st type BB winning flag is 0, the main game state number 4 complete stop processing is immediately terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the 1st type BB winning flag is not 0, the process proceeds to step S535, and it is determined whether or not BB is not established. Then, if the BB is not established, the main game state number 4 complete stop processing is immediately finished and the process returns; if the BB is established, 7 is saved as the main game state number (step S536), and then the main game state number is 4 Complete the complete stop processing and return.

Further, if the AT winning flag is not 0 in the determination in step S525, the process proceeds to step S531, and it is determined whether the 1st type BB winning flag is 0 or not. Here, if the 1st type BB winning flag is not 0, the process advances to step S532, performs AT entry game end processing, completes main game state number 4 full stop processing, and returns. On the other hand, when the 1st type BB winning flag is 0, the process advances to step S533, stores 5 in the main game state number, completes the main game state number 4 full stop process, and returns. Furthermore, if the result of the pullback 2 lottery is not 0 in the judgment in step S528, the process advances to step S530 and performs the AT winning process, after which 5 is saved in the main game state number (step S533), and the main Game state number 4 completes the full stop process and returns.

In the main game state number 6 full stop processing in step S371 of FIG. 46, as shown in FIG. 56 (A), it is determined whether or not BB has been established (step S541). If BB has not been established, the main game state number 6 full stop processing ends and returns, whereas if BB has been established, 1 is saved in the main game state number (step S542), after which the main game state number 6 full stop processing ends and returns.

In the main game state number 7 full stop process in step S372 of FIG. 46, as shown in FIG. 56(B), it is determined whether BB is established (step S551). Then, if the BB is not established, the main game state number 7 complete stop processing is immediately finished and the process returns; if the BB is established, 4 is saved as the main game state number (step S552), and then the main game state number is 6 Complete the total stop processing and return.

After executing any of the total stop processes for main game state numbers 0 to 7 shown in steps S365 to S372 in FIG. 46, the process advances to step S373 in FIG. Here, 0 is saved as the instruction number, the section type number management game end process is ended, and the process returns. Upon return from the section type number management game end process, the process proceeds to step S8 in FIG. 30(B), and advantageous section clear counter management processing is performed.

In the advantageous section clear counter management process, as shown in FIG. 57, the value of the advantageous section clear counter is subtracted by 1 (step S561), and it is determined whether the value of the advantageous section clear counter is 0 from before the current subtraction. (Step S562). Here, if the value of the advantageous section clear counter is not 0 before the current subtraction, the process advances to step S565, and it is determined whether the value of the advantageous section clear counter has become 0 as a result of the current subtraction. Here, if the value of the advantageous section clear counter becomes 0 as a result of the current subtraction, the process directly advances to step S566. On the other hand, if the value of the advantageous section clear counter does not become 0 even after the current subtraction, the process advances to step S567, and it is determined whether or not a replay activation symbol is displayed in the game. If the replay activation symbol is displayed in the game, the process directly advances to step S569, and if it is not displayed, the value obtained by subtracting the number of bets from the number of game medals paid out in the game is added to the net increase counter. From there (step S568), the process advances to step S569.

In step S569, it is determined whether the value of the net increase counter is 2401 or more. If the value of the net increase counter is less than 2401, the process proceeds to step S566, and if it is 2401 or more, the advantageous section clear counter management process is directly terminated. and return. In step S566, 0 is stored in all storage areas that store data values that affect the performance of the instruction function, and the process proceeds to step S563. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S562 that the value of the advantageous section clear counter is 0 before the current subtraction, the process directly proceeds to step S563. In step S563, it is determined whether the section type number is 0 or not. If the section type number is 0, the advantageous section clear counter management process is immediately terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the section type number is not 0, 1500 is stored in the advantageous section clear counter (step S564), and then the advantageous section clear counter management process is ended and the process returns.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing will be explained with reference to FIG. 58. In this embodiment, processing is performed such as reading each game operation signal output in response to a game operation such as a bet operation performed by a player, detecting (confirming) the signal level, transmitting each control command, and controlling the drive of the reels. This is performed by a timer interrupt process that is performed every preset constant time (for example, 2.235 milliseconds). In this timer interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 58, first, interrupt initial processing (saving registers, disabling interrupts, etc.) is performed (step MT11), and then it is determined whether a power outage has been detected. (Step MT12). Here, if a power-off is detected, power-off processing is performed (step MT25). In the power-off process, registers are saved, stack pointers are saved, interrupt states are saved, etc. Further, processing such as retention of information related to winning combination results and information related to gaming status (including information related to AT) stored in a predetermined storage area, and calculation and storage of a checksum is also performed.

On the other hand, if a power outage is not detected, processing is performed to update the interrupt counter value (subtract "1") (step MT13), and further timer measurement is performed (step MT14). This timer measurement is performed by subtracting or adding the timer value of an arbitrary timer set in the game progress control process described above. Next, the input port is read (step MT15). In this input port reading, the signal level of each game operation signal inputted to the input port is read and stored, and the signal level is determined.

Next, reel drive control processing is performed to control the drive of reels 3a to 3c (acceleration, deceleration, constant speed maintenance, stop maintenance, etc.) (step MT16). In this reel drive control processing, the reel drive pulse output counter value indicating the timing to switch the output phase (excitation phase) of the stepping motor is updated according to the reel drive state (stop, reel rotation waiting, accelerating, constant speed, decelerating, etc.), and reel drive pulse data for driving the stepping motor is acquired, updated, output, etc. In the next step MT17, it is determined whether the reel drive control processing has been performed for all reels. If not, the process returns to step MT16 and the reel drive control processing is performed again. On the other hand, if all reels have been performed, a port output process is performed to perform excitation output for reels, hoppers, blockers, etc. (step MT18), and a control command transmission process is performed to transmit the control commands stored in the control command buffer (CB) (step MT19).

Next, the process proceeds to step MT20, where the outer end signal (external signal) data stored in a predetermined storage area is read out, and the outer end signal is output. Next, an LED display is performed to cause the above-mentioned display lamp to perform a predetermined display (step MT21). In this LED display, for example, the following display is executed on the payout number display lamp 46j. In other words, if no errors (excluding E-type errors) have occurred, the number of payouts "0 to 9" will be displayed based on the number of game medals paid out, or the number "1 to 6" will be displayed based on the set value. display it. Furthermore, when notifying the pressing order, display modes of instruction numbers "=1" to "=6" are displayed. Further, if an error (excluding E-type errors) has occurred, an error display is executed based on the value of the error number.

Next, the process proceeds to step MT22, where error management is performed. In this error management, first, error checking is performed. This error check includes determining whether an H0 error has occurred, determining whether a CE error has occurred, determining whether a CP error has occurred, determining whether a CH error has occurred, and determining whether a C0 error has occurred. It determines whether an error has occurred, determines whether a C1 error has occurred, determines whether an E6 error has occurred, determines whether an E7 error has occurred, and further determines whether an E6 error or When an E7 error occurs, processing is performed such as displaying an error on the payout number display lamp 46j and stopping the execution of the game. Note that when an E-type error occurs, recovery from the error is possible if the above-mentioned setting change processing is executed. After this error check, if an error has occurred, an output request set upon error detection is processed for transmitting error information to the sub-control means 200. After executing this error management process, a process is performed to update the random numbers used for role determination, etc. (step MT23), and an interrupt recovery process (register recovery, interrupt permission, etc.) is performed (step MT24), and the interrupt return do.

Next, with reference to Figures 59 to 71, we will explain the effects (hereinafter referred to as "display effects") that are performed by images displayed on the display screen 11a (image display section DP) of the image display device 11 in the slot machine 1. Examples of display effects that are performed in this embodiment include conversation effects (also referred to as "dialogue effects"), subtitle effects (also referred to as "telop effects"), expectation effects (also referred to as "object effects"), GET effects, scene switching effects, and blackout effects.

(conversation performance)
Conversation production is, for example, a process in which people, animals, plants, robots, monsters (whether real or imaginary), etc. (collectively referred to as "characters") set as image characters for a gaming machine have a conversation. This is a performance in which predetermined lines uttered by each character are displayed on an image display unit such as a liquid crystal panel, and the sound is output from an audio output unit such as a speaker. Conversation presentations provide players with information that is not related to gaming results, such as introducing characters to players, explaining content about gaming methods, or explaining content about gaming machine models and specifications. It may play the role of informing the player, or it may play the role of informing the player of content related to the game result, such as suggesting the degree of expectation for awarding an advantageous game. An advantageous game is a game that is more advantageous to the player than usual (for example, a game during AT (including during ART) in a slot machine, a bonus game, a game during a jackpot in a pachinko machine, a probability-changing game, or a time-saving game) This refers to games (hereinafter also referred to as ``advantageous games''). Furthermore, the degree of expectation of granting an advantageous game refers to a game result that increases the probability of executing an advantageous game or permitting the execution of an advantageous game (including a case of 100%) (for example, AT in a slot machine). Winning, AT add-on win, add-on win with a large number of AT add-ons, bonus win, advantageous bonus win, rare role win, jackpot win on a pachinko machine, guaranteed variable jackpot (more advantageous jackpot than a non-probable jackpot) win, 16 round jackpot ( It refers to the level of expectation (reliability, accuracy) of getting a jackpot with a large number of jackpots, winning, etc.). In the conversation performance, a predetermined display for the conversation performance (also referred to as a "conversation performance display") is displayed on the image display section DP at a predetermined timing. Note that the term "display" is not limited to a two-dimensional (planar) image display, but also includes a three-dimensional (stereoscopic) display such as a hologram. Note that the conversation effect may be in a mode in which two or more characters talk with each other, or in a mode in which one character speaks to the player. In short, at least a character image and dialogue characters corresponding to the character image satisfy the requirements for conversation production.

The conversation effect display is a display related to what each character says in a conversation between a plurality of characters, and includes a character display and a display that can be identified as text. Specifically, the character display is, for example, the display of a picture (picture) showing the appearance (appearance, mainly the face) of the character speaking (also referred to as "character picture display"). On the other hand, a display that can be identified as text is specifically, for example, a display of characters (also referred to as a "line display") that indicates the content of a character's utterance (also referred to as a "line" in a conversation production display). In addition to the character image display and dialogue display, the conversation effect display usually includes a display that allows identification of the character's name. Specifically, the display by which the name of the character can be identified is, for example, a display of characters indicating the name of the character speaking (also referred to as "character name display"). The conversation effect display is configured to include a character image display, a dialogue display, and a character name display, but a conversation effect display that does not include a character name display and is configured by a character image display and a dialogue display may be provided. As specific examples of conversation effect displays, a first conversation effect display KD1 is shown in FIG. 59(A), and a second conversation effect display KD2 is shown in FIG. 59(B).

The first conversation effect display KD1 includes a character image display KG1 that displays the appearance of the character CH1, a character name display KN1 that displays the name of the character CH1 ("Kenji"), and a line of the character CH1 ("It's a nice day today"). and a dialogue display KS1 that displays the message "It's ok"). The dialogue display KS1 uses a frame-like image ("range KW1 (also referred to as "picture") is also displayed along with the dialogue. Similarly, the second conversation effect display KD2 includes a character image display KG2 that displays the appearance of a character CH2 different from the character CH1, a character name display KN2 that displays the name of the character CH2 ("Pamela"), and a character image display KN2 that displays the character CH2's name ("Pamela"). It is configured to include a dialogue display KS2 that displays a dialogue by CH2 (``It's okay to be carefree''). In the dialogue display KS2, a range image KW2 is also displayed.

In the first conversation effect display KD1, a character image display KG1, a character name display KN1, a line display KS1, and a range image KW1 are used as each display component constituting the first conversation effect display KD1. They are displayed in a predetermined area of the image display section DP at the same timing. Similarly, in the second conversation effect display KD2, the character image display KG2, character name display KN2, dialogue display KS2, and range image KW2 are displayed during one game as each display component constituting the second conversation effect display KD2. is displayed in another predetermined area (for example, an area that does not overlap with the area where the first conversation image KG1 is displayed) of the image display section DP at another predetermined same timing. As a modification example, for example, in the first conversation effect display KD1, the character image display KG1 and the character name display KN1 are displayed first, and then (for example, after 0.2 seconds), the dialogue display KS1 is displayed together with the range image KW1. The display timings of the display components may be slightly different, such as when the display component is displayed. The same holds true for the second conversation effect display KD2.

The timing at which the conversation effect display is displayed is controlled by predetermined switches controlled by the main control means (for example, the 1-BET switch 22 and the MAX-BET switch 23 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "bet switches"), or the start switch. The display timing (display trigger) of the conversation production display is set to an arbitrary timing (display trigger) triggered by the operation of the lever 25 and stop switches 26a, 26b, 26c, etc. (these are also collectively referred to as "main switches"). (start timing) can be set as appropriate. For example, during one game, when the operation of the start lever 25 is effectively accepted, a predetermined timing (lever operation The first conversation effect display KD1 may be displayed on the image display section DP at the same timing as the reception or at a timing when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the reception of the lever operation. In addition, during the same game, when any of the three stop switches 26a, 26b, 26c effectively receives the first stop operation, the time point when the first stop operation is effectively received (the first At a predetermined timing (same timing as when receiving the first stop operation or timing after a predetermined time has elapsed since receiving the first stop operation) after receiving the stop operation, the second conversation effect display KD2 is displayed on the image display section. It may also be displayed on the DP. In addition, if the first conversation effect display KD1 to the second conversation effect display KD2 are displayed at the timing when the third stop operation is accepted, the operation of the bet switch to start the next game is accepted or the start lever 25 is When the operation is accepted, the first conversation effect display KD1 to the second conversation effect display KD2 displayed on the image display section DP are erased, and a bet switch is pressed to start the next game. , or when the operation of the start lever 25 is accepted and the first conversation effect display KD1 to the second conversation effect display KD2 are erased, all the voices of the lines being output from the audio output section are still being output. If not output, the first conversation effect display KD1 to the second conversation effect display KD2 on the image display section DP are erased, but the audio of the dialogue may be output until the end. However, if a production that the player wants to pay attention to, such as a rare role announcement or a freeze, or a new conversation production is selected by accepting the operation of the start lever 25 for the next game, the audio of the dialogue will be released at the timing after receiving the operation of the start lever 25. Output is aborted. With this configuration, even a player who wants to advance the game quickly can understand the content of the performance. It goes without saying that the audio of the dialogue may be erased together with erasure of the first conversation effect display KD1 to the second conversation effect display KD2 on the image display section DP.

The conversation effect display can be displayed at any timing triggered by the operation of a sub-button controlled by the sub-control means (display trigger). For example, during one game, an image prompting the player to operate the enter button 55 (for example, an image that combines the image of the enter button 55 and the word "PUSH") is displayed on the image display section DP. Then, in accordance with the display, it is determined that the determination button 55 has been operated effectively (including cases in which it is activated by being operated once, cases in which it is activated by being operated a predetermined number of times in succession, etc.). As a trigger, a predetermined timing after the time when the decision button 55 is operated (also referred to as "when the decision button is operated") (the same timing as when the decision button is operated or the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the decision button was operated) The first conversation effect display KD1 and the second conversation effect display KD2 may be displayed on the image display section DP. In addition, in the case of a pachinko machine, the timing at which the conversation effect display is displayed is, for example, the timing when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the time when the game ball enters the starting slot (also referred to as "starting slot winning time"). It can be set as the display timing of the effect display.

During one game, there are cases in which no conversation effects are displayed, cases in which only one conversation effect is displayed, and cases in which a plurality of conversation effects are displayed. The difference in the number of conversation effect displays displayed during one game may not be related to the game result, or the difference in the number may cause the game result to be different. For example, the degree of expectation that an advantageous game will be given may be made higher when two or more conversation effects are displayed than when only one conversation effect is displayed during one game. Whether or not to display a conversation effect display, the type and number of conversation effect displays to be displayed (for example, the type of lines in a dialogue display), the display timing, etc., can be determined based on, for example, the game status (for example, whether or not it is in an advantageous section). , determined based on the results of an internal lottery (for example, whether or not a rare prize has been won), other lottery results such as AT lottery and AT additional lottery (based on satisfying other predetermined conditions) ). When a plurality of conversation effect displays are displayed, at most one conversation effect display is displayed per display opportunity.

For example, in a case where the first conversation effect display KD1 and the second conversation effect display KD2 are displayed during one game, if the first conversation effect display KD1 is displayed in response to the operation of the start lever 25, The second conversation effect display KD2 is displayed after any one of the three stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c has effectively received the first stop operation. That is, the second conversation effect display KD2 is not displayed before the first stop operation is effectively accepted (it is also possible to provide a case where it is displayed). Thereby, for example, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by varying the degree of expectation of giving an advantageous game depending on when the conversation effect display is displayed. In addition, by allowing up to one display per display opportunity, it is possible to prevent players from misrecognizing the occasion when a conversation effect display was displayed or from confusing multiple displayed conversation effect displays. It becomes possible to do so.

Three or more conversation effect displays may be displayed on the image display section DP during one game. For example, the first conversation effect display KD1 is displayed when the start lever operation is accepted, and the second conversation effect display KD2 is displayed when the first stop operation is accepted, and then during the same game, the remaining 2 When one of the two stop switches effectively receives the second stop operation, a predetermined timing after receiving the second stop operation (at the same timing as when receiving the second stop operation or at the same timing as when the second stop operation is received) A third conversation effect display (not shown) is displayed at a timing when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the time of reception, and furthermore, when the remaining one stop switch has effectively accepted the third stop operation, At a predetermined timing after receiving the third stop operation (the same timing as when receiving the third stop operation or a timing after a predetermined time has elapsed since receiving the third stop operation), a fourth conversation effect display (not shown) is displayed. It may be displayed. The character in the third conversation effect display and the character in the fourth conversation effect display may be different characters from character CH1 and character CH2, or may be the same character.

When a plurality of conversation effect displays are displayed on the image display section DP during one game, the conversation effect display that is displayed first is erased from the image display section DP even if a conversation effect display that is displayed later is displayed. It continues to be displayed without being hidden (hidden). For example, in the above example, the first conversation effect display KD1 that was displayed first is not hidden and continues to be displayed even if the second conversation effect display KD2 is displayed, and then the third conversation effect display KD2 is displayed. Even if the conversation effect display KD1 and KD2 are displayed, the first and second conversation effect displays KD1 and KD2 are not hidden and continue to be displayed. Furthermore, even if the fourth conversation effect display is displayed after that, the first to third conversation effect displays are not hidden but are displayed at that point. In this way, by making the conversation effect display that was displayed first continue to be displayed even if the conversation effect display that is displayed later is displayed, multiple conversation effect displays can be displayed simultaneously during one game. They can be displayed on the image display section DP (so that the display periods of each conversation effect display partially overlap each other). Thereby, it is possible to obtain a production effect that makes the image display section DP look lively by displaying a plurality of conversation productions. In addition, when the player is likely to feel tired because the player is in a gaming state in which there is a low possibility of obtaining an advantageous gaming result (for example, during a non-advantageous period), multiple conversation effects can be displayed in one By displaying them throughout the game, it is possible to direct the player's attention to these conversation effect displays, thereby reducing the player's feeling of fatigue. Furthermore, the degree of expectation for giving an advantageous game may differ depending on when the conversation effect display is displayed, and in that case, it is possible to make the player interested in the display timing of the conversation effect. , it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the conversation presentation display, the content of the character's lines (for example, the content of the line display KS1 in the first conversation presentation display KD1 or the content of the line display KS2 in the second conversation presentation display KD2) may be set to have no relation to the game result regardless of the content, or the game result may differ depending on the line content. For example, in a case where the content of the line display KS2 is "You're so carefree" (see FIG. 59(B)) or "That's true" (see FIG. 60), it may be set so that neither case has any effect on the game result, or it may be set so that the latter case has a higher expectation of granting a more advantageous game than the former case. Also, the line content may be changed when the decision button 55 is operated. In addition, as a case where the content of the dialogue changes by operating the decision button 55, there may be a case where the dialogue is displayed (the dialogue display starts) by operating the decision button 55, and a case where the content of the dialogue changes by operating the decision button 55 after the dialogue is displayed. In a case where the content of the dialogue changes by operating the decision button 55 after the dialogue is displayed (the dialogue voice is also output at the same time), the operation (operation acceptance) of the decision button 55 may be enabled before the dialogue voice has ended, or the operation of the decision button 55 may be enabled after the dialogue voice has ended. When the operation of the decision button 55 is enabled before the dialogue voice has ended, if the decision button 55 is operated in the middle of the dialogue voice, the dialogue being output is interrupted and a new line is output, which is a specification that is preferred by players who want to know the result of the game quickly. In addition, when the operation of the decision button 55 is enabled after the dialogue voice has ended, the dialogue is not interrupted, which is a specification that is preferred by players who want to enjoy the production.

In addition, the characters displayed in the dialog display may always have the same font (font and style), the same size (size), and the same color, or may vary depending on the game situation and the display timing of the conversation display. The colors may be different. Further, depending on the font, size, color, etc., the degree of expectation for providing an advantageous game may vary. For example, when displaying serifs, one or both of the outer line (outline) and the area inside the outer line of the character is displayed in blue, in addition to the normal color (for example, black or white). (also referred to as "blue serif display") and red serif display (also referred to as "red serif display"). In that case, red serif display is better than blue serif display. It may be arranged so that the degree of expectation of providing an advantageous game increases.

As an example, FIG. 61(A) shows an example of a blue dialogue display for the character Kenji's line "It's a nice day today," with the area inside the outline of the text in blue, and a red dialogue display for the character Pamela's line "That's true, isn't it?" with the outline of the text in red (with the area inside the outline in white). In this example, the size of the text in the red dialogue display is made larger than the size of the text in the blue dialogue display, and the difference in size also suggests to the player that the red dialogue display has a higher expectation of awarding a more advantageous game. In the red dialogue display, not only the text size of the dialogue display, but also the size of the character in the character picture display and the text size of the character name display may be made larger. In other words, in the red dialogue display, one or two or all of the text size of the dialogue display, the text size of the character name display, and the size of the character may be made larger than those in the blue dialogue display (only the color of the text, etc. may be changed, and the text size, etc. may be the same). In addition, when multiple conversation performance displays are displayed during one game, the text of the dialogue displayed in the first conversation performance display (e.g., the first conversation performance display KD1) may be of one size or font, and the text of the dialogue displayed in the second or subsequent conversation performance displays (e.g., the first conversation performance display KD1) may be of multiple different sizes or fonts.

When multiple dialogue display displays with different expectations for providing advantageous play, such as blue dialogue display and red dialogue display, are displayed during one game, the dialogue display with the higher expectation is displayed later (it is also possible to provide a case where it is displayed first). Therefore, when multiple dialogue display displays are displayed during one game, the first dialogue display (e.g., the first dialogue display KD1) is likely to display dialogue displays in normal colors or dialogue displays in colors with low expectations, and the second or subsequent dialogue display (e.g., the second dialogue display KD2) is likely to display dialogue displays in colors with high expectations. In the case of blue dialogue display and red dialogue display, for example, the blue dialogue display is displayed in response to the acceptance of the operation of the start lever 25, and the red dialogue display is displayed in response to the acceptance of the first stop operation. It is also possible to provide a case where the red dialogue display with a relatively high expectation is displayed so as to overlap the blue dialogue display with a relatively low expectation. When the blue dialogue display is displayed overlappingly, the red dialogue display may hide part or all of the characters in the blue dialogue display (see FIG. 60(B)), or the red dialogue display may be overlapped so as not to hide the characters in the blue dialogue display (see FIG. 61(A)). In addition, when the second conversation production display KD2 is displayed after the first conversation production display KD1, the color indicating the expectation level of the second conversation production display KD2 will not be displayed in a color lower than the color indicating the expectation level of the first conversation production display KD1. This is also applied when the third conversation production display or the fourth conversation production display is displayed, and the expectation level of the later conversation production will not be lower than that displayed in the previous conversation production. This is to prevent a situation where it becomes difficult to know how much expectation there is if a red dialogue display with high expectation is displayed first in the first conversation production display KD1 and then a blue dialogue display with low expectation is displayed in the second conversation production display KD2. In addition, displaying a normal dialogue display in the second conversation performance display KD2 after displaying a red dialogue display in the first conversation performance display KD1 does not cause confusion for the player, so there is no problem. In addition, when a conversation performance occurs before and after a reach performance in a pachinko machine, the expectation level of the conversation performance display displayed after the reach performance may be lower than the expectation level of the conversation performance display displayed before the reach performance. This is because the expectation level increases stepwise because the reach performance is sandwiched in between. For example, before the reach performance, the player is interested in whether or not it will be a reach, so if the red dialogue display of the conversation performance appears at this stage, the player expects whether or not it will be a reach. In contrast, after the reach performance, the player is interested in whether or not it will be a jackpot, so if the blue dialogue display of the conversation performance appears at this stage, the player expects whether or not it will be a jackpot. Since the targets of expectation are different in this way, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand performance configuration even if the expectation level drops before and after the reach performance. The characters displayed in the conversation scenes before and after the reach scene may be the same character, or the same character may be displayed in a different way (e.g., with a different costume or facial expression), or may be different characters.

Note that the color of characters, etc. in serif display (colors other than normal colors) is not limited to blue and red. For example, in addition to blue serif display and red serif display, green serif display with green text, pattern serif display with text in a specific pattern (for example, a pattern symbolizing a gaming machine manufacturer), A rainbow serif display may be provided in which the characters and the like are colored in rainbow colors. Then, the expectation level for providing an advantageous game may be increased in the order of blue serif display < green serif display < red serif display < pattern serif display < rainbow serif display. At this time, in the case of a dialogue display that has the highest level of expectation (in this example, a rainbow dialogue display), it may be a guaranteed performance with a 100% expectation level (for example, an AT confirmation, a bonus confirmation, a jackpot confirmation, etc.).

The lines displayed in the conversation performance display are usually composed of words and sentences in characters whose meanings the player can understand. However, it may be composed of characters whose meaning cannot be understood, such as characters in an ancient language, garbled characters, or characters containing figures or symbols (▽, ●, *), etc. When a dialogue display containing characters whose meaning cannot be understood is displayed, the expectation level for giving an advantageous game increases compared to when a dialogue display consisting of characters whose meaning is understandable is displayed. You can do it like this. In addition, character strings (sentences) in dialogue display can be displayed in one line (see Figure 59) or displayed over two or more lines with line breaks (consisting of two or more sentences). (see Figure 60).

The range image KW1 in the first conversation performance display KD1 and the range image KW2 in the second conversation performance display KD2 are both in the shape of a so-called speech bubble, but the shape of the range image is not limited to this shape and can be any shape. The shape of the range image may always be the same, or may be different depending on the game situation or the display timing of the conversation performance display. Furthermore, the difference in the shape of the range image may differ the expectation level for the game result, etc. For example, there are cases where the range image is displayed in the shape of a speech bubble and cases where the range image is displayed in the shape of an arrow, and the expectation level for granting a favorable game may be higher in the latter case than in the former case. Note that such range images may not be displayed, and the characters of the dialogue display may be displayed in an exposed state (without being surrounded by a frame, etc.).

Further, the color, pattern, etc. of the area inside the outline of the range picture may always be the same, or may vary depending on the game situation or the display timing of the conversation effect display. Further, depending on the color, pattern, etc. of the area inside the outline, the degree of expectation for giving an advantageous game may be varied. For example, in addition to displaying the area inside the outline of a range drawing in normal color, there are also modes in which it is displayed in blue (this is also included in the blue serif display) and in red (this is also included in the red serif display). (including in the display), the degree of expectation that an advantageous game will be awarded may be higher in the mode displayed in red than in the mode displayed in blue.

As an example, FIG. 60(A) shows an example of the dialogue display for character Kenji in which the area inside the outline of the range image is blue, and the dialogue display for character Pamela in which the area inside the outline of the range image is red. Note that the color of the area inside the outline of the range image is not limited to blue and red. For example, it is also possible to have the area inside the outline of the range image green (this is also included in green dialogue display), a specific pattern (this is also included in pattern dialogue display), or rainbow colored (this is also included in rainbow dialogue display). Also, in the example of FIG. 60(A), there may be cases where the red dialogue display is displayed overlapping the blue dialogue display.

The character image display in the conversation performance display may always be the same for the same character, or may be different for the same character depending on the game situation or the display timing of the conversation performance display. The expectation of granting an advantageous game move may differ depending on the mode of the character image display. For example, in a case where the character image KG1 in the first conversation performance display KD1 is displayed in a mode in which it is displayed with a hat and a mode in which it is displayed without a hat, the expectation of granting an advantageous game move may be higher in the mode in which it is displayed with a hat than in the mode in which it is not worn.

When a conversation effect display is displayed on the image display section DP, a different type of effect display (another image) from the conversation effect display may be displayed on the same image display section DP. In such a case, the conversation effect display and another effect display can be rendered in separate layers (layers) using a layer function installed in the graphic software used for image creation. For example, when an image composed of a moving image or a still image (also referred to as a "background image") is displayed so as to occupy almost the entire area on the screen of the image display section DP, a partial area of the background image If you want to display the conversation effect display so as to overlap with the background image, the conversation effect display can be drawn on a layer on the nearer side (front side closer to the player) than the layer on which the background image is drawn. By doing so, even if the conversation effect display is displayed over the background image, it is possible to ensure sufficient visibility of the conversation effect display. In addition, when displaying a plurality of conversation effect displays, each conversation effect display may be rendered on a separate layer.

If some kind of error occurs while the conversation presentation display is being displayed on the image display section DP, an error notification display for notifying the occurrence of the error may be displayed on the image display section DP. In this case, the error notification display is drawn on a layer closer to the front than the layer on which the conversation effect display is drawn, and is displayed so as to overlap the conversation effect display. As an example, FIG. 61(B) shows an example in which an HP error notification display that notifies the occurrence of an HP error is displayed so as to overlap the conversation production display. In this example, the line display of the conversation production display is hidden by the HP error notification display, making it impossible to visually recognize its contents. In this way, when the conversation effect display and the error notification display are displayed on the image display section DP at the same time, the error notification display is displayed overlapping the dialogue display of the conversation effect display, and the contents of the dialogue display become invisible (serifs). (It is also possible to provide a case where an error notification display is displayed so that the contents of the display can be visually confirmed.) In addition to the various errors mentioned above, error notifications may be displayed when communication errors or door opening errors occur.In the case of pachinko machines, there are times when a left-handed hit warning or a lower tray full error occurs. be. In addition, although it is not an error, there is an image suggesting that the reel rotation has stopped as a notification effect to the player in the slot machine 1. This is an effect in which "Please stop the reels" is displayed on the image display section when the reels have been rotating for a predetermined period of time (for example, one minute). Even when the reel rotation stop suggestion image is displayed, it is displayed in front of the conversation effect display (layer on the near side), so the conversation effect display is difficult to see (it doesn't have to be visible at all or just a part of it) ). Therefore, the words "Please stop the reels" are displayed in an easy-to-understand manner, thereby effectively alerting the player. Note that the reel rotation stop suggestion image may be deleted when a stop operation is accepted for one of the multiple spinning reels, or it may be deleted when a stop operation is accepted for all reels. You may. In addition, even if a volume change image is displayed due to a button operation related to volume change being accepted during a game (while the reels are rotating in the case of a slot machine, while changing in the case of a pachinko machine), the image will be displayed in front of the conversation effect display. A volume change image is displayed. The volume change image is a meter display that indicates the level of the volume, and the display ends when a decision operation or time elapses after changing the volume, and the conversation effect display becomes visible again.

When an assist effect is displayed on the image display unit DP, a conversation effect display may be displayed on the image display unit DP. As an example, FIG. 62 shows a state in which a conversation effect display is displayed when a push navigation effect display (particularly a push order navigation effect display that notifies the push order) is displayed on the image display unit DP. In this example, as shown in FIG. 62(A), when a push navigation effect display that notifies the "center left and right" push order from the first stop operation to the third stop operation is displayed in the lower area of the image display unit DP, a conversation effect display of the character name Kenji is displayed. At this time, the conversation effect display of Kenji is displayed in an area above the display area of the push navigation effect display so as not to overlap with the push navigation effect display. Also, as shown in FIG. 62(B), when a push navigation effect display that notifies the "left and right" push order from the second stop operation to the third stop operation is displayed in the lower area of the image display unit DP after the first stop operation is accepted, a conversation effect display of the character name Pamela is displayed. At this time, Pamela's conversation performance display is displayed in an area above the display area of the press navigation performance display, so as not to overlap with the press navigation performance display.

In this way, when the conversation effect display is displayed on the image display section DP while the assist effect is displayed on the image display section DP, the conversation effect display is displayed so as not to overlap with the push navigation effect display. More specifically, while dialogue display and character name display in the conversation production display are displayed without overlapping with the push navigation production display, some parts of the character image display (for example, the character's body and hands) are The display may overlap with the push navigation display. In that case, for example, the conversation effect display is drawn on a layer on the back side (the back side away from the player), and the push navigation effect display is drawn on a layer on the front side, thereby ensuring the visibility of the push navigation effect display. It is supposed to be done. Note that a case may be provided in which a part of the line display and the character name display in the conversation effect display are displayed so as to overlap with the push navigation effect display. Even in that case, for example, the conversation effect display may be drawn on a layer on the back side, and the push navigation effect display may be drawn on a layer on the front side, thereby ensuring the visibility of the push navigation effect display. It is preferable to do so. In addition, the lines in the conversation effect display shown in FIGS. 62(A) and 62(B) ("It seems good to press in the order of the navigation", "Follow the navigation") are based on the game method. This example shows the case where the content is related to In addition to this, ``Drawing a watermelon during a special zone seems to be hot'', ``Push from the left during normal times'', ``Follow the navigation during AT'', ``Drawing a watermelon during normal The content can be various, such as ``If a UFO appears somewhere in the background image, there is a chance''.

When the conversation effect display is displayed on the image display section DP, the conversation effect sound is outputted from the audio output section in synchronization with the display timing (display start timing). The conversation effect sound basically has the same content as the content of the characters' lines in the conversation effect display. For example, if the content of the line display KS1 in the first conversation effect display KD1 is "It's a nice day today, isn't it?", the corresponding conversation effect audio is the audio content "It's fun today." On the other hand, a case may be provided in which a voice having a content different from the content of the characters' lines in the conversation effect display is output as the conversation effect sound. For example, if the content of the dialogue display KS1 is meaningless such as "※↓●//っwog◇#", a conversation production voice with an understandable content such as "Today is a good day" is output. You may also do so. When the contents of the lines in the conversation effect display are different from the contents of the conversation effect audio, the expectation level for giving an advantageous game may be increased compared to the case where both contents match.

(Subtitle production)
Subtitle production (also referred to as ``telop production'') is, for example, a character appearing in a background image (video image) saying something (this can be said during a conversation with another character or talking to oneself), and the text indicating the content of the statement. This is a production that makes it look like a caption that appears on a TV screen or subtitles in a movie. Subtitle production mainly plays the role of informing the player of content related to the game, such as hinting at the progress of the game, etc., but it also plays the role of informing the player of content that is not related to the game. Good too. In subtitle presentation, a subtitle presentation display for subtitle presentation is displayed on the image display section DP at a predetermined timing. Further, the subtitle performance may play a role of informing the player of content related to the game result, such as suggesting the degree of expectation of giving an advantageous game. An advantageous game is a game that is more advantageous to the player than usual (for example, a game during AT (including during ART) in a slot machine, a bonus game, a game during a jackpot in a pachinko machine, a probability-changing game, or a time-saving game) Refers to games, etc. (collectively referred to as "advantageous games").In addition, the degree of expectation for granting advantageous games means that the probability of executing an advantageous game or allowing the execution of an advantageous game increases. Game results (including cases where the percentage is 100%) (for example, AT winnings in slot machines, AT addition winnings, additional winnings with a large number of AT additions, bonus winnings, advantageous bonus winnings, rare prize winnings, jackpot winnings in pachinko machines, This refers to the level of expectation (reliability, accuracy) of winning a guaranteed variable jackpot (a jackpot that is more advantageous than a non-probable jackpot), winning a 16-round jackpot (a jackpot with many jackpots, etc.).In subtitle production, A subtitle effect display for subtitle effect is displayed on the image display section DP at a predetermined timing.

The subtitle effect display is a display related to the remarks of a character appearing in a background image, and is composed of a display that can be identified as text. A display that can be identified as text is, for example, a display of text (also called a "telop display") that shows the content of the character's remarks (corresponding to the lines in a conversation effect display). Note that when the subtitle effect display is displayed, the character does not necessarily have to be displayed in the background image. In short, the requirement for the subtitle effect display is met if text is displayed on the background image. The subtitle effect display is displayed on a layer that is closer to the player than the layer on which the background image is displayed. Therefore, even if the subtitle effect display is displayed superimposed on the background image, the visibility of the subtitle effect display (especially the telop display) is sufficiently ensured. As an example of the subtitle effect display, a first subtitle effect display JD1 is shown in FIG. 63 (A), and a second subtitle effect display JD2 is shown in FIG. 63 (B).

The first subtitle performance display JD1 is configured to include a caption display JT1 that shows the contents of a statement made by the character CH1 ("It's fine weather, so it looks like a good chance!") appearing in one scene in the background image HG1 displayed on the image display unit DP during one game. In this way, the first subtitle performance display JD1 is configured to include the caption display JT1, and does not include a display showing the name of the character CH1 ("Kenji") (referred to as a "character name display" as in the conversation performance display). The second subtitle performance display JD2 is configured to include a caption display JT2 that shows another statement made by the character CH1 ("The weather is looking ominous!") appearing in another scene in the background image HG1 displayed on the image display unit DP during the same one game. In this way, the second subtitle performance display JD2 is configured to include the caption display JT2, and does not include a character name display (it is also possible to provide a subtitle performance display that includes a character name display). Note that the character's name may be displayed as part of the contents of the statement in the caption display. In this case, the display of the name is considered to be different from the character name display.

The timing at which the subtitle effect display is displayed is triggered by the operation of a predetermined switch controlled by the main control means, such as the bet switch, the start lever 25, the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c (display trigger). Any timing can be appropriately set as the display timing (display start timing) of subtitle effect display. For example, during one game, when the operation of the start lever 25 is effectively accepted, a predetermined timing (when the lever operation is accepted) after the start lever 25 has effectively accepted the operation (when the lever operation is accepted) is triggered. The first subtitle effect display JD1 may be displayed on the image display section DP at the same time as or at the time when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the lever operation was accepted. In addition, during the same game, when one of the three stop switches 26a, 26b, 26c effectively receives the first stop operation, the time point when the first stop operation is effectively received (the first The second subtitle effect display JD2 appears on the image display section DP at a predetermined timing (at the same time as when the first stop operation is received or after a predetermined time has elapsed since the first stop operation is received) after the first stop operation is received. You can do it like this. In addition, in the case of a pachinko machine, the timing at which the subtitle effect display is displayed is, for example, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the time the game ball enters the starting slot (also referred to as "starting slot winning time" or "variation start time"). From the timing of the moment, any time when the SP reach effect is displayed after the reach is established, or the time when the big winning hole is opened (also referred to as "when the big winning hole is opened" or "when the jackpot starts") Set the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed, or the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the game ball enters the grand prize opening (also referred to as "the time of winning the grand prize opening") as the display timing of the subtitle effect display. can do.

During one game, there are cases in which no subtitle effects are displayed, cases in which only one subtitle effect is displayed, and cases in which a plurality of subtitle effects are displayed. Whether or not to display subtitle effects, the type and number of subtitle effects to be displayed (for example, the type of content of subtitle display), the display timing, etc., can be determined based on, for example, the gaming status (for example, whether or not it is in an advantageous section). , determined based on the results of an internal lottery (for example, whether or not a rare prize has been won), other lottery results such as AT lottery and AT additional lottery (based on satisfying other predetermined conditions) ). Note that even if the internal lottery results are the same, the subtitle effect display is more likely to be displayed during an advantageous section than during a non-advantageous section. When a plurality of subtitle effects are displayed, a plurality of subtitle effects may be displayed per display opportunity. For example, in a case where the first subtitle effect display JD1 and the second subtitle effect display JD2 are displayed during one game, the first subtitle effect display JD1 is displayed in response to the operation reception of the start lever 25, and further The second subtitle production display JD2 may be displayed before any of the three stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c effectively receives the first stop operation (up to one subtitle display per display trigger). ).

Three or more subtitle effect displays may be displayed on the image display unit DP during one game. For example, the first subtitle effect display JD1 may be displayed upon receipt of the start lever 25 operation, the second subtitle effect display JD2 may be displayed upon receipt of the first stop operation, and then, during the same game, a third subtitle effect display (not shown) may be displayed at a predetermined timing (simultaneous with receipt of the second stop operation or a predetermined time has passed since receipt of the second stop operation) after the second stop operation is effectively accepted (when the second stop operation is accepted) upon receipt of one of the remaining two stop switches effectively accepting the second stop operation, and further, a fourth subtitle effect display (not shown) may be displayed at a predetermined timing (simultaneous with receipt of the third stop operation or a predetermined time has passed since receipt of the third stop operation) after the third stop operation is effectively accepted (when the third stop operation is accepted) upon receipt of the remaining one stop switch effectively accepting the third stop operation.

Comparing the percentage of cases where the subtitle effect display is triggered by the acceptance of the operation of the start lever 25 (including 0% and 100%, as below) with the percentage of cases where the subtitle effect display is triggered by the acceptance of the third stop operation, the percentage of cases where the subtitle effect display is triggered by the acceptance of the third stop operation is relatively higher. This is in consideration of the psychology of the player who wants to concentrate on operating the stop switch after operating the start lever, and by relatively increasing the percentage of times the subtitle effect display is displayed after the third stop operation, it becomes easier for the player to pay attention to the subtitle effect display. Also, when the background image is a single-shot effect (an effect that starts and ends during one game), the subtitle effect display is rarely triggered by the acceptance of the first or second stop operation, but when the background image is a continuous effect (an effect that continues over multiple games), the subtitle effect display is often triggered by the acceptance of the first or second stop operation. For example, comparing the case where the subtitle display is displayed when the background image is a single effect (case H1) with the case where the subtitle display is displayed when the background image is a continuous effect (case H2), the rate at which the subtitle display is displayed in response to the acceptance of the first stop operation is relatively higher in case H2 than in case H1. This is because continuous effects play the role of notifying players of a specific game result (such as winning the AT) that is of great interest to the player, and the content of the effect is often advanced with each acceptance of a stop operation to draw attention to the content of the effect, so it is easy to provide an opportunity to display the subtitle display in response to the progress of the continuous effect, triggered by the acceptance of the first stop operation or the second stop operation. By displaying the subtitle display, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the content of the continuous effect (the progress of the effect).

If multiple subtitle effects are displayed on the image display section DP during one game, the subtitle effect displayed first will be deleted from the image display section DP at the time the subtitle effect displayed later is displayed. (hidden). That is, the subtitle effect display that was displayed first is erased from the image display section DP before the subtitle effect display that is displayed later (including at approximately the same timing). For example, in the above example, the first subtitle effect display JD1 that was displayed first is hidden before the second subtitle effect display JD2 is displayed, and the second subtitle effect display JD2 is hidden from the third subtitle effect display JD2. The subtitle effect display is hidden before being displayed, and the third subtitle effect display is hidden before the fourth subtitle effect display is displayed. In this way, by making the subtitle effect display that was displayed first disappear before the subtitle effect display that is displayed later, the subtitle effect can be appropriately displayed as the game or background image progresses. Subtitle performance can be performed while switching the performance display. Therefore, it is possible to execute a subtitle performance with a good tempo that is consistent with the progress of the game and the background image.

The subtitle effect display may be hidden after a predetermined time has elapsed after being displayed, or may be hidden when a predetermined switch is operated. , the subtitle effect may be hidden when the next subtitle effect display is displayed. For example, the subtitle effect display that was displayed when the operation of the start lever 25 was accepted may be hidden when any one of the first to third stop operations was received, or when the stop operation was accepted. Irrespective of this, if a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed from the start of display, the subtitle display may be hidden, or if the next subtitle display is displayed even before the first stop operation is received, the subtitle display display may be It may be hidden immediately before being displayed. As a specific example, in a case where the first subtitle effect display JD1 is displayed when the start lever 25 operation is accepted, and the second subtitle effect display JD2 is displayed when the third stop operation is accepted, After receiving the third stop operation, first the first subtitle effect display JD1 may be hidden, and then the second subtitle effect display may be displayed.

The subtitle effect display may be displayed according to the movement (e.g., the movement of the mouth, eyes, or hands) of a character appearing in a background image. For example, in a case where the background image HG1 (moving image) starts to be displayed at the same time as the lever operation is performed, and a predetermined time (e.g., 1 second) has elapsed since the start, there is a scene (called scene A) in which the character CH1 in the background image HG1 moves his mouth, the first subtitle effect display JD1 may be displayed in accordance with scene A. In order to match the timing of scene A with the display timing of the first subtitle effect display JD1, the following method may be adopted. As a premise, in response to the result of an internal lottery or the like performed on the main control means side when the lever operation is accepted, the sub-main control means selects whether or not to execute the background image and subtitle effect display and the display contents, and as a result, it is decided to display the background image HG1 and the first subtitle effect display JD1.

In that case, first, the sub-main control means 200A transmits a command (referred to as command A) for transmitting the decision result to the sub-sub control means 200B. Upon receiving the command A, the sub-sub control means reads the image file of the background image HG1 and starts displaying the background image HG1 on the image display section DP, and also reads the image file of the first subtitle effect display JD1, The first subtitle effect display JD1 is displayed on the image display section DP in accordance with the timing of scene A (for example, determined from the number of frames up to scene A, the frame rate, etc.). Note that a time counter may be set and the timing of scene A may be measured using this counter. The counter may be set by the sub-main control means 200A or by the sub-sub control means 200B. When setting the counter in the sub-main control means 200A, the counter may be set when command A is sent, or the sub-main control means 200B may set the counter as a sub-command (referred to as command B) at the time when the sub-main control means 200B reads the image file of the background image HG1. This command B may be sent to the main control means 200A and set at the timing when the sub-main control means 200A receives it. Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed after setting the counter, a command (referred to as command C) for notifying the arrival of the time is transmitted to the sub-sub control means, and at the timing when this command C is received, the sub-sub control means 200B The subtitle effect display JD1 is displayed on the image display section DP. Note that the subtitle effect display is rendered on a layer on the nearer side (front side closer to the player) than the layer on which the background image is rendered. By doing so, even if the subtitle effect display is displayed superimposed on the background image, it is possible to sufficiently ensure the visibility of the subtitle effect display (particularly the telop display).

In the subtitle effect display, the content of the subtitle display (for example, the content of the subtitle display JT1 in the first subtitle effect display JD1 and the content of the subtitle display JT2 in the second subtitle effect display JD2) depends on what kind of content it is. However, it may be arranged so that it has no relation to the game result, or the degree of expectation of giving an advantageous game may differ depending on the content of the telop display. For example, when the content of the caption display JT2 is "The weather is getting cloudy!" (see Figure 63 (B)) and when it is "It's a perfect sunny day in Japan!!" (See Figure 64 (B)) In a certain case, it may be set so that it has no effect on the expectation of awarding an advantageous game in either case, or the expectation of awarding an advantageous game in the latter case than in the former case. The setting may be made to increase the degree. Further, the contents of the telop display may be changed in response to the operation of the enter button 55. Note that there are conversation effects and subtitle effects as effects in which the display contents change when the operation of the enter button 55 is accepted, but it is relatively more likely that the display contents change in response to the operation of the sub-buttons in the conversation effects than in the subtitle effects. The number of cases has increased. Further, in a pachinko machine, a conversation performance and a subtitle performance may be displayed during one change, and when configured in this way, the expectations of the conversation performance and the subtitle performance may not be related. For example, a conversation effect is displayed in red serifs, but a subtitle effect is displayed in blue letters. In particular, it is more suitable if a conversation effect is displayed before the reach effect and a subtitle effect is displayed after the reach effect, since the expected targets will be different. Further, it is also possible to consider a mode in which the level of expectation increases, such as the first subtitle effect display JD1 is in white text and the second subtitle effect display JD2 is in red text. Furthermore, although the second subtitle effect display JD2 is in red text, the third subtitle effect display may be in white text, which lowers the level of expectation. This aspect is suitable for use as a subtitle effect when the background image is in a manner to display failure. For example, when presenting whether or not to give advantageous benefits (in the case of slot machines, such as bonus winnings and AT winnings, and in the case of pachinko machines, presenting whether or not there will be a reach or not, or whether there will be a jackpot). ), when a subtitle effect (for example, the text "Let's go!") is displayed in red letters to increase expectations, the subsequent effect on whether or not to grant this advantageous benefit is incorrect. If the subtitles (for example, the words ``lost'') in scenes that indicate ``losing'' were to be displayed in red, it would be difficult to tell whether the player lost or was revived, so the word ``loser'' would be displayed in white. .

In addition, the characters displayed in the subtitle display may always have the same font (font and style), the same size (size), and the same color, or may vary depending on the gaming situation and the display timing of the subtitle display. The colors may be different. Further, depending on the font, size, color, etc., the degree of expectation for providing an advantageous game may vary. For example, in a subtitle display, the outer line (outline) of a character, the area inside the outer line, or both are displayed in blue, in addition to the normal color (black or white). A mode (also referred to as "blue caption display") and a mode in which the caption is displayed in red (also referred to as "red caption display") may be provided, and in that case, the red caption display is more advantageous than the blue caption display. It may be arranged so that the degree of expectation of giving a game increases.

As an example, in FIGS. 64(A) and 64(B), for the text "Nice weather looks like a good chance!" in the text display JT1, a blue text is displayed with the area inside the outline of the text blue, and in the text display JT2, the area inside the outline of the text is blue. For the phrase "Japan is perfectly sunny!!", an example of a red caption display in which the area inside the outline of the characters is red is shown. In this example, the size of the characters displayed in the red caption is made larger than the size of the characters displayed in the blue caption, and the font of the characters displayed in the red caption is changed, and these differences also indicate that the red caption is more advantageous. This suggests to the player that there is a high expectation that the game will be awarded. In addition, if multiple subtitle effects are displayed during one game, the text in the subtitle display that is displayed first will have one type of size and font, and the subtitle effects that will be displayed from the second onwards will be of the same size and font. Regarding the characters displayed in the subtitle display, there may be a plurality of types of characters having different sizes and fonts. When displaying multiple subtitle effects with different expectations for giving an advantageous game in one game, such as a blue caption display and a red caption display, the one with the higher expectation level is displayed later. It may be displayed from

The color of characters, etc. (colors other than normal colors) in the telop display is not limited to blue and red. For example, in addition to the blue telop display and the red telop display, a green telop display with green text and a rainbow telop display with rainbow colors may be provided. Then, the expectation level for awarding an advantageous game may be increased in the order of blue telop display < green telop display < red telop display < rainbow telop display. At this time, in the case of the telop display with the highest level of expectation (in this example, the rainbow telop display), it may be a guaranteed effect with the expectation level of 100% (for example, suggesting AT confirmation, bonus confirmation, jackpot confirmation, etc.). Note that in the case of a telop display that is displayed in a specific scene of a background image, characters and the like may not be displayed in a specific color. For example, when displaying a subtitle with content related to lyrics in a scene where a character sings on the background screen, a rainbow subtitle may not be displayed. In addition, the telop display (rainbow telop display) that is the final effect is set to be hidden when the player operates a predetermined switch, etc. It will not be hidden due to the passage of time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused due to the confirmed performance disappearing due to the passage of time. Note that when the demo screen is displayed on the image display section DP, the rainbow telop display that has been displayed until then may be hidden. The telop display of other colors (for example, the blue telop display) may be hidden because a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the display.

The telop display in the subtitle effect display is usually composed of words and sentences in characters whose meanings can be understood by the player. However, it may be composed of characters whose meanings cannot be understood, such as characters written in an ancient language, garbled characters, or characters containing figures or symbols (▽, ●, *), etc. When a subtitle display containing characters whose meaning cannot be understood is displayed, the expectation level for giving an advantageous game increases compared to when a subtitle display consisting of characters whose meaning is understandable is displayed. You can do it like this. In addition, character strings (sentences) in the caption display are basically displayed in one line without line breaks, but if they are displayed over two or more lines with line breaks (if they are composed of two or more sentences) ) may be provided.

The characters in the subtitle display in the subtitle display are often displayed in a bare state (not surrounded by a frame or the like), but they may also be displayed in a state surrounded by a frame or the like. As an example, FIG. 65(A) shows a mode in which the characters "The weather is getting cloudy!" in the telop display JT2 are displayed surrounded by a frame (referred to as a "background frame") JW1. The illustrated background frame JW1 has a rectangular outline, and an area inside the outline is decorated with a predetermined pattern. The form of the background frame (the shape of the outline and the color and pattern of the area inside the outline) is not limited to these forms, but can be any form (including a form without an outline). The form of the background frame may always be the same, or may vary depending on the game situation or the display timing of the conversation effect display. Further, depending on the aspect of the background frame, the degree of expectation of giving an advantageous game, etc. may be different. For example, in addition to the mode in which the area inside the outline of the background frame is displayed in normal color, the mode in which it is displayed in blue (this is also included in the blue ticker display) and the mode in which it is displayed in red (this is also included in the red ticker display). (included in the display) may be provided so that the expectation level for awarding an advantageous game is higher when the game is displayed in red than when it is displayed in blue.

If an error occurs while the subtitle effect display is being displayed on the image display section DP, an error notification display for notifying the occurrence of the error may be displayed on the image display section DP. In this case, the error notification display is rendered in a layer that is closer to the layer than the layer in which the subtitle effect display is rendered, but is displayed so as not to overlap with the subtitle effect display. As an example, in FIG. 65(B), the HP error notification display that notifies the occurrence of an HP error is placed within the screen area of the image display section DP so that it does not overlap with the subtitle production display JD2, and is located within the area where the subtitle production display JD2 is displayed. An example of what is displayed in the upper area is shown. In this way, when the subtitle effect display and error notification display are displayed on the image display section DP at the same time, the error notification display is displayed without overlapping with the subtitle effect display (however, the background image (which may include characters) ) may overlap with the error notification display and at least a portion thereof may not be clearly visible), and the visibility of the contents of the caption display is ensured (it is also possible to provide a case where at least part of the caption display is hidden by the error notification display). possible). The types of errors when performing an error notification display are the same as those described in the explanation of the conversation performance. Note that depending on the type of error, the error may be notified on the entire screen (such as a PAM error or an error on the sub-control side), so in this case, the telop display may not be visible. In addition, even when the above-mentioned reel rotation stop suggestion image is displayed, it does not overlap with the subtitle effect, so the visibility of the subtitle effect is ensured. (some parts may not be clearly visible). Since the reel rotation stop suggestion image is not an error, the moving image related to the subtitle performance continues to be executed. For this reason, if the text portion of the subtitle performance is not visible, it becomes difficult to understand the progress of the performance. With such a configuration, it is possible to alert the players and make them understand the content of the performance. In addition, even if a volume change image is displayed due to a volume change button being accepted during a game (while the reels are rotating in the case of a slot machine, while changing in the case of a pachinko machine), the text part of the subtitle effect will be visible. It is possible.

A subtitle effect display may be displayed on the image display section DP when an assist effect is displayed on the image display section DP. As an example, FIG. 66(A) shows a mode in which a subtitle effect display is displayed when a push navigation effect display (push order navigation effect display) is displayed on the image display portion DP. In the case of this example, when the push navigation effect display that informs the pressing order of "middle left/right" from the first stop operation to the third stop operation is displayed in the lower area of the screen of the image display section DP, the 1 subtitle effect display JD1 is displayed. The first subtitle effect display JD1 is displayed so as to overlap with the push navigation effect display in the lower area of the screen, which is the same position as the area where the push navigation effect display is displayed. At this time, the first subtitle effect display JD1 is drawn and displayed on a layer deeper than the layer in which the push navigation effect display is drawn (on the back side away from the player). Therefore, while some of the characters in the telop display JT1 are hidden by the push navigation effect display and cannot be seen, the visibility of the push navigation effect display, which is of great interest to players, is ensured. In addition, the subtitle effect display may be displayed in a different area from the display area of the push navigation effect display so as not to overlap with the push navigation effect display (however, the background image (which may include characters) may be displayed in a different area from the push navigation effect display. at least some parts may not be clearly visible). Further, when the push navigation effect display is displayed, the subtitle effect display may not be displayed. In particular, when displaying a subtitle display effect triggered by reception of the third stop operation, it is preferable to display the subtitle display effect after the push navigation effect display becomes hidden. By doing this, the player can concentrate on operating the stop switch while paying attention to the navigation content while the push navigation effect display is displayed, and only turn on the subtitles after the operation is completed and the push navigation effect display is hidden. It becomes possible to pay attention to the performance display. In addition, in addition to the mode of notifying the push order of "middle left/right", the push navigation effect display includes a mode of notifying the push order of "left middle right", a mode of notifying the push order of "right middle left", etc. There are multiple types of aspects.

When the subtitle effect display is displayed on the image display section DP, the subtitle effect sound is output from the audio output section in synchronization with the display timing (display start timing). The subtitle effect audio is basically audio with the same content as the content of the subtitle display in the subtitle effect display. For example, when the content of the subtitle display JT2 in the second subtitle display JD2 is "Perfect Japan is sunny!!", the corresponding subtitle display audio is "Kanpekin ni honbare desu". On the other hand, a case may be provided in which audio having a content different from the content of the telop display in the subtitle presentation display is output as the subtitle presentation audio. For example, as shown in FIG. 66(B), if the content of the caption display JT2 is garbled or meaningless content such as "▲/%*p・n↑→?aa≫!", It is also possible to output subtitle production audio with another understandable content such as "Kanpekinani Honbare desu". When the content of the subtitle display in the subtitle performance display is different from the content of the subtitle performance audio, the level of expectation that an advantageous game will be given may be increased compared to the case where both contents match. Furthermore, if the telop display has meaningless content such as garbled characters, the level of expectation may be higher than when the telop display has content that can be understood. In addition, if the telop display has meaningless content such as garbled characters, the size, font, color, etc. of the characters of the telop display are displayed in a manner that is unlikely to provide an advantageous game. In this way, by displaying subtitles that are garbled but have low expectations, it becomes unclear whether expectations are high or low, and players who see it feel uncomfortable. can be done. In addition, it is possible to surprise a player who has the impression that the level of expectation for such a subtitle effect display is low due to the gap between the level of expectation and the actual level of expectation. Further, a case may be provided in which when a caption with meaningless content is displayed, when the enter button 55 is operated, the garbled characters are removed and the displayed content is changed to an understandable meaning. Further, the typographical error effect may be performed using an effect such as displaying a garbled subtitle. For example, in a case where the content of the subtitle display JT2 in the second subtitle display JD2 is "Perfect Japan is sunny!!", in a typographical error, the content of the subtitle display JT2 in the second subtitle display JD2 is "It's perfect weather in Japan!!" and "perfect" is displayed as "wall". In this case as well, while the level of expectation is higher than that of a normal telop display, the font size, font, color, etc. of the telop display are displayed in a manner with a lower level of expectation to give an advantageous game, so that the actual expectation is lowered. It is possible to give surprises by the gap between the height and the degree.

As mentioned above, the conversation production display and the subtitle production display are similar in that both include the display of characters related to the character's remarks. As a production display in which characters are displayed, there are some that display the title characters of a certain production such as a continuous production when that production starts, and some that display characters in a production (cut-in production) in which an image unrelated to the previous flow is inserted into a background image. However, these production displays differ from the conversation production display and the subtitle production display in that the content of the displayed characters is not directly related to the character's remarks. When comparing the conversation production display and the subtitle production display, the conversation production display has more types of modes (colors and sizes of characters, etc.) that suggest differences in the expectation of granting advantageous games than the subtitle production display. In addition, the conversation production display is displayed in the upper area of the screen of the image display unit DP than the subtitle production display. As a general tendency, the conversation production display is relatively more often displayed in response to the acceptance of the operation of the start lever 25, and the subtitle production display is relatively more often displayed in response to the acceptance of the third stop operation. For example, if there are 80 types of conversational performance displays and 70 types of subtitle performance displays, approximately 75% of the 80 types of conversational performance displays are displayed upon receipt of the start lever operation, and approximately 80% of the 70 types of subtitle performance displays are displayed upon receipt of the third stop operation. Also, the number of characters of the subtitle display in the subtitle performance display is relatively greater than the number of characters of the dialogue display in the conversational performance displays. For example, if the average number of characters of each dialogue display in the 80 types of conversational performance displays is N, the average number of characters of each subtitle display in the 70 types of subtitle performance displays is about 1.5 x N. The conversational performance displays are relatively often displayed during normal times (normal game play state) such as during non-AT, and the subtitle performance displays are relatively often displayed during continuous performance execution or freeze. For example, approximately 70% of the 80 types of conversational performance displays are displayed during normal times, and approximately 75% of the 70 types of subtitle performance displays are displayed during continuous performance execution or freeze.

(Expectation creation)
The expectation presentation is a presentation that suggests to the player the expectation of an advantageous game. In the expectation presentation, an expectation presentation display for the expectation presentation is displayed on the image display unit DP at a predetermined timing. The expectation presentation display is, for example, a display whose display mode can be changed according to the expectation of an advantageous game, and is configured to include a display object (also called an "object") having a predetermined form. As an example of an expectation presentation display, an expectation presentation display OD1 is shown in FIG. 67.

The expectation effect display OD1 includes a heart-shaped object OJ1 displayed in a predetermined area of the image display section DP. The display mode of the object OJ1 differs depending on the degree of expectation of providing an advantageous game. Specifically, the color of the area inside the outline of object OJ1 changes depending on the expectation level. In this example, in addition to a mode in which the color of the area inside the outline of object OJ1 is a normal color (for example, white), a mode in which it is displayed in blue (also referred to as "blue object display"), and a mode in which it is displayed in yellow. (also referred to as "yellow object display"), green (also referred to as "green object display"), red (also referred to as "red object display"), blue (also referred to as "red object display"), blue (also referred to as "red object display"), (also referred to as "blue object display"), a mode in which the object is displayed in a specific pattern (also referred to as "pattern object display"), and a mode in which it is displayed in rainbow colors (also referred to as "rainbow object display"). The order of blue object display < yellow object display < green object display < red object display < pattern object display < rainbow object display is set so that the degree of expectation for providing an advantageous game increases. In addition, in the case of the expectation performance display that has the highest expectation level (in this example, the rainbow object display), it is set as a guaranteed performance with 100% expectation level (for example, suggesting AT confirmation, bonus confirmation, jackpot confirmation, etc.). There is.

Regarding the timing at which the expectation effect display is displayed, any timing triggered (display trigger) by the operation of a specific switch controlled by the main control means, such as the bet switch, start lever 25, or stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c, can be appropriately set as the display timing (display start timing) of the expectation effect display. For example, the display timing of the expectation effect display can be a specific timing after the lever operation is accepted, a specific timing after the first stop operation is accepted, a specific timing after the second stop operation is accepted, or a specific timing after the third stop operation is accepted. In addition, in the case of a pachinko machine, the timing at which a specific time has passed since the start hole winning, the timing at which a specific time has passed since the big winning hole opening, or the timing at which a specific time has passed since the big winning hole winning can be set as the display timing of the expectation effect display.

FIG. 67 illustrates a mode in which the expectation level effect display OD1 and the second subtitle effect display JD2 are simultaneously displayed on the image display section DP. In this way, the expectation level effect display and the subtitle effect display may be displayed on the image display section DP at the same time, or may be displayed separately so that the display times do not overlap. Comparing the expectation level effect display and the subtitle effect display, the number of stages (for example, the number of colors) indicating the difference in expectation level is greater in the expectation level effect display than in the subtitle effect display. This is because the subtitle effect display also has the function of increasing the level of understanding of the progress of the game depending on the content of the subtitle display, so the expectation level effect display is mainly used to inform people of the difference in the level of expectation. This is because the number of stages that indicate differences in expectation levels may be smaller than in comparison with . In addition, the rainbow object display for the expectation level effect display and the rainbow caption display for the subtitle effect display both have in common that they represent confirmed effects, but in the case of other colors, the same color does not necessarily have the same expectation level. do not have. For example, when comparing a blue object display as an expectation effect display and a blue telop display as a subtitle effect display, the blue telop display is set to suggest a higher level of expectation than the blue object display. Note that the expectation level effect display and the telop display may be superimposed, and in that case, the telop display is displayed in the front (on the nearer layer). Further, when the expectation level effect display and the telop display overlap, it is difficult to understand if they have the same color, so they may be displayed while avoiding the same color.

In addition, as a general trend, differences in the color of the expectation effect display are related to differences in the internal lottery results (winning combinations) (for example, the red object display corresponds to the winning of a rare combination). ), and the difference in color between the subtitle effect display and the conversation effect display is often related to the degree of expectation of winning in a lottery other than the internal lottery, such as an AT win or a jackpot. The shape of the object in the subtitle effect display is not limited to the illustrated heart shape, but can be in various shapes. For example, a balloon-shaped object may be provided in addition to a heart-shaped object. Moreover, as another aspect, a chair-shaped object and a desk-shaped object may be provided, or a bottle-shaped object and a cup-shaped object may be provided. It should be noted that there are more types of telop displays in the subtitle effect display (types based on differences in the content of the telop) than there are types of objects in the expectation level effect display (types based on differences in shape). This is because, as described above, the subtitle effect display also has the function of increasing the level of understanding of the progress of the game, etc., depending on the content of the subtitle display. By increasing the number of types of subtitles displayed, various game situations can be explained. In the case of FIG. 67, there is no mode in which a specific pattern is used as the color of characters, etc. in the subtitle effect display, but such a mode may be provided. However, even if the characters of the telop are patterned, there is a risk that the player may not be able to visually recognize that the characters are small because of the small size of the characters. Therefore, when a pattern is used for characters or the like in the subtitle effect display, an expectation level effect display of the same pattern may be displayed on the image display section DP together with the subtitle effect display.

(GET production)
For example, in a notification game during AT (a game in which push navigation is executed), the GET effect informs the player that when a push winning combination such as a small bell winning combination is achieved, game value (game medals) will be awarded. This is the production shown in . In the GET performance, a GET performance display for the GET performance is displayed on the image display section DP at a predetermined timing. The GET performance display is a display for appealing to the player that a gaming value will be given. As an example of the GET effect display, GET effect display GD1 is shown in FIGS. 68(D) and 68(E).

The GET effect display GD1 is composed of a stroke of the characters "GET!" and is displayed in a predetermined area of the image display section DP (in this example, the area is approximately in the center of the screen, but this can be changed as appropriate). When the GET effect display is displayed on the image display section DP, the GET effect sound is output from the audio output section in synchronization with the display timing (display start timing). The GET effect sound is a sound to appeal to the player that the game value will be given, and for example, it may be the sound ``Get'' which has the same content as the characters ``GET!'' in the GET effect display GD1 ( (The content may be different from the text content.)

The execution timing of the GET effect (GET effect display GD1 and GET effect sound) will be explained with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69. As shown in FIG. 68(A), when the push navigation effect display ND1 notifying the pressing order of "center left/right" is displayed on the image display section DP, the first stop operation is accepted according to the push navigation effect display ND1. Then, as shown in FIG. 68(B), the push navigation effect display ND1 changes to a mode that notifies the pressing order of "left and right" and is displayed on the image display section DP. Here, when the second stop operation is accepted according to the push navigation effect display ND1, as shown in FIG. displayed on the department DP. Furthermore, when the third stop operation is accepted (the operation part of the stop switch that accepted the third stop operation (in this example, the right stop switch) is pressed, and the stop switch is switched from the OFF state to the ON state, ) The push navigation effect display ND1 is hidden.

After the push navigation effect display ND1 is hidden, the provision of game value (payout of game medals by the hopper and addition of the number of credits) and the GET effect are executed. Specifically, when the third stop operation is canceled (the press of the operation part of the stop switch that received the third stop operation is released, and the stop switch is switched from the on state to the off state), the game Addition of value, output of GET effect sound, and display of GET effect display are started. In FIG. 69, these start timings are substantially the same, but the start timings may be shifted slightly. The GET effect sound that has started to be output ends at a time point before the time point at which the provision of game value ends. After the output of the GET performance sound ends, the provision of gaming value ends, and the GET performance display is hidden at a time later than the time when the provision of gaming value ends. In this way, by making the display end timing of the GET effect display later than the output end timing of the GET effect sound and the end timing of the game value provision, the player is given the game value by listening to the GET effect sound. In addition to being able to pay attention to the GET effect and seeing the GET effect display after listening to the GET effect audio and after the game value has been awarded, you can reconfirm that the game value has been awarded, and feel a sense of elation. It becomes possible to obtain.

In a game in which a GET effect is performed, a subtitle effect display may be displayed on the image display section DP in response to reception of the third stop operation. In FIG. 68(E), a second subtitle effect display JD2 (telop) is displayed in a lower area of the screen than the area where the GET effect display GD1 is displayed in the image display section DP without overlapping with the GET effect display GD1. An example in which display JT2) is displayed is shown. The subtitle effect display that is displayed upon reception of the third stop operation must be displayed at the time when the GET effect display becomes hidden, that is, the subtitle effect is displayed at a time before the time when the GET effect display becomes hidden. Preferably, the display of the display is started. By doing so, the player's attention can be immediately directed to the subtitle effect display at the time when the GET effect display becomes hidden. In addition, in the example of FIG. 69, the display start timing of the subtitle effect display is set to be located between the end time of the game value provision and the time point when the GET effect display is hidden, but the timing is not limited to this. It's not something you can do. For example, at any timing within the period from when the third stop operation is received until the GET effect display is hidden (also referred to as the "subtitle effect display start suitable period"), or before the third stop operation is received. The subtitle effect display may be started at a predetermined timing. As mentioned above, all the push navigation effect displays disappear when the third stop operation is accepted, the GET effect display is not yet displayed when the third stop operation is accepted, and the subtitle effect display is not displayed when the third stop operation is accepted. The display starts at a point before or after the start of displaying the GET effect display. The subtitle effect display that started displaying when the third stop operation was accepted or at a point before that will continue to be displayed even after the third stop operation is accepted, but the push navigation effect display will be triggered by the third stop operation being accepted. disappears, so the subtitle effect display can be clearly seen without being hidden behind the push navigation effect display. Additionally, the GET effect display is displayed when the third stop operation is released, but this GET effect display is originally displayed in a position that does not overlap with the subtitle effect display, and disappears over time, so the subtitle effect display is displayed after the GET effect is displayed. It is also easier to see. Therefore, even if a push navigation effect display is displayed or a blessing effect display (including a GET effect display) to improve the player's satisfaction level, the player cannot understand the content of the caption display of the subtitle effect display. It becomes possible to understand.

(scene switching effect)
The scene switching effect is a display effect consisting of a plurality of scenes that may be switched in response to the operation of the start lever or the operation of the stop switch (for example, displayed on the image display unit DP). . Each scene is composed of a progress effect in which the display content changes as time passes, and a cyclic effect that can be displayed after the progress effect ends and the same display content is repeated. Progress effects are mainly composed of moving images, and circulating images are composed of moving images or still images. The scene switching performance may be configured as a single performance or as a continuous performance. As examples of scene switching effects, a first scene switching effect is shown in FIG. 70(A), and a second scene switching effect is shown in FIG. 70(B).

The first scene switching effect is composed of four scenes from the first scene to the fourth scene, as shown in FIG. 70(A). The first scene consists of a progression effect P1 and a circulation effect L1, the second scene consists of a progression effect P2 and a circulation effect L2, the third scene consists of a progress effect P3 and a circulation effect L3, and the fourth scene consists of a progress effect P3 and a circulation effect L3. The scene is composed of a progress effect P4 and a circulation effect L4. In the first scene switching effect, when the start lever 25 is operated, the first scene progress effect P1 starts to be displayed. If a predetermined time (time T1) passes without the first stop operation being accepted after the display of the progress effect P1 starts, the display of the progress effect P1 ends and the display of the circulation effect L1 starts. This circulation effect L1 is continuously displayed until the first stop operation is accepted.

Thereafter, when the first stop operation is effectively accepted, the first scene is switched from the second scene to the second scene, and the progress effect P2 of the second scene is started to be displayed. Note that if the first stop operation is effectively accepted before the time T1 has elapsed after the first scene progress effect P1 has started displaying, the cycle effect L1 will not be displayed and the process will continue from the first scene to the first scene. The display switches to two scenes, and the progress effect P2 of the second scene starts to be displayed. If a predetermined time (time T2) elapses without the second stop operation being accepted after the display of the progress effect P2 starts, the display of the progress effect P2 ends and the display of the circulation effect L2 is started. This circulation effect L2 is continuously displayed until the second stop operation is accepted.

After that, when the second stop operation is validly accepted, the acceptance triggers a switch from the second scene to the third scene, and the display of the third scene's progress presentation P3 begins. Note that if the second stop operation is validly accepted after the display of the second scene's progress presentation P2 has begun and before time T2 has elapsed, the second scene switches to the third scene without displaying the circular presentation L2, and the display of the third scene's progress presentation P3 begins. If a predetermined time (time T3) elapses after the display of the progress presentation P3 begins without the third stop operation being accepted, at that point the display of the progress presentation P3 ends and the display of the circular presentation L3 begins. This circular presentation L3 continues to be displayed until the third stop operation is accepted.

Thereafter, when the third stop operation is effectively accepted, the third scene is switched to the fourth scene, and the progress effect P4 of the fourth scene is started to be displayed. In addition, if the third stop operation is effectively accepted before the time T3 has elapsed after the progress effect P3 of the third scene has started to be displayed, the cycle effect L3 will not be displayed and the process will continue from the third scene to the third scene. The display switches to 4 scenes, and the progress effect P4 of the 4th scene starts to be displayed. If a predetermined time (time T4) elapses without any bet operation, lever operation, liquidation operation, etc. (collectively referred to as "next game operation") for the next game being accepted after the display of the progress effect P4 starts, the elapsed time point The display of the progress effect P4 ends and the display of the circulation effect L4 starts. This cyclic effect L4 is continuously displayed until the next game operation is accepted (it may be ended after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the display).

In the first scene switching performance, comparing the display continuation time (time T2) of the progress performance P2 of the second scene that is switched by the acceptance of the first stop operation, the display continuation time (time T3) of the progress performance P3 of the third scene that is switched by the acceptance of the second stop operation, and the display continuation time (time T4) of the progress performance P4 of the fourth scene that is switched by the acceptance of the third stop operation, the time T4 is set relatively longer than the times T2 and T3. This is because after the first stop operation or the second stop operation, it is difficult for the player to pay attention to the content of the progress performance because he or she is concentrating on performing the next stop operation, whereas after the third stop operation, the stop operation is completed, so the player has more time to pay attention to the content of the progress performance. In other words, by setting the time of the progress performance after the third stop operation relatively longer, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the content of the progress performance after the third stop operation and improve the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, by relatively lengthening the duration of the progression presentation after the third stop operation, it becomes easier to suggest game results, etc., in the progression presentation after the third stop. This tendency is not limited to a specific scene change presentation, but is a tendency that extends to all of the multiple types of scene change presentations. For example, if there are a total of 50 types of scene change presentations performed during continuous presentations and a total of 10 types of scene change presentations performed during single presentations, then time T4 is set relatively longer than times T2 and T3 as an overall tendency (average value) for a total of 60 types of scene change presentations.

In addition, in the first scene switching performance, the first scene can be switched from the first scene to the second scene regardless of which stop switch among the three stop switches on the left center right receives the first stop operation. . Similarly, no matter which stop switch accepts the second stop operation, the scene is switched from the second scene to the third scene, and no matter which stop switch accepts the third stop operation, the scene is switched from the third scene to the third scene. Switch to the 4th scene. By doing so, the control processing in the sub-control means can be simplified. That is, each time each stop operation is accepted, first, second, and third stop acceptance commands are sent from the main control means to the sub control means, and the sub control means receives the first, second, and third stop commands based on these commands. You can know that the operation has been accepted. The first, second, and third stop acceptance commands also include information about which stop switch was operated. However, in the first scene switching performance, the scene can be switched without referring to that information as long as the number of stop acceptance commands in one game is known. Therefore, it is possible to omit referring to information regarding which stop switch has been operated, and thereby it is possible to simplify the processing for scene switching. Furthermore, regardless of the order in which the player operates the three stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c while playing the game, the scene can be switched at an appropriate timing, so that the game progresses smoothly. This makes it easier to ensure consistency between the performance and the content of the performance. In addition, if the sub-control means knows that it is a stop reception command, it can determine the number of stop reception commands based on the number of stop commands received. There is no particular need for information indicating whether the Therefore, as information included in each stop command, it is possible to omit the information indicating the number of stop operation receptions.In this case, it is possible to reduce the amount of information in the stop reception command, and the memory is also saved. It is also possible to reduce storage capacity.

The second scene switching effect is composed of two scenes, from a first scene to a second scene, as shown in FIG. 70(B). The first scene is composed of a progression performance P11 and a circulation performance L11, and the second scene is composed of a progression performance P12 and a circulation performance L12. In the second scene switching effect, the display of the first scene progress effect P11 is started in response to reception of the start lever operation. If a predetermined time (time T11) passes after the display of the progress effect P11 starts and until the third stop operation is accepted, the display of the progress effect P11 ends and the circular effect L11 starts to be displayed. . This circulation effect L11 is continuously displayed until the third stop operation is accepted. In addition, in the second scene switching performance, even if the first stop operation is accepted or the second stop operation is accepted, the scene will not be switched based on this.

After the display of the circulation effect L11 starts, if the third stop operation is effectively accepted after receiving the first stop operation and the second stop operation, the reception is used as a trigger to switch from the first scene to the second scene, and the second stop operation is performed. The scene progress effect P12 starts to be displayed. Note that if the third stop operation is effectively accepted before the time T11 has elapsed after the first scene progress effect P11 has started displaying, the cycle effect L11 will not be displayed and the process will continue from the first scene to the first scene. The display switches to two scenes, and the progress effect P12 of the second scene starts to be displayed. When a predetermined time (time T12) elapses without receiving the next game operation after the start of the display of the progress effect P12, the display of the progress effect P12 ends and the display of the circulation effect L12 is started. This cyclic effect L12 is continuously displayed until the next game operation is accepted (it may be ended after a predetermined time has elapsed after the start of the display).

In the second scene switching performance, no matter which stop switch among the three stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c on the left-center right side receives the first stop operation, the first stop operation is changed from the first scene to the second scene. It cannot be switched to. Similarly, no matter which stop switch receives the second stop operation, the first scene will not be switched to the second scene. On the other hand, if the third stop operation is accepted, the first scene is switched to the second scene regardless of which stop switch receives the third stop operation. For example, if the middle stop switch 26b receives the first stop operation or the second stop operation, the scene cannot be switched to the second scene, but if the middle stop switch 26b receives the third stop operation, the scene can be switched to the second scene. . Further, when the middle stop switch 26b receives the third stop operation, the scene is switched to the second scene, and when the left stop switch 26a or the right stop switch 26c receives the third stop operation, the scene is also switched to the second scene. By doing so, the control processing in the sub-control means can be simplified. In other words, it is omitted to refer to the information about which stop switch was operated, which is included in the first, second, and third stop acceptance commands that are sent from the main control means to the sub-control means each time each stop operation is accepted. Since the scene can be switched without changing the scene, the process for switching the scene can be simplified. Furthermore, regardless of the order in which the player operates the three stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c while playing the game, the scene can be switched at an appropriate timing, so that the game progresses smoothly. This makes it easier to ensure consistency between the performance and the content of the performance.

As described above, in the second scene switching effect, whether the first stop operation is accepted or the second stop operation is accepted, the scene will not be switched based on this. In this embodiment, there are other scene switching effects other than the first or second scene switching effects, but as a general trend, in the scene switching effects, the scene is switched when the third stop operation is accepted. When comparing the case where the scene changes when the first stop operation or the second stop operation is accepted, the case where the scene changes when the third stop operation is accepted is better than the case where the scene changes when the first stop operation or the second stop operation is accepted. The rate of scene switching is relatively higher than the case where the scene switches due to reception (the former case can be set to 0%, and the latter case to 100%). This is because after the first stop operation or the second stop operation, it is difficult for the player to pay attention to the contents of the progress effect because the player concentrates on performing the next stop operation, whereas the third stop operation This is done in consideration of the fact that after the operation, the player has completed the stop operation, so the player can feel at ease and can easily pay attention to the contents of the progress performance. That is, by setting a relatively high rate of scene switching triggered by the third stop operation, the player's interest in the content of the progress performance after the third stop operation is increased, and the interest of the game is improved. becomes possible. In addition, by setting a relatively high rate of scene switching triggered by the third stop operation, it becomes easier to suggest the game result in the progress performance after the third stop.

(Blackout)
The blackout effect is a display effect that makes the display appear less visible. The blackout effect is executed, for example, when a predetermined effect display suggests a game result that is unfavorable to the player (for example, no AT win, no bonus win, no AT top-up win, no big win in pachinko machines, etc.). The blackout effect is often executed when the final scene of a continuous effect is displayed, but it can also be executed in a single effect. An example of the blackout effect is shown in FIG. 71.

FIG. 71(A) shows the display state of the image display section DP immediately before the darkening effect is executed. In this example, the image display section DP includes a final scene display RD1 indicating the final scene of the continuous production, a subtitle production display JD3 having a subtitle display JT3 with the content "Is there a storm tomorrow?", and the number of remaining games in AT ( A first region RY1 indicating "23G remaining") and a second region RY2 indicating the name of the game state ("Decisive Battle Stage") are displayed. The continuous performance is, for example, displaying a moving image in which the character CH1 challenges something over a plurality of games. Furthermore, the final scene display RD1 depicts the character CH1 who has failed in the challenge hanging his head, which suggests that a disadvantageous game result has been obtained for the player. Furthermore, although the audio is output at the start of the final scene display RD1, the output of the audio may be terminated when performing a darkening effect for the final scene display RD1. With such a configuration, the absence of sound can clearly indicate to the player that the game is over. It goes without saying that when an error occurs in this state, an error sound is output.

FIG. 71(B) shows the display state of the image display section DP when the darkening effect is executed. In the blackout effect of this example, the final scene display RD1 is displayed so as to become dark as a whole and to reduce visibility. Furthermore, the visibility of the subtitle effect display JD3 is also reduced. On the other hand, in the first region RY1 and the second region RY2, the original brightness is maintained and visibility has not deteriorated. By doing this, it is possible to give the impression to the player that a game result that is disadvantageous to the player has been obtained, while ensuring the visibility of information regarding subsequent games, so that the contents can be communicated to the player. It becomes possible to notify clearly. The area (also referred to as a "non-dark area") in which visibility is prevented from decreasing even during a dark change effect in the image display section DP is not limited to the first area RY1 and the second area RY2. In the case of slot machines, the areas that display the number of credits, the area that displays the number of bets, the area that displays the number of games played, the area that displays the number of game values acquired, the area that displays sub effects such as mini-games, etc. are hidden. In the case of a pachinko machine, it can be a blackout area, and in the case of a pachinko machine, an area where a hold display is displayed, an area where a fluctuating pattern (so-called mini pattern) different from the decorative pattern is displayed, an area where the number of holds is displayed, and the area where the floating hold is displayed. It is possible to make the area showing the icon or the like a non-darkening area. Furthermore, the mini symbol is also referred to as the second symbol, and is a symbol that is always displayed even if the first symbol disappears due to a reach effect, etc., and it represents the progress of the game. This is a symbol that allows the player to always understand the progress of the game.

Furthermore, if a predetermined period of time elapses without any next game operation after the blackout effect is executed, the visibility of the final scene display RD1 may be further reduced (for example, made darker). good. By doing so, it becomes possible for the player to distinguish and recognize a blackout as a result of continuous performance and a blackout due to no progress in the game so as not to misunderstand. Note that instead of reducing the visibility in two stages, the visibility may be reduced gradually over time.

A layered structure may be used to reduce the visibility of the display in a blackout effect. For example, the first layer that depicts the final scene display RD1 is placed on the back side, the second layer that depicts the subtitle display JD3 is placed on the near side, and the first layer RY1 is placed further on the near side. and a third layer that depicts the second region RY2 (a layer that depicts the first region RY and a layer that depicts the second region RY2 may be separated) are arranged. Then, at the time of blackout effect, a fourth layer is placed between the second layer and the third layer, and by processing to reduce the brightness of the entire area of the fourth layer, the final scene display RD1 and subtitle effect display JD3 are The visibility of the first region RY1 and the second region RY2 can be maintained while reducing the visibility.

Instead of reducing the brightness of the fourth layer, it is possible to reduce visibility by increasing the opacity of the fourth layer or by drawing many thin lines or fine patterns on the fourth layer. good. Instead of using layers, visibility may be reduced by applying blurring processing such as mosaic to the image of the final scene display RD1. Furthermore, visibility may be reduced by lowering the brightness of the backlight of the image display section DP. In this case, power consumption can be reduced by lowering the brightness of the backlight. Further, in the example of FIG. 71(B), the subtitle effect display JD3 with reduced visibility is displayed as is, but it may be hidden during the dark effect.

If a player obtains an advantageous gaming result during a continuous performance (for example, an AT win, a bonus win, an AT additional win, a jackpot on a pachinko machine, etc.), the player will receive an advantageous gaming result in the final scene of the continuous performance. In many cases, a display (also referred to as a "success display") indicating that the result has been obtained is displayed, and in that case, no blackout effect is performed. On the other hand, even though an advantageous game result has been obtained, a display suggesting that an unfavorable game result has been obtained (also referred to as a "failure display") is displayed for a time, and then a display indicating that an unfavorable game result has been obtained is displayed. In some cases, a display (also called a "resurrection display") indicating that the item has been obtained may be made. In this case, a darkening effect may be executed while the failure display is being displayed. If a blackout effect is executed while a failure display is being displayed, and then a recovery display is to be displayed, the blackout effect is ended before the recovery display is displayed. By doing so, the revival display can be displayed while ensuring visibility, so that the player can clearly recognize that an advantageous game result has been obtained.

Furthermore, an advantageous game result is given when a failure display, a blackout effect, and a resurrection display occur (even if there is no blackout effect), and an advantageous game result is given when a success display is performed without a resurrection display. Comparatively, when there is a resurrection display, the game results are more advantageous (for example, winning in a specialized zone where AT additions are likely to occur, AT winnings with a large number of initial games, jackpots with a large number of rounds on pachinko machines, etc.) , a probability fluctuation jackpot in which the jackpot probability is high) may be relatively more likely to occur. By doing this, even if a failure display or a blackout effect is performed, it is possible to keep the player's expectations without being disappointed.

When visibility is reduced due to a blackout effect, for example, the enter button 55 may be operated and an adjustment screen for adjusting the amount of light (brightness) of the screen and the volume of the effect sound may be displayed. In that case, the visibility of the light amount and volume adjustment screen is ensured even during the dark transition effect. Furthermore, when some kind of error occurs during execution of the blackout effect, an error notification display may be performed to notify the occurrence of the error. In this case, the visibility of the error notification display is ensured even during the blackout effect. Note that the blackout effect can also be executed in situations other than continuous effects. For example, the blackout effect may be performed in response to a stop operation of the stop switch being performed in a different press order from the press order notified by the push navigation effect (also referred to as "push order failure"). In this case, even if the first stop operation fails in the push order or the second stop operation fails in the push order, it is possible to perform a darkening effect at the time of the push order failure. At this time, it is possible to set a non-dark area where visibility does not deteriorate, as in the case of a dark change effect in a continuous effect.

Although the first embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment and can be modified as appropriate. For example, in the correction counter of the first embodiment, a first threshold value and a second threshold value (first threshold value < second threshold value) are set, and the correction counter value exceeds the first threshold value but exceeds the second threshold value. It is easier to start the next AT when one AT ends with the correction counter value exceeding the second threshold than when one AT ends without exceeding the second threshold. It may be set so that the probability that the number of games to be played by the time the game is completed is high. As a result, it is possible to create a wave in the change in the number of coins issued (the number of game medals acquired) within the range of 2400 coins, which is the upper limit of the end of one advantageous section, and to suppress excessive acquisition of game medals. becomes possible.

In addition, the types of characters displayed in the demonstration performance (a performance that is displayed during non-gaming and executed after a predetermined period of time after the end of the game; also referred to as "standby performance") and the characters displayed in the conversation performance are also explained. The number of types may be configured such that there are more conversation effects. Characters that appear less frequently (so-called premium characters) may not be displayed in the demo performance, but may appear in conversation performances or other performances. As a result, a situation can occur in which a character you do not know in advance (a character you know exists but do not know will appear) appears, and the appearance of such a character can effectively raise expectations. can be increased to Furthermore, the demonstration performance is configured so that conversation performance and subtitle performance are not displayed.

[Second embodiment]
Hereinafter, a slot machine according to a second embodiment (hereinafter also referred to as a "second form slot machine") will be described with additional reference to FIGS. 72 to 85. Below, the characteristic parts of the slot machine of the second embodiment will be mainly explained. The characteristic parts described below are not limited to the slot machine of the second embodiment, but can be combined with other embodiments. Note that the slot machine of the second embodiment has the same or similar basic configuration as the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, and a description thereof will be omitted. Further, each control process such as the winning combination determination process and the reel control process described for the slot machine 1 can be applied to the second embodiment of the slot machine in the same manner or with some changes in the process contents.

<Basic configuration>
Before explaining the characteristic parts, the basic configuration of the second embodiment of the slot machine (the configuration particularly relevant to the description of the characteristic parts) will be briefly explained. Although not shown, the slot machine of the second form has three reels (corresponding to the above-mentioned reels 3a to 3c) and a start lever (the above-mentioned start lever 25) that is operated to start rotating all the reels. ), and three stop switches (corresponding to the above-mentioned stop switches 26a to 26c) on the left, middle, and right that accept a stop operation for individually stopping the rotation of each reel. Additionally, there is a max bet switch (corresponding to the MAX-BET switch 23 described above) that is operated when betting game medals, and a settlement switch (corresponding to the above-mentioned settlement switch 23) that is operated when settling bets or credited game medals. (corresponding to the switch 27) and sub-switches that are operated when playing a performance game or displaying gaming machine information. Furthermore, the slot machine of the second form has three control boards as main control boards: a main control board, a sub-main control board, and a sub-sub control board (the above-mentioned main control board 60, sub-main control board 70A, and sub-sub control board). (corresponding to the control board 70B). Further, the slot machine of the second embodiment includes an image display section corresponding to the display screen 11a of the image display device 11 in the slot machine 1, and various display effects are executed on this image display section. There is.

Each stop switch, like the stop switch of the first embodiment, has a button-shaped operation reception section that retracts when the player presses it with his/her hand and returns to its original position due to spring force, etc. when the player releases his or her hand. When the part is pressed (pressed by hand), the contacts of the electric circuit close and switch from the OFF state to the ON state, and when the pressure is released (the hand is removed), the contacts close. It opens and switches from the on state to the off state. Further, the button portion of each stop switch has a built-in stop switch lamp whose lighting mode changes depending on the progress of the game and the like.

The Max Bet Switch has a button-like operation receiving section that retracts when the player presses it with his/her hand and returns to its original position due to spring force, etc. when the player releases his or her hand. When the button is pressed), the electrical circuit contacts close and switch from the OFF state to the ON state, and when the pressing operation is released (your hand leaves), the contacts open and switch from the ON state to the OFF state. It has become. Further, the button portion of the Max Bet Switch has a built-in Max Bet Switch lamp whose lighting mode changes depending on the progress of the game and the like.

The settlement switch has a button-shaped operation receiving part that retracts when the player presses it with his/her hand and returns to its original position due to spring force, etc. when the player releases his or her hand. ), the electrical circuit contacts close and switch from the OFF state to the ON state, and when the pressing operation is released (your hand leaves), the contacts open and switch from the ON state to the OFF state. It has become.

The sub-switch has the same configuration and function as the decision button 55 of the first embodiment. This sub-switch has a button-shaped operation reception part that retracts when pressed by the player's hand and returns to its original position due to spring force, etc. when the player releases the hand, and a cross-shaped operation reception part with an arrow. When the reception part is pressed (pressed by hand), the contacts of the electric circuit close and switch from the OFF state to the ON state, and when the pressure operation is released (the hand leaves), the contacts open and the switch changes from the ON state to the ON state. It is set to switch to the off state.

The main control board controls the operation reception of the start lever, stop switch, max bet switch, and settlement switch, and the control of the operation reception of the sub-switches and the control of various effects on the image display section are performed by the sub-control board (sub-main control board or sub-sub control board). The start lever, stop switch, etc. controlled by the main control board (main control means) are also collectively referred to as "main switches." In addition, the max bet switch lamp is controlled by the main control board, and the stop switch lamp is controlled by the sub control board (sub control means). The lamp may be controlled by a main control board. Hereinafter, several characteristic parts of the slot machine of the second embodiment will be sequentially explained.

<Processing when the clearing switch or other switches are operated>
The processing contents when the clearing switch and other switches are operated will be explained with reference to FIGS. 72 to 78. In this embodiment, the main control board reads the on/off state of each main switch operated by the player at preset intervals (for example, 2.235 milliseconds) using a timer. This is done in interrupt processing. Further, reading of the on/off state of the sub-switch is performed in a similar interrupt process executed by the sub-control board. In FIGS. 72 to 75, the timing of timer interrupt processing by the main control board is shown by short arrows lined up on the time axis.

(When the clearing switch is operated alone)
FIG. 72 shows the timing at which the on/off state of the settlement switch is switched and the timing at which execution of the settlement process is started when the settlement switch is operated alone. In this example, as a result of reading the on/off state of the clearing switch in each timer interrupt process, the timer is set when the clearing switch switches from the off state to the on state (also referred to as "the time when it is turned on"). , measurement of the elapsed time from that point is started. Then, when the on state of the clearing switch continues for a preset predetermined time (referred to as "T01") from the start of measurement, a predetermined flag (" The clearing switch ON reception flag) is set. Next, a process is performed to determine whether the settlement switch ON acceptance flag has been set, and with this determination as a trigger, the settlement switch ON acceptance flag is cleared and settlement processing is started. Note that if the determination process is not performed, the settlement switch ON acceptance flag is cleared after a predetermined time (for example, in the next timer interrupt process).

As for the contents of the settlement process, if there are game medals that have been bet, they are settled (refunded), and if there are game medals that have been credited, they are settled (refunded). Also, a 1-bet lamp, a 2-bet lamp, and a 3-bet lamp for displaying the number of bets (corresponding to the 1-BET display lamp 46bC, 2-BET display lamp 46bB, and MAX-BET display lamp 46bA of the first embodiment) is turned off, and the number displayed on the credit number display section (corresponding to the stored number display lamp 46h of the first embodiment) that displays the number of credits is updated (subtracted). Furthermore, a control command including information indicating that the operation of the clearing switch has been effectively accepted is transmitted to the sub-control board. Upon receiving this command, the sub-control board performs an effect according to the payment process. Specifically, for example, a predetermined sound (also referred to as a "settlement sound") corresponding to the settlement is output from a speaker, and a predetermined image (also referred to as a "settlement image") indicating that the settlement is in progress is displayed on the image display section. Display. Further, when the number of bets and the number of credits are displayed on the image display section, the displayed number of bets and the number of credits are updated (subtracted). In FIG. 72, the time from when the settlement switch is turned on until the settlement switch ON reception flag is set (also referred to as "valid settlement switch operation time") is expressed as T11. This clearing switch valid operation time T11 is strictly different from the time from when the clearing switch is turned on until the clearing process starts, but the difference is a very small time that cannot be detected by humans ( (on the order of several milliseconds). Therefore, hereinafter, the time from when the settlement switch is turned on until the settlement process is started is considered to be the same length of time as the settlement switch effective operation time T11.

Note that the settlement process is performed in response to the operation of the settlement switch when the settlement switch is operated during a period in which the operation of the settlement switch is validly accepted (also referred to as "the period in which settlement operations can be accepted"). The period during which liquidation operations can be accepted is, for example, the period from the end of one game (for example, the time when all reels have stopped and the payout process for game medals, etc. has been completed) to the start of the next game (for example, when the start lever has been operated). This is the period from when the reels start spinning. If the clearing switch is operated during a period other than the clearing operation acceptance period, the clearing process will not be performed. For example, the clearing switch ON flag may not be set, or the flag may not be determined. In this example, bets and credited game medals are settled by turning on the settlement switch once, but when the settlement switch is turned on once, betted game medals are settled. , and when the settlement switch is turned on again, the credited game medals may be settled. Further, when the settlement switch is turned on, the betted game medals are settled, and when the on state continues for a predetermined period of time (long press), the credited game medals are settled.

(When the Max Bet switch is operated independently)
FIG. 73 shows the timing when the ON/OFF state of the MAX BET switch is switched and the timing when the bet process is started when the MAX BET switch is operated alone. In this example, as a result of reading the ON/OFF state of the MAX BET switch in each timer interrupt process, the timer is set at the time when the MAX BET switch is switched from the OFF state to the ON state (the time when it is operated ON), and the measurement of the elapsed time from that time is started. Then, when the ON state of the MAX BET switch continues for a predetermined time (hereinafter referred to as "T02") or more from the start of the measurement, a predetermined flag (also called "MAX BET switch ON acceptance flag") indicating that the operation of the MAX BET switch has been validly accepted is set. After that, a process is performed to determine that the MAX BET switch ON acceptance flag has been set, and the MAX BET switch ON acceptance flag is cleared as a result of the determination, and the bet process is started. If the process of the determination is not performed, the MAX BET switch ON acceptance flag is cleared after a predetermined time (for example, in the next timer interrupt process).

The contents of the bet process are as follows: From the credited game medals, the number of medals will be calculated according to the number of bets immediately before the max bet switch operation (for example, if the number of bets immediately before is 0, then 3 medals, if the number of bets immediately before is 1 medals, 2 game medals (if the previous bet number was 2, then 1 game medal). Furthermore, the 1-bet lamp, 2-bet lamp, and 3-bet lamp are turned on, and the number displayed on the credit number display section is updated (subtracted). Furthermore, a control command including information indicating that the operation of the max bet switch has been effectively accepted is transmitted to the sub-control board. Upon receiving this command, the sub-control board performs an effect according to the bet process. Specifically, for example, a predetermined sound (also referred to as "bet sound") corresponding to the bet is output from the speaker. Further, when the number of bets and the number of credits are displayed on the image display section, the displayed number of bets is updated (added) and the number of credits displayed is updated (subtracted). In FIG. 73, the time from when the max bet switch is turned on until the settlement switch ON reception flag is set (also referred to as "max bet switch valid operation time") is expressed as T12. For the same reason as the clearing switch valid operation time T11, in the following, the time from when the max bet switch is turned on until the bet process starts is the same length as the max bet switch valid operation time T12. regarded as.

In this example, if the operation of the max bet switch is accepted effectively, the 1st to 3rd bet lamps are turned on almost simultaneously (including cases where there is a time difference of several milliseconds that cannot be detected by humans). On the other hand, the number of bets displayed on the image display section is updated one by one so that the updating process can be visually recognized, and the output of the bet sound is also performed one by one so that the number of bets can be identified by the sound. For example, when three game medals are bet according to the operation of the max bet switch, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp, which were off until just before, are turned on almost simultaneously. On the other hand, the displayed bet number on the image display section is displayed in increments of 1, such as "BET: 0" → "BET: 1" → "BET: 2" → "BET: 3", and the bet sound is Three distinct sounds are output one by one, such as "Pon" → "Pon" → "Pon". In this way, by lighting the 1 to 3 bet lamps substantially simultaneously, it is possible to quickly notify the player that a bet has been placed, so that the game can proceed quickly. On the other hand, since the number of bets displayed on the image display unit is updated and the bet sound is output one by one, the number of game medals that have been bet can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner, even to players who are unfamiliar with the game. becomes possible.

Note that the timing of updating the number of bets displayed on the image display section and the timing of outputting the bet sound may be set as appropriate depending on the time required for updating the image and outputting the sound. Alternatively, the main control board may send commands indicating update timing to the sub-control board at predetermined time intervals according to the number of bets (for example, 3 commands in the case of a 3 bet), and update the timing at each command reception timing. Images may be updated and audio may be output accordingly. In addition, when a demo image (an image that is displayed when the slot machine has been idle for a predetermined period of time or more after all reels have stopped; also referred to as a "demo screen") is displayed on the image display section, the Max Bet Switch When game medals are bet in response to the operation, the demo image is switched to a predetermined image (also referred to as a "game in progress image") displayed during the game, and the number of bets is displayed. In this case, the displayed bet number is configured such that "BET: 3" is already displayed when the demo image is switched to the game-in-progress image. This is to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable because the difference between the actual bet timing and the update timing of the displayed bet number becomes large if the displayed bet number is updated by one after the image is switched. On the other hand, the bet sounds are output one by one without waiting for the completion of image switching, even during the display of the demo image or during the process of switching from the demo image to the game-in-progress image. Therefore, even while the demo image is being displayed, the player can confirm that a bet has been placed by the bet sound.

Note that bets will be processed in response to the operation of the Max Bet Switch if the Max Bet Switch is operated during the period in which the operation of the Max Bet Switch is validly accepted (also referred to as the "Max Bet Operation Acceptable Period"). This is the case. The maximum bet operation acceptable period is, for example, the period from the end of one game until the number of bets in the next game reaches three. During this max bet operation acceptance period, the max bet lamp is lit in a predetermined manner (for example, in a predetermined lighting color) to indicate that a bet is possible. If the max bet switch is operated during a period other than the max bet operation acceptance period, no bet processing will be performed. For example, the max bet switch ON flag may not be set, or the flag may not be determined. The contents of the settlement process and the start timing of the process when the 1 bet switch is operated are the same as when the max bet switch is operated.

(If the max bet switch is operated while the liquidation switch is operated)
FIG. 74 shows the timing at which the settlement process is executed when the max bet switch is operated during the operation of the settlement switch (during the settlement switch valid operation time T11). It should be noted that the settlement switch was turned on during the settlement operation acceptable period, and the max bet switch was turned on during the max bet operation acceptable period. Further, the time point when the operation of the max bet switch is stopped and the max bet switch is switched from the on state to the off state (also referred to as "the time point when the max bet switch is turned off") is outside the range of the settlement switch valid operation time T11. In this example, the operation of the max bet switch is disabled, while the operation of the settlement switch is enabled. Specifically, even if the clearing switch valid operation time T11 elapses while the clearing switch is in the on state from the time when the clearing switch is turned on, the clearing switch ON reception flag is not set and the clearing process is not started. The settlement switch ON acceptance flag is set after the max bet switch is turned off. Thereafter, a process is performed to determine whether the settlement switch ON acceptance flag has been set, and with this determination as a trigger, the settlement switch ON acceptance flag is cleared and settlement processing is started. Therefore, the time to start executing the settlement process may be later than when the settlement switch is operated alone. Furthermore, when the clearing switch valid operation time T11 has elapsed from the time the clearing switch was turned on, the clearing switch ON acceptance flag is set (the set timing is illustrated by a broken line in FIG. 74), and the max bet switch is turned off. After this point, a process may be performed to determine that the settlement switch ON reception flag has been set, and the settlement process may be started. Furthermore, if the max bet switch is turned off during the valid settlement switch operation time T11, the settlement process may be started at the same timing as when the settlement switch is operated alone.

On the other hand, even if the max bet switch valid operation time T12 elapses while the max bet switch is in the on state from the time when the max bet switch is turned on, the max bet switch ON reception flag is not set and the bet process is not executed. As described above, in this example, if the player accidentally operates the max bet switch during the valid settlement switch operation time T11, the settlement process is executed but the bet process is not executed. By doing this, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the settlement process, which is performed when the player wants to finish the game, and the bet process, which is performed when the player wants to continue playing, are executed at the same time, which confuses the player. be able to. In addition, if the bet processing is configured to be executed in response to the operation of the max bet switch even while the settlement switch is being operated, it will be a hassle to operate the settlement switch again to settle the betted game medals. In this example, such trouble can be prevented from occurring.

In addition, in this example, the max bet lamp, which is lit in a predetermined manner when the max bet operation acceptance period begins, remains lit even after the settlement switch is turned on, and the settlement process begins. The light is turned off when the light is turned off. If the max bet lamp is lit when the inside of the game parlor is dark, the position of the max bet switch can be easily recognized, and the player's desire to play can be increased by seeing the max bet switch lit. Therefore, by keeping the max bet lamp lit until the settlement process starts, the player will be able to enjoy a longer period of time compared to a case where the max bet lamp is turned off when the settlement switch is turned on. It becomes possible to show the lighting of the max bet lamp, and it becomes possible to increase the player's desire to finish the game. Further, by keeping the max bet lamp lit until the settlement process starts, it becomes easy for the player to understand that the game medals will be settled without any bets being made. Therefore, by checking the displayed number of credits before the start of settlement, the player can grasp the number of game medals to be settled in advance before the start of settlement.

In addition, in this example, when a game medal is cleaned from the slot (corresponding to the medal slot 21 in the first embodiment) at a predetermined timing (also referred to as "valid maintenance timing"), the cleaned game medal is is configured such that bets can be placed during the period from the time when the settlement switch is turned on until the settlement process is started. Specifically, for example, this is realized by allowing the game medals that have been cleaned to be accepted without turning off the blocker even if the settlement switch is turned on. The effective timing for maintenance is any time before the time when the clearing switch is turned on, at approximately the same time as when the clearing switch is turned on, or before the time when the clearing switch is turned on. There may be. In contrast to this example, for example, if the blocker is turned off when the payment switch is turned on, and the game medals that have been serviced are inadvertently not accepted, then the game medals that have been serviced are not actually accepted. There is a possibility that a situation may occur in which the fact that the game medals are not recognized even though they have been accommodated in the slot machine (also referred to as a "game medal swallowing state"). According to this example, it is possible to prevent such a situation in which game medals are swallowed from occurring.

(If the sub-switch is operated while the clearing switch is being operated)
FIG. 75 shows the timing at which the settlement process is executed when the sub-switch is operated while the settlement switch is being operated (during the settlement switch valid operation time T11). The clearing switch was turned on during the clearing operation acceptable period, and the sub-switch was turned on during a period during which sub-switch operations were validly accepted (also referred to as the "sub-switch operation acceptable period"). ) Medium. The sub-switch operation acceptance period may include, for example, an image that prompts the player to operate the sub-switch (for example, an image that displays the words "PUSH" and an arrow "↓" pointing to the position of the sub-switch). This is the period during which an image (also referred to as a "subswitch operation promotion image") is displayed on the image display section. In this example, the operation of the settlement switch is also valid, and the operation of the sub-switch is also valid. Specifically, the settlement process is started at the same timing as when the settlement switch is operated alone. In addition, when the subswitch remains on for a predetermined period of time after the subswitch is turned on, a predetermined flag (“subswitch ON reception flag”) indicating that the subswitch operation has been effectively accepted is set. (not shown) is set. After that, a process is performed to determine that the subswitch ON reception flag has been set, and with this determination as a trigger, the subswitch ON reception flag is cleared, and a predetermined effect corresponding to the subswitch operation ("Subswitch operation trigger (also referred to as "performance") is started. In FIG. 75, the time from when the subswitch is turned on until the subswitch operation trigger effect is started is expressed as T13. These effects and processes related to the operation of the sub-switches are executed by the sub-control board. An example of a sub-switch operation trigger effect is an image display or audio output that suggests that there is a high possibility (expectation level) of a situation that is advantageous to the player (for example, addition or continuation of AT). (also referred to as a "successful sub-switch operation effect"), and a display that displays an image or sounds that indicates that the possibility of the situation developing into an advantageous situation for the player is low or eliminated (also referred to as a "failed sub-switch operation effect"). ).

The contents of the sub-switch operation trigger effect include, for example, outputting a predetermined sound (also referred to as a "sub-switch operation trigger sound") from a speaker, or outputting a predetermined image (also referred to as a "sub-switch operation trigger image") on an image display section. ). In this way, in this example, when the subswitch is operated during the settlement switch valid operation time T11, the subswitch operation trigger effect is executed. Therefore, even if a player who operates the settlement switch to finish the game sees the sub-switch operation promotion image and operates the sub-switch without thinking, the sub-switch operation trigger effect can be executed smoothly. can. In addition, if the settlement process is started after the start of the subswitch operation trigger effect, the output of the settlement sound or the display of the settlement image accompanying the start of the settlement process may be configured not to be executed, or the subswitch operation It may be executed after the trigger effect ends. When outputting the settlement sound or displaying the settlement image is not executed, the processing load can be reduced compared to when outputting the settlement sound or displaying the settlement image. When outputting a settlement sound or displaying a settlement image after the completion of the sub-switch operation trigger performance, it becomes easier for the player to understand that settlement has been made. Furthermore, the settlement sound may be output even while the sub-switch operation trigger effect is being executed. The output of the settlement sound makes it easier for the player to understand that the settlement has been made. When outputting the settlement sound, the output timing may be adjusted so that it does not overlap with the output timing of the subswitch operation trigger sound, or the output timing may be adjusted so that the output timing does not overlap with the output timing of the settlement sound and the subswitch operation trigger sound. It may also be possible to allow sounds to be output substantially simultaneously. When such output timing adjustment is performed, it becomes easier for the player to hear the payment sound, so it becomes easier to understand that the payment is being made. On the other hand, when such output timing adjustment is not performed, the processing load can be reduced compared to when adjustment is performed.

Further, during the period during which the demo image is displayed on the image display section (also referred to as the "demonstration display period"), the sub-switch operation promotion image is not displayed, so basically the sub-switch operation is not acceptable period. Therefore, even if the sub-switch is operated during this demo display period, it will be invalid, but the structure is configured so that the sub-switch operation can be effectively accepted and the sub-switch operation trigger effect can be executed even during the demo display period. Good too. When sub-switch operation is disabled, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the start of the sub-switch operation trigger effect when the player who is operating the settlement switch accidentally operates the sub-switch. It can be prevented. When the sub-switch operation is enabled, it is possible to increase the chances of performing the sub-switch operation trigger effect. Additionally, if you want to start the payment process during the demo display period, you can leave the demo image as it is and output only the payment sound without displaying the payment image, or you can switch from the demo image to the payment image and display it. At the same time, a settlement sound may also be output. When only the settlement sound is output, there is no need to perform processing for displaying the settlement image, so the processing load can be reduced. If the demo image is switched to the settlement image and the settlement sound is also output, it becomes easier for the player to understand that the settlement is being made.

(If the clearing switch operation and other main switch operations are performed at the same time)
FIG. 76(A) shows the timing at which the settlement process is executed when a predetermined main switch (in this example, a stop switch) is operated during the operation of the settlement switch (during the settlement switch valid operation time T11). FIG. 76(B) shows the operation timing when the settlement switch is operated while the stop switch is being operated. This is a period in which stop switch operations are not effectively accepted (also referred to as a "stop operation unacceptable period"). The stop operation unacceptable period is, for example, a period in which all reels are stopped. Although not shown in FIG. 76, the on/off states of the clearing switch and stop switch are read for each timer interrupt process.

If the stop switch is operated during the settlement switch valid operation time T11, the operation of the settlement switch becomes valid and settlement processing is started in accordance with the operation, as shown in FIG. 76(A). The timing at which the settlement process is started varies depending on the timing at which the stop switch is turned off, but in any case, the settlement process is started after the time when the stop switch is turned off. Specifically, if the time when the stop switch is turned off is outside the range of the clearing switch effective operation time T11, the clearing switch remains on from the time when the clearing switch is turned on and the clearing switch effective operating time continues. Even after T11 has elapsed, the settlement process is not started. The settlement switch ON reception flag (not shown) is set after the stop switch is turned off, and the settlement process is started after the stop switch is turned off. Therefore, the execution start time of the settlement process is later than when the settlement switch is operated alone. On the other hand, if the time when the stop switch is turned off is within the settlement switch effective operation time T11, the settlement process is started at the same timing as when the settlement switch is operated alone. In this way, if the stop switch is operated during the valid settlement switch operation time T11, by validating the operation of the settlement switch, if the player who is operating the settlement switch accidentally operates the stop switch, , it becomes possible to smoothly execute the settlement process without having to operate the settlement switch again.

If the settlement switch is operated while the stop switch is being operated, the operation of the settlement switch becomes invalid and the settlement process corresponding to the operation is not started, as shown in FIG. 76(B). Specifically, when the settlement switch is operated while the stop switch is being operated, even if the time when the stop switch is turned off is during the settlement switch effective operation time T11, the settlement switch effective operation time T11. Even if it is outside the range (timing indicated by the broken line in FIG. 76(B)), the operation of the settlement switch is invalidated and the settlement process corresponding to the operation is not started. In order to start the clearing process, the clearing switch needs to be operated again. In this way, if the clearing switch is operated while the stop switch is being operated, the clearing process will not be performed, so the processing necessary to perform the clearing process (such as setting the clearing switch ON reception flag and setting the clearing switch ON reception flag) will not be performed. Processing to determine whether the stop switch is set, etc.) can be uniformly not performed while the stop switch is being operated, thereby making it possible to reduce the processing load.

In addition, even if the clearing switch is operated while the stop switch is being operated, if the stop switch is turned off during the clearing switch valid operation time T11, the clearing switch operation is validly accepted and the clearing process is executed. It may also be executed. By doing this, in the case where a player who operated the settlement switch while operating the stop switch by mistake realizes that he was operating the stop switch and turns off the stop switch early, the player will be able to turn off the settlement switch. It becomes possible to smoothly settle accounts without having to perform operations again. In this example, the predetermined main switch is a stop switch, but even if another main switch is operated during the clearing switch effective operation time T11, the same process as in this example may be performed. For example, there is a case where the start lever is operated during the settlement switch valid operation time T11 in a state where no bet is placed (a period in which the operation of the start lever is not effectively accepted).

(If an error occurs while operating the clearing switch)
FIG. 77 shows the start timing and end timing of error notification when a predetermined error (for example, a full error in the auxiliary storage for game medals) occurs during operation of the settlement switch (during the settlement switch valid operation time T11). ing. Note that the settlement switch is turned on during the period in which settlement operations can be accepted. Further, although not shown in FIG. 77, the on/off state of the settlement switch is read for each timer interrupt process. In this example, a predetermined error signal that detects the presence or absence of an error (for example, a signal from a full sensor (corresponding to the full detector 86 of the first embodiment) that detects the storage state of game medals in the auxiliary storage) and the on/off state of the reset switch (corresponding to the reset switch 82 of the first embodiment) are read for each timer interrupt process (the same applies to FIG. 78, which will be described later).

In this example, as shown in the figure, the error signal switches from the off state (error undetected state) to the on state (error detected state) during the clearing switch valid operation time T11, and when the on state continues for a predetermined time, at that point It is determined that an error has occurred, and predetermined error processing is executed to start error notification. In this error notification, for example, information indicating the type of error that has occurred is displayed on an error indicator (corresponding to the above-mentioned payout number display lamp 46j) provided on the front door, and the occurrence of the error is displayed on the image display section. A notification image (also referred to as an "error notification image") is displayed, and a sound (also referred to as an "error notification sound") to notify the occurrence of an error is output from a speaker. Error notification by the error display is controlled by the main control board, and error notification images and error notification sounds are controlled by the sub-control board.

In addition, in this example, as shown in the figure, after the error notification starts, the error signal is switched from the on state to the off state as the cause of the error is removed and the error is resolved, and then the reset switch is turned on. The main control board determines that the reset switch has been switched from the off state to the on state, and uses this as an opportunity to execute a predetermined error release process and end the error notification. It is assumed that the reset switch was turned on outside the valid settlement switch operation time T11. In this example, the operation of the clearing switch becomes invalid and the clearing process corresponding to the operation is not started. In order to start the clearing process, the clearing switch must be operated again after the error is resolved. If the payment process is executed even when an error has occurred, there is a risk that the player may feel distrustful that the payment was not performed correctly. In this example, if an error occurs during operation of the settlement switch, settlement processing is not performed, so it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring.

Further, as described above, in this example, if an error occurs during the effective operation time T11 of the settlement switch, the occurrence of the error is detected and an error notification is performed. Therefore, even when the player is operating the settlement switch to finish the game, it is possible to notify the player at an early stage that an error has occurred that could seriously affect the progress of the game. Furthermore, if an error occurs during the effective operation time T11 of the clearing switch, the period during which the occurrence of an error cannot be reported can be reduced compared to a configuration in which error detection and notification are not performed.

(If the reset switch is operated while the clearing switch is being operated)
FIG. 78 shows a case where the settlement switch is turned on while a predetermined error is occurring (error notification), and the reset switch is turned on during that operation (in this example, during the settlement switch valid operation time T11). It shows the end timing of error notification in . As shown in the figure, when the reset switch is turned on during the clearing switch valid operation time T11, the main control board determines that the reset switch has switched from the off state to the on state, and uses this as a trigger to issue an error notification. finish. In this example as well, the operation of the clearing switch becomes invalid and the clearing process corresponding to the operation is not started. In order to start the clearing process, the clearing switch needs to be operated again. In addition, in this example, the time when the reset switch is turned on is during the clearing switch effective operation time T11, but the time when the reset switch is turned on is outside the range of the clearing switch effective operating time T11 (the clearing switch is in the on state). ), the same processing is performed.

As described above, in this example, if the reset switch is turned on while the settlement switch is being operated while an error is occurring (during the settlement switch valid operation time T11), the error notification is terminated and the state returns to the normal state (a state in which games can be played). ). Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the reset switch cannot be returned to the normal state even if the reset switch is turned on during the valid operation time T11 of the settlement switch, it is possible to increase the period during which the state can be returned to the state in which the game can be played. Machine utilization rate can be increased. Note that in this example, the operation of the settlement switch is invalidated and settlement processing is not performed, but settlement processing may be performed. In that case, it becomes possible to smoothly execute the settlement process without having to operate the settlement switch again.

<Press order navigation performance and GET performance>
In the second type of slot machine, for example, when a push order combination is selected during AT, a push order navigation effect is executed to notify the player of the push order (correct push order) that is advantageous to the player. In addition, when the player operates the stop switch according to the notified correct press order and the press combination is established, a GET effect (also referred to as an "acquisition effect") is executed that indicates to the player that game medals will be awarded. be done. Below, these press order navigation effects and GET effects will be explained with reference to FIGS. 79 to 82. Note that the push order navigation effect and the GET effect are controlled by a sub-control board. When the push order navigation performance is performed, the push order navigation is also performed using a push order display (corresponding to the above-mentioned payout number display lamp 46j) controlled by the main control board.

(Press order navigation performance when the press order is correct and press order navigation performance when the press order is unsuccessful)
In the push order navigation effect, a predetermined image related to the push order notification (also referred to as a "push order navigation effect image") is displayed on the image display section. The display mode of this push order navigation effect image changes in response to a stop operation (operation of a stop switch) by the player. An example of the press order navigation effect image is shown in FIG. 79 together with diagrams of the left stop switch SS1, middle stop switch SS2, and right stop switch SS3. FIG. 79(A) shows an example of the transition of the push order navigation effect image when the push order is correct (when the first stop operation is performed according to the correct push order), and FIG. 79(B) shows a transition example of the push order navigation effect image when the push order fails (the correct push An example of the transition of the push order navigation effect image in the case where the first stop operation is performed in an order different from the order shown in FIG.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 79(A) and 79(B), when a pressing order winning combination such as a bell small winning combination is selected in a game during AT, the navigation image NV1 is mainly used to indicate the correct pressing order. , a navigation background image NH1 is displayed mainly to improve the game's interest during a stop operation. The navigation background image NH1 is rendered in a layer (second layer) lower (backward) than the layer (first layer) in which the navigation image NV1 is rendered, and when displayed in a position overlapping with the navigation image NV1, the navigation background image NH1 is displayed in the navigation image. Sometimes it is hidden behind NV1 and cannot be seen. The navigation image NV1 in this example shows the correct pressing order of "left middle right", and until the first stop operation is performed, the navigation image NV1 shows the number 1 in a circular frame ("first stop"). (also referred to as "operation display"), a diagram displaying the number 2 in a circular frame (also referred to as "second stop operation display"), a diagram displaying the number 3 in a circular frame (also referred to as "third stop operation display"), ) are displayed in this order from the left side at the bottom of the image display section. The first stop operation display is displayed larger than the second and third stop operation displays. In the navigation background image NH1 in this example, until the first stop operation is performed, three star-shaped figures, large, medium, and small, are displayed corresponding to each of the first to third stop operation displays.

After the push order navigation performance image (navigation image NV1 and navigation background image NH1) is displayed, when the left stop switch SS1 is operated as the first stop operation according to the correct push order as shown in FIG. 79 (A), the display mode of the navigation image NV1 and the navigation background image NH1 changes as follows. First, at the timing when the left stop switch SS1 is operated, the shape of the frame surrounding the number 1 in the first stop operation display of the navigation image NV1 changes from a circle to a jagged star shape. Also, at the same timing, the color of the leftmost star-shaped figure in the navigation background image NH1 changes, it becomes smaller, and it is displayed at an angle. After that, the first stop operation display of the navigation image NV1 gradually becomes smaller and disappears from the image display unit as if fading out, and the leftmost star-shaped figure in the navigation background image NH1 gradually becomes smaller and disappears from the image display unit as if flying away into the distance. At this time, appropriate sound may be output from the speaker according to the change in the mode of the navigation image NV1 and the navigation background image NH1. For example, the sound "bang" may be output when the shape of the frame of the first stop operation display in the navigation image NV1 changes from a circle to a star shape, or the sound "whoosh" may be output when the first stop operation display becomes smaller and the star-shaped figure at the far left of the navigation background image NH1 flies away. Such sounds are also called "push order navigation performance sounds."

On the other hand, after the push order navigation effect images (navigation image NV1 and navigation background image NH1) were displayed, the first stop operation (in this example, the operation of the middle stop switch SS2) was performed in an order different from the correct press order. In this case, the navigation image NV1 and the navigation background image NH1 change as shown in FIG. 79(B). First, at the timing when the middle stop switch SS2 is operated, the first stop operation display, the second stop operation display, and the third stop operation display of the navigation image NV1 disappear from the image display section almost simultaneously. The time it takes for these to disappear is shorter than the time from when the first stop operation is performed until the first stop operation display disappears when the pressing order is correct. On the other hand, the navigation background image NH1 changes in the same way as when the pressing order is correct. That is, at the timing of the first stop operation, the color of the leftmost star-shaped figure in the navigation background image NH1 changes, becomes smaller, and is displayed obliquely. Thereafter, the leftmost star-shaped figure in the navigation background image NH1 gradually becomes smaller and disappears from the image display section as it flies away into the distance. At this time, the same push order navigation effect sound as when the push order is correct may be output, a different press order navigation effect sound than when the press order is correct, or the press order navigation effect sound is not output. You can do it like this.

As mentioned above, in this example, when the push order is correct, part of the navigation image NV1 (only the stop switch that was stopped and the corresponding stop operation display) disappears, but when the push order is incorrect, the entire navigation image NV1 disappears. They disappear at the same time. In this way, the way the navigation image NV1 disappears (the effect when it disappears) changes depending on whether the push order is correct or when the push order is incorrect, allowing the player to intuitively recognize whether the push order is correct or the push order is incorrect. It becomes possible. In addition, if the navigation image NV1 is continued to be displayed even when the push order fails by erasing all of the navigation images NV1 at the same time when the push order fails, there may be concerns, such as a stop operation after the push order fails. It is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding the order, or from feeling embarrassed when the navigation image NV1 is seen by people around him after the push order fails. Furthermore, in this example, the time from when the stop operation is performed until the navigation image NV1 disappears is set shorter when the push order fails than when the push order is correct. In this way, the time taken until the navigation image NV1 disappears is different depending on whether the push order is correct or when the push order is unsuccessful, making it easier for the player to recognize whether the push order is correct or not. In addition, in the case of the above-mentioned sub-switch operation promotion image (image displaying the word "PUSH"), it disappears from the image display section at a predetermined timing after the sub-switch is operated, but the time until it disappears is The time is longer when a sub-switch operation failure effect is performed (also referred to as ``when a sub-switch operation fails'') than when a sub-switch operation success effect is performed (also referred to as ``when a sub-switch operation is successful''). It is set as follows. This is to prevent it from becoming difficult for the player to understand whether or not the sub-switch has been operated by quickly extinguishing the sub-switch operation promotion image when the sub-switch operation fails.

On the other hand, in this example, as described above, for the navigation background image NH1, the display changes in the same manner and the timing at which the display switches is the same whether the push order is correct or the push order is unsuccessful. Therefore, since the same image data can be used when the push order is correct and when the push order is unsuccessful, it is possible to reduce the amount of image data as the navigation background image NH1, which can also lead to a reduction in storage capacity. In addition, by displaying the same navigation background image NH1 at the same timing when the push order is incorrect as when the push order is correct, it is possible to suppress the feeling of exhilaration from being lost due to an error in the push order during AT, where players tend to feel refreshed. It becomes possible to do so. Furthermore, if the navigation image NV1 is not only completely erased when the push order is incorrect, but also the navigation background image NH1 is displayed differently from when the push order is correct, the player may misunderstand the game status (for example, that AT is in progress). However, according to this example, such a situation can be prevented from occurring.

(Push order navigation and GET effects)
Figure 80 shows an example of the state of the push order navigation effect image from the first stop operation to the third stop operation. Figure 80 (A) shows an example of the transition of the push order navigation effect image when the push order is correct (when the first stop operation to the third stop operation are performed according to the correct push order), and Figure 80 (B) shows an example of the transition of the push order navigation effect image when the push order is incorrect (when the first stop operation to the third stop operation are performed in an order different from the correct push order).

After the press order navigation effect images (navigation image NV1 and navigation background image NH1) are displayed, as shown in FIG. 80(A), if the left stop switch SS1 is operated as a first stop operation according to the correct press order, The first stop operation display of the navigation image NV1 and the star-shaped figure on the far left of the navigation background image NH1 disappear from the image display section as described above, and at the same time, the second stop operation display of the navigation image NV1 and the leftmost star figure of the navigation background image NH1 disappear. The star-shaped figure at the center of the background image NH1 is displayed in a large size. After that, when the middle stop switch SS2 is operated as a second stop operation according to the correct pressing order, the second stop operation display of the navigation image NV1 and the star-shaped figure in the center of the navigation background image NH1 disappear from the image display section (disappear). (same as the first stop operation display and the leftmost star-shaped figure), and at the same time, the third stop operation display of the navigation image NV1 and the rightmost star-shaped figure of the navigation background image NH1 are larger. Is displayed. Furthermore, when the right stop switch SS3 is operated as a third stop operation according to the correct pressing order, the third stop operation display of the navigation image NV1 and the star-shaped figure on the far right of the navigation background image NH1 disappear from the image display section. (The manner in which it disappears is the same as in the case of the first stop operation display and the star-shaped figure on the far left.) After that, the GET effect is executed. In this GET performance, for example, an image GT1 displaying the characters "GET!!" (also referred to as a "GET performance image") is displayed on the image display section, and a voice saying "Get" ("GET performance sound") is displayed on the image display section. ) is output from the speaker.

On the other hand, after the press order navigation effect images (navigation image NV1 and navigation background image NH1) were displayed, the first stop operation (in this example, the operation of the middle stop switch SS2) was performed in an order different from the correct press order. In this case, as shown in FIG. 80(B), the navigation image NV1 completely disappears, and at the same time, the star-shaped figure in the center of the navigation background image NH1 is displayed in a large size. After that, when the left stop switch SS1 is operated as a second stop operation, the star-shaped figure in the center of the navigation background image NH1 of the navigation image NV1 disappears from the image display section (the way it disappears is the same as when the pressing order is correct). ), and at the same time, the rightmost star-shaped figure of the navigation background image NH1 is displayed in a large size. Further, when the right stop switch SS3 is operated as a third stop operation, the rightmost star-shaped figure of the navigation background image NH1 disappears from the image display section (the way it disappears is the same as when the pressing order is correct). Note that when the push order fails, the GET effect (GET effect image GT1 and GET effect sound) is not executed.

(GET effect and backlight effect when the button is pressed correctly)
When the push order is correct, in addition to the GET effect, a back lamp effect using the back lamps (corresponding to the back lamps 38a, 38b, and 38c in the first embodiment) arranged on the inside of the reels is also executed. Figure 81 shows a schematic diagram of the left reel RE1, the center reel RE2, and the right reel RE3, and shows an example of the execution timing of the GET effect and the back lamp effect when the push order is correct.

After the press order navigation effect images (navigation image NV1 and navigation background image NH1) are displayed, as shown in FIG. 81, if the left stop switch SS1 is operated as a first stop operation according to the correct press order, the left reel RE1 stops rotating, and the symbol constituting the push order (in this example, expressed as a hexagonal symbol) is stopped and displayed in the middle row of the left reel RE1. Further, the first stop operation display of the navigation image NV1 and the leftmost star-shaped figure of the navigation background image NH1 disappear from the image display section as described above. After that, when the middle stop switch SS2 is operated as a second stop operation according to the correct pressing order, the middle reel RE2 stops rotating due to the second stop operation to the middle stop switch SS2, and the middle reel RE2 is pushed to the middle stage to form a sequential combination. The pattern will be stopped and displayed. Further, the second stop operation display of the navigation image NV1 and the star-shaped figure at the center of the navigation background image NH1 disappear from the image display section. Further, when the right stop switch SS3 is operated as a third stop operation according to the correct pressing order, the right reel RE3 stops rotating and the symbols constituting the pressing order are stopped and displayed in the middle row of the right reel RE3. Further, the third stop operation display of the navigation image NV1 and the rightmost star-shaped figure of the navigation background image NH1 disappear from the image display section.

At the timing when the navigation image NV1 and the navigation background image NH1 have all disappeared, the execution of the back lamp effect is started. In the illustrated example, the back lamp that illuminates the middle area is turned on, and the back lamp that illuminates the upper and lower areas is turned off so that the three push-order combination symbols arranged in a row stand out. After starting the execution of the back lamp effect, the display of the GET effect image GT1 is started on the image display section. At the timing when the GET effect image GT1 is displayed, the mode of the back lamp effect starts to change. In the illustrated example, the area illuminated by the back lamp begins to expand toward the upper and lower sides. After the GET effect image GT1 starts displaying, the display mode changes (in the illustrated example, the size of the characters gradually decreases) and disappears from the image display section. Further, the back lamp effect returns to the normal illumination mode that illuminates the area from the upper stage to the lower stage during the period in which the display mode of the GET effect image GT1 is changing.

The player concentrates on the stop operation while watching the display of the navigation image NV1 until the navigation image NV1 completely disappears (is not displayed). Therefore, in this example, as described above, the execution of the back lamp effect and the GET effect is started after the timing when the navigation image NV1 has completely disappeared, so that the player can correctly press the order without losing concentration. It is possible to make the player intuitively recognize in a natural flow that game medals will be awarded. Note that, in this example, the back lamp effect starts and ends a little earlier than the GET effect (the GET effect is the display of an image), but the present invention is not limited to this. You can set the GET effect to start and end first, or start the backlight effect but have the GET effect end first. The start timing and end timing of the back lamp effect can be set as appropriate.

(GET performance, back lamp performance, and display update of number of credits)
If the pressing order is correct and the GET effect is executed, game medals are naturally awarded. When awarding game medals is performed by adding credits, the number of credits displayed on the credit number display section (corresponding to the above-mentioned stored number display lamp 46h, also referred to as a "credit lamp") is also updated. FIG. 82 illustrates the credit number display section CRL, and also shows an example of the execution timing of the GET effect and the back lamp effect, and the display update timing of the credit number. Note that the execution timings of the GET effect and the back lamp effect in FIG. 82 are the same as those shown in FIG. 81.

In the example shown in FIG. 82, the number of game medals awarded is 15 (the maximum number of game medals awarded in one game), and the number of credits displayed in the credit number display section CRL depends on the actual timing of awarding each game medal. The number is updated in increments of 1 from 30 to 45. As shown in the figure, the number of credits in the number of credits display section CRL is updated at a timing after the navigation image NV1 and the navigation background image NH1 have all disappeared (see FIG. 81), and the back lamp effect has started to be executed. However, the GET effect (display of the GET effect image) is started at a timing when it has not yet started. The updating of the number of credits in the number of credits display section CRL ends at a predetermined timing within the period during which both the GET effect and the back lamp effect are being executed. The GET performance and the back lamp performance end after the update of the number of credits is completely completed.

In this way, in this example, when the update of the number of credits in the credit number display section CRL is completed, the GET effect and the back lamp effect that are executed in connection with the awarding of game medals continue. configured. Even though the display of the number of credits continues to be updated, if the GET effect or back lamp effect ends, even if the player who confirms the end of the GET effect, etc. tries to start the next game, the game medals will not be displayed. It may not be possible to start the game because the award has not been completed, and the player may feel uncomfortable or the tempo of the game may be disrupted. In this example, the GET effect and the back lamp effect end after the update of the number of credits (assignment of game medals) in the credit number display section CRL is completed, so the player who confirms the end of the GET effect may feel strange. It becomes possible to play the game at a good tempo without having to memorize it. In addition, although the above description has been made by taking as an example a back lamp effect in which the reels are illuminated from the inside using a back lamp, other reel illumination effects may be used. For example, there is a reel lighting effect in which the reels are illuminated from the outside using an illumination lamp (also referred to as a "reel window frame lamp") placed near the frame of the reel window (corresponding to the display window W described above) on the back side of the front door. Can be mentioned.

<Control when reel re-rotates due to power outage>
The slot machine of the second type is configured such that when a power outage occurs while the reels are rotating, the reels that were being rotated at the time of the power outage are rotated again after the power is restored. Below, the control contents regarding re-rotation of the reels after the power is restored will be explained with reference to FIGS. 83 to 85. The slot machine of the second embodiment includes three stepping motors (corresponding to the stepping motors 35a, 35b, and 35c of the first embodiment) that rotate three reels, respectively, and by switching the excitation phase of the stepping motors. , which controls the rotation of the reels. The slot machine of the second embodiment also includes an index that serves as an indicator of the rotational position of each reel, an index sensor that detects the index (corresponding to the reel sensor of the first embodiment), and a rotational position (symbol position) of the reel. The reel counter is provided with a reel counter that performs a predetermined count for determining the index, and is configured to reset the reel counter every time the reel sensor detects the index.

First, an overview of reel control will be explained with reference to FIG. 83. Here, the stepping motor has four phases (φ0, φ1, φ2, φ3), and a 1-2 excitation method (φ0, φ0・φ1, φ1, φ1・φ2, φ2, It is controlled by a method that sequentially switches the 8 excitation phase steps of φ2, φ3, φ3, φ3, and φ0), and during deceleration, it is controlled by a deceleration method that excites all phases of φ0 to φ3 (stepping motor (The configuration and control method can be changed as appropriate). Furthermore, switching of the excitation phase is performed in an interrupt process (corresponding to the above-mentioned timer interrupt process) executed at predetermined time intervals.

As shown in FIG. 83, when the reel starting operation (operation of the start lever) is accepted, acceleration state processing (processing of rotating the reel while accelerating until it reaches a predetermined rotational speed) is performed. executed. In the acceleration state process, as shown in the figure, the excitation phase switching in the first step is performed when the number of executions of the interrupt process (also referred to as the "number of interrupts") reaches 100 from the start point. Thereafter, the second step of excitation phase switching is performed when the number of interrupts is 50, and further, the excitation phase switching of steps 3, 4, and 5 is performed when the number of interrupts is 10, 5, and 2. . Then, at the time of execution of the next interrupt processing after the interrupt processing in which the excitation phase switching is performed in the fifth step (at the time when the number of interrupts is 1), the excitation phase switching in the sixth step is performed, and the acceleration state processing ( Excitation switching from the first step to the sixth step) is completed (the value of the number of interruptions that determines the excitation phase switching timing can be changed as appropriate).

When the acceleration state processing is completed, constant speed state processing (processing for rotating the reels at a constant speed) is executed. In constant speed state processing, excitation phase switching is performed every time an interrupt process is executed (every time the number of interrupts is 1). When a reel stop operation (operation of a stop switch to stop the reel) is received during execution of constant speed state processing, the scheduled reel stop position (deceleration state processing described later) is determined according to the timing of the reception. A deceleration start process ("slide") in which the reels are rotated (slided) at a constant speed until the reel moves to the scheduled stopping position is determined. (also referred to as "slip processing") is executed. Then, when the reels move to the scheduled stop position, a deceleration state process (a process in which the reel is stopped while being decelerated) is executed, and the scheduled stop symbols are stopped on the active line. In the deceleration state process, all phases φ0 to φ3 are excited while the interrupt process is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, six times).

Note that while the constant speed state process is being executed, a step-out determination is performed as appropriate to determine whether or not the stepping motor has stepped out (or whether there is a defective rotation of the reel). This step-out determination is performed, for example, as follows. Here, when the reel is rotating normally, the reel is configured to rotate once when the stepping motor switches the excitation phase by 336 steps. In this case, when the reel is in a constant speed state, it advances by one step for each interrupt, so if the reel is rotating normally, the reel will rotate once at the 336 interrupt. Therefore, the number of interruptions is counted by a reel counter or the like, and when the reel rotates once (when the index is detected by the index sensor), the counted value is cleared and counting of the number of interruptions is started again. In this way, if no index is detected even after the number of interrupts exceeds 336, it can be determined that a step-out (rotation failure) has occurred. Note that if it is determined that step-out has occurred, the acceleration state processing is executed again.

(If the power is cut off after receiving the stop operation)
Next, a processing procedure when power is cut off after receiving a stop operation will be described with reference to flowcharts in FIGS. 84(A) to 84(C). Note that each flowchart describes not only the processing contents but also the state of the slot machine. Here, the third stop operation is received while the first drum (the reel that is stopped by the first stop operation) and the second drum (the reel that is stopped by the second stop operation) are stopped. An example will be explained in which a power outage occurs later. Note that if a power outage occurs after the first stop operation is accepted, or if a power outage occurs after the second stop operation is accepted, the process is as follows: The power outage occurs after the third stop operation is accepted. The process will be similar to that in the case of

As shown in FIG. 84(A), when constant speed state processing is being executed on the third reel (the reel stopped by the third stop operation) (J11), when the third stop operation is accepted (J12 ), determines the symbol to be stopped for the third drum (J13), and executes deceleration start processing for the third drum (J14). If a power outage is detected after the start of the deceleration start process and before the third drum stops (J15), the power outage process is executed (J16). After the power is restored (J17), the re-rotation process A is executed on the third drum (J18), and the symbols to be stopped determined in step J11 are stopped and displayed on the active line. In this example, the re-rotation process A is automatically started after the power is restored. In contrast, for example, if a power outage occurs during deceleration start processing (slip processing), the power outage is detected as an error, and after the power is restored, the reset switch is operated to clear the error state. , the re-rotation process A may be started.

In the re-rotation process A, as shown in FIG. 84(B), accelerated state processing is executed (J21), and then constant speed state processing is executed (J22). In addition, step-out determination is performed as appropriate during execution of constant speed state processing. Thereafter, deceleration start processing is executed (J23), and deceleration state processing is further executed (J24). Note that if a power outage is detected before the third stop operation is accepted (while the third drum is rotating at a constant speed), the re-rotation process B shown in FIG. 84(B) is performed. This re-rotation process B differs from the re-rotation process A in that after executing the constant speed state process, a stop operation is accepted (J221), and then a deceleration start process is executed.

In this manner, in this example, if the power is cut off after the start of the deceleration start process, step-out determination is performed even during the re-rotation of the drum after the power is restored. Therefore, compared to the case where no out-of-step determination is performed, it is possible to more accurately stop the symbols to be stopped on the effective line, which were determined before the power cutoff occurred. In addition, the symbols scheduled to stop that are to be stopped on the active line after re-rotation are not only symbols in the same manner as the symbols scheduled to be stopped that were determined before the power outage occurred, but also symbols that are placed in the same position on the reels. Point. For example, a bell symbol with symbol number 3, a bell symbol with symbol number 8, a bell symbol with symbol number 13, and a bell symbol with symbol number 18 are arranged in one reel, and each bell symbol is arranged in the same manner. Suppose that the pattern is In this case, if the scheduled stop symbol determined before the power outage occurs is the bell symbol with symbol number 3, the symbol scheduled to stop after re-rotation will also be the bell symbol with symbol number 3 (see Figure 3 for symbol numbers). ). In a case where, for example, a watermelon symbol is arranged in symbol number 2 adjacent to the bell symbol of symbol number 3, and a cherry symbol is arranged in symbol number 12, which is adjacent to the bell symbol of symbol number 13, the power is cut off. If the scheduled stop symbol determined before the occurrence is the bell symbol with symbol number 3, but the symbol scheduled to stop after re-rotation is the bell symbol with symbol number 13, the bell symbol with symbol number 3 will be on the active line. The contents of the nine symbols stopped and displayed within the reel window are different when the bell symbol with symbol number 13 stops on the activated line. According to this example, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring.

(Differences due to differences in the timing of power outage)
As shown in FIG. 84(B), in the slot machine of the second form, when the power is cut off after accepting a stop operation, after the reel for which the stop operation has been accepted is rotated again, the reel for which the stop operation has been accepted is , it is designed to stop at a predetermined position without accepting a stop operation again. Even if a stop operation is performed again on a reel for which a stop operation has already been accepted, it will be invalid and will not be accepted. On the other hand, if a power outage occurs after the stop operation is accepted, as shown in FIG. accepted. In addition, after re-spinning, the stop switch lamp of the stop switch corresponding to the reel for which the stop operation has been accepted is controlled to an invalid state (for example, turned off), whereas the stop switch lamp for the reel corresponding to the reel for which the stop operation has not been accepted is The stop switch lamp of the switch is controlled to be in a lighting state (for example, red lighting state) indicating validity until a stop operation is performed.

A specific example is shown in FIG. Here, after the left stop switch SS1 is operated as a first stop operation and the left reel RE1 is stopped, the middle stop switch SS2 is operated as a second stop operation, and the power is cut off while the middle reel RE2 is rotating. It is assumed that the middle reel RE2 and the right reel RE3 rotate again after the power is restored. In that case, the stop switch lamp of the middle stop switch SS2, which has already accepted the second stop operation, is controlled to be off, and the stop switch lamp of the right stop switch SS3, which has not received the third stop operation, is controlled to be lit. .

In this way, in this example, the lighting state of the stop switch lamp when the reel is spinning again after the power is restored is different depending on whether the power is cut off after receiving the stop operation or when the power is cut off before accepting the stop operation. are configured differently. Therefore, depending on the lighting status of the stop switch lamp, the player can determine whether the reels that are spinning again after the power is restored are those for which a stop operation was accepted before the power was turned off, or whether the reels were not accepted for a stop operation before the power was turned off. can be notified. Note that during normal reel rotation, which is not re-spinning, a predetermined effect sound (also referred to as "reel rotation effect sound") that makes the player feel elated may be output from the speaker. . In that case, it is preferable to output the reel rotation performance sound even during re-rotation. By outputting the reel rotation effect sound even during the re-rotation, it is possible to make the player feel elated even during the re-rotation.

(If an error occurs while the reel is rotating again after the power is restored)
It is also assumed that an error may occur during re-rotation of the reels after power is restored. In the second type of slot machine, if a predetermined error (for example, a full error of game medals in the auxiliary storage) occurs while the reels are being re-rotated after the power is restored, the error is not immediately notified even if the error is detected. First, the system is configured to issue an error notification after the re-rotated reel stops. Specifically, for example, if a predetermined error occurs during execution of the re-rotation process A (see FIG. 84(B)) for a reel for which a stop operation has been accepted, the error will be detected, but the error notification will not be issued until the stop operation has been accepted. This is done after the accepted reel has stopped. By enabling error detection even during re-rotation, it is possible to reduce the period during which errors cannot be detected. Additionally, if an error notification is made while the reels are spinning again, there is a risk that the player may misunderstand the error notification as noting that the reels have started spinning again. It is possible to prevent such misunderstandings from occurring.

When an error is reported both using an error indicator controlled by the main control board and an image display unit or speaker controlled by the sub-control board, for example, the error may be reported using the error indicator even while the reel is re-spinning, and the error may be reported using the image display unit or speaker after the re-spinning reel has stopped. Also, if a specified error occurs at a specified timing during execution of re-spin process B (see FIG. 84(C)) for the reel before the stop operation is accepted, an error may be reported immediately after the error is detected. For example, if an error is detected before the stop operation is accepted during re-spin process B, the stop operation may not be accepted effectively and an error may be reported immediately.

(If the power is cut off again while the reel is spinning again after the power is restored)
It is also assumed that the power is cut off again (also referred to as "re-power cut") while the reel is rotating again after the power is restored. Furthermore, there may be multiple cases in which the power is cut off again. For example, the timing at which the power is turned off again is the time after the reel starts rotating again but before the index is detected (also referred to as the "time when the re-rotation index is not detected"), and the time when the index is detected after the reel starts rotating again. (also referred to as "time after re-rotation index detection"). In addition, the time after the re-rotation index is detected is the period from after the index is detected until the start of deceleration processing (the period during which the rotational position of the reels during re-rotation is outside the range in which the symbols scheduled to be stopped can be pulled onto the active line) (also referred to as "the time before the start of deceleration after detecting the re-rotation index") and the period after the index is detected and after the start of deceleration processing (when the rotational position of the reel during re-rotation makes the scheduled stop symbol effective. It can be considered separately from the point in time (also referred to as the "time after the start of deceleration after detecting the re-rotation index") within the period within which the rotation can be pulled onto the line.

In the second type of slot machine, if a second power outage occurs at any time, whether it is when the re-spin index is not detected, before deceleration begins after the re-spin index is detected, or after deceleration begins after the re-spin index is detected, the reels are rotated again (also called a "third spin") after the power is restored from the second power outage at least until the index is detected, and the symbols to be stopped are then stopped on the active line. Therefore, no matter when the power is restored, the symbols to be stopped can be stopped on the active line based on the point in time when the index was detected during the third spin. Therefore, even if the reel that was stopped due to a second power outage is moved, it is possible to accurately stop the symbols to be stopped on the active line by spinning the reel a third time.

As a modification, if a re-power cut occurs when the re-rotation index is not detected, it will be processed in the same way as above, but the power will be cut off again at the time after the re-rotation index is detected and before deceleration starts, or after the re-rotation index is detected and after the deceleration starts. If this occurs, the reels may not be rotated again. According to such a modification, if a power cut occurs again when the re-rotation index is not detected, it is possible to accurately stop the symbol to be stopped on the active line based on the time when the index is detected in the re-rotation. can. In addition, if a power outage occurs again after the re-rotation index is detected, the deceleration start process (slip processing) is already in progress, so the reel will be scheduled to stop before the reel stops due to the re-power outage. It is possible to stop the symbol on the active line with a fairly high probability. In addition, since the rotation is not performed again, it is possible to quickly move on to the next game after recovery from another power outage. On the other hand, if a power outage occurs again before the re-rotation index is detected, the deceleration start process is not executed at the time of the re-power outage, so the reel will stop before the reel stops due to the re-power outage. The probability that the scheduled symbol can be stopped on the active line becomes low. However, since they do not rotate again, it is possible to quickly move on to the next game.

As another modification, if a re-power cut occurs when the re-rotation index is not detected, or if a re-power cut occurs after deceleration starts after the re-rotation index is detected, the same processing as the above modification is performed. , If a power cut occurs again before the deceleration starts before the re-rotation index is detected, after the power is restored from the power cut again, the reels will be rotated again until at least the index is detected, and then the symbols scheduled to be stopped will be rotated on the active line. It may be stopped at the top. By doing this, the same effect as the above modification can be obtained in the case where the power is cut off again when the re-rotation index is not detected, or when the power is cut off again after the re-rotation index is detected and deceleration has started. can get. Furthermore, even if a power cut occurs again after the re-rotation index is detected and before the start of deceleration, the symbol scheduled to be stopped can be accurately stopped on the effective line.

[Third embodiment]
Hereinafter, a slot machine according to a third embodiment (hereinafter also referred to as a "third form slot machine") will be described with additional reference to FIGS. 86 to 120. Below, the characteristic parts of the slot machine of the third embodiment will be mainly explained. The characteristic parts described below are not limited to the third embodiment of the slot machine, but can be combined with other embodiments. Note that the slot machine of the third embodiment has the same or similar basic configuration as the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, and a description thereof will be omitted. Furthermore, each control process such as the winning combination determination process and the reel control process described for the slot machine 1 can be applied to the third embodiment of the slot machine in the same manner or with some changes in the process contents.

The characteristic configuration of the slot machine in this embodiment will be described below. ≪Basic specifications≫
(effective line)
In the slot machine of this embodiment, five winning lines are set: an upper horizontal line, a middle horizontal line, a lower horizontal line, a lower right line, and an upper right line. Five winning lines are valid lines. The prescribed number varies depending on the type of game, and is 2 pieces during the RB-A game described later, and 3 pieces for other games.

(Pattern arrangement)
In this embodiment, 21 symbols are arranged on each of the reels 3a to 3c as shown in FIG. 86(a) ("left reel", "middle reel", and "right reel" in FIG. 86(a) represent the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c, respectively). The types of symbols arranged on each of the reels 3a to 3c are 10 types, namely, "red seven", "blue seven", "bar", "replay A", "replay B", "star A", "star B", "watermelon", "cherry A", and "cherry B", as shown in FIG. 86(b). The arrows shown in FIG. 86(a) indicate the direction in which the symbols on each reel scroll within the display window W when the reels 3a to 3c are rotating during a game (except during a freeze effect).

(Types of Gaming Roles)
In this embodiment, the symbol combinations that will give the player a special bonus when stopped and displayed on each of the reels 3a to 3c are set as shown in Figs. 87 to 90. In the slot machine of this embodiment, the special bonuses that can be given include the payout of medals, replay, and bonus play. Such special bonuses are also referred to as special bonuses related to game media. Hereinafter, in this embodiment, a symbol combination that will give medals when aligned on a winning line is called a symbol combination of a small prize, and the alignment of a symbol combination of a small prize on a winning line is called a winning of a small prize. Furthermore, a symbol combination that will allow a replay to be performed when aligned on a winning line is called a replay symbol combination, and the alignment of a symbol combination of a replay on a winning line is called a replay alignment. Furthermore, a symbol combination that will allow a bonus game to be performed when aligned on a winning line is called a bonus symbol combination, and the alignment of a symbol combination of a bonus on a winning line is called a bonus alignment.

Types of bonus games include type 1 BB games (also referred to as "big bonuses"), RB games (also referred to as "regular bonuses"), and SB games (also referred to as "single bonuses"). Four types of symbol combinations, 1st type BB01 to BB04, are set as the symbol combinations for starting the 1st type BB game. The symbol combination for Type 1 BB01 is "Red Seven, Red Seven, Red Seven", the symbol combination for Type 1 BB02 is "Blue Seven, Blue Seven, Blue Seven", and the symbol combination for Type 1 BB03 is "Bar-Bar-Bar". The pattern combination of Type 1 BB04 is "Red Seven, Blue Seven, Red Seven."

When any of these symbol combinations is aligned on the active line, the 1st type BB game will start from the next game, and the RB-B game (1st type special accessory) will be repeatedly executed during the 1st type BB game. . As will be described later, during the RB-B game, a small prize is always won in every game, so the RB-B game can be said to be an advantageous gaming state for the player. In the RB-B game, after the start of the RB-B game, the end condition is satisfied when the number of games in which a small winning combination has been won becomes two, or when two games are played. However, during the type 1 BB game, when the RB-B game in progress ends, a new RB-B game starts from the next game. For this reason, type 1 BB is also referred to as "accessory continuous operation device related to first class special accessory". When the RB-B game is repeatedly executed in this way and the number of medals paid out during the first type BB game exceeds 279, the condition for ending the first type BB game is satisfied. Here, when the number of medals paid out during a type 1 BB game exceeds 279, even if the above-mentioned RB-B game termination condition is not met, the RB-B game ends. Then, the first type BB game ends.

The symbol combination that starts the RB-A game is "red seven, red seven, bar", and when this symbol combination is aligned on the active line, the RB-A game starts from the next game. RB-A games are the same type 1 special prizes as RB-B games, and during RB-A games, like during RB-B games, a small prize is always won every game, so it is advantageous for the player. It can be said that it is a game state. However, the end condition for the RB-A game is different from the RB-B game, and the end condition is satisfied that the number of games in which a small winning combination has been won is 5 times, or the game is played 12 times.

The symbol combination that starts the SB game is "Replay B, Blue Seven, Replay B", and when the symbol combination is aligned on the winning line, the normal role game is played only for the next one game. As described later, in the normal role game, the probability of winning a small role is slightly higher than in the normal game, but the number of medals paid out is more likely to be less than the specified number, so it cannot be said to be an advantageous game state for the player. For example, in the case of a gaming machine that does not notify the fact that SB has been won in a game, it is preferable for the player to operate the stop switch at a timing when the symbol combination that starts the SB game does not stop and display in the normal game. In other words, in the normal game, if the stop switch is operated at a random position, the symbol combination that starts the SB game may stop and display, so that a tense game can be provided even in the normal game. In this embodiment, "normal play" refers to play that is not a type 1 BB game, a type RB-A game, or a game with a normal role, and in which the type 1 BB01-04 and RB condition devices are not operating.

As the symbol combinations for replay, five types of symbol combinations or symbol combination groups are set as replays 01 to 05 shown in FIG. 87. Among these, the symbol combination group of re-game 05 is composed of six symbol combinations. As for the symbol combinations of the small winnings, 40 kinds of symbol combinations or symbol combination groups of winnings 01 to 40 shown in FIGS. 87 to 90 are set. Furthermore, if winnings 01 to 03 are won (corresponding symbol combinations are aligned on the active line), 10 medals are paid out, so these symbol combinations are also referred to as 10-card winnings. Similarly, the symbol combination of winning 04 is a 5-piece winning combination, the symbol combination of winnings 05-13, 39, and 40 is a 1-card winning, the symbol combination of winnings 14-23 is a 2-piece winning, and the symbol combination of winnings 26-37 is a 10-card winning. A symbol combination with a winning combination of 38 pieces is also called a 7-piece winning combination. The winning symbol combinations 24 and 25 are called a 15-card winning combination during the RB-A game, and a 10-card winning combination during the RB-B game.

≪Functional block of main control means≫
<Role determining means>
In this embodiment, a winning combination determination process executed by means corresponding to the winning combination determining means 132 shown in FIG. 9 will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 91, each condition device number and the type of condition device corresponding thereto in this embodiment will be explained. FIG. 91(a) shows the correspondence between bonus condition device numbers and bonus condition devices, and the symbol combinations associated with each bonus condition device. In addition, FIG. 91(b) shows the correspondence between the winning replay condition device number and the condition device related to replay or the condition device related to winning, and the symbols associated with each condition device related to replay and the condition device related to winning. Indicates a combination.

As shown in FIG. 91(a), each bonus condition device of this embodiment is assigned a bonus condition device number, and bonus condition device number 0 does not correspond to any bonus condition device. The bonus condition device number 1 is given to the condition device of type 1 BB-A, and the symbol combination of type 1 BB01 is associated with this condition device. The bonus condition device number 2 is given to the condition device of type 1 BB-B, and the symbol combination of type 1 BB02 is associated with this condition device. The bonus condition device number 3 is given to the condition device of type 1 BB-C, and the symbol combination of type 1 BB03 is associated with this condition device. The bonus condition device number 4 is given to the condition device of type 1 BB-D, and the symbol combination of type 1 BB04 is associated with this condition device.

Further, the bonus condition device number 5 is given to the RB condition device, and the RB symbol combination is associated with this condition device. The SB condition device is given a bonus condition device number 6, and the SB symbol combination is associated with this condition device. The symbol combinations of Type 1 BB01 to Type 1 BB04, RB, and SB are as shown in FIG. 87.

As shown in FIG. 91(b), the winning replay condition devices are assigned winning replay condition device numbers 0 to 27. The winning replay condition device number 0 indicates that no winning condition device or replay condition device is associated with the device. The condition devices of replay-A to replay-F are assigned winning replay condition device numbers 1 to 6, respectively. The condition devices of replay-A to replay-F are also associated with a group of replay-related symbol combinations shown in the "Constituent Symbol Combination" column. The condition devices of win-A1 to A3 are assigned winning replay condition device numbers 7 to 9, respectively. The condition devices of win-B to S are assigned winning replay condition device numbers 10 to 27, respectively. In addition, the condition devices for winning-A1 to A3 and winning-B to S are each associated with a winning symbol combination or symbol combination group shown in the "Constituent Symbol Combination" column.

(Probability of winning the lottery)
Next, with reference to the number tables shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, the winning probability of the winning combination lottery executed in the winning combination determination process of this embodiment will be explained. The number tables shown in FIGS. 92 and 93 represent the winning numbers assigned to each winning number. In this embodiment, the random number generator corresponding to the random number generator 66 shown in FIG. There are 65,536 numerical values. Therefore, the probability of winning is the value obtained by dividing the winning number assigned to each winning number shown in the number tables of FIGS. 92 and 93 by 65536.

The types of winning numbers to be drawn in the winning lottery and their winning probabilities vary depending on the RT state, the type of game to be played, and the setting values. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 92, the probability of winning the winning number α+1 (α is an integer, for example, 0) to which the condition device number of replay-A is linked differs depending on the RT state. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, the probability of winning for winning numbers (for example, α+2 to 6, α+8, α+51, α+52, etc.) that are linked to the bonus condition device number or the small role condition device number is set. It varies depending on the value. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 92(a) to (e), whether the game currently being executed is a normal game, a normal accessory game, a game inside type 1 BB or RB, or type 1 BB The types of winning numbers to be drawn differ depending on whether it is a game or an RB-A game. In this embodiment, three types of RT states are set: "Non-RT", "RT1", and "Type 1 BB operating/RB-A operating", and these RT states are shown in FIG. The transition is controlled by means corresponding to the RT state control means 112 (details will be described later). In addition, the setting value is set in four ways from "1" to "4", and as shown in FIG. ) has a high probability of winning.

FIG. 93 is a table of winning numbers to which bonus condition device numbers are linked, and in this embodiment, a winning combination related to a bonus winning combination is performed only when the RT state is non-RT, and one kind of winning number is drawn. It is not performed inside BB or RB, or during type 1 BB game or RB-A game. In addition, the winning numbers (α+19, α+29, α+40, α+50, α+52, α+60) to which only the bonus condition device numbers are linked, and the condition device numbers for bonuses and the condition device numbers for replays or small roles are linked. There is a winning number. If a winning number that is linked to both the bonus-related conditional device number and the replay or minor role conditional device number is determined by the lottery, the bonus-related conditional device number and replay linked to the determined winning number are determined. The condition device numbers of games or small winnings are each stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM of the main control means 100. For example, when the winning number α+20 is determined in a lottery, the bonus condition device number 1 (see FIG. 91(a)) is stored in the storage area where the bonus condition device number is stored in the RAM of the main control means 100. , and the winning replay condition device number 5 (see FIG. 91(b)) is stored in the RAM of the main control means 100 in the storage area where the winning replay condition device number is stored.

Figure 92 is a table showing the number of places for the draw for small roles and replay roles, and the types of winning numbers that are the subject of the draw are different for non-RT state (normal), non-RT state (SB in operation), RT1, RB-A in operation, and RB-B in operation. Here, non-RT state (normal) refers to a state in which the RT state is non-RT and normal role play is not being performed. Also, non-RT state (SB in operation) refers to a state in which the RT state is non-RT and normal role play is being performed. RB-A in operation refers to a state in which RB-A play is being performed, and RB-B in operation refers to a state in which RB-B play is being performed (i.e., type 1 BB play is being performed).

Comparing the number table for the non-RT state (normal) (Fig. 93(a)) and the number table for the non-RT state (SB in operation) (Fig. 93(b)), the total number of places assigned to the condition devices related to winning is one more in the non-RT state (SB in operation). However, the number of winning places for the winning number α+9 (linked to the condition device number of winning -J) is greater than the number of winning places for the winning number α+10 (linked to the condition device number of winning -K). Therefore, since there is a high possibility that fewer medals than the specified number will be paid out (the condition device of winning -J is associated with a pattern combination of one-coin roles), playing with a normal role is not advantageous for the player. Also, in RT1, when the winning number shown in Fig. 93 is determined by the role drawing, only the winning replay condition device number linked to that winning number is stored in RAM, and the bonus condition device number is not stored in RAM. Also, in RT1, as shown in FIG. 93(c), the probability of winning the winning number linked to the prize replay condition device number of the minor role is the same as in the non-RT state (normal state), but the probability of winning the winning number linked to the prize replay condition device number of the replay entry is higher than in the non-RT state (normal state). In RB-B game executed during the first type BB game, as shown in FIG. 93(d), the winning number linked to one of the condition device numbers of prize-L to prize-Q is determined, and in RB-A game, as shown in FIG. 93(e), the winning number linked to the condition device number of prize-R or prize-S is determined, so it can be said that when these games are being played, the game state is advantageous to the player.

<Production group number determining means and condition device group number determining means>
Next, in this embodiment, FIG. 94 will be referred to regarding the effect group number and condition device group number determined by means corresponding to the effect group number determining means 133 and condition device group number determining means 140 shown in FIG. I will explain. First, as shown in FIG. 94(a), the performance group number becomes 0 if the winning number determined by the lottery is linked with the winning replay condition device number 0. Additionally, if any of the winning replay condition device numbers 1 to 4 is linked to the determined winning number, the performance group number becomes 1, and the winning replay condition device number 5 or 6 is linked. In this case, the production group number becomes 2.

Further, if any of the winning replay condition device numbers 7 to 9 is linked to the winning number determined by the lottery, the production group number becomes 3. In addition, if any of the winning replay condition device numbers 10 to 27 is linked to the winning number determined in the lottery, as shown in FIG. 94(a), the winning replay condition device number is Accordingly, the performance group number will be one of the performance group numbers 3 to 21.

The condition device group number in this embodiment corresponds to the bonus condition device number. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 94(b), if the bonus condition device number 0 or 6 is linked to the winning number determined in the lottery, the condition device group number becomes 0. Further, if any of the bonus condition device numbers 1 to 4 is linked to the winning number determined in the lottery, the condition device group number becomes 1. Furthermore, if the bonus condition device number 5 is linked to the winning number determined in the lottery, the condition device group number becomes 2. Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, when the winning numbers corresponding to the condition device numbers of type 1 BB-A to D and RB are determined in the lottery, the main game state shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section. However, the above-mentioned conditional device group numbers can also be said to be grouped by main game state to which the game will be transferred within the advantageous section.

<RT state control means>
Next, in this embodiment, RT state transition control performed by means corresponding to the RT state control means 112 shown in FIG. 9 will be described with reference to FIG. 95. When the above-mentioned operation for changing the setting value is performed, a predetermined storage area of the RAM 63 of the main control means 100 is cleared, and thereby the RT state becomes "non-RT" (see arrow A). In "Non-RT", if a winning number associated with any of the bonus condition device numbers (1 to 4) of type 1 BB-A to D is determined, it will be in the type 1 BB, or the bonus condition device of RB When the winning number associated with number 5 is determined, the RB becomes internal, and the RT state shifts to "RT1" (see arrow B). Then, in "RT1", if the symbol combination corresponding to the 1st type BB is aligned on the active line inside the 1st type BB, or when the symbol combination corresponding to RB is aligned on the active line inside the RB, , the RT state shifts to "Type 1 BB operation/RB-A operation" (see arrow C). In "Type 1 BB operation/RB-A operation", when the termination condition of Type 1 BB game is satisfied or the termination condition of RB-A game is satisfied, until the next game starts. The RT state shifts to "non-RT" (see arrow D).

<Main game state control means>
Next, in this embodiment, the game mode transition control performed by the main game state control means corresponding to the game mode control means 116 shown in FIG. 9 will be explained. In the following explanation, the gaming mode will be referred to as a main gaming state, and each main gaming state will be represented by a main gaming state number MS. The main game states of this embodiment are "Normal section" (MS = 0), "High accuracy" (MS = 1), "RB inside / RB in operation" (MS = 2), "Type 1 BB inside" Five types are set: ``/Type 1 BB in operation'' (MS=3) and ``AT in progress'' (MS=4). Here, "high accuracy", "inside RB/in operation of RB", "inside type 1 BB/in operation of type 1 BB", and "during AT" belong to the advantageous section. In these main game state transition controls, in addition to the above-mentioned performance group number and condition device group number, various variables related to the game state are referred to. Therefore, with reference to FIG. 96, the main variables among various variables related to the gaming state in this embodiment will be explained. The various variables described below are stored in respective designated storage areas in the RAM 63 of the main control means 100.

(variable type)
In FIG. 96, the main gaming state number is a variable indicating the value (any one of 0 to 4) of the main gaming state number MS corresponding to the main gaming state in which the player is currently staying. The performance group number is the value (any one from 0 to 21) of the performance group number (see FIG. 94(a)) determined according to the winning replay condition device number linked to the winning number determined by the role lottery. This is a variable that indicates The condition device group number is the value (any one from 0 to 2) of the condition device group number (see FIG. 94(b)) determined according to the bonus condition device number linked to the winning number determined by the lottery. This is a variable that indicates The instruction number is a number for managing the operation order of the stop switches 26a, 26b, 26c and the notification content of the symbol to be pressed (advantageous operation mode of the stop switch), and is numbered from 0 to 6 depending on the notification content. A number is specified (details will be explained later).

The advantageous section clear counter is a counter that manages the number of games continuously staying in the advantageous section, and the numerical range of the counter value is 0 to 1500. That is, it is set to 1500 when transitioning from the normal section to the advantageous section, and is updated (for example, subtracted by 1) every time the game is played in the advantageous section. The MY counter is also referred to as a net increase counter, and is a counter that manages the difference (difference number) between the number of medals put in during the advantageous section and the number of medals paid out. The numerical range of the count value is 0 to 2412, and the counter is set to 0 when the game shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section, and thereafter, the count value is updated according to the number of medals inserted and the number of medals paid out in each game. Ru.

In addition, during the advantageous period, if the updated MY counter value (difference number of coins) becomes less than "0" due to the current MY counter value, the number of medals inserted for the game, and the number of medals paid out for the game. is configured to store "0" in the MY counter. For example, if the current value of the MY counter is 2, the number of medals inserted for the game is 3, and the number of medals paid out for the game is 0, then 2-3+0<0, so 0 is stored as the value of the MY counter. I try to do that.

The AT play count counter is a counter for managing the remaining number of games (hereinafter referred to as the "AT play count") that can be played "in AT" (MS = 4), and the numerical range of the count value is set to 0 to 1500. When the main game state transitions to "in AT", an initial value (e.g. 30) is set in the AT play count counter, and the count value is updated (e.g. subtracted by 1) each time a game is played "in AT". In addition, when various additional draws described below are performed, the value of the number of games determined by the additional draw is added to the count value. In addition, during play "in AT", the player is presented as if he is playing two types of AT games, a first AT game and a second AT game (details will be described later).

The temporary play counter is a counter for managing the number of additional games to be notified to the player when the start lever 25 is operated when the count value of the AT game number counter is added (additional). . The numerical range of the count value of this counter is set from 0 to 50. The high-probability game number counter is a counter for managing the remaining number of games in which a "high-probability" (MS=1) game can be played (hereinafter referred to as "the number of high-probability games"), and the count value The numerical range of is set from 0 to 255. If you win a high-probability shift lottery to be described later, a predetermined value (for example, 30) is added to the high-probability game number counter, and the count value is updated (for example, subtracted by 1) each time a game is played in "high probability".

The high certainty flag is a flag for determining whether or not the main game state is staying in "high certainty", and when it is "0", it is not staying in "high certainty" and it is "1". The time indicates that you are staying in a ``high degree''. The AT flag is a flag for determining whether or not the main game state is staying in "AT in progress"; when it is "0", it is not staying in "AT in progress", and when it is "1", it is not staying in "AT in progress". indicates that the host is staying in "AT" mode. The one-card winning counter is a counter for counting the number of times a one-card winning combination is won during the RB-A game, and the numerical value range of the count value is 0 to 8. The loop rate number is a number for managing the probability that a new first AT game will start (hereinafter referred to as "loop rate") when the first AT game described above once ends, and the numerical range is 0. ~2. That is, in this embodiment, three loop rates are set in advance.

The standby performance number is a number for managing the freeze performance that is executed when all the reels stop, and the numerical range is set from 0 to 2. Here, if the freeze is not executed, the standby effect number becomes "0". Furthermore, if both the all-stop freeze 1 lottery and the all-stop freeze 2 lottery (described later) are won in non-RT or RT1, the standby performance number becomes "1". Here, the full stop freeze 1 drawing is triggered by the winning number α+27 (1st type BB-A + prize-winning-I, see Figure 93) or α+47 (1st type BB-C + prize-winning-H) being determined in the role lottery. executed. Further, the all-stop freeze 2 lottery is executed when the all-stop freeze 1 lottery is won.

Also, when the count value of the AT game number counter is 1 or more, winnings -B to E or replays -B to D among the winning numbers (see Figure 93) that correspond to the bonus condition device number by lottery. If a winning number to which no replay condition device number is linked is determined by lottery, the standby performance number becomes "2". Here, as shown in FIG. 93, the winning numbers to which the winning/replaying condition device numbers of winnings B to E or replays B to D are not linked are α+21 to α+23, α+30, α+32 to α+34, α+41. ~α+44, α+53~α+55, α+60.

It should be noted that the freeze effect executed when the standby effect number is "2" is longer than that of the standby effect number "1". The ED flag is a flag for determining whether or not the main game state has transitioned to the ending state while staying in the advantageous section.If the main game state has not transitioned to the ending state, it is "0" and the ending When the state is changed, it becomes "1". Here, the transition to the ending state is performed when the value of the above-mentioned advantageous section clear counter exceeds a predetermined value (for example, 1250) or when the value of the MY counter exceeds a specific value (for example, 2200). be exposed.

After transitioning to the ending state, when any of the winning numbers α+2 to α+4 (see FIGS. 92(a) and (c)) is determined in the lottery, the bell spill counter is linked to the determined winning number. A counter that counts the number of times that the symbol combination (any of winning prizes 01 to 03) associated with the winning replay condition device number that is displayed does not line up on the active line (that is, the notified press order is ignored). The numerical range of the count value is set to 0 to 241. The internal game number counter is a counter that counts the number of games played within the 1st type BB or RB, and the numerical range of the count value is set to 0 to 4.

(Conditions for transition to main game state)
As mentioned above, the transition control of the main game state is performed based on the values of the various variables mentioned above and the performance group number and condition device group number determined according to the winning number determined by the role lottery. With reference to FIG. 97, each transition condition of the main game state will be explained. First, when the main game state is "normal section", the condition device group number becomes "0" according to the winning number determined by the lottery (the bonus condition device number becomes "0" or "6" (Fig. 94). (see (b))), and the performance group number becomes "7" (the winning replay condition device number becomes "15" (see Fig. 94 (a))), then " Shift to ``high accuracy'' (see arrow A). In "High Determined", when the condition device group number becomes "0" according to the winning number determined by the lottery, and the value of the High Determined Game Counter becomes "0", it is the "Normal section". (see arrow d).

In addition, in the "normal section", if the condition device group number becomes "2" (the bonus condition device number becomes "5") according to the winning number determined by the lottery, "RB internal medium / If the condition device group number becomes “1” (the bonus condition device number becomes one of “1” to “4”), the state changes to “1st type BB in operation” (see arrow A). Transition to "Internal/Type 1 BB in operation" (see arrow C). Similarly, in "High Accuracy", if the conditional device group number becomes "2" according to the winning number determined by the lottery, it will shift to "RB inside / RB in operation" (arrow ), when the condition device group number becomes “1” (type 1 BB-A to D condition devices are activated), the state shifts to “type 1 BB inside/type 1 BB in operation” (arrow ).

When RB-A play is started while "inside RB/RB in operation", if the RB-A play end condition is met afterwards and the AT play count counter value is "0", it will transition to the "normal section" (see arrow K). On the other hand, when RB-A play is started while "inside RB/RB in operation", if the RB-A play end condition is met afterwards and the AT play count counter value is "1" or greater, it will transition to "in AT" (see arrow K).

In addition, when the 1st type BB game is started in ``1st type BB inside/1st type BB in operation'' and the end condition of the 1st type BB game is met, the value of the AT game number counter is ``0''. When this occurs, the vehicle will move to the "normal section" (see arrow). On the other hand, when the 1st type BB game is started in ``1st type BB inside/1st type BB in operation'' and the end condition of the 1st type BB game is satisfied, the value of the AT game number counter is ``1''. ” or more, the state shifts to “AT in progress” (see arrow).

In "AT in progress", if the conditional device group number becomes "2" according to the winning number determined by the lottery, the state shifts to "RB inside/RB in operation" (see arrow C), and the conditional device When the group number becomes "1" (the condition devices for type 1 BB-A to D are activated), the process shifts to "type 1 BB inside/type 1 BB in operation" (see arrows). In addition, when the conditional device group number becomes "0" according to the winning number determined by the lottery, and the value of the AT game number counter becomes "0", the process moves to the "normal section" (arrow ). Furthermore, if the value of the ED flag becomes "1" and the value obtained by adding the value of the bell spill counter multiplied by 10 to the value of the MY counter exceeds 2400, the transition to the "normal section" occurs ( (see arrow ce).

In addition, in the "High Probability", "Inside RB/RB in operation", "Inside Type 1 BB/Type 1 BB in operation" and "During AT" (i.e. while in the favorable zone), when the value of the favorable zone counter becomes "0" or the value of the MY counter exceeds 2400, the main game state will transition to the "Normal Zone" (see arrow S).

(Type of drawing executed in each main gaming state)
Next, the types of lotteries executed in each main game state will be described with reference to FIG. 98. First, the lotteries executed in the "normal section" (MS=0) and "high probability" (MS=1) include the all stop freeze 1 lottery, the all stop freeze 2 lottery, the special first AT game lottery, and the special first AT game additional lottery. As described above, the all stop freeze 1 lottery and the all stop freeze 2 lottery are executed when the winning number is determined to be α+27 or α+47 by the role lottery executed in response to the operation of the start lever 25. In detail, first the all stop freeze 1 lottery (the winning probability is about 98%) is executed, and if it is won, the all stop freeze 2 lottery (the winning probability is about 9.8%) is executed.

The special first AT game lottery is a lottery for determining whether to proceed to the special first AT game after the bonus game ends. In the normal 1st AT game, when a predetermined number of games (the number of games may be added by a lottery to be described later) is played, the 1st AT game ends and shifts to the 2nd AT game, but in the special 1st AT game, Even if a predetermined number of games have been played, there is a possibility that a new first AT game will be started according to the loop rate described above. The special first AT game lottery is executed according to the winning number determined by the combination lottery performed in response to the operation of the start lever 25. The special first AT game addition lottery is executed when the special first AT game lottery is won, and the above-mentioned loop rate is determined by the lottery.

Next, among the drawings executed in the "normal section" (MS=0), "high certainty" (MS=1), and "during AT" (MS=4), there is a high certainty transfer drawing. The high-probability transition lottery is executed according to the winning number determined by the combination lottery performed in response to the operation of the start lever 25. If you win the high-probability transition lottery, a predetermined value is added to the high-probability game number counter shown in FIG.

Next, the drawings executed in the "normal zone" (MS = 0), "high probability" (MS = 1), "inside RB/during RB play" (MS = 2) and "during AT" (MS = 4) include the first AT game add-on drawing, the loop rate drawing and the loop drawing. The first AT game add-on drawing is a drawing to select one from a number of pre-determined numbers of add-on games. The loop rate drawing is a drawing to select one from a number of pre-determined loop rates. The loop drawing is a drawing to determine whether or not to start a new first AT game based on the loop rate drawing described above. These drawings are executed when a predetermined winning number is determined by a role drawing triggered by the operation of the start lever 25 and a predetermined symbol combination is lined up in the game.

Next, among the drawings executed in "RB inside/RB gaming" (MS=2) and "1BB inside/1BB gaming" (MS=3), there is an internal drawing. This lottery is to determine whether or not to notify the operating order of the stop switches 26a to 26c (i.e. push order navigation) when the RB is inside or 1BB is inside, and is a lottery to determine whether or not to notify the operating order of the stop switches 26a to 26c (that is, push order navigation). It is executed in accordance with the winning number determined by the lottery drawn in response to the operation.

Next, the draws that are executed "inside 1BB/during 1BB play" (MS=3) include the second AT game add-on draw, the 3-time body add-on 1 draw, the 3-time body add-on 2 draw, and the 3-time body add-on 3 draw. These draws are executed when a specific symbol combination is completed when all reels have stopped. The second AT game add-on draw is a draw to select one from a number of pre-determined add-on play numbers. The 3-time body add-on 1 draw, the 3-time body add-on 2 draw, and the 3-time body add-on 3 draw will be described in detail later, but they are executed depending on how many of the three reels have stopped at a predetermined position (in other words, the eye-pressing was successful) when a predetermined winning number is determined by the role draw.

Specifically, when the eye-pressing is successful for one reel, only the 3-times body-added 1 draw is executed. When the eye-pressing is successful for two reels, the 3-times body-added 1 draw and the 3-times body-added 2 draw are executed. When the eye-pressing is successful for all reels, the 3-times body-added 1 draw, the 3-times body-added 2 draw, and the 3-times body-added 3 draw are executed. These draws determine the value to be added to the number of games played in the second AT game, and the 3-times body-added 2 draw is more likely to result in a larger number of games being added than the 3-times body-added 1 draw. Also, the 3-times body-added 3 draw is more likely to result in a larger number of games being added than the 3-times body-added 2 draw.

<Method of controlling the pressing order>
In this embodiment, the contents notified by the means corresponding to the push order management means 139 shown in FIG. 9 will be described with reference to FIG. 99. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 99(a), there are five types of instruction contents A1 to A5 notified to the player by both the payout number display lamp 46j (instruction monitor) and the image display device 11. Also, as shown in FIG. 99(b), there are nine types of instruction contents B1 to B9 notified to the player by only the image display device 11. When the instruction contents are notified using the instruction monitor, an instruction number (0 to 5) is displayed on the instruction monitor. Here, instruction number 0 is displayed when the push order is not notified.

The instruction content A1 is to notify the "red seven" symbol as a symbol to be pressed (hereinafter referred to as "selected symbol"), and "=1" is displayed as the instruction number 1 on the payout number display lamp 46j. do. At this time, a message "Aim for Red Seven" is displayed on the display screen 11a of the image display device 11. The instruction content A2 is to notify the "Blue Seven" symbol as the target symbol, and displays "=2" as the instruction number 2 on the payout number display lamp 46j. At this time, a message "Aim for the blue seven" is displayed on the display screen 11a. The instruction content A3 is to notify the "bar" symbol as the target symbol, and displays "=3" as the instruction number 3 on the payout number display lamp 46j. At this time, a message "Aim for the blue seven" is displayed on the display screen 11a.

The instruction content A4 is to notify that the "Star A" symbol with symbol number 13 on the middle reel 3b is to be pressed in the middle row of the display window W as a targeted symbol. In this case, "=4" is displayed as the instruction number 4 on the payout number display lamp 46j. At this time, a message is displayed on the display screen 11a saying, "Press (Replay, ☆, ☆) on the middle reel!"

The instruction content A5 is to press the "Star A" symbol with symbol number 14 on the left reel 3a in the middle of the display window W as the eye-press symbol, and to push the "Star B" symbol with symbol number 12 on the middle reel b. This is to notify that the symbol number 0 on the right reel c is to be pressed in the middle row of the display window W, and that the "Cherry B" symbol with symbol number 0 on the right reel c is to be pressed in the middle row of the display window W. In this case, "=5" is displayed as instruction number 5 on the payout number display lamp 46j. At this time, the display screen 11a shows "Press (☆, ☆, blue seven) on the left reel, (☆,☆, bar) on the middle reel, and (replay A, cherry B, red seven) on the right reel!" A message will be displayed.

The instruction content B1 is to notify the user of the "red seven" symbol as the target symbol, and when this notification is performed, a message "Aim for the red seven" is displayed on the display screen 11a. The instruction content B2 is to notify the "Blue Seven" symbol as a target symbol, and when this notification is performed, a message "Aim for the Blue Seven" is displayed on the display screen 11a. The instruction content B3 is to notify a "bar" symbol as a target symbol, and when this notification is performed, a message "Aim for the bar" is displayed on the display screen 11a.

The instruction contents B4 to B9 notify the operating order of the stop switches 26a to 26c. The instruction content B4 notifies the order of operations from left to middle to right, and a character string "1, 2, 3" is displayed on the display screen 11a. The instruction content B5 is to notify the operation order of left→right→middle, and a character string "1, 3, 2" is displayed on the display screen 11a. The instruction content B6 notifies the order of operations from middle to left to right, and a character string of "2, 1, 3" is displayed on the display screen 11a. The instruction content B7 informs the operation order of right→left→middle, and a character string "3.1.2" is displayed on the display screen 11a. The instruction content B8 notifies the order of operations from middle to right to left, and a character string "2, 3, 1" is displayed on the display screen 11a. The instruction content B9 notifies the order of operations from right to middle to left, and a character string "3.2.1" is displayed on the display screen 11a.

<Design position detection means>
In this embodiment, the game progress management means 130 shown in FIG. 9 further includes symbol position detection means. This symbol position detection means detects the symbol number and step number at a predetermined detection position at the time when the player's operation (stop operation) on the stop switches 26a to 26c is accepted. Here, in this embodiment, the detection position is a position shifted downward by an angle equivalent to one step of the stepping motor from the boundary between the lower stage and the middle stage in the display window W.

Each stepping motor of this embodiment corresponding to the stepping motors 35a, 35b, and 35c shown in FIG. 2 is a 4-phase stepping motor, and these stepping motors are driven by a predetermined excitation method (for example, 1-2 phase excitation). In this case, the number of steps per rotation is 504 (the rotation angle of one step is approximately 0.71 degrees). Therefore, in this embodiment, since the number of symbols on one reel is 21 symbols, the number of steps per symbol is 504/21=24.

Note that the detection of one rotation of the stepping motor can be performed, for example, by using a reel sensor installed corresponding to each of the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c using an index (detection piece) provided on each of the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c. ) is made possible by the detection of In addition, in order to rotationally drive each stepping motor, the timer interrupt process is used to switch the phase to be excited among the four phases (φ0, φ1, φ2, φ3), so the number of times the timer interrupt process is executed is The number of steps rotated by the stepping motor can be counted based on . For example, when a stepping motor that rotates once every 504 steps is controlled by a timer interrupt process that is executed every 1.49 milliseconds, when the reel reaches a constant speed (the reel drive state changes to a constant speed state) The rotational speed of the reel is approximately 79.90 revolutions per minute (79.90 rpm).

When the reels are rotated by a stepping motor with 504 steps per rotation, the number of symbols on each reel is 21 (see Figure 86), so it takes 24 timer interrupts for the reels to rotate by one symbol. Processing will be executed. In this embodiment, the main control means 100 determines the position of a symbol based on each count value of a 1 symbol counter that counts the number of steps for one symbol and a symbol number counter that counts the symbol number. For example, when the reels 3 are rotating at a constant speed, the center position in the symbol area of symbol number 0 (step 12) and the center position C in the middle of the display window W are Suppose they match. Here, the symbols of the illustrated reels do not distinguish between the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel, so the notations a to c added to the symbol 3 are omitted.

At this time, the value of the symbol number counter detected at the aforementioned detection position (a position shifted one step downstream from the boundary between the middle and lower sections of the display window W) becomes "20", which indicates the symbol number in the lower section of the display window W, and the value of the 1 symbol counter becomes "1". In this state, as shown in FIG. 100(b), when the reel 3 rotates one step, the value of the 1 symbol counter is subtracted by one and becomes "0" for a moment, but is immediately set to a value of "24". At this time, the value of the symbol number counter is updated from "20" to "0". Then, each time the reel 3 rotates one step, the value of the 1 symbol counter is subtracted by one, and as soon as the value becomes "0", the value of "24" is set, and the value of the symbol number counter is updated from "0" to "1".

The symbol position detection means of this embodiment detects the value of the symbol number counter and the value of the one symbol counter at the detection position at the time when the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the reel 3 is accepted. Thereby, the main control means 100 determines the symbol number and the position of its symbol area in the lower row of the display window W based on each count value detected by the symbol position detection means.

(Vita press range)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 100(b) to 100(d), the timing at which the target symbol (push symbol) can be stopped at the lower stage of the display window W will be explained. In these figures, arrows indicate the rotation direction of the reel 3. In this embodiment, the fastest stop operation timing at which the symbol with symbol number 0 can be stopped at the lower stage of the display window W by pressing the button is as shown in FIG. 100(b), when the symbol number counter at the detection position is This is a case where the stop switch is operated when the value is "0" and the value of the 1 symbol counter is "24". If the stop switch is operated faster than this timing (for example, if the symbol position detection means detects symbol number 20 when the stop operation is accepted), the symbol with symbol number 0 will stop at the lower row. Even if it is displayed, in this embodiment, it is treated as if the symbol with symbol number 0 was stopped at the lower row by one frame or more pull-in control rather than by bit pushing.

The latest operation timing for stopping the symbol number 0 at the lower row of the display window W by a vita-push is when the stop switch is operated when the value of the symbol number counter at the detection position is "0" and the value of the 1 symbol counter is "5", as shown in FIG. 100(c). Here, in this embodiment, when stopping the symbol number 0 at the lower row, when the value of the 1 symbol counter becomes "5", the stepping motor is excited in all phases to start braking the reel. As a result, the reel continues to rotate by inertia, but it will eventually stop when the position of the step 12 of the symbol number 0 reaches approximately the center position C in the lower row of the display window W. On the other hand, if the value of the 1 symbol counter is "4" or less when the stop switch is operated, the reel control means of this embodiment does not perform braking by exciting all phases, so that the symbols from symbol number 1 onwards will stop at the lower row of the display window W. From the above, if the value of the 1 symbol counter is "5" when the stop switch is operated, it can be said that the timing of the stop operation is the latest (in other words, the most accurate) perfect push.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the stop switch is operated, the value of the symbol number counter detected by the symbol position detection means is "0", and the value of the 1 symbol counter is "24" to "5". ”, it is treated as if the symbol with symbol number 0 was pushed to the bottom of the display window W when the reels 3 stopped in the state shown in FIG. 100(d).

In the above-described example, the determination of whether to press the button was made at the lower position of the display window W, but it may be determined whether the button was pressed at the middle or upper position of the display window W. For example, if the value of the symbol number counter detected by the symbol position detection means is "0" and the value of the 1 symbol counter is within the range of "24" to "5", the symbol is displayed in the middle of the display window W. It may be treated as if the symbol number 1 has been pressed, or it may be treated as if the symbol number 2 has been pressed in the upper row of the display window W.

Further, the detection position is not limited to a position shifted one step downstream from the boundary between the middle and lower stages of the display window W, but may be any position. For example, when the center position in the lower part of the display window W is set as the detection position, the value of the symbol number counter is "20" and the value of the 1 symbol counter is "13" - the value of the symbol number counter is "0" and the value of the 1 symbol counter is When the stop switch is operated while the value of is within the range of "16", it may be treated as if the symbol with symbol number 0 has been pressed to the bottom of the display window W.

In this embodiment, when the operation of the stop switch is accepted, for the reel corresponding to the stop switch, (a) the symbol number of the symbol located in the lower row of the display window W when the stop switch was operated; (for example, the count value of the symbol number counter detected by the symbol position detection means); (b) the position of the symbol in the lower part of the display window W (for example, the one symbol counter detected by the symbol position detection means); (c) Information that allows you to know the symbol number of the symbol that will eventually be stopped and displayed at the bottom of the display window W (hereinafter, in this embodiment, "stop operation information ) is transmitted from the main control means 100 to the sub control means 200. These stop operation information may be transmitted from the main control means 100 to the sub-control means 200 by, for example, a left reel stop reception command, a middle reel stop reception command, or a right reel stop reception command. Furthermore, the stop operation information sent from the main control means 100 to the sub-control means 200 does not have to be sent by one command; for example, part of the stop operation information may be sent by another command (a plurality of commands). You can do it like this.

Furthermore, the information (a) to (c) described above does not need to be transmitted as individual information, and the sub-control means 200 can perform predetermined arithmetic processing on the information received from the main control means 100. It may be something that can be obtained. For example, by dividing the numerical value transmitted from the main control means 100, the value of the quotient ultimately indicates the symbol number to be stopped and displayed on the lower row, and the remainder value indicates the number of sliding frames. Good too. In other words, for example, (a) as information for grasping the symbol number of the symbol located in the lower part of the display window W when the stop switch was operated, information is displayed in the lower part of the display window W when the stop switch is operated. Instead of transmitting the symbol number itself of the symbol that was located, the sub-control means 200 transmits information that allows the user to grasp the symbol number that will finally be stopped and displayed in the lower row and information that allows the number of sliding frames to be grasped. (a) It is possible to grasp the symbol number of the symbol located in the lower row of the display window W when the stop switch was operated.

≪Functional block of sub-control means≫
<Skill determination means>
In this embodiment, the performance management means 210 shown in FIG. 9 further includes a skill determination means. This skill determining means is configured to determine whether a player moves to a practice mode (described later) at the start of a normal big game, which will be described later, and when a stop switch is operated in each game during the normal big game. The accuracy of the eye press is determined based on the above-mentioned stop operation information transmitted from the main control means (details will be described later).

≪Game specifications of this embodiment≫
<Basic game flow>
In the slot machine of this embodiment, in a game where the main game state is "normal section" (MS = 0), a winning number corresponding to one of the bonus condition device numbers of type 1 BB-A to D is determined by lottery. Then, the main game state shifts to "1st type BB inside/1st type BB in operation" (MS=3). Then, when a symbol combination (see FIG. 87) corresponding to any one of Type 1 BB01 to BB04 is completed, a normal big bonus game (Type 1 BB game) is started. Note that the normal big bonus game will be referred to as "normal big" below. As mentioned above, the condition for ending the type 1 BB game is that the number of medals paid out exceeds 279 (see the remarks column in FIG. 87). Therefore, if only a 10-card winning combination is won during the 1st type BB game, the total number of medals paid out during the 1st type BB game will be 280 when the 10-card winning combination is won for the 28th time. Then, the normal big (1st type BB game) ends. On the other hand, if prize 38 (see Figure 90) is won, 7 medals will be paid out, so if prize 38 is won only once during a type 1 BB game, until the 28th game is played. You can bring the total number of medals you have earned to 277. If the 10-coin winning combination is won in the 29th game, a total of 287 medals can be acquired and the normal big game can be completed.

In this way, by winning the prize 38 only once during the normal big, it is possible to increase the number of medals paid out during the type 1 BB game. In this embodiment, during the type 1 BB game, the winning number α+13 (see FIG. 92(d)) is determined by lottery, and the winning replay condition device number 22 (see FIG. 91(b)) of winning -N is determined. In the game stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM of the main control means 100, reel stop control is performed to make it possible to match the winning symbol combination 38 when the right stop switch 26c is operated for the first stop. Furthermore, a cut-in effect is executed based on the determination of the winning number α+13, and the player is informed that the symbol combination corresponding to the prize winning number 38 can be arranged.

Further, in a normal big game, when the start lever 25 is operated, the images shown in FIGS. 101(a) and 101(b) may be displayed on the display screen 11a. The image in FIG. 101(a) is displayed when the production group number becomes 14 or 15 as a result of the winning number being determined to be α+11 or α+12 (see FIG. 92(d)). This image instructs the player to perform a first stop operation on the middle stop switch 26b (the part surrounded by a broken line A in the figure). In addition, the operation order and stop symbols for the left reel 3a and right reel 3c are not limited. Furthermore, the "Replay A" symbol (symbol number 14) of the middle reel 3b is displayed on the upper row of the display window W, the "Star A" symbol (symbol number 13) on the middle row, and the "Star B" symbol (symbol number 12) on the lower row are stopped. (The part surrounded by the broken line A in the figure) Note that when the image in FIG. 101(a) is displayed, instruction content A4 shown in FIG. 99 is also notified. In other words, it is a notification effect that makes you press a specific reel (in this embodiment, the middle reel) at a specific position. Thereby, the notification of the instruction content A4 is also referred to as a "single body notification performance."

The image in Figure 101 (b) is displayed when the winning number is determined to be α+16 (see Figure 92 (d)) by the winning combination lottery, resulting in a performance group number of 19. This image indicates that for the left reel 3a, the "Star B" symbol (symbol number 15) should stop on the top row of the display window W, the "Star A" symbol (symbol number 14) on the middle row, and the "Blue Seven" symbol (symbol number 13) on the bottom row (parts surrounded by dashed line U in the figure). For the middle reel 3b, it indicates that the "Star A" symbol (symbol number 13) should stop on the top row of the display window W, the "Star B" symbol (symbol number 12) on the middle row, and the "Bar" symbol (symbol number 11) on the bottom row (parts surrounded by dashed line E in the figure). For the right reel 3c, the instruction is to stop the "Replay A" symbol (symbol number 1) on the top row of the display window W, the "Cherry B" symbol (symbol number 0) on the middle row, and the "Red Seven" symbol (symbol number 20) on the bottom row (parts surrounded by dashed line O in the figure). The order in which the stop switches 26a to 26c are operated does not matter. When the image in FIG. 101(b) is displayed, the instruction A5 shown in FIG. 99 is also notified. In other words, it is a notification effect that causes multiple reels (in this embodiment, the left reel, center reel, and right reel) to be pressed at specific positions. For this reason, the notification of the instruction A5 is also referred to as a "three-reel notification effect."

In a game in which the image of FIG. 101(a) is displayed, when the performance group number reaches 15, the eye press is successful for the middle reel 3b, and the announced symbol arrangement ("Replay A" symbol, "Star A" ” symbol, “Star B” symbol) are stopped and displayed in the display window W, reel stop control is performed so that any of the winning symbol combinations 01 to 03 (see FIG. 87) is aligned on the active line. The above-mentioned "eye press" is successful not only when the bit press is successful, but also when the notified pattern sequence is located upstream from the display window W by a predetermined number of frames (for example, 1 frame). This may include the case where the stop switch is operated. As a result, the second AT game add-on lottery shown in FIG. 98 is executed, and when the number of add-on games is determined, the numerical value is added to the AT game number counter shown in FIG. 96. On the other hand, when the production group number reaches 14, the second AT game additional lottery is executed even if the arrangement of symbols notified to the middle reel 3b cannot be stopped and displayed on the display window W.

In addition, in a game in which the image of FIG. 101(b) is displayed (that is, a game in which the symbol combinations associated with the winning-Q condition device are aligned), all of the reels 3a to 3c are If you successfully hit the reels, the winning symbol combination 28 (see Figure 89) will line up on the active line, and if you successfully hit the two reels, any of the winning symbol combinations 29 to 31 (see Figure 89) will align on the active line. When the symbols are aligned and one reel is successfully pushed, reel stop control is performed so that any one of the winning symbol combinations 32 to 34 (see FIGS. 89 and 90) is aligned on the active line. Further, if the eye-pull fails for all the reels, reel stop control is performed so that the symbol combination of winning 35 or winning 36 is aligned on the active line. Here, the success of the above-mentioned "eye push" is not only when the hit push is successful, but also when the symbol number corresponding to the predetermined symbol constituting the winning symbol combination 28 is a predetermined number of frames from the reference position (for example, the lower row). This may also include a case where the stop switch is operated at a position on the upstream side (for example, by one frame).

In this way, the number of medals paid out is the same when the eye press is successful on three reels, when the eye press is successful on two reels, and when the eye press is successful on one reel. However, the symbol combinations that line up on the active line are different. In this way, by determining whether or not the eye press was successful for each reel and aggregating the results, it is possible to effectively Since it is determined how many reels have been successfully hit or not based on the symbol combinations (types of winnings) that are stopped and displayed on the line, it does not burden the storage capacity of the RAM of the main control means. Moreover, the processing load on the main control means can be reduced. Then, depending on the number of reels that have been successfully hit, the 3-time bonus 1 draw to the 3-time bonus 3 draw shown in FIG. 98 are executed, and the number of bonus games determined in each bonus lottery is shown in FIG. It is added to the indicated AT game number counter.

Specifically, if you successfully hit the eye on three reels, three draws will be executed: 3 times body additional 1 draw, 3 times body additional 2 draw, 3 times body additional 3 draw, and 2 reels will be successfully hit. If successful, two draws will be executed, 1st draw for 3-time body addition and 2nd draw for 3-time body increase, and if the eye is successful for one reel, one lottery will be executed for 3-time body addition 1 lottery, and all If the eye-pull on the reel fails, none of the 3-time bonus 1 draw, 3-time bonus 2 draw, and 3-time bonus 3 draws will be executed. In other words, the larger the number of reels that are successfully hit, the more advantageous the player can get. Furthermore, even if the first stop operation fails, advantageous results can be obtained by pressing the remaining reels. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a game experience in which the sense of tension increases throughout one game (that is, until the final stop operation is performed).

Then, if the count value of the AT game number counter is 1 or more when the end condition of the 1st type BB game is satisfied, the main game state will shift to "AT in progress" (MS = 4), For the players, a lottery is performed on the display screen 11a to determine whether or not to start the first AT game. When the start of the first AT game is determined by this lottery, the second AT game is basically started after a predetermined number of first AT games have been played. However, the first AT game may be repeatedly executed by the loop lottery based on the loop rate determined by the loop rate lottery shown in FIG. Then, when the second AT game of the number of games added during the normal big is played, the game returns to the normal section game. Note that the first AT game and the second AT game are recognized by the player as separate AT games, but the main game state of both AT games is "AT in progress" (MS=4).

(Benefits for “Kokatsu”)
When the main game state is staying in "High Accuracy" (MS = 1), the winning number that is linked to one of the bonus condition device numbers of type 1 BB-A to D is determined by lottery. Then, the state shifts to "Type 1 BB inside/Type 1 BB in operation" (MS=3). After that, when a normal big is started, the symbol of the displayed image is stopped and displayed in a game in which the image shown in FIG. 101(a) or FIG. 101(b) is displayed on the display screen 11a during the normal big. If this is possible, the number of additional 2nd AT games will be approximately twice that of the case where the transition is from the "normal section" to the "1st type BB inside/1st type BB in operation".

(Benefits during “AT”)
When the main game state is “AT in progress” (MS=4), the winning number that is linked to one of the bonus condition device numbers of type 1 BB-A to D is determined by lottery. Then, the state shifts to "Type 1 BB inside/Type 1 BB in operation" (MS=3). Then, when the symbol combinations associated with the bonus condition device linked to the determined winning number are completed, a hyper big game (hereinafter referred to as "hyper big") is started instead of a normal big game. . In Hyper Big, in a game where the image shown in FIG. 101(a) or FIG. 101(b) is displayed on the display screen 11a, even if the symbol of the displayed image cannot be stopped and displayed, the 2nd AT game An additional lottery will be held.

<Practice mode>
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, during a normal big game, it is possible to shift to a practice mode in which the player's eye press skill is determined. During the practice mode, the normal big also progresses in parallel, and when the normal big ends, the practice mode also ends. Furthermore, even if the player shifts to the practice mode, the benefits that can be enjoyed by normal bigs will not be any different than if the player did not shift to the practice mode.

Switching to practice mode is possible after a type 1 BB symbol combination is complete. For example, as shown in FIG. 102(a), when a type 1 BB symbol combination is complete, a message MG2 saying "Press and hold the PUSH button to switch to PRACTICE MODE" is displayed on the display screen 11a below a message MG1 saying "Normal Big." If the specified number of medals are inserted in this state and the start lever 25 is operated, normal big will start without switching to practice mode.

In the state shown in FIG. 102(a), if the player continues to press the enter button 55 (see FIG. 1(a)), the message MG2 disappears and appears in the upper left corner of the display screen 11a, as shown in FIG. 102(b). A message MG3 "PRACTICE MODE" is displayed to inform the player that the game has entered the practice mode. At this time, if the enter button 55 is kept pressed again, the message MG3 disappears and the message MG2 is displayed again. When a specified number of medals are inserted in the state shown in FIG. 102(b), a time TM indicating elapsed gaming time is displayed below the message MG3, as shown in FIG. 102(c). The time TM is a cumulative display of the time taken to play each game in the practice mode. Specifically, when a predetermined number of medals are inserted and the start lever 25 is operated, the sub-control means 200 starts timing, and when all the reels stop, it temporarily stops timing. The value of the displayed time TM is held as it is, and when the start lever 25 is operated in the next game, the sub-control means 200 restarts timing from the held time, and when all the reels stop, it starts counting again. Pause. By measuring the elapsed gaming time in this way, you can measure the time required to pay out medals, the time if a hopper empty error (an error that occurs when no medals are stored in the hopper) occurs when paying out medals, , the time spent away from the table for business (toilet breaks) between games, etc. are excluded from the elapsed playing time, and based on the net time spent playing the game, the time spent away from the seat for business (toilet breaks), etc. Since the evaluation is performed, the player can enjoy the practice mode game with peace of mind.

(Eye-catching image)
During practice mode, when the performance group number becomes 14 or 15 based on the winning number determined by the role drawing, one of the pressing images 1 to 57 shown in Figures 103 to 105 is displayed on the display screen 11a together with the single drum notification performance (notification of the instruction content A4 shown in Figure 99). Also, when the performance group number becomes 19 based on the winning number determined by the role drawing, the image shown in Figure 101 (b) (hereinafter, also referred to as the "three drum vita pressing image" in this embodiment) is displayed on the display screen 11a together with the three drum notification performance (notification of the instruction content A5 shown in Figure 99).

The eye press image is an image that instructs the operation order of the stop switches 26a, 26b, 26c and the eye press symbol on each reel, and as shown in FIGS. 103 to 105, the eye press image 1 to the eye press image 57 are , 57 types of eye-catching images are available. In the eye-pressing images shown in these figures, the name of the symbol and the pressing order are written in the squares composed of 4 rows and 3 columns, and the left column corresponds to the left reel 3a, and the center The columns correspond to the middle reel 3b, and the right column corresponds to the right reel 3c. In addition, the first line shows the name of the symbol to be stopped at the top of the display window W, the second line shows the name of the symbol to be stopped at the middle of the display window W, and the third line shows the name of the symbol to be stopped at the top of the display window W. The name of the symbol to be stopped is shown at the bottom of the display window W. Further, on the fourth line, numbers indicating the order in which each reel is pressed are shown.

For example, the pressing image 1 shown in FIG. 103 indicates the order in which the stop switches are pressed: middle → left → right. In addition, the symbols to press on each reel are the "bar" symbol (symbol number 6), the "watermelon" symbol (symbol number 5), and the "replay A" symbol (sequentially from the top of the display window W) on the left reel 3a. Press the symbol number 4), and on the middle reel 3b, from the top of the display window W, the "replay A" symbol (symbol number 14), "star A" symbol (symbol number 13), and "star B" symbol are displayed in order. (Symbol No. 12), and on the right reel 3c, the "Star B" symbol (symbol No. 4), the "Watermelon" symbol (symbol No. 3), and the "Star A" symbol appear in order from the top of the display window W. It instructs you to press (pattern number 2).

Note that the instruction content is the same for the eye-pressing images 2 to 57, but the pressing order is middle→left→right for all the eye-pressing images. Further, the symbol numbers related to the symbols to be pressed on each reel shown in the pressing images 2 to 57 can be specified from the symbol arrangement shown in FIG. 86, so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When the player presses the symbol displayed on the display screen 11a for each reel when any of the eye-pressing images 1 to 57 or the three-drum vita-pressing image (see FIG. 101(b)) is displayed on the display screen 11a, the sub-control means 200 calculates a score that is an indication of the skill in eye-pressing, depending on whether the displayed symbol is stopped and displayed in the display window W, and if it is possible to stop and display it, depending on the accuracy of the vita-pressing. Also, since the practice mode is also during normal big, in a game in which the performance group number is determined to be 14 or 15 by the role drawing, if the "Replay A" symbol, "Star A" symbol, and "Star B" symbol on the center reel 3b are stopped and displayed in order from the top of the display window W, a second AT game addition drawing (see FIG. 98) is executed, and the number of second AT games is added depending on the drawing result.

In the press images 1 to 57 shown in Figures 103 to 105, the symbols to be pressed on the middle reel 3b are all the "Replay A" symbol, the "Star A" symbol, and the "Star B" symbol. There is. Therefore, even if the notification mode to the player (specifically, the notification mode shown in FIG. 101(a) and the notification mode shown in FIGS. 103 to 105) differs depending on whether the player is in the practice mode, This will not put the player at a disadvantage.

Figure 106 shows the symbol numbers in the lower part of the display window W that are used to determine whether or not the vita-oshi has been successful for each of the eye-pressing images shown in Figures 103 to 105, and the difficulty level of the vita-oshi for each eye-pressing image. In this figure, for example, when eye-pressing image 1 is displayed on the display screen 11a, when the symbol number 4 (the "Replay A" symbol) of the left reel 3a is displayed in a stopped state in the lower part of the display window W, a determination is made as to whether or not the vita-oshi has been successful for the left reel 3a. Furthermore, when the symbol number 12 (the "Star B" symbol) of the middle reel 3b is displayed in a stopped state in the lower part of the display window W, a determination is made as to whether or not the vita-oshi has been successful for the middle reel 3b. Furthermore, when the symbol number 2 (the "Star A" symbol) of the right reel 3c is displayed in a stopped state in the lower part of the display window W, a determination is made as to whether or not the vita-oshi has been successful for the middle reel 3c. Similarly, for other pressing images, the symbol number to be displayed in a stopped state is determined in the lower section of the display window W. Note that the position of the symbol to be referenced when deciding whether or not to perform a perfect pressing is not limited to the lower section, but may be the upper section or middle section.

Further, in this embodiment, the difficulty level of bit pressing is determined in five ranks of SS, S, A, B, and C for the stop display symbols of each reel shown by the pressing images 1 to 57. Among these ranks, SS is the most difficult to press, and it becomes easier to press in the order of S→A→B→C. These difficulty levels are determined, for example, depending on whether or not a conspicuous symbol or symbol arrangement is included in or near the nine symbols shown by each eye-pressing image. Here, "nearby" refers to, for example, a symbol position one position above the upper stage of the display window W or a symbol position one position below the lower stage. Further, the "conspicuous symbols" refer to, for example, bonus symbols (the "red seven" symbol, the "blue seven" symbol, and the "bar" symbol). Furthermore, a "conspicuous pattern arrangement" is a case where the same type of patterns (for example, "Star A" pattern and "Star A" pattern, or "Star A" pattern and "Star B" pattern, etc.) are arranged consecutively. etc.

(Selecting the desired image to display)
The pressed image displayed on the display screen 11a during the practice mode is determined by a lottery (eye pressed image lottery) executed in the sub-control means 200 in response to the operation of the start lever 25. In the eye-pull image lottery, different lottery tables are referred to depending on the elapsed game time (the time displayed at time TM in FIG. 102(c)) when the start lever 25 is operated. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 107(a), when the elapsed game time when the start lever 25 is operated is 0 seconds or more and less than 20 seconds, the lottery table A is referred to, and the lottery table A is referred to. When the time is less than 40 seconds, lottery table B is referred to, when it is 40 seconds or more and less than 1 minute, lottery table C is referred to, and when it is 1 minute or more and less than 1 minute 20 seconds, lottery table D is referred to. When the time is 20 minutes or more and less than 2 minutes, lottery table E is referred to, and when it is 2 minutes or more, lottery table F is referred to.

In the present embodiment, the probability is determined such that the larger the value of the elapsed game time, the more likely the target image with a higher difficulty level will be selected. Therefore, in lottery table A, the probability that a low-difficulty target image is selected is the highest, and in the order of lottery table A → B → C → D → E → F, the probability that a high-difficulty target image is selected is the highest. The selection probability is determined so that the selection probability gradually increases. In other words, the configuration is such that the score, which will be described later, is more likely to be high when the game elapsed time is short than when it is long.

(score calculation)
As described above, the score calculated in the practice mode is a numerical value that is a measure of the player's eye-catching skill. This score is determined by the sub-control means 200 based on whether or not the symbol shown in the eye-pressing image displayed on the display screen 11a is displayed, the accuracy of the bit-pressing, the type of conditional device activated by the winning combination, etc. Calculated by Specifically, points are added to the score value based on the calculation table shown in FIG. 107(b). In this calculation table, three items are defined: "Bita push judgment", "3 body beat push success points", and "Marvelous judgment in number adjustment role".

"Bita press judgment points" are added according to the accuracy of the stop operation timing of the stop switch when the symbol shown in the press image displayed on the display screen 11a is stopped and displayed on the display window W. That's the point. These points are added individually for each reel. In this embodiment, four stages of evaluation of the accuracy of the stop operation timing are defined: "Marvelous", "Excellent", "Cool", and "So-so". "Marvelous" has the highest accuracy, followed by "Excellent" and "Cool" with decreasing accuracy. In "So-so", the stop switch was operated at a timing earlier than the stop operation timing of bit-pressing, but because the reel retraction control was performed, the symbol shown in the eye-pressing image was displayed on the display window W. This is the evaluation when it is stopped and displayed.

Therefore, if the judgment is "So-so", no points will be added to the score, and if the judgment is "Marvelous", the points added to the score will be the largest, followed by "Excellent" and "Cool". The points added to the score decrease in this order. Note that a method for determining the evaluation regarding the precision of these stop operation timings will be explained in detail later.

Next, "3-time drum vita-oshi success points" are points added to the score when vita-oshi is successful for all reels under certain circumstances. "Single-time drum notification" is points added when vita-oshi is successful for all reels when the winning number α+11 or α+12 (see FIG. 92(d)) is determined by hand drawing during practice mode and the single-time drum notification performance (notification of instruction A4 shown in FIG. 99) is performed. "3-time drum notification" is points added when vita-oshi is successful for all reels when the winning number α+16 (see FIG. 92(d), FIG. 94(a)) is determined by hand drawing during practice mode and the three-time drum notification performance (notification of instruction A5 shown in FIG. 99) is performed.

Next, "Marvelous judgment at the time of number adjustment role" is performed in a game in which the winning number α+13 (see FIGS. 92(d) and 94(a)) is determined during the practice mode (at this time, a cut-in effect is performed). , points are added when a winning symbol combination of 38 (7-card combination, see FIG. 90) can be arranged. If the winning combination of symbols 38 can be arranged, an evaluation performance of "Marvelous" is performed for the player.

In this embodiment, even in a game in which none of the eye-pressing images 1 to 57 are displayed, the three-reel vita-pressing image is not displayed, and the cut-in effect is not executed, the eye-pressing accuracy for only the center reel 3b is evaluated in the three levels of "Marvelous," "Excellent," and "Cool" mentioned above only when the center stop switch 26b is operated to the first stop.

During the practice mode, points related to the above various items are added to the score, but as shown in FIG. 107(b), the points associated with each item differ depending on the score calculation level 1 to 5. . In this embodiment, score calculation level 1 is set such that the points associated with each item are the lowest, and the points associated with each item gradually increase from score calculation levels 2 to 5. .

Which of the score calculation levels 1 to 5 is used to determine the points to be added to the score is determined by the elapsed gaming time when the start lever 25 shown in FIG. 107(a) is operated. That is, when the elapsed game time when the start lever 25 is operated is 0 seconds or more and less than 20 seconds, the score is calculated according to score calculation level 3, and when it is 20 seconds or more and less than 40 seconds, the score is calculated according to score calculation level 4. If the time is 40 seconds or more and less than 1 minute, the score is calculated according to score calculation level 5. If it is 1 minute or more and less than 1 minute 20 seconds, the score is calculated according to score calculation level 3. When the time is 20 seconds or more and less than 2 minutes, the score is calculated according to score calculation level 2, and when it is 2 minutes or more, the score is calculated according to score calculation level 1.

Due to the above features, until the elapsed game time reaches 1 minute, the difficulty level of the selected eye-pull images will gradually increase (lottery table A → B → C), and the points added to the score will also increase. It gets bigger (score calculation level 3 → 4 → 5). When the elapsed game time exceeds 1 minute, the difficulty level of the selected eye-pushing images becomes higher (lottery table D → E → F), but the time spent on eye-pushing in each game is too long. Therefore, the points added to the score will become smaller (score calculation level 3 → 2 → 1).

Note that the elapsed gaming time may be directly reflected in the score calculation. Specifically, there is a game where the accuracy of eye-pressing is α when the elapsed game time is A, and a game where the accuracy of eye-pressing is α when the elapsed game time is B (B is greater than A). In this case, when the scores of both games are compared, it may be configured such that when the game elapsed time is A, the score of the game where the eye-pressing accuracy is α is higher. In other words, the configuration may be such that the smaller (shorter) the elapsed game time, the higher the score, even if the accuracy of the eye press is the same. In addition, the elapsed playing time is the cumulative amount of time it takes to play each game in the practice mode. The game time is measured for each game (until it stops), and the score is based on the elapsed play time and accuracy of the eye press for each game (when calculating the score for each game, the shorter the elapsed time, the higher the score) You can also use it as With this configuration, not only the accuracy of the eye press but also the speed of the eye press is reflected in the score, and it is possible to provide a game with a sense of tension for the player.

≪Transition of notification mode as the game progresses during normal big≫
Next, the transition of the notification mode as the game progresses during normal big will be explained separately for the case where the game does not transition to the practice mode (non-practice mode) and the case where the game transitions to the practice mode.
<When a single body notification effect is performed>
FIG. 108 shows the notification mode when the winning number α+11 or α+12 (see FIGS. 92(d) and 94(a)) is determined in the lottery and the notification of instruction content A4 (single body notification effect) is performed. 108(a-1) to (a-3) show the transition when the transition to practice mode is not made, and FIG. 108(b-1) to (b-3) show the transition to practice mode. This shows the transition when switching to mode.

(Transition of Notification Mode in Non-Practice Mode)
If the practice mode is not entered, the draw is triggered by the operation of the start lever 25, and when the winning number α+11 or α+12 (see Figures 92 (d) and 94 (a)) is determined, the display screen 11a will display the message of instruction A4, "Press (Replay, ☆, ☆) on the middle reel!", along with the image NDP shown in Figure 101 (a), as shown in Figure 108 (a-1).

As a result, when the player performs the first stop operation on the middle stop switch 26b, the number "1" indicating the pressing order of the middle reel is erased in the image NDP as shown in FIG. 108(a-2). Then, the second stop operation and the third stop operation are performed in sequence to stop all the reels, and the "Replay A" symbol, "Hoshi A" symbol, and " When the "Hoshi B" symbol is stopped and displayed, a second AT game add-on lottery is performed, and as shown in FIG. 108 (a-3), the number of add-on games determined by the lottery is displayed on the display screen 11a. Note that FIG. 108(a-3) shows that 5 games have been added to the second AT game.

(Transition of notification mode in practice mode)
On the other hand, when the mode is shifted to the practice mode, when the winning number α+11 or α+12 (see FIGS. 92(d) and 94(a)) is determined by lottery with the operation of the start lever 25, the As shown in 108(b-1), the display screen 11a displays the message "Medium" of instruction content A4 along with any one of the push images PDP among the push images 1 to 57 shown in FIGS. 103 to 105. "Press (Replay/☆/☆)!" will be displayed on the reels. Here, FIG. 108(b-1) shows a state in which the eye press image 1 is displayed.

As a result, when the player performs the first stop operation on the middle stop switch 26b, the number "1" indicating the push order for the middle reel is erased in the image PDP as shown in FIG. 108(b-2). At this time, if the "Replay A" symbol, "Star A" symbol, and "Star B" symbol are displayed stopped in the upper, middle, and lower rows of the display window W on the middle reel 3b, respectively, the accuracy of the push operation for the middle reel 3b is evaluated based on the timing of the stop operation of the stop switch 26b. The evaluation result of the accuracy of the push operation is displayed below the image PDP, and FIG. 108(b-2) shows the state in which "Marvelous" has been evaluated.

Subsequently, when the second stop operation and the third stop operation are performed in sequence, the eye press accuracy is evaluated each time. When all reels stop, if the "Replay A" symbol, "Star A" symbol, and "Star B" symbol of the middle reel 3b are stopped and displayed in the upper, middle, and lower rows of the display window W, the A 2AT game add-on lottery will be held. Then, as shown in FIG. 108(b-3), the number of additional games determined by the lottery is displayed on the display screen 11a. Note that FIG. 108 (b-3) shows that the second AT game is added by five games.

<When the 3rd torso notification effect is performed>
FIG. 109 shows the transition of the notification mode when the winning number α+16 (see FIGS. 92(d) and 94(a)) is determined in the lottery and the notification of instruction content A5 (3-time notification effect) is performed. 109(a-1) to (a-3) show transitions in non-practice mode, and FIGS. 109(b-1) to (b-3) show transitions in practice mode.

(Transition of Notification Mode in Non-Practice Mode)
First, the operation of the start lever 25 triggers a prize draw, and when the winning number α+16 (see Figures 92 (d) and 94 (a)) is determined, as shown in Figure 109 (a-1), the display screen 11a displays a three-reel vita-push image SDP along with the message of instruction A5, "Via-push (☆-☆-blue seven) on the left reel, (☆-☆-bar) on the middle reel, and (Replay A-Cherry B-red seven) on the right reel!"

As a result, for example, when the player performs the first stop operation on the left stop switch 26a, the area corresponding to the left reel in the image SDP becomes dark as shown in FIG. 109(a-2). Furthermore, the left reel 3a was successfully pressed, and the "Star B" symbol, "Star A" symbol, and "Blue Seven" symbol of the left reel 3a were stopped and displayed on the upper, middle, and lower rows of the display window W. In this case, the text "OK" is displayed below the image SDP. Note that if the bit-pressing fails, the word "NG" is displayed.

Then, the second and third stop operations are performed in sequence, and each time, if the perfect push is successful, the same display as the left reel 3a is displayed. All reels stop, and depending on the symbol combination displayed in the display window W, a 3-times drum add-on 1 draw to a 3-times drum add-on 3 draw (see Figure 98) is performed. Then, as shown in Figure 109 (a-3), the number of added games determined by the draw is displayed on the display screen 11a. Note that Figure 109 (a-3) shows that 10 games have been added to the second AT game.

(Transition of Notification Mode in Practice Mode)
When the practice mode is entered, the operation of the start lever 25 triggers the drawing of the winning number α+16 (see Figures 92 (d) and 94 (a)) to determine the winning number, and as shown in Figure 109 (b-1), in the same way as in the non-practice mode, the display screen 11a will display a three-reel vita-press image SDP along with the message of instruction A5, "Via-press (☆-☆-blue seven) on the left reel, (☆-☆-bar) on the middle reel, and (Replay A-Cherry B-red seven) on the right reel!"

For example, when a player performs the first stop operation of the left stop switch 26a, the area of the image SDP corresponding to the left reel goes dark as shown in FIG. 109(b-2). Then, when the "Star B", "Star A" and "Blue Seven" symbols of the left reel 3a are displayed in the upper, middle and lower rows of the display window W, the word "OK" is displayed below the image SDP. If the above-mentioned sequence of symbols is not displayed in the display window W, the word "NG" is displayed. If the above-mentioned sequence of symbols is displayed in the display window W, the accuracy of the eye-pressing for the left reel 3a is evaluated based on the timing of the stop operation of the stop switch 26a. The evaluation result of the eye-pressing accuracy is displayed below the image SDP, and FIG. 109(b-2) shows the state where an "Excellent" evaluation has been performed.

Thereafter, the second stop operation and the third stop operation are performed in sequence, and each time, when the notified arrangement of symbols is stopped and displayed on the display window W, the same display as on the left reel 3a is performed. In addition, the press accuracy for the corresponding reel is evaluated based on the stop operation timing of each stop switch, and the evaluation result is displayed at the bottom of the image SDP. When all the reels have stopped, 3-time bonus 1 draw to 3-time bonus 3 bonus draws are performed according to the symbol combinations stopped and displayed on the display window W (see FIG. 98). Then, as shown in FIG. 109(b-3), the number of additional games determined by the lottery is displayed on the display screen 11a. Note that FIG. 109 (b-3) shows that 10 games have been added to the second AT game.

≪Main control processing related to games during practice mode≫
Next, the contents of the main control processing related to the game in the practice mode will be explained with reference to the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 110 to 118.
<Main control processing in the main control means>
Referring to the flowchart shown in FIG. 110, when the main gaming state stays in "1st type BB inside/1st type BB in operation" (MS=3), main control means 100 stops all reels. A part of the contents of the gaming state 3 complete stop processing that will be performed later will be explained. The game state 3 complete stop process is a process that is executed in both the non-practice mode and the practice mode.

When all the reels stop and the gaming state 3 all-stop processing starts while staying in "1st type BB inside/1st type BB in operation" (MS=3), the main control means 100 First, it is determined whether a type 1 BB (RB-B) game, RB-A game, or SB game is being executed (step Sm10). If none of the type 1 BB game, RB-A game, or SB game is being executed, the determination result in step Sm10 is NO, and other processing is performed. On the other hand, if you have played any of the Type 1 BB games, RB-A games, or SB games, the judgment result in step Sm10 will be YES, and the result of the lottery performed in this game will be Based on this, it is determined whether the presentation group number has reached 19 (step Sm12).

If the winning number is not determined to be α+16 in the lottery and as a result, the performance group number is not determined to be 19 (see FIG. 94(a)), the determination result in step Sm12 is NO, and then the main control means 100 , it is determined whether the winning number is determined to be α+11 or α+12 by the lottery performed in the current game, and as a result, the performance group number is determined to be 14 or 15 (step Sm14). If the winning number is not determined to be α+11 or α+12 in the role lottery, and as a result, the performance group number is not determined to be 14 or 15, the judgment result in step Sm14 is NO, and the process moves to step Sm32, where the provisional entry counter ( After storing 0 in (see FIG. 96), other processing is performed. On the other hand, if the winning number is determined to be α+11 or α+12 in the role lottery, and as a result, the performance group number becomes 14 or 15, the judgment result in step Sm14 is YES, and the main control means 100 performs the following. Performs the processing for the single-shot body notification effect that will be explained.

(Processing during single body notification performance)
First, the main control means 100 determines whether or not the winning number has been determined to be α+11 by the combination drawing performed in the current game, and as a result, the performance group number has become 14 (step Sm16). If the performance group number does not reach 14, the determination result in step Sm16 is NO, and the main control means 100 determines whether the value of the AT flag (see FIG. 96) is 0 (step Sm18). If the value of the AT flag is 0, the judgment result in step Sm18 becomes YES, and then the main control means 100 determines whether any of the winning symbol combinations 01 to 03 (see FIG. 87) are aligned on the valid line. (Step Sm20). If none of the winning symbol combinations 01 to 03 is aligned on the active line, the judgment result in step Sm20 becomes NO, the process moves to step Sm32, stores 0 in the temporary placement counter, and then performs other processing. I do.

In the judgment process of step Sm16, if the production group number is 14, the judgment result is YES, and in the judgment process of step Sm18, if the value of the AT flag is 0, the judgment result is NO, and further, If any of the winning symbol combinations 01 to 03 are aligned on the active line in the judgment process of step Sm20, the judgment result will be YES, but in any of these cases, the second AT game additional lottery (see Fig. 98) will be executed. (Step Sm22). Then, when the number of games to be added is determined by the second AT game addition lottery, that number of games is set in the temporary addition counter (see FIG. 96) (step Sm24), and then the AT game number counter (see FIG. 96). The value set in the temporary loading counter is added to the count value of (step Sm26).

Then, the main control means 100 determines whether the value of the high accuracy flag (see FIG. 96) is 0 (step Sm28). If the value of the high certainty flag is 0, the determination result in step Sm28 is YES, the process moves to step Sm32, stores 0 in the temporary placement counter, and then performs other processing. On the other hand, if the value of the high accuracy flag is 1, it means that the type 1 BB game was started while the main game state was staying in "high accuracy" (MS = 1). , the value set in the temporary entry counter is added to the count value of the AT game number counter again (step Sm30). As a result, if the main game state changes from "Highly accurate" (MS = 1) to "Type 1 BB inside / Type 1 BB in operation" (MS = 3), it will change to "Normal section" (MS = 0). Compared to the case where the transition is from "1st type BB inside/1st type BB in operation" (MS=3), the number of additional games added during the 1st type BB game is doubled. Then, the process moves to step Sm32, and after storing 0 in the temporary loading counter, other processing is performed.

(Processing at the time of 3rd body alarm)
In the judgment process of step Sm12, if the winning number is determined to be α+16 in the role lottery and as a result, the production group number becomes 19, the judgment result becomes YES, and the main control means 100 performs the process at the time of the third body notification. I do. First, it is determined whether the value of the AT flag is 0 (step Sm34), and if the value of the AT flag is 0, the determination result of step Sm34 is YES, and then the main control means 100 It is determined whether the winning symbol combination 28 (see FIG. 89) is aligned on the active line (step Sm36). When the winning symbol combination 28 is aligned on the active line, that is, when all the reels are successfully hit, the judgment result in step Sm36 is YES, and first, 3 extra bonuses and 3 draws are performed (step Sm38). , performs a process of adding the number of additional games determined by the lottery to the AT game number counter (step Sm40). Next, a 3-game bonus 2 lottery is performed (step Sm44), and a process is performed in which the number of additional games determined by the lottery is added to the AT game number counter (step Sm46). Furthermore, a 3-game bonus 1 lottery is performed (step Sm50), and a process is performed in which the number of games to be added determined by the lottery is added to the AT game number counter (step Sm52). After performing the process of step Sm52, the process moves to other processes.

In the determination process of step Sm36, if the symbol combination of winning prize 28 does not line up on the active line, the determination result becomes NO, and then the main control means 100 controls the symbol combination of winning prize 29 to winning prize 31 to line up on the valid line. It is determined whether all the items are complete (step Sm42). If any of the symbol combinations from Winning 29 to Winning 31 are aligned on the active line, that is, if the two reels are successfully hit, the judgment result in step Sm42 is YES, and first, 3 times the body is added to the 2nd draw. (Step Sm44), and the process of adding the number of additional games determined by the lottery to the AT game number counter is performed (Step Sm46). Next, a 3-game bonus 1 lottery is performed (step Sm50), and a process is performed in which the number of additional games determined by the lottery is added to the AT game number counter (step Sm52). After performing the process of step Sm52, the process moves to other processes.

In the judgment process of step Sm42, if none of the symbol combinations of Winning Prize 29 to Winning Prize 31 are aligned on the active line, the determination result becomes NO, and then the main control means 100 selects any of the symbol combinations of Winning Prize 32 to Winning Prize 34. It is determined whether the combinations are aligned on the valid line (step Sm48). If any of the symbol combinations from Winning 32 to Winning 34 are aligned on the active line, that is, if the eye-squeezing is successful for one reel, the judgment result in step Sm48 is YES, and 3 additional body additions and 1 drawing are performed. (Step Sm50), the process of adding the number of additional games determined by the lottery to the AT game number counter is performed (Step Sm52). After performing the process of step Sm52, the process moves to other processes. In addition, in the judgment process of step Sm48, if none of the symbol combinations of winning 32 to winning 34 are aligned on the active line, the judgment result becomes NO and the process directly proceeds to other processes.

In addition, in the judgment process of step Sm34, if the value of the AT flag is 1, it means that the type 1 BB game has been started while the main game state is "AT in progress" (MS=4). . Therefore, the type 1 BB game in this case is Hyper Big, and the determination result in step Sm34 is NO, and the processing related to the additional lottery of steps Sm38→Sm40→Sm44→Sm46→Sm50→Sm52 is performed.

In the processing of steps Sm36 to Sm52 described above, the number of reels that were successfully pressed can be determined by determining the symbol combination (type of winning) that is lined up on the active line, so there is no need to perform separate processing to determine the number of reels that were successfully pressed, and the capacity of the control program can be reduced.

<Main control processes in the sub-control means>
Hereinafter, a score calculation process executed by the sub-control means 200 when the player transitions to the practice mode at the start of a normal big will be described. In the score calculation process, the sub-control means 200 grasps (a) the pattern number of the pattern that was located in the lower part of the display window W when the stop switch was operated (hereinafter, also referred to as the "pattern number at the time of the stop operation" in this embodiment), (b) the position of that pattern in the lower part of the display window W (specifically, the number of steps of the stepping motor. Hereinafter, also referred to as the "step number at the time of the stop operation" in this embodiment), and (c) the pattern number of the pattern that will finally be stopped and displayed in the lower part of the display window W (hereinafter, also referred to as the "pattern number at the time of the stop operation" in this embodiment) from the stop operation information transmitted from the main control means 100 in response to the operation of the stop switch. Therefore, the sub-control means 200 grasps the count value of the pattern number counter in the main control means 100 as the pattern number at the time of the stop operation, and the sub-control means 200 grasps the count value of the 1 pattern counter in the main control means 100 as the step number at the time of the stop operation. The sub-control means 200 then calculates a score based on the above-mentioned information (a) to (c) that has been grasped.

(Score calculation process when any of the eye-catching images 1 to 57 is displayed)
First, with reference to FIGS. 111 to 113, the content of the score calculation process when any of the clicked images 1 to 57 (see FIGS. 103 to 105) is displayed will be described. FIG. 111 is a flowchart of the first stop score calculation process executed when the first reel stops (first stop), and FIG. 112 is a flowchart of the first stop score calculation process executed when the next reel stops (second stop). This is a flowchart of the second stop score calculation process that is executed, and FIG. 113 is a flowchart of the third stop score calculation process that is executed when the last reel stops (third stop). Furthermore, in this embodiment, the reel that stops first is called a "first stop reel," the reel that stops next is called a "second stop reel," and the reel that stops last is called a "third stop reel."

During practice mode, when any of the eye-pressing images 1 to 57 is displayed and the first of the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c stops, the sub-control means 200 executes the first stop time score calculation process shown in FIG. 111, and first determines whether the first stopped reel is the center reel 3b (step Ss10). If the first stopped reel is not the center reel 3b, the determination result in step Ss10 becomes NO, and information indicating that the first stop operation has failed (first stop operation failure information) is stored in a specified storage area of the RAM provided in the sub-control means 200 (step Ss12), the first stop time score calculation process ends, and other processes are performed.

On the other hand, if the first stop reel is the middle reel 3b, the determination result in step Ss10 is YES, and the sub-control means 200 controls the middle reel symbol (eye) in the eye-pressing image displayed on the display screen 11a. (also referred to as push designated symbol, eye push designated symbol number, success judgment symbol number) and the symbol on the middle reel 3b that is stopped and displayed in the display window W (stopped and displayed) matches ( Step Ss14). As an example of this determination method, it is determined whether the stop display symbol number grasped from the stop operation information transmitted from the main control means matches the above-mentioned push-designated symbol number. If they do not match, the judgment result is NO, and the process moves to step Ss12, where the first stop operation failure information is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM included in the sub-control means 200, and then the first stop score is calculated. Finish processing and perform other processing.

On the other hand, if they match, the determination result in step Ss14 becomes YES, and the sub-control means 200 determines whether or not the press of the middle stop switch 26b was successful (step Ss16). This determination is made based on the symbol number at the time of the stop operation, which is grasped from the stop operation information regarding the middle stop switch 26b transmitted from the main control means 100. That is, among the success determination symbol numbers regarding each of the eye press images shown in FIG. 106, the success determination symbol number regarding the middle reel of the eye press image displayed on the display screen 11a and the stop operation information ascertained from the stop operation information. It is determined whether or not the symbol numbers match.

If the success determination symbol number regarding the middle reel and the symbol number at the time of the stop operation do not match, the judgment result in step Ss16 is NO, and the target press designated symbol is stopped and displayed on the display screen 11a, but when the button is pressed In step Ss18, an image of "So-so" is displayed, which indicates a failure (the designated symbol is stopped and displayed due to pull-in control). On the other hand, if the success determination symbol number regarding the middle reel and the symbol number at the time of stop operation match, the determination result in step Ss16 becomes YES, and then the sub-control means 200 controls the symbol number related to the middle stop switch 26b. It is determined whether the count value of the 1-symbol counter is within the range of 5 to 9 (step Ss20). If the number of steps at the time of the stop operation ascertained from the stop operation information transmitted from the main control means 100 is within the range of 5 to 9, the judgment result in step Ss20 is YES, and the accuracy of the Vita press is the highest. An image of "Marvelous" indicating this is displayed on the display screen 11a (step Ss22).

If the number of steps at the time of the stop operation is outside the range of 5 to 9 in the judgment process of step Ss20, the judgment result of step Ss20 becomes NO, and the sub-control means 200 next judges whether the number of steps at the time of the stop operation is within the range of 10 to 15 (step Ss24). If the number of steps at the time of the stop operation is within the range of 10 to 15, the judgment result of step Ss24 becomes YES, and an image of "Excellent", which indicates that the accuracy of the vita-pressing is the second highest after "Marvelous", is displayed on the display screen 11a (step Ss26). On the other hand, if the number of steps at the time of the stop operation is outside the range of 10 to 15, the judgment result of step Ss24 becomes NO, and an image of "Cool", which indicates that the accuracy of the vita-pressing is the second highest after "Excellent", is displayed on the display screen 11a (step Ss28).

Then, after displaying the evaluation regarding the accuracy of the vita press on the display screen 11a through the processing of steps Ss18, Ss22, Ss26, or Ss28, the sub-control means 200 then performs the process shown in FIG. 107 in accordance with the evaluation displayed on the display screen 11a. Calculate points according to specifications. For example, if the elapsed gaming time when the start lever 25 was operated was 12 seconds, the score calculation level would be 3 (see Figure 107(a)), and if the evaluation of the bita press accuracy was "Excellent", The point becomes 36 (see FIG. 107(b)). Further, if the evaluation of the bit-pressing accuracy is "So-so", the point becomes 0. Then, the calculated points are added to the score stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM included in the sub-control means 200 (step Ss30). This score is the total value of points calculated in one practice mode (also normal big), and the scores corresponding to each practice mode are individually saved. After performing the process of step Ss30, the sub-control means 200 ends the first stop score calculation process and performs other processes.

As described above, in the judgment process of step Ss16, if the success judgment symbol number regarding the middle reel and the symbol number at the time of stop operation grasped from the stop operation information do not match, the timing of bit pressing ("first It means that the stop switch was not operated to stop at the timing (also referred to as "second timing"), but that the stop switch was operated at the timing when reel retraction control for one or more frames was performed (also referred to as "second timing"). do. Therefore, in this case, the process moves to step Ss18 without determining the number of steps at the time of the stop operation, and an evaluation (So-so) that means that the bita push has failed is performed. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the processing load for evaluating the accuracy of bit pressing. Furthermore, for example, if the judgment of whether or not the vita push was successful is made based on the number of steps, there is a risk that the score may be incorrectly calculated based on the number of steps when it is determined that the vita press was not successful. There is no.

Next, during the practice mode, when the second reel stops in a game in which any of the eye-pressing images 1 to 57 is displayed, the sub-control means 200 performs the second stop score calculation process shown in FIG. Execute. First, the sub-control means 200 determines whether or not the first stop operation has failed in pressing the button (step Ss40). Specifically, by the process of step Ss12 in FIG. 111, it is determined whether the first stop operation failure information is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM included in the sub-control means 200. If the first stop operation failure information is stored, the determination result in step Ss40 is YES, and the information indicating that the second stop operation Bita press has failed (second stop operation failure information) is sent to the sub control means 200. (step Ss42), the second stop score calculation process is completed, and other processes are performed.

In the judgment process of step Ss40, if the first stop operation was successful in pressing the bit (that is, the first stop operation failure information was not stored in the RAM of the sub-control means 200), the judgment result becomes NO. , the sub-control means 200 determines whether the second stop reel is the left reel 3a (step Ss44). If the second stop reel is not the left reel 3a, the determination result in step Ss44 is NO, and the process proceeds to step Ss42, where the second stop operation failure information is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM provided in the sub-control means 200. Save to. Then, the second stop score calculation process is completed and other processes are performed.

On the other hand, if the second stop reel is the left reel 3a, the determination result in step Ss44 is YES, and the sub-control means 200 controls the symbols of the left reel in the eye-pressing image displayed on the display screen 11a, It is determined whether the symbols on the left reel 3a that are stopped and displayed on the display window W match (step Ss46). If they do not match, the judgment result becomes NO, and the process moves to step Ss12, where the second stop operation failure information is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM included in the sub-control means 200, and then the second stop score is calculated. Finish processing and perform other processing.

On the other hand, if they match, the determination result in step Ss46 becomes YES, and the sub-control means 200 determines whether or not the left stop switch 26a is successfully pressed (step Ss48). This determination is made based on the stop operation information regarding the left stop switch 26a transmitted from the main control means 100, as in the case of the middle stop switch 26b described above. That is, among the success determination symbol numbers related to each eye press image shown in FIG. 106, the success determination symbol number regarding the left reel of the eye press image displayed on the display screen 11a and the stop operation time determined from the stop operation information. It is determined whether the symbol number matches or not.

If the success determination symbol number for the left reel does not match the stop operation symbol number obtained from the received stop operation information, the result of the determination in step Ss48 is NO, and the image "So-so" is displayed on the display screen 11a (step Ss50). On the other hand, if the success determination symbol number for the left reel matches the stop operation symbol number, the result of the determination in step Ss48 is YES, and the sub-control means 200 next determines whether the stop operation step number obtained from the stop operation information for the left stop switch 26a is within the range of 5 to 9 (step Ss52). If the stop operation step number is within the range of 5 to 9, the result of the determination in step Ss52 is YES, and the image "Marvelous" is displayed on the display screen 11a (step Ss54).

In the judgment process of step Ss52, if the number of steps during the stop operation is outside the range of 5 to 9, the judgment result of step Ss52 becomes NO, and then the sub control means 200 determines that the number of steps during the stop operation is outside the range of 10 to 9. It is determined whether or not it is within the range of 15 (step Ss56). If the number of steps during the stop operation is within the range of 10 to 15, the determination result in step Ss56 is YES, and the image "Excellent" is displayed on the display screen 11a (step Ss58). On the other hand, if the number of steps at the time of the stop operation is outside the range of 10 to 15, the determination result in step Ss56 is NO, and the "Cool" image is displayed on the display screen 11a (step Ss60).

Then, when the evaluation regarding the accuracy of the Vita-oshi is displayed on the display screen 11a by the processing of steps Ss50, Ss54, Ss58 or Ss60, the sub-control means 200 next calculates points according to the evaluation displayed on the display screen 11a and in accordance with the specifications shown in FIG. 107. The sub-control means 200 then adds the calculated points to the score stored in a specified storage area of the RAM provided in the sub-control means 200 (step Ss62). Thereafter, the sub-control means 200 ends the second stop time score calculation processing and performs other processing.

Furthermore, during the practice mode, when the last reel stops in a game in which any of the eye-pressing images 1 to 57 is displayed, the sub-control means 200 executes the third stop score calculation process shown in FIG. 113. . First, the sub-control means 200 determines whether or not the second stop operation has failed in pressing the button (step Ss70). Specifically, by the process of step Ss42 in FIG. 112, it is determined whether the second stop operation failure information is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM included in the sub-control means 200. If the second stop operation failure information is stored, the determination result in step Ss70 is YES, and the information indicating that the third stop operation Bita press has failed (third stop operation failure information) is sent to the sub control means 200. (step Ss72), the third stop score calculation process is completed, and other processes are performed.

In the judgment process of step Ss70, if the second stop operation was successful in pressing the bit (that is, the second stop operation failure information was not stored in the RAM of the sub-control means 200), the judgment result becomes NO. , the sub-control means 200 determines whether the third stop reel is the right reel 3c (step Ss74). If the third stop reel is not the right reel 3c, the determination result in step Ss74 is NO, and the process proceeds to step Ss72, where the third stop operation failure information is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM provided in the sub-control means 200. Save to. Then, the third stop score calculation process is completed and other processes are performed.

On the other hand, if the third stop reel is the right reel 3c, the determination result in step Ss74 is YES, and the sub-control means 200 controls the right reel symbol in the eye-pressing image displayed on the display screen 11a, It is determined whether the symbols on the right reel 3c that are stopped and displayed on the display window W match (step Ss76). If they do not match, the judgment result is NO, and the process moves to step Ss72, where the third stop operation failure information is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM included in the sub-control means 200, and then the third stop score is calculated. Finish processing and perform other processing.

On the other hand, if they match, the determination result in step Ss76 becomes YES, and the sub-control means 200 determines whether or not the right stop switch 26c has been pressed successfully (step Ss78). This determination is made based on the stop operation information regarding the right stop switch 26c transmitted from the main control means 100, as in the case of the middle stop switch 26b described above. That is, among the success determination symbol numbers related to each eye press image shown in FIG. 106, the success determination symbol number regarding the right reel of the eye press image displayed on the display screen 11a and the stop operation information ascertained from the stop operation information. It is determined whether or not the symbol numbers match.

If the success determination symbol number regarding the right reel does not match the stop operation symbol number grasped from the received stop operation information, the judgment result in step Ss78 is NO, and "So-so" is displayed on the display screen 11a. (Step Ss80). On the other hand, if the success determination symbol number regarding the right reel and the symbol number at the time of stop operation match, the determination result in step Ss78 becomes YES, and then the sub control means 200 controls the right reel related to the right stop switch 26c. It is determined whether the number of steps at the time of the stop operation ascertained from the stop operation information is within the range of 5 to 9 (step Ss82). If the number of steps at the time of the stop operation is within the range of 5 to 9, the determination result in step Ss82 becomes YES, and the image of "Marvelous" is displayed on the display screen 11a (step Ss84).

If the number of steps at the time of the stop operation is outside the range of 5 to 9 in the judgment process of step Ss82, the judgment result of step Ss82 becomes NO, and the sub-control means 200 then judges whether or not the number of steps at the time of the stop operation is within the range of 10 to 15 (step Ss86). If the number of steps at the time of the stop operation is within the range of 10 to 15, the judgment result of step Ss86 becomes YES, and the image of "Excellent" is displayed on the display screen 11a (step Ss88). On the other hand, if the number of steps at the time of the stop operation is outside the range of 10 to 15, the judgment result of step Ss86 becomes NO, and the image of "Cool" is displayed on the display screen 11a (step Ss90).

Then, after displaying the evaluation regarding the accuracy of bit pressing on the display screen 11a through the processing of steps Ss80, Ss84, Ss88, or Ss90, the sub-control means 200 then performs the process shown in FIG. 107 in accordance with the evaluation displayed on the display screen 11a. Calculate points according to specifications. Then, the calculated points are added to the score stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM included in the sub-control means 200 (step Ss92). Thereafter, the sub-control means 200 ends the third stop score calculation process and performs other processes.

(Score calculation process when the 3-time drum push image is displayed)
Next, the contents of the score calculation process when the three-cylinder vita-push image (see FIG. 101(b)) is displayed will be described with reference to FIG. 114 to FIG. 116. FIG. 114 is a flowchart of the first stop score calculation process executed at the first stop, FIG. 115 is a flowchart of the second stop score calculation process executed at the second stop, and FIG. 116 is a flowchart of the third stop score calculation process executed at the third stop.

In a game in which a three-drum vita-push image is displayed during practice mode, when the first reel stops, the sub-control means 200 executes the first stop time score calculation process shown in FIG. 114. First, the sub-control means 200 judges whether or not the symbol displayed (stopped) in the display window W for the first stopped reel matches the symbol of the corresponding reel in the three-drum vita-push image displayed on the display screen 11a (step Ss100). If they do not match, the judgment result in step Ss100 is NO, and the first stop operation failure information is saved in a predetermined storage area of the RAM provided in the sub-control means 200 (step Ss102), the first stop time score calculation process ends, and other processes are performed.

On the other hand, if there is a match, the determination result in step Ss100 becomes YES, and the sub-control means 200 determines whether the number of steps at the time of the stop operation determined from the stop operation information transmitted from the main control means 100 for the first stopped reel is within the range of 5 to 9 (step Ss104). If the number of steps at the time of the stop operation is within the range of 5 to 9, the determination result in step Ss104 becomes YES, and the image of "Marvelous" is displayed on the display screen 11a (step Ss106).

In the judgment process of step Ss104, if the number of steps during the stop operation is outside the range of 5 to 9, the judgment result of step Ss104 becomes NO, and then the sub control means 200 determines that the number of steps during the stop operation is outside the range of 10 to 9. It is determined whether or not it is within the range of 15 (step Ss108). If the number of steps during the stop operation is within the range of 10 to 15, the determination result in step Ss108 is YES, and the image "Excellent" is displayed on the display screen 11a (step Ss110). On the other hand, if the number of steps at the time of the stop operation is outside the range of 10 to 15, the determination result in step Ss108 is NO, and the "Cool" image is displayed on the display screen 11a (step Ss112).

Then, when the evaluation regarding the precision of the vita press is displayed on the display screen 11a through the process of step Ss106, Ss110 or Ss112, the sub-control means 200 next displays the specifications shown in FIG. 107 in accordance with the evaluation displayed on the display screen 11a. Calculate points according to. Then, the calculated points are added to the score stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM included in the sub-control means 200 (step Ss114). Thereafter, the sub-control means 200 ends the first stop score calculation process and performs other processes.

When the second reel stops in a game in which the 3-time body beat image is displayed during the practice mode, the sub-control means 200 executes the second stop score calculation process shown in FIG. 115. First, the sub-control means 200 determines whether or not the first stop operation has failed in pressing the button (step Ss120). Specifically, by the process of step Ss102 in FIG. 114, it is determined whether the first stop operation failure information is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM included in the sub-control means 200. If the first stop operation failure information is stored, the determination result in step Ss120 is YES, and the second stop operation failure information is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM included in the sub-control means 200 (step Ss122). , completes the second stop score calculation process and performs other processes.

In the judgment process of step Ss120, if the first stop operation was successful (i.e., the first stop operation failure information was not stored in the RAM of the sub-control means 200), the judgment result is NO, and the sub-control means 200 judges whether or not the pattern displayed (stopped) in the display window W for the second stopped reel matches the pattern of the corresponding reel in the three-drum vita push image displayed on the display screen 11a (step Ss124). If they do not match, the judgment result of step Ss124 is NO, and the process proceeds to step Ss122, where the second stop operation failure information is saved in a predetermined storage area of the RAM provided in the sub-control means 200, the second stop time score calculation process is terminated, and other processes are performed.

On the other hand, if they match, the determination result in step Ss124 becomes YES, and the sub-control means 200 determines that the number of steps at the time of the stop operation ascertained from the stop operation information transmitted from the main control means 100 for the second stopped reel is It is determined whether or not it is within the range of 5 to 9 (step Ss126). If the number of steps during the stop operation is within the range of 10 to 15, the determination result in step Ss126 is YES, and the image of "Marvelous" is displayed on the display screen 11a (step Ss128).

In the judgment process of step Ss126, if the number of steps during the stop operation is outside the range of 5 to 9, the judgment result of step Ss126 becomes NO, and then the sub control means 200 determines that the number of steps during the stop operation is outside the range of 10 to 9. It is determined whether or not it is within the range of 15 (step Ss130). If the number of steps during the stop operation is within the range of 10 to 15, the determination result in step Ss130 is YES, and the image "Excellent" is displayed on the display screen 11a (step Ss132). On the other hand, if the number of steps at the time of the stop operation is outside the range of 10 to 15, the determination result in step Ss130 is NO, and the "Cool" image is displayed on the display screen 11a (step Ss134).

Then, when the evaluation regarding the precision of the vita press is displayed on the display screen 11a by the process of step Ss128, Ss132 or Ss134, the sub-control means 200 next displays the specifications shown in FIG. 107 in accordance with the evaluation displayed on the display screen 11a. Calculate points according to. Then, the calculated points are added to the score stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM included in the sub-control means 200 (step Ss136). Thereafter, the sub-control means 200 ends the second stop score calculation process and performs other processes.

When the last reel stops in a game in which the three-time drum press image is displayed during the practice mode, the sub-control means 200 executes the third stop score calculation process shown in FIG. 116. First, the sub-control means 200 determines whether or not the second stop operation has failed in pressing the button (step Ss140). Specifically, by the process of step Ss122 in FIG. 115, it is determined whether the second stop operation failure information is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM included in the sub-control means 200. If the second stop operation failure information is stored, the determination result in step Ss140 is YES, and the second stop operation failure information is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM included in the sub-control means 200 (step Ss142). , the third stop score calculation process is completed and other processes are performed.

In the judgment process of step Ss140, if the second stop operation was successful in pressing the bit (that is, the second stop operation failure information was not stored in the RAM of the sub-control means 200), the judgment result becomes NO. Regarding the third stopped reel, the sub-control means 200 determines whether the symbol stopped and displayed on the display window W matches the symbol of the corresponding reel in the 3rd body bit press image displayed on the display screen 11a. It is determined whether or not (step Ss144). If they do not match, the determination result in step Ss144 becomes NO, and the process moves to step Ss142, where the third stop operation failure information is saved in a predetermined storage area of the RAM provided in the sub-control means 200, and the 3. Finish the stop score calculation process and perform other processes.

On the other hand, if there is a match, the determination result in step Ss144 becomes YES, and the sub-control means 200 determines whether the count value of the 1 symbol counter included in the stop operation information transmitted from the main control means 100 for the third stopped reel is within the range of 5 to 9 (step Ss146). If the count value of the 1 symbol counter is within the range of 5 to 9, the determination result in step Ss146 becomes YES, and the image of "Marvelous" is displayed on the display screen 11a (step Ss148).

In the judgment process of step Ss146, if the number of steps during the stop operation is outside the range of 5 to 9, the judgment result of step Ss146 becomes NO, and then the sub control means 200 determines that the number of steps during the stop operation is outside the range of 10 to 9. It is determined whether or not it is within the range of 15 (step Ss150). If the number of steps during the stop operation is within the range of 10 to 15, the determination result in step Ss150 is YES, and the image "Excellent" is displayed on the display screen 11a (step Ss152). On the other hand, if the number of steps at the time of the stop operation is outside the range of 10 to 15, the determination result in step Ss150 is NO, and a "Cool" image is displayed on the display screen 11a (step Ss154).

Then, when the evaluation regarding the precision of the vita press is displayed on the display screen 11a through the process of step Ss148, Ss152 or Ss154, the sub-control means 200 next displays the specifications shown in FIG. 107 in accordance with the evaluation displayed on the display screen 11a. Calculate points according to. Then, the calculated points are added to the score stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM included in the sub-control means 200 (step Ss156). Thereafter, the sub-control means 200 ends the third stop score calculation process and performs other processes.

(Score calculation process when the symbol combination for adjusting the number of coins is completed)
Next, referring to FIG. 117, the contents of the score calculation process (score calculation when winning the number adjustment role) performed when the winning 38 symbol combination (symbol combination for adjusting the number of coins) is lined up during the practice mode will be described. First, the sub-control means 200 judges whether the winning 38 symbol combination (see FIG. 90) is lined up on the active line (step Ss160). If the winning 38 symbol combination is not lined up on the active line, the judgment result of step Ss160 is NO, and the score calculation process when the number adjustment role is lined up is terminated and other processing is performed. On the other hand, if the winning 38 symbol combination is lined up on the active line, the judgment result of step Ss160 is YES, and the sub-control means 200 displays the image of "Marvelous" on the display screen 11a (step Ss162). The sub-control means 200 then calculates the points when the number-adjusting role is won according to the specifications shown in Fig. 107 (see the "Marvelous Judgment at Number-Adjusting Role" column in Fig. 107(b)). The sub-control means 200 then adds the calculated points to the score stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM it has (step Ss164). After that, the sub-control means 200 ends the score calculation process when the number-adjusting role is won and performs other processes.

(Score calculation process when there is no instruction regarding eye press)
As mentioned above, during the practice mode, none of the press images 1 to 57 (see FIGS. 103 to 105) is displayed, and the 3-time body press image (see FIG. 101(b)) is displayed. is not displayed, and the cut-in effect that is executed when the symbol combination for adjusting the number of coins (the winning symbol combination of 38) is arranged does not occur (hereinafter, this situation will be referred to as " Even when the middle stop switch 26b is operated for the first stop, the accuracy of pressing the middle reel 3b is evaluated even when the middle reel 3b is not instructed.

The contents of the score calculation process when no instruction is given will be described below with reference to FIG. 118. First, the sub-control means 200 judges whether the first stopped reel is the middle reel 3b or not (step Ss170). If the first stopped reel is not the middle reel 3b, the judgment result in step Ss170 will be NO, and the sub-control means 200 will end the score calculation process when no instruction is given and perform other processes. On the other hand, if the first stopped reel is the middle reel 3b, the judgment result in step Ss170 will be YES, and the sub-control means 200 will judge whether the perfect press of the middle stop switch 26b was successful or not (step Ss172).

That is, the arrangement of the "Replay A" symbol (symbol number 14), "Star A" symbol (symbol number 13), and "Star B" symbol (symbol number 12) on the middle reel 3b is in the upper row of the display window W. A determination is made as to whether or not the middle or lower row has been pressed. Specifically, if the symbol number at the time of the stop operation ascertained from the stop operation information transmitted from the main control means 100 when the middle stop switch 26b is operated the first stop operation is 12, it is determined that the bit press has been successful. be done. If the symbol number at the time of the stop operation is not 12 and it is determined that the bit press of the middle stop switch 26b was not successful, the determination result in step Ss172 becomes NO, and the sub-control means 200 performs the score calculation process when no instruction is given. , and perform other processing.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the press of the middle stop switch 26b is successful, the determination result in step Ss172 becomes YES, and then the sub control means 200 controls when the middle stop switch 26b is operated for the first stop. It is determined whether the number of steps at the time of the stop operation ascertained from the stop operation information transmitted from the main control means 100 is within the range of 5 to 9 (step Ss174). If the number of steps during the stop operation is within the range of 5 to 9, the determination result in step Ss174 is YES, and the image of "Marvelous" is displayed on the display screen 11a (step Ss176).

In the judgment process of step Ss174, if the number of steps during the stop operation is outside the range of 5 to 9, the judgment result of step Ss174 becomes NO, and then the sub control means 200 determines that the number of steps during the stop operation is outside the range of 10 to 9. It is determined whether or not it is within the range of 15 (step Ss178). If the number of steps during the stop operation is within the range of 10 to 15, the determination result in step Ss178 is YES, and the image "Excellent" is displayed on the display screen 11a (step Ss180). On the other hand, if the number of steps at the time of the stop operation is outside the range of 10 to 15, the determination result in step Ss178 is NO, and the "Cool" image is displayed on the display screen 11a (step Ss182).

Then, when the evaluation regarding the precision of the vita press is displayed on the display screen 11a through the processing of steps Ss176, Ss180, or Ss182, the sub-control means 200 then displays the specifications shown in FIG. 107 in accordance with the evaluation displayed on the display screen 11a. Calculate points according to. Then, the calculated points are added to the score stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM included in the sub-control means 200 (step Ss184). Thereafter, the sub-control means 200 ends the third stop score calculation process and performs other processes.

It can be said that the sub-control means 200 that executes the various score calculation processes described above has a function as a score determination means. In addition, among the various score calculation processes described above, only the score calculation process (FIGS. 111 to 113) when a single-time drum press image is displayed is performed, and the score calculation process when a three-time drum press image is displayed is performed. (Figure 114 to Figure 116), score calculation process when the symbol combinations for number adjustment are complete (Figure 117), and score calculation process when there is no instruction regarding eye pressing (Figure 118). , or may not be executed depending on the specifications of the gaming machine.

<Example of using scores calculated during practice mode>
The score calculated by the score calculation process shown in FIGS. 111 to 118 may be configured to be displayed on the image display device 11 for a predetermined time at the end of one practice mode. Items displayed on the image display device 11 at this time include, for example, the score in the practice mode (the total value of points awarded during the practice mode), the start date and time of the practice mode, the elapsed gaming time at the end of the practice mode, The number of evaluations for ``Marvelous'', the number of evaluations for ``Excellent'', the number of evaluations for ``Cool'', the number of times a single body announcement was made, the number of times a 3-time body announcement was made, the number of winnings for the number adjustment combination, etc. Good too.

In addition, the information on the above items may be configured to be stored in the RAM of the sub-control means 200 as a practice mode history for each practice mode that has been executed. In this case, the history of some of the practice modes that have been executed may be stored. For example, the history of the current practice mode and the history of the practice mode with the highest score among the practice modes executed up to that point may be stored in the RAM.

The history of each practice mode may be displayed on the display screen 11a by the player's operation. For example, when the decision button 55 is operated while no game is being played on the gaming machine, a menu screen may be displayed on the display screen 11a, and an option to display the history of the practice mode (for example, an item "Display practice mode history") may be provided in the displayed menu screen. When the player selects the item "Display practice mode history" from the menu screen, the display screen 11a displays the various information described above for each practice mode. In this case, if the history of multiple practice modes is saved and all the practice mode histories cannot be displayed on one screen, the history of each practice mode may be displayed individually, and the history of the practice mode displayed on the display screen 11a may be switched by operating the selection button 54.

The gaming machine of this embodiment may also be applied to a gaming machine in a gaming system mainly composed of a server connected to a network, an information terminal owned by a player, and the gaming machine. In such a gaming system, each player may transmit the history of the practice mode that he or she has performed to a specified server connected to the Internet, and the specified server may generate a ranking based on the scores contained in the transmitted practice mode history, and each player may view the ranking. For example, a player may perform a specified procedure to register his or her identification information (ID) with a specified server, and obtain from the specified server a password containing information that can identify his or her ID. The gaming machine is configured to allow the password issued by the specified server to be entered, and when the password is entered into the gaming machine and play is started, the sub-control means 200 records history information (including practice mode history information) of various items related to the game performed after the password is entered.

If the player wishes to participate in the ranking of scores acquired during the practice mode (hereinafter, in this embodiment, referred to as "eye-pushing ranking"), the player transmits his/her score information stored in the RAM of the sub-control means 200 to the above-mentioned specified server. For example, in a gaming machine, an item "two-dimensional code display" is provided on the above-mentioned menu screen, and when this item is selected by the player, the sub-control means 200 displays a two-dimensional code on the display screen 11a, which includes information (access information) of the URL (Uniform Resource Locator) of the specified server, the player's ID corresponding to the password entered at the start of the game, and the practice mode history information. Therefore, the sub-control means 200 also has a function as a two-dimensional code generating means. Here, the practice mode history information included in the two-dimensional code is related to the practice mode history showing the highest score among the practice mode history stored in the RAM of the sub-control means 200. In addition, it may be configured to erase the practice mode history stored in the RAM of the sub-control means 200 by displaying the two-dimensional code on the display screen 11a. This will prevent your practice mode history from being used as someone else's practice mode history.

When the player photographs the two-dimensional code displayed on the display screen 11a with the camera of an information terminal such as a mobile phone or smartphone, the player accesses the Internet from the information terminal based on the URL information included in the two-dimensional code. A predetermined server can be accessed via the . When a predetermined server is accessed, the practice mode history information included in the two-dimensional code is transmitted from the information terminal to the predetermined server. Also, when a two-dimensional code is photographed, GPS information of the location is acquired, and based on the acquired GPS information, point information (for example, latitude and longitude) that can identify the location where the two-dimensional code was photographed is generated. , When sending practice mode history information, the generated point information is also sent.

Note that the point information transmitted to the predetermined server may be point information of a location where the predetermined server is accessed from the information terminal. This point information is generated from the GPS information obtained when the information terminal accesses a predetermined server. In addition, if location information cannot be generated when a two-dimensional code is photographed with the camera of an information terminal, location information of the location where you were when accessing a predetermined server will be generated and sent. It's okay. In addition, the server is preloaded with information about gaming parlors throughout Japan and the locations of those gaming parlors, and the gaming machine is configured to include information about the gaming parlor where the gaming machine is installed in the aforementioned two-dimensional code. Make it. Thereby, the server may determine the area where the player played the game based on the gaming hall information transmitted from the information terminal that read the two-dimensional code.

The predetermined server that received the practice mode history information from the information terminal determines which region out of the eight regions of Hokkaido, Tohoku, Kanto, Chubu, Kinki, Chugoku, Shikoku, and Kyushu the point information sent along with it , and associates the determined region and the player's ID with the received history information of the practice mode. Further, the predetermined server updates the eye-catching ranking based on the received practice mode history information.

When a player wants to view the eye ranking, he selects the item "eye ranking" on the menu screen displayed on the screen of the information terminal when accessing a predetermined server from the information terminal. As a result, the contents of the eye-pull ranking are displayed on the screen of the information terminal. In this embodiment, national rankings and regional rankings are available as the featured rankings. Here, FIG. 119 shows a display example of the national ranking, and FIG. 120 shows a display example of the regional ranking.

In the national ranking screen shown in FIG. 119(a), the screen DSP of the information terminal is a touch panel, and the character string "National Ranking" is displayed in the title display area ta provided at the top of the screen DSP. ing. Below the title display area ta, a display switching button b1 on which the character string "Go to regional ranking" is displayed is displayed. When this display switching button b1 is tapped, the display on the screen dsp is switched to the regional ranking shown in FIG. 120. Below the display switching button b1, four tabs t1 to t4 are displayed in the width direction of the screen dsp. In addition, the character string "My Ranking" is displayed on the tab t1, the character string "Weekly" is displayed on the tab t2, the character string "Monthly" is displayed on the tab t3, and the character string "My Ranking" is displayed on the tab t4. The character string "History" is displayed. Furthermore, the display area below the tabs t1 to t4 is a ranking display area ra.

FIG. 119(a) shows a weekly national ranking screen that is displayed in the ranking display area ra when tab t2 is tapped. A period designation area tm for designating the period is displayed. When the period designation area tm is tapped, a numeric keypad for inputting numbers and a cursor are displayed, and it becomes possible to input the desired start and end of a week. Then, when the user taps the display button b2 displayed below the period designation area tm, the ranking for the designated week is displayed. In FIG. 119(a), first, the nickname (Mr. 〇〇) associated with the player ID sent when accessing a predetermined server and the highest score (best score) corresponding to that nickname are shown. and the national ranking (AAA) based on the best score.

Below the individual rankings, the national rankings for the specified week are displayed in order of score. For each rank, the player's nickname and practice mode results are displayed, including the score value (Score), the time elapsed until one practice mode session ends (TIME), the number of times a player was rated Cool (Cool count), the number of times a player was rated Excellent (Excellent count), the number of times a player was rated Marvelous (Marvelous count), the number of times a single drum alert was issued (total number of single drum alerts), and the number of times a triple drum alert was issued (total number of triple drum alerts). In FIG. 119(a), only part of the results for the second-place player are displayed on the screen dsp, but by flicking upwards on the screen dsp, the displayed content can be scrolled upwards to display lower ranking results.

When tab t3 is tapped, a monthly national ranking screen is displayed in the ranking display area ra, but the displayed content is almost the same as that shown in FIG. 119(a). However, the period that can be specified in the period specification area tm is one month. When the tab t1 is tapped, the content (my ranking) shown in FIG. 119(b) is displayed in the ranking display area ra. That is, for the player ID transmitted when accessing a predetermined server, the practice mode results from the past to the present stored in the server are displayed in descending order of score value.

Here, the content of the results in the practice mode is the same as in Figure 119(a), but in Figure 119(b), the year, month, and day when the results were recorded is displayed next to each ranking display. ing. In addition, in FIG. 119(b), only part of the result for the third place in the ranking is displayed on the screen DSP, but by flicking upward on the screen DSP, the displayed content can be scrolled upward. Lower grades can be displayed. When tab t4 is tapped, past rankings are displayed on the screen DSP. The display contents of the past rankings are similar to the display contents of the My Rankings shown in FIG. 119(b), but for each rank, the nickname of the player ranked in that rank is displayed.

When the display switch button b1 is tapped on the national ranking screen shown in FIG. 119, the regional rankings shown in FIG. 120 are displayed on the screen dsp. At this time, the character string "Regional Rankings" is displayed in the title display area ta, and the character string "Go to National Rankings" is displayed on the display switch button b1. In addition, tabs t1 to t4, which are the same as those on the national rankings screen, are displayed below the display switch button b1, and the display area below the tabs t1 to t4 is the ranking display area ra.

FIG. 120(a) shows a weekly regional ranking screen that is displayed in the ranking display area ra when tab t2 is tapped. ) is displayed, and the period specification area tm displays a region specification area ar for specifying the region of the ranking to be displayed. When the period designation area tm is tapped, a numeric keypad for inputting numbers and a cursor are displayed, and it becomes possible to input the desired start and end of a week. In addition, if you tap the region specification area ar, you can select "Hokkaido region", "Tohoku region", "Kanto region", "Chubu region", "Kinki region", "Chugoku region", "Shikoku region", "Kyushu region". Eight options are displayed, and when one of the options is tapped, the name of the selected region is displayed in the region designation area ar.

When the display button b2 displayed below the region designation area ar is tapped, the rankings for the specified week are displayed for the practice mode history associated with the selected region. In FIG. 120(a), the Kanto region is selected as the region, and an individual ranking is displayed that includes the nickname (Mr. XX) associated with the player's ID sent when accessing the specified server, the best score corresponding to that nickname, and the rank in the Kanto region based on that best score (bbbth place).

Below the individual rankings, the rankings for the specified week in the Kanto region are displayed in order of score. For each ranking, the player's nickname and practice mode results are displayed, and the content of the results displayed is the same as in Figure 119(a). Also, in Figure 119(b), only the results of the top ranking player are displayed on the screen dsp, but by flicking upwards on the screen dsp, the displayed content can be scrolled upwards and lower ranking results can be displayed.

When the tab t3 is tapped, the monthly ranking screen for the selected region is displayed in the ranking display area ra, and the display contents are almost the same as those shown in FIG. 120(a). However, the period that can be specified in the period specification area tm is one month. When the tab t1 is tapped, the contents shown in FIG. 120(b) (my ranking) are displayed in the ranking display area ra. That is, for the ID of the player transmitted when accessing the specified server, the practice mode results that resulted in the best score are displayed among the practice mode history recorded in each region. In FIG. 120(b), only the best score results in the Kinki region are displayed on the screen dsp, but the best score results in other regions can be displayed by flicking upward on the screen dsp. When the tab t4 is tapped, the practice mode results that are the all-time top scores in each region and the rankings in which those results were recorded are displayed on the screen dsp. The display contents of the all-time rankings by region are the same as those of the my rankings shown in FIG. 120(b), but the nicknames of the players who achieved the best scores are displayed for each region.

In this way, in the third embodiment, since it is possible to know the eye-pulling skill (eye-pulling accuracy) of other players, it is possible to develop a competitive spirit in the player regarding the eye-pulling skill and increase the desire to play. At the same time, it is possible to provide a new entertainment of competing with other players in their eye-catching skills. Note that the items displayed on the screen of the information terminal are not limited to those shown in FIGS. 119 and 120. For example, some of the items shown in FIGS. 119 and 120 may be omitted. Further, for example, a message inviting the player to an event where the player competes for eye-catching accuracy may be displayed on the screen of the information terminal of the top ranking player or may be sent by e-mail from the server of the gaming system.

In the third embodiment, a slot machine (reel type gaming machine) that uses gaming medals as gaming value is described as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention can be similarly applied to, for example, reel type gaming machines that use gaming balls as gaming value, reel type gaming machines that use information recorded on an electronic recording medium as gaming value, mahjong ball gaming machines, arrange ball machines, pachinko machines, etc., and similar effects can be obtained.

Furthermore, it may be a drum-type gaming machine that does not pay out game media as a bonus and only determines the accuracy of eye-pressing. In this case, there is no need to divide the control means into a main control means and a sub-control means as in the present embodiment, and each part constituting the gaming machine may be controlled by a single control means. Further, in the case of a reel-type gaming machine in which only the precision of the eye-press is determined, the number of reels may be one, or may be four or more. Furthermore, the reel stop control is configured so that each symbol on each reel is always pulled in by sliding one frame without performing a lottery. One eye-pressing image selected by is displayed, and if the displayed eye-pressing image and the symbols of each reel that are stopped and displayed match, it may be determined that the bit-pressing has been successful. Even in the case of such a configuration, the accuracy of bit pressing can be determined in more detail using the symbol position detection means and skill determination means in the third embodiment. Furthermore, in the case of a drum-type gaming machine that only determines the accuracy of eye presses, the practice mode may be started at a different trigger than winning a bonus (for example, by operating a predetermined button).

[Fourth embodiment]
Hereinafter, a slot machine according to a fourth embodiment (hereinafter also referred to as a "fourth embodiment slot machine") will be described with additional reference to FIGS. 121 to 133. Below, the characteristic parts of the slot machine of the fourth embodiment will be mainly explained. The characteristic parts described below are not limited to the slot machine of the fourth embodiment, but can be combined with other embodiments. It should be noted that the slot machine of the fourth embodiment has the same or similar basic configuration as the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above. It will also be referred to in the form, and detailed explanation will be omitted. Furthermore, the control processes such as the winning combination determination process and the reel control process described for the slot machine 1 can be applied to the fourth embodiment of the slot machine in the same manner or with some changes in the process contents.

≪Characteristic production control in this embodiment≫
Below, the contents of the characteristic effect control executed in the slot machine of this embodiment will be explained.

<Characteristic types of production control and their contents> (Display control of rotation stop suggestion image)
In the slot machine of this embodiment, in order to avoid the performance of the stepping motors 35a, 35b, and 35c shown in FIG. 2 from deteriorating due to the heat generated by continuous operation for a long time, If the player does not perform an operation to stop the reels even after a predetermined period of time has passed since the reels have been rotated, a rotation stop suggestion image is displayed on the image display device 11. This rotation stop suggestion image is an image indicating a message such as "Please stop the reels", and may be displayed over the production screen that was previously displayed on the image display device 11, or may be displayed on the production screen that was previously displayed on the image display device 11. The effect screen that was displayed may be switched to a notification screen that includes an image that suggests rotation stop.

The display control of the spin stop suggestion image is performed by the sub-control means 200 shown in FIG. 9. Specifically, when a specified number of medals have been inserted (or replay is possible), and the sub-control means 200 receives a specific control command from the main control means 100 in response to the operation of the start lever 25 shown in FIG. 1, the sub-control means 200 starts counting the timer, and when the timer counts a specific time while the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c remain in an unoperated state, the sub-control means 200 displays the spin stop suggestion image on the image display device 11.

Here, the control commands transmitted from the main control means 100 in response to the operation of the start lever 25 include, for example, as explained in the first embodiment, an instruction number command, a performance group number command, and a full rotation cylinder command. There are rotation start commands, etc. When the sub-control means 200 receives a predetermined control command from among these control commands (also collectively referred to as "lever operation reception commands"), it starts the timer.

(Display control of game standby screen)
In the slot machine of this embodiment, after one game ends due to all the reels stopping, some operations are performed on the slot machine (for example, inserting medals for the next game, changing the BET switch 22, 23, etc.). If a predetermined time has elapsed without any operation (operation of the settlement switch 24, etc.), the sub-control means 200 starts displaying a game standby screen (so-called "demonstration screen") on the image display device 11. This game standby screen is made up of, for example, an image showing the logo of the manufacturer that manufactured the slot machine, the model name of the slot machine, and a moving image of a character or the like used in the performance carried out by the slot machine. The display control of the game standby screen is also performed by the sub-control means 200, and specifically, among the control commands transmitted from the main control means 100 when all the reels have stopped, a predetermined control command is When the sub-control means 200 receives the signal, the sub-control means 200 starts counting the time with a timer, and when the timer measures a predetermined time while no operation such as inserting medals is performed, the image is displayed. The device 11 starts displaying a game standby screen.

Here, as explained in the first embodiment, the control commands transmitted from the main control means 100 in response to the stoppage of all reels include an all stop command, a payout number command, a winning combination result command, etc. be. When the sub-control means 200 receives a predetermined control command from among these control commands (also collectively referred to as "all reel stop commands"), it starts the timer.

(Volume control of performance sounds)
In the slot machine of this embodiment, after one game ends due to the stopping of all reels, when the sound effects (e.g., BGM) that were being output during the game are still being output, and a predetermined time has elapsed without any operation being performed on the slot machine (e.g., inserting a medal to play the next game, or operating the BET switch 22, 23 or the settlement switch 24), the sub-control means 200 reduces the volume of the sound effects output from the speakers 15a, 15b, 44a, 44b (see Figs. 2 and 9) in order to reduce power consumption. Specifically, when a predetermined control command is received from among the above-mentioned all reels stop commands, the timer starts to count, and when the timer counts a predetermined time while no operation such as inserting a medal is performed, the volume of the sound effects is reduced. Here, "reducing the volume" also includes the case where the volume is zero (a state in which no sound effects are being output).

<Timing of various production controls>
Next, with reference to the timing chart shown in FIG. 121, the timing of display control of the above-mentioned rotation stop suggestion image and game standby screen, and volume control of effect sound will be explained. FIG. 121(a) is a timing chart showing the timing from when the start lever is operated until the rotation stop suggestion image is displayed. It shows the timing of rotation/stop of the first to third stop reels and the start of display of the rotation stop suggestion image. Here, the first to third stop reels indicate the order in which the rotation stopped, and do not indicate the distinction between the left reel 3a, middle reel 3b, and right reel 3c. That is, the first stop reel is the first reel to stop, the second stop reel is the second to stop, and the third stop reel is the last to stop.

Figure 121 (b) is a timing chart showing the timing from when all the reels have stopped until the game standby screen is displayed and the volume of the background music, which is one of the sound effects, is reduced, and shows the timing of the on/off of the start lever 25 and the stop switches 26a, 26b, 26c, the rotation/stop of the first to third stopped reels, the start of the display of the rotation stop indication image, and the reduction in the volume of the output background music (marked as "Mute" in the figure).

In FIG. 121(a), when the start lever is turned on, all the reels start rotating, and a lever operation reception command is transmitted from the main control means 100 to the sub control means 200. Thereby, when the sub-control means 200 receives a predetermined control command among the received lever operation acceptance commands, the sub-control means 200 starts the timer. Here, if the time when the sub-control means 200 starts counting the timer is t _s1 (when time d ₁ has elapsed since the start lever was turned on), then from time t _s1 to any stop switch. If time T1 passes without a stop operation being performed, a rotation stop suggestion image is displayed on the image display device 11. That is, the rotation stop suggestion image is displayed on the image display device 11 when time T1 has elapsed from a predetermined timing (time t _s1 ) after the start lever was operated. As a result, when the player who has viewed the rotation stop suggestion image operates to stop any of the stop switches, the sub-control means 200 ends the display of the rotation stop suggestion image.

When the sub-control means 200 receives a predetermined control command from among the control commands transmitted from the main control means 100 due to the stop switch being operated to stop, the sub-control means 200 restarts the timer. Here, if the time when the sub-control means 200 starts timing the timer is t _s2 (time d ₂ has elapsed since the first stop reel stopped), then from time t _s2 to the next stop switch. When a predetermined time (preferably less than time T1) has elapsed without a stop operation being performed, a rotation stop suggestion image is displayed on the image display device 11.

Next, in FIG. 121(b), when the start lever is turned on, the main control means 100 sends a lever operation acceptance command to the sub control means 200. The sub-control means 200 causes the speakers 15a, 15b, 44a, and 44b to output BGM as a performance when the performance group number indicated by the performance group number command among the received lever operation acceptance commands is a specific performance group number. . Thereafter, when the player sequentially operates the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c to stop all reels, the main control means 100 transmits the above-mentioned all reel stop command.

When the sub-control means 200 receives a predetermined control command from among the received all-reel stop commands, the sub-control means 200 starts counting time with a timer. Here, if the time when the sub-control means 200 starts counting the time of the timer is t _s3 , the sub-control means 200 controls the time T 2 from time t _s3 (when time d ₃ has elapsed since the third stop reel stopped). When the time has passed, a game standby screen is displayed on the image display device 11. Furthermore, when time T3 has elapsed since time _ts3 , the sub-control means 200 reduces the volume of the BGM that has been output until then.

Here, the time from the predetermined timing after the start lever is operated until the rotation stop suggestion screen is displayed is defined as the first predetermined time, and the time from when all reels stop until the game standby screen is displayed is defined as the second predetermined time. time, and if the time from when all reels stop until the BGM volume is reduced is the third predetermined time, then the second predetermined time and the third predetermined time are the same time, and The first predetermined time is longer than the second predetermined time and the third predetermined time described above.

In the above example, the display of the game standby screen and the decrease in the volume of the performance sound are performed after all the reels have stopped and one game has ended, so the game will start after all the reels have stopped. Even if the time during which the standby screen is displayed or the volume of the performance sound is reduced is set to be relatively short, there is little risk of bothering the player. On the other hand, since the rotation stop suggestion image is displayed while the reels are rotating, that is, in the middle of the game, if you set a short time until the rotation stop suggestion image is displayed, for example, When a player is watching the rotation of the reels in an attempt to hit the reel or enjoying the effect image or sound, an image suggesting that the rotation has stopped is displayed, causing the player to feel annoyed. There is a possibility. Therefore, by setting the aforementioned third predetermined time to be longer than the first predetermined time and the second predetermined time, it is possible to control the display of the game standby screen and control the game machine while reducing the risk of stress on the player. Power consumption can be suppressed and the player can be prompted to stop the reels.

In the example shown in FIG. 121, the BGM volume is controlled to be lowered when a predetermined time has elapsed after all the reels stopped, but apart from this, the BGM volume is controlled to be lowered when a predetermined time elapses after the start lever is operated. Control may be performed to reduce the volume of BGM when the time elapses. A case will be described with reference to the timing chart shown in FIG. 122 about the case where the display control of the above-mentioned rotation stop suggestion image and game standby screen is performed together with such BGM volume control. Note that in FIG. 122, the same times and times as those shown in FIG. 121 are given the same reference numerals as in FIG. 121.

FIG. 122(a) is a timing chart showing the timing from when the start lever is operated until the rotation stop suggestion image is displayed and the BGM volume is decreased. 121(a) except that a timing chart regarding the timing chart (denoted as ")" is added. Further, FIG. 122(b) is a timing chart showing the timing from when all reels stop until the game standby screen is displayed, and FIG. This is the same as (b).

In FIG. 122(a), when the start lever is turned on, all the reels start rotating, and a lever operation acceptance command is transmitted from the main control means 100 to the sub control means 200. As a result, if the performance group number indicated by the performance group number command among the received lever operation acceptance commands is a specific performance group number, the sub-control means 200 can output BGM from the speakers 15a, 15b, 44a, 44b as a performance. output. In addition to this, when the sub-control means 200 receives a predetermined control command from among the received lever operation acceptance commands, the sub-control means 200 starts counting the time of the timer.

Here, if the time when the sub-control means 200 starts counting the timer is _ts1 , if a time T1 passes without any stop operation being performed on any of the stop switches from the time _ts1 , the image display device 11 Displays an image suggesting rotation stop. Further, the sub-control means 200 reduces the volume of the BGM that has been output when a time period T4 has elapsed without any stop operation being performed on any of the stop switches from the time _ts1 . Then, when the player who has viewed the rotation stop suggestion image operates to stop any of the stop switches, the sub-control means 200 ends the display of the rotation stop suggestion image, and further returns the volume of the BGM to the level before being lowered.

Next, in FIG. 122(b), when the start lever is turned on, the main control means 100 sends a lever operation acceptance command to the sub control means 200. Thereafter, when the player sequentially operates the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c to stop all reels, the main control means 100 transmits the above-mentioned all reel stop command. On the other hand, when the sub-control means 200 receives a predetermined control command from among the received all-reel stop commands, the sub-control means 200 starts the timer. Here, assuming that the time when the sub-control means 200 starts counting the timer is _ts3 , the sub-control means 200 displays the game standby screen on the image display device 11 when a time T2 has elapsed from the time _ts3 .

Here, the time from the predetermined timing after the start lever is operated until the rotation stop suggestion screen is displayed is defined as the first predetermined time, and the time from the predetermined timing after all reels are stopped until the game standby screen is displayed is the first predetermined time. In the example of FIG. 122, the first predetermined time, the second predetermined time, and the All predetermined times are the same.

The above-mentioned display of the rotation stop suggestion screen and game standby screen, as well as a decrease in the BGM volume, all affect the progress of the performance during the game (for example, the display of the game standby screen is carried out over multiple games) (affects continuous performance). Therefore, if these controls are executed while the player is playing a game, there is a risk that the player will be annoyed or feel bothered, so the time period during which it can be assumed that no game is being played may be It is desirable that this be done when the period has elapsed. Therefore, by displaying the rotation stop suggestion screen, the game standby screen, and lowering the BGM volume after a period of time during which it can be assumed that no games are being played, we can avoid disturbing or bothering players. This can reduce the risk of causing a feeling of discomfort.

In addition, since the timer measurement time (specifically, the measurement value set in the timer) that is referenced when displaying the rotation stop suggestion screen and the game standby screen and when lowering the BGM volume can be shared, the memory It is possible to reduce the amount of data stored in the system and to simplify the control flow. Furthermore, by lowering the BGM volume in conjunction with the display of the rotation stop suggestion screen, it is possible to draw the attention of players or hall staff, thereby reducing the possibility that the reel rotation will be stopped. It can be made higher.

Next, in the example shown in FIG. 122, the BGM volume is reduced when a predetermined time has elapsed after the start lever was operated, but in addition to this, a predetermined time has elapsed after all reels have stopped. Control may also be performed to reduce the BGM volume even when the time has elapsed. The case where such control is performed will be explained with reference to the timing chart shown in FIG. 123. Note that in FIG. 123, the same times and times as those shown in FIGS. 121 and 122 are given the same reference numerals as in FIGS. 121 and 122.

FIG. 123(a) is a timing chart showing the timing from when the start lever is operated until the rotation stop suggestion image is displayed and the BGM volume is lowered, and is similar to FIG. 122(a). Further, FIG. 123(b) is a timing chart showing the timing from when all the reels stop until the game standby screen is displayed and the BGM volume is lowered.

In FIG. 123(a), when the start lever is turned on, all the reels start rotating, and a lever operation acceptance command is transmitted from the main control means 100 to the sub control means 200. As a result, if the performance group number indicated by the performance group number command among the received lever operation acceptance commands is a specific performance group number, the sub-control means 200 can output BGM from the speakers 15a, 15b, 44a, 44b as a performance. output. In addition to this, when the sub-control means 200 receives a predetermined control command from among the received lever operation acceptance commands, the sub-control means 200 starts counting the time of the timer.

Here, if the time when the sub-control means 200 starts counting the timer is _ts1 , if a time T1 has passed without any stop operation being performed on any stop switch from the time _ts1 , the image display device 11 Displays an image suggesting rotation stop. Further, the sub-control means 200 reduces the volume of the BGM that has been output when a time period T4 has elapsed without any stop operation being performed on any of the stop switches from the time _ts1 . Then, when the player who has viewed the rotation stop suggestion image operates to stop any of the stop switches, the sub-control means 200 ends the display of the rotation stop suggestion image, and further returns the volume of the BGM to the level before being lowered.

Next, in FIG. 123(b), when the start lever is turned on, this triggers the main control means 100 to send a lever operation acceptance command to the sub control means 200. Thereafter, when the player sequentially operates the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c to stop all reels, the main control means 100 transmits the above-mentioned all reel stop command. On the other hand, when the sub-control means 200 receives a predetermined control command from among the received all-reel stop commands, the sub-control means 200 starts the timer. Here, assuming that the time when the sub-control means 200 starts counting the timer is _ts3 , the sub-control means 200 displays the game standby screen on the image display device 11 when a time T2 has elapsed from the time _ts3 . Further, the sub-control means 200 lowers the volume of the BGM when time T3 has elapsed from time _ts3 .

Here, if the time from the specified timing after the start lever is operated until the spin stop indication screen is displayed is defined as the first specified time, the time from the specified timing after all reels have stopped until the game standby screen is displayed is defined as the second specified time, the time from the specified timing after all reels have stopped until the volume of the background music is reduced is defined as the third specified time, and the time from the specified timing after the start lever is operated until the volume of the background music is reduced is defined as the fourth specified time, in the example of FIG. 123, the first specified time and the fourth specified time are the same time, and the second specified time and the third specified time are the same time.

As mentioned above, the display of the rotation stop suggestion screen, the game standby screen, and the decrease in the BGM volume all affect the progress of the performance during the game, so these displays indicate that the game is not being played. It is desirable that this be done after an estimable amount of time has elapsed. Therefore, by displaying the rotation stop suggestion screen and the game standby screen after a period of time during which it can be assumed that no games are being played has elapsed, and by reducing the volume of the BGM in conjunction with each display, The power consumption of the gaming machine can be reduced more effectively. In addition, by lowering the volume of BGM in conjunction with the display of the rotation stop suggestion screen, it is possible to draw the attention of players or hall staff, thereby reducing the possibility that the reel rotation stop operation will be performed. can be made higher.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 121(a), 122(a), and 123(a), if the stop switch is operated after the rotation stop suggestion image is displayed, the rotation stop suggestion image is stopped and the rotation stop suggestion image is restarted. When the timer starts counting and a predetermined period of time elapses without the next stop operation being performed, the rotation stop suggestion image is displayed again, but after the rotation stop suggestion image is finished displaying, the rotation stop suggestion image is displayed again. may not be displayed. Separately from this, when the rotation stop suggestion image is displayed, even if a stop operation is performed thereafter, the rotation stop suggestion image may continue to be displayed until the game ends.

<Management and display of error history information>
Next, an overview of the management and display of history information of errors and the like in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

(Control command transmitted from control command transmitting means)
The control command sending means 151 (see Figure 9) in this embodiment is configured to send to the sub-control means 200, in addition to the control commands described in the first embodiment, a control command including information indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in effect (hereinafter referred to as the "setting confirmation state command" as appropriate), a control command including information indicating that the setting change mode is in effect (hereinafter referred to as the "setting change state command" as appropriate), a control command including information indicating that the door is in an open state (front door 2 is open) (hereinafter referred to as the "door open state command" as appropriate), and a control command including information indicating that the door is in a closed state (front door 2 is closed) (hereinafter referred to as the "door closed state command" as appropriate).

Further, when the occurrence of an error is detected in the main control means 100, a control command including information indicating the type of error that has occurred (hereinafter referred to as an "error occurrence control command") is sent to the sub control means 200. , when the detected error is resolved, it is configured to transmit a control command (hereinafter referred to as an "error resolution control command" as appropriate) including information indicating that the error has been resolved.

(About displaying history information such as errors)
The sub-control means 200 of this embodiment includes an RTC (real-time clock) circuit, and each time it receives the above-mentioned door open state command, door closed state command, and error occurrence control command from the main control means 100, The time at which the command was received is obtained from the RTC circuit, and the time information (reception time information) and information representing the event indicated by the received command (occurrence event information) are combined and stored in the RAM 73 (Fig. 2) as error history information. reference) and store them sequentially.

The error history information stored in the RAM 73 can be viewed by selecting the "error history display mode" included in the system menu screen displayed on the image display device 11. The system menu screen is displayed on the image display device 11 by a predetermined operation performed by the slot machine manager or the like when checking the error history information described above, adjusting various parameters related to the performance, adjusting the current time, etc., and cannot be displayed to general players. As a procedure for displaying the system menu screen, for example, it is possible to configure the system menu screen to be displayed on the image display device 11 when a predetermined operation is performed after switching to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode described in the first embodiment. Note that the mode in which the system menu screen can be displayed may be limited to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Also, examples of the "predetermined operation" for displaying the system menu screen include the operation of the decision button 55 shown in FIG. 1, or the operation of each switch (start lever 25, stop switches 26a, 26b, 26c, 1-BET switch 22, MAX-BET switch 23, settlement switch 24, reset switch 82, etc.) that outputs an on/off signal to the main control board 60 shown in FIG. 2. Furthermore, when the system moves to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode (when the display of the system menu screen is limited to one of the modes, that one mode), the system menu screen may be displayed even if the "predetermined operation" is not performed.

Here, an example of the system menu screen displayed on the image display device 11 is shown in FIG. 124(a). The system menu screen shown in this figure is displayed when a predetermined operation is performed after transitioning to the setting confirmation mode, and at the top left of the screen of the image display device 11, the character string "System Menu" and its The string "Verifying settings" is displayed at the bottom. Additionally, in the center of the system menu screen, four items are displayed in order from the top of the screen: "Volume adjustment mode," "Side lamp test mode," "Error history display mode," and "Time setting mode." .

Of the four items mentioned above, the "volume adjustment mode" is a mode that allows the volume of the performance sound generated during the performance to be adjusted. The "side lamp test mode" is a mode that allows the blinking patterns of the first performance lamp 12, the second performance lamp 13a, 13b, the third performance lamp 14a, 14b, and the decorative lamps 32a, 32b shown in FIG. 1 to be tested. The "error etc. history display mode" is a mode that allows the error etc. history information stored in the RAM 73 mentioned above to be displayed on the image display device 11. The "time setting mode" is a mode that allows the time to be adjusted in the RTC circuit provided in the sub-control means 200.

The above four selection items can be selected by operating the upper button 54U and lower button 54D of the selection button 54 shown in FIG. 1, and the enter button 55. Specifically, in the initial state of the system menu screen, the topmost item, "Volume Adjustment Mode", is selected. That is, in the display of the "volume adjustment mode", the background is displayed in a dark color (for example, black) and the character string is represented by white characters, thereby indicating that the "volume adjustment mode" is selected. On the other hand, unselected items are displayed with a white background and dark text.

In this state, when the lower button 54D is operated, the next item below is selected each time it is operated, and when the lower button 54D is operated while the "time setting mode" is selected, The "Volume Adjustment Mode" displayed at the top is now selected. Additionally, if the upper button 54U is operated while the "volume adjustment mode" is selected, the "time setting mode" will be selected, and from now on, each time the upper button 54U is operated, the item will move up one item. are selected. Then, when the enter button 55 is operated with the desired item selected, the display on the image display device 11 is switched to the screen of the selected mode.

For example, if the enter button 55 is operated with "time setting mode" selected on the system menu screen, the display on the image display device 11 is switched to the time setting screen shown in FIG. 124(b). Almost in the center of this time setting screen, the current time in the RTC circuit at the time the "time setting mode" is selected is displayed in "year", "month", "day", "hour", and "minute". Among these, adjustable items are sandwiched between markers mk displayed as "▲" and "▼", and in the initial state of the time setting screen, "year" is displayed as shown in Figure 124(b). It is adjustable. In this state, when the upper button 54U is operated, the numerical value indicating the Western calendar increases by one, and when the downward button 54D is operated, the numerical value indicating the Western calendar decreases by one.

Also, for example, when the right button 54R is operated while the "year" is adjustable, the display position of the marker mk shifts one item to the right with each operation ("year" → "month" → "day" → "hour" → "minute"). Also, for example, when the left button 54L is operated while the "minute" is adjustable, the display position of the marker mk shifts one item to the left with each operation ("minute" → "hour" → "day" → "month" → "year"). Then, when the up button 54U and the down button 54D are operated at the position where the marker mk is displayed, the value of the corresponding item can be changed. However, at this stage, the changed time has not been set in the RTC circuit, and when the decision button 55 is operated while the time setting screen is displayed, the changed time is reflected in the RTC circuit and the changed time is confirmed as the current time. Also, when the changed time is confirmed, the display of the image display device 11 switches back to the system menu screen. Although the RTC circuit keeps track of the current time down to the second, the time setting screen does not allow you to reset the seconds value or set it to a desired value.

Next, when the decision button 55 is operated while the "error history display mode" is selected on the system menu screen, the display on the image display device 11 switches to the error history display screen shown in FIG. 124(c). On this error history display screen ([Error History Display] (1/2)), the history of errors (hereinafter also referred to as "events") is displayed in a table format consisting of a "No." column, a "content" column, and an "occurrence time" column. Specifically, the event shown in the "content" column and the occurrence time of the event shown in the "occurrence time" column are displayed corresponding to each of the numbers "1" to "5" displayed in the "No." column. In addition, the error history display screen is composed of two screens, and when the right switch 54R or the left switch 54L is operated on the error history display screen shown in FIG. 124(c), the display switches to the second error history display screen ([Error History Display] (2/2)) shown in FIG. 124(d). When the right switch 54R or left switch 54L is operated while the error history display screen shown in FIG. 124(d) is displayed, the screen will switch back to the error history display screen shown in FIG. 124(c).

The error history display screen shown in FIG. 124(d) shows the same content as the error history display screen shown in FIG. 124(c), but the number displayed in the "No." column is " 6” to “10”. Here, the numbers displayed in the "No." column indicate the order of occurrence of the stored events, and the smaller the value, the more recently the event occurred. Therefore, in the error history display screen shown in FIGS. 124(c) and (d), the event displayed in the row where "1" is displayed in the "No." column (hereinafter, "No. 1 event") ”. The same applies to other “No.” columns) is the most recent event, and No. The event number 10 is the event that occurred first. Also, when a new event is stored, the event will be numbered on the error history display screen. No. 1 of each event that was displayed on the error history display screen until then. are displayed one by one. Also, No. 1~No. If a new event is stored while 10 events are displayed, No. 10 events are deleted and No. 1~No. The event number 9 moves down one line at a time and becomes No. 2~No. Shifts to event No. 10, and the newly stored event is No. It is displayed as one event.

Note that if the enter button 55 is operated while the error history display screen shown in FIG. 124(c) or FIG. 124(d) is displayed, the display on the image display device 11 changes to the one shown in FIG. 124(a). The screen switches to the system menu screen shown.

Next, while displaying the error history display screen mentioned above, if an event that should be displayed on the error history display screen occurs, how the contents of the error history display screen that is being displayed changes. How to do this will be explained with reference to FIG. 125. In this figure, main events that occur in the slot machine are indicated by dots on the time axis. Here, the dots "▼" indicate events that should be displayed on the error history display screen, and the dots "●" indicate other events. Moreover, each dot on the time axis merely indicates the events that have occurred in chronological order, and the interval between each dot does not correspond to the elapsed time between each event.

In FIG. 125, for example, when the front door 2 of the slot machine is opened by the manager of the gaming hall at 23:07 and the enter button 55 is operated after the operator performs an operation to shift to the setting confirmation mode. , the system menu screen shown in FIG. 124(a) is displayed on the image display device 11. After the administrator closes the front door 2 at 23:09, when the administrator selects the error history display mode on the system menu screen and operates the enter button 55, the image display device 11 changes the display to the error history display screen. Switch to . At this time, the error history display screen shows No. 1 as shown in FIG. 125(a). The most recent "door closing" that occurred at 23:09 is displayed for event No. 1, and the event No. 1 before that is displayed. Event 2 shows "door opening" that took place at 23:07.

If the front door 2 is opened again at 23:15, for example, in a situation where the error history display screen is displayed on the image display device 11, as shown in FIG. 125(b), the image display device 11 No. of the error history display screen that was displayed on the screen. "Door opening" that occurred at 23:15 is displayed as event 1. Also, if the CP error (incorrect passage of inserted medals) as described in the first embodiment occurs at 23:16, the error history display screen currently displayed will display " "Invalid medal passing error" is displayed. Furthermore, if the front door 2 is closed again at 23:17, this event is also displayed on the error history display screen currently being displayed as "door closed" as shown in FIG. 125(d).

In this way, in the example shown in FIG. 125, an event that occurs while the error history display screen is displayed is reflected in the error history display screen that is currently being displayed, so that an event that should be recorded in the history occurs. In this case, it can be confirmed whether the event is detected in a timely manner and recorded in the history. Note that in the "Contents" column of the error history display screen, a character string specifically indicating the content of the error that has occurred may be displayed, or an error code may be displayed. For example, when the HP error described in the first embodiment occurs, the "Contents" column of the error history display screen may display "Paid-out medal retention error" or "HP error". good. In the example shown in FIG. 125, the front door 2 is opened at 23:07, the system menu screen is displayed after transitioning to the setting confirmation mode, and then the error history display screen is displayed after the front door 2 is closed. However, the error history display screen can be displayed while the front door 2 is left open without being closed. At this time, the No. displayed on the error history display screen. Event 1 is "door open" at 23:07, and if the front door 2 is closed while the error history display screen is displayed, the "door closed" history will be displayed as No. 1 along with the time at that time. It is displayed as one event.

In the example shown in FIG. 125, when an event that should be displayed on the error history display screen occurs while the error history display screen is displayed, the event is reflected on the currently displayed error history display screen in almost real time. However, an example in which the event is reflected on the error history display screen at a different timing will be described with reference to FIG. 126. Note that the meanings of the dots on the time axis in FIG. 126 are the same as those in FIG. 125.

In FIG. 126, for example, when the front door 2 of the slot machine is opened by the game hall manager at 23:07 and the enter button 55 is operated after the operator performs an operation to shift to the setting confirmation mode. , the system menu screen shown in FIG. 124(a) is displayed on the image display device 11. Then, when the error history display mode is selected on the system menu screen with the front door 2 open and the enter button 55 is operated, the display on the image display device 11 is switched to the error history display screen. At this time, the error history display screen shows No. 1 as shown in FIG. 126(a). ``Door opening'' that took place at 23:07 is displayed as event 1.

Here, in a situation where the error history display screen is displayed on the image display device 11, for example, the front door 2 is closed at 23:07, opened again at 23:15, and the above-mentioned message is displayed at 23:16. Even if a C0 error occurs and the front door 2 is closed again at 23:17, unlike the example shown in FIG. 125, these events are not reflected on the error history display screen being displayed. At this time, when the right switch 54R or the left switch 54L is operated, a screen of "[Display error history] (2/2)" is displayed on the image display device 11 as shown in FIG. 126(b). Even if the right switch 54R or left switch 54L is operated again after that and the screen returns to the "[Display error history] (1/2)" screen as shown in FIG. 126(c), The same screen as shown in Figure 126(a) is displayed, and the front door 2 is closed at 23:07, the front door 2 is opened at 23:15, and the occurrence occurs at 23:16. The history regarding the C0 error that occurred and the closing of the front door 2 that occurred at 23:17 is not reflected on the error history display screen.

On the other hand, when the enter button 55 is operated while the error history display screen is displayed, the display of the error history display screen is temporarily ended and the system menu screen is displayed, as shown in FIG. 126(d). After that, when the error history display screen is displayed again because the error history display mode is selected, as shown in FIG. 126(e), No. "Door closing" that occurred at 23:09 is displayed as event No. 4, and No. The "door opening" that occurred at 23:15 is displayed as event No. 3, and the event No. The "incorrect medal passage error" that occurred at 23:16 is displayed as the event No. 2. The "door closing" that occurred at 23:17 is reflected as event 1.

In this way, in the example shown in FIG. 126, events that occur while the error history display screen is being displayed are not reflected on the error history display screen that is currently being displayed. To make it difficult for a person who commits a fraudulent act during display (also referred to as a "cheating person") to keep the type of error caused by the fraudulent act from being known to the management of the gaming hall. Can be done. For example, when an event that occurs while displaying the error history display screen is to be reflected on the error history display screen that is currently being displayed, if a fraudster generates a C0 error (incorrect medal passing error). Assuming that you do not want them to know about this, you may repeatedly open and close the front door 2 while visually checking the error history display screen, and press the button ``Door Open'' until the history of ``Illegal Medal Passing Error'' is removed from the error history display screen. ” and “door closed” history. For example, if a fraudster opens and closes the front door 2 five times in a row while the error history display screen is displayed, the history of "door open" and "door closed" will be displayed alternately on the error history display screen. 5 records are displayed one by one (total of 10 records), and eventually the history on the error history display screen is filled with "door open" and "door closed", and it is not known to the management of the amusement park etc. Although it can be easily confirmed that no unwanted history remains, the example shown in FIG. 126 can make such an action difficult.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 126, if multiple events to be recorded in the history (door opening, door closing, medal unauthorized passing error, etc.) occur repeatedly while the error history display screen is displayed, those events will be , when the error history display screen is displayed again after the display of the error history display screen is finished, the error history display screen is displayed without omission, so there is no risk that the history of errors caused by fraudulent acts will be omitted. In the example shown in FIG. 126, after opening the front door 2 at 23:07 and transitioning to the setting confirmation mode, the system menu screen was displayed and the error history display screen was displayed. After displaying the screen, it is also possible to close the front door 2 and then display the error history display screen. In this case, the displayed error history display screen shows No. The history displayed as event No. 1 is "Door Closed" at the time when the front door 2 was most recently closed, and No. The history displayed as event 2 is "door opened" at 23:07.

Next, when the time of the RTC circuit included in the sub-control means 200 is changed using the time setting screen shown in FIG. 124(b), how does this affect the history displayed on the error history display screen? will be explained with reference to FIG. 127. Note that the meanings of dots arranged on the time axis in FIG. 127 are the same as in FIG. 125.

In FIG. 127, for example, when the front door 2 of the slot machine is opened by the manager of the gaming hall at 23:07 and the enter button 55 is operated after the operator performs an operation to shift to the setting confirmation mode. , the system menu screen shown in FIG. 124(a) is displayed on the image display device 11. Then, when the error history display mode is selected on the system menu screen with the front door 2 open and the enter button 55 is operated, the display on the image display device 11 is switched to the error history display screen. At this time, the error history display screen shows No. 1 as shown in FIG. 127(a). ``Door opening'' that took place at 23:07 is displayed as event 1.

Then, when the front door 2 is closed at 23:09 and the enter button 55 is operated while the error history display screen is displayed, the sub-control means 200 controls the system shown in FIG. 124(a). When the menu screen is displayed on the image display device 11 and the administrator selects the time setting mode on the system menu screen and operates the enter button 55, the sub-control means 200 displays the time setting screen shown in FIG. 127(b). is displayed on the image display device 11. Here, if the time when the administrator selected the time setting mode and operated the enter button 55 was 23:12 on December 14, 2020, that time is displayed on the time setting screen. At this time, the RTC circuit included in the sub-control means 200 continues to measure the time, but the time displayed on the time setting screen remains unchanged at 23:12 on December 14, 2020.

However, when the display of the time setting screen is once ended and the screen is moved to the system menu screen, and the time setting screen is displayed again, the time at that point is displayed on the time setting screen. For example, if you move from the time setting screen shown in Figure 127(b) to the system menu screen and then display the time setting screen again at 23:14, the time setting screen shown in Figure 127(c-1) will change. The time of December 14, 2020, 23:14 will be displayed on the settings screen. Then, while the time setting screen is being displayed on the image display device 11, a C0 error occurs at 23:15, and the administrator then changes the time displayed on the time setting screen as shown in Figure 127 (c-2). Assume that the change was made at 0:43 on December 15, 2020, as shown in . At this stage, the time changed on the time setting screen (00:43, December 15, 2020) has not been confirmed (the current time in the RTC circuit is "0:43, December 15, 2020"). (not updated).

When the enter button 55 is operated in this state, the current time is determined to the changed time, and the sub-control means 200 displays the system menu screen on the image display device 11. When the error history display mode is selected on the system menu screen and the enter button 55 is operated, the sub-control means 200 displays the error history display screen shown in FIG. 127(d) on the image display device 11. On the error history display screen shown in FIG. 127(d), the most recently occurring No. As event 1, it is shown that a medal unauthorized passage error (C0 error) occurred at 23:15 in accordance with the time before the time change. Also, No. The second event indicates that "door closing" occurred at 23:09 in accordance with the time before the time change. That is, even if the time displayed on the time setting screen is changed between the time the time setting screen is displayed at 23:14 and the time after the change is confirmed at 23:16, the sub control means 200 This does not affect the time measured by the RTC circuit. Furthermore, simply changing the time displayed on the time setting screen does not change the time being measured (unless the OK button 55 is operated), so the time of occurrence of an event that occurs while the time setting screen is displayed is , the time will be in accordance with the passage of time before the time is changed.

In this way, in the example shown in FIG. 127, if the time is changed after a C0 error occurs, the time of occurrence of the C0 error on the error history display screen is the time according to the elapsed time before the change. Is displayed. For example, if the time is changed after a predetermined error occurs, and the time after the change affects the time when the predetermined error occurred (for example, if the current time is set back 10 minutes, There is a risk that the order of occurrence of each error displayed on the error history display screen may be changed (e.g., the time of occurrence of a previously occurring error may be moved back 10 minutes), but in the example shown in Figure 127, the order in which each error occurred may be changed. You can avoid the risk.

In the example shown in FIG. 127, the time in the middle of being changed is not reflected in the time kept by the RTC circuit on the time setting screen (the time of occurrence of an event that occurs while the time setting screen is displayed is not left in the history as a time in the middle of being changed), so it is difficult to tamper with the time of an event that occurs due to fraudulent behavior while the time setting screen is displayed. In addition, in the time setting screens shown in FIG. 127(b), (c-1), and (c-2), the current time cannot be adjusted in units of seconds, and the time keeping in units of seconds continues to be cyclically performed from 0 to 59 seconds while the time setting screen is displayed. Therefore, even if the current time is adjusted to a specific hour and minute, depending on the timing of the adjustment, it may happen that the minute unit increases by "1" immediately afterwards. Therefore, if there is fraudulent behavior that can be achieved by leaving a history of a specific event at a specific hour and minute, it can be made difficult to achieve.

Next, the display contents of the error history display screen when the current time is retroactively changed using the time setting screen shown in FIG. 124(b) will be described with reference to FIG. 128. Note that the meanings of dots arranged on the time axis in FIG. 128 are the same as in FIG. 125.

In FIG. 128, for example, when the front door 2 of the slot machine is opened by the manager of the gaming hall at 23:07 and the enter button 55 is operated after the operator performs an operation to shift to the setting confirmation mode. , the system menu screen shown in FIG. 124(a) is displayed on the image display device 11. After the administrator closes the front door 2 at 23:09, when the administrator selects the error history display mode on the system menu screen and operates the enter button 55, the image display device 11 changes the display to the error history display screen. Switch to . At this time, the error history display screen shows No. 1 as shown in FIG. 128(a). The most recent "door closing" at 23:09 is displayed as event No. 1, and the event No. 1 before that is displayed. As event 2, "door opening" that took place at 23:07 is displayed.

When the enter button 55 is operated while the error history display screen is displayed, the sub-control means 200 displays the system menu screen shown in FIG. 124(a) on the image display device 11, and the system When the administrator selects the time setting mode on the menu screen and operates the enter button 55, the sub-control means 200 displays the time setting screen shown in FIG. 124(b) on the image display device 11. Here, if the time when the administrator selected the time setting mode and operated the enter button 55 was 23:13 on December 14, 2020, the The time will be displayed on the time setting screen.

Then, with the time setting screen displayed on the image display device 11, open the front door 2 at 23:16, and in that state, set the current time on the time setting screen to 23:09 on December 14, 2020. Assume that the changed time is changed (the changed time is not finalized at this stage), and the decision button 55 is operated at 23:19 to confirm the changed time. Then, when the administrator closes the front door 2 at 23:12 on December 14, 2020 at the changed current time and operates the enter button 55, the sub-control means 200 displays the system menu screen on the image display device. indicate. As a result, when the error history display mode is selected on the system menu screen and the enter button 55 is operated, the sub-control means 200 displays the error history display screen shown in FIG. 128(c) on the image display device 11. do. On the error history display screen shown in FIG. 128(c), the most recently occurring No. Event 1 indicates that "door closing" occurred at 23:12 in accordance with the time after the time change. Also, the previous No. As event 2, it is shown that the "door opening" was performed at 23:16 in accordance with the time before the time change.

In this way, in the example shown in FIG. 128, the current time obtained from the RTC circuit is used as is for the occurrence time of the event to be recorded in the history, but the order in which the event occurred is determined by the order in which it actually occurred regardless of the current time. maintain. For this reason, for example, in order to make it difficult for a person who commits fraud to be detected or to make it difficult to understand the procedure of fraud, a person who commits fraud may change the current time appropriately and falsify the time of occurrence of each event. This can prevent the order of occurrence of events from being moved back and forth. Note that on the time setting screens shown in FIGS. 127 and 128, the displayed time was not updated as time passed, but even if the time displayed on the time setting screen was updated in real time. good.

Next, a case will be described with reference to FIG. 129 regarding the case where events to be recorded in the history are different in the setting confirmation mode and in the non-setting confirmation mode (game possible state). For example, after all the reels have stopped during the non-setting confirmation mode, the HP error (payout medal retention error) explained in the first embodiment is announced at 16:13, and the clerk at the hall who received the call is notified at 16:13. If the front door 2 is opened at 1:15 p.m. to resolve the paid-out medal retention error, and then the front door 2 is closed again at 16:17, these events will be recorded in the history. In addition, even if the CE error (inserted medal retention error) described in the first embodiment is notified during the game, the time when the input medal retention error is notified and the time when the input medal retention error is resolved When the front door 2 is opened or closed, "door open" and "door closed" are recorded in the history.

On the other hand, for example, at 23:07, the front door 2 of the slot machine is opened by the administrator of the gaming hall and an operation is performed to shift to the setting confirmation mode. It is assumed that the above-mentioned input medal retention error occurs at 10:00 p.m., and then a paid-out medal retention error occurs at 23:15. Here, in this embodiment, since these errors are not detected during the setting confirmation mode, the occurrence of these errors is not reported. For example, the administrator notices these errors visually, removes the medals accumulated in the selector or hopper, closes the front door 2 at 23:18, and displays the error history display screen from the system menu screen. Suppose you let it happen. In this case, the sub-control means 200 displays on the error history display screen the "door closing" that occurred at 23:18, but the inserted medal retention error that occurred at 23:10 and the error that occurred at 23:15. The issued medal retention error that has occurred is not displayed.

With this configuration, for example, it is extremely difficult to shift to the setting confirmation mode or setting change mode due to fraudulent activity, and it is extremely difficult to perform fraudulent activity on the selector or hopper compared to opening/closing the front door 2. In this case, even if a paid medal retention error or an inserted medal retention error occurs in the settings confirmation mode or settings change mode, it is extremely unlikely that these errors occur due to fraudulent activity. Therefore, by excluding events that have an extremely low possibility of fraudulent activity from the events to be displayed on the error history display screen, for example, the number of events that can be displayed on the error history display screen is reduced. In addition, when a new event occurs and the event that occurs first is erased, it is possible to make it possible for events that are more likely to be fraudulent activity to remain on the error history display screen for as long as possible.

Note that on the error history display screen, the time displayed for each error may be the time at which the error was detected instead of the time at which the error was reported. . For example, when an error is detected in a slot machine, the error will not be notified until after the error has been cleared, and if the error is detected while the reels are rotating, all reels will stop. If the configuration is such that the error cannot be canceled unless the error is detected, the time at which the error was detected may be recorded in the history instead of the notification time of the error.

Next, when a predetermined error occurs during the rotation of the reels, the relationship between the time at which the occurrence of the predetermined error is notified and the time at which the predetermined error occurs to be recorded in the history will be explained with reference to FIG. 130. explain. Note that in FIG. 130, the meanings of dots arranged on the time axis are the same as in FIG. 125.

In FIG. 130, after all the reels start rotating at the same time due to the start lever being operated by the player, a predetermined error displayed on the error history display screen is displayed, for example at 14:38. Suppose that it occurs in minutes. Here, if the predetermined error occurs, the occurrence of the error is not immediately notified, and after all the reels have stopped (at 14:39 in FIG. 130), the system as shown in FIG. 130(a) be notified. Here, the above-mentioned predetermined error is written as "XX error" on the notification screen shown in FIG. 130(a). Then, after the business hours of the game hall have ended, for example at 23:07, the game hall manager opens the front door 2, performs an operation to shift to the setting confirmation mode, and then performs a predetermined operation, the sub control means 200 displays the system menu screen shown in FIG. 124(a) on the image display device 11.

As a result, when the administrator selects the error history display mode on the displayed system menu screen and operates the decision button 55, the sub-control means 200 displays the error history display screen shown in FIG. 130(b) on the image display device 11. Here, on the displayed error history display screen, the time of occurrence of a specific error (indicated as "Ox error" in FIG. 130(b)) is 14:39, when the error was notified, but rather, 14:38, when the error occurred.

In this way, by displaying the time the error was reported instead of the time the error occurred on the error history display screen, it is less likely that a time difference will occur between the time the specific error displayed on the error history display screen occurred and the time the administrator became aware of the specific error. This makes it easier for the administrator to identify the circumstances under which the error occurred and the cause of the specific error displayed on the error history display screen based on their memory, thereby reducing the risk of taking incorrect measures to prevent the specific error from occurring, for example.

Next, when a predetermined error occurs while the reels are rotating and the setting change mode is entered while the reels are rotating, how the history of the predetermined error is handled will be explained with reference to FIG. 131. explain. Note that the meanings of dots arranged on the time axis in FIG. 131 are the same as in FIG. 125.

In FIG. 131, after all the reels start rotating at the same time due to the start lever being operated by the player, a predetermined error (for example, the E-type error described in the first embodiment) occurs while the reels are rotating. Assume that the occurrence occurred at 14:38. As a result, for example, the manager of a gaming hall opens the front door 2 and turns off the power to the slot machine at 2:39 p.m., before being notified that the predetermined error has occurred, and then performs the predetermined operation. After doing so, turn on the power to shift to setting change mode and perform setting change work, and the E-system error will be cleared by the setting change work. When the sub-control means 200 displays the error history display screen on the image display device 11 after the setting change operation, the setting change operation is performed after a predetermined error occurs, as shown in FIG. 131(a). The history of predetermined errors and openings of the front door 2 that occurred until the time when the front door 2 was opened is not displayed.

In this way, if an error corresponding to the E-type error occurs while the reels are rotating, and the administrator changes the settings before this error is notified, the error will be cleared by changing the settings. Therefore, the administrator is not aware of the specific type of error that occurred. In such a situation, for example, if you display the error history display screen after changing the settings, and the history of errors that have occurred is displayed, errors that the administrator who viewed the history may not be aware of may be included. This may cause confusion. Therefore, by not displaying the history of errors that the administrator is not aware of on the error history display screen, it is possible to eliminate the possibility that the administrator will be confused.

Next, when multiple errors occur during the setting confirmation mode, the relationship between the timing at which each error is notified and the order in which errors occur on the error history display screen will be explained with reference to Figure 132. explain.

First, after the administrator opened the front door 2 at 21:12 and transitioned to the setting confirmation mode, an incorrect medal passing error occurred at 21:14, and a paid medal retention error occurred at 21:16. Suppose we did. Here, in the example shown in FIG. 132, the medal unauthorized passage error is notified when the reset switch 82 is operated in a state where the game is possible (that is, the state not in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode), and the paid medal retention error is notified. It is assumed that a notification is given when the setting confirmation mode is ended. As a result, when the administrator first exits the settings confirmation mode, a payout medal retention error will be notified, and after the administrator recognizes this notification and removes the cause of the payout medal retention error, it will be reset to clear the payout medal retention error. When the switch 82 is operated, a medal unauthorized passage error is notified. Then, after the administrator removed the cause of the medal unauthorized passage error, he operated the reset switch 82 to cancel the medal unauthorized passage error, and after all errors were cleared, the front door 2 The player closes the door and allows the player to continue playing the game.

Then, after the business hours of the game hall have ended, for example at 23:37, the game hall manager opens the front door 2, performs an operation to shift to the setting confirmation mode, and performs a predetermined operation in the setting confirmation mode. , the sub-control means 200 displays the system menu screen shown in FIG. 124(a) on the image display device 11. As a result, when the administrator selects the error history display mode on the displayed system menu screen and operates the enter button 55, the sub-control means 200 displays the error history shown in FIG. 132(a) on the image display device 11. Display the display screen. At this time, the sub-control means 200 displays, on the error history display screen, the history of the aforementioned medal unauthorized passage errors and paid-out medal retention errors, not in the order of occurrence but in the order in which error notifications were made.

In this way, when multiple errors occur during the setting confirmation mode, the errors are displayed on the error history display screen in the order in which they were reported, making it easier to match the multiple errors displayed on the error history display screen with the multiple errors that the administrator is aware of. This makes it easier for the administrator to identify the circumstances under which the errors occurred and the causes of the multiple errors displayed on the error history display screen based on their memory, thereby reducing the risk of taking incorrect measures to prevent the occurrence of the multiple errors, for example.

Next, please refer to FIG. 133 to see how each error is displayed on the error history display screen when multiple errors occur in the game-enabled state and in the setting confirmation mode. I will explain.

First, as shown in FIG. 133(a), if an illegal medal passage error occurs at 20:48 while a game is being played on a slot machine, a notification is issued that an illegal medal passage error has occurred. Upon receiving this notification, an attendant at the game center opens the door at 20:51, eliminates the cause of the error, and operates the reset switch 82, which clears the illegal medal passage error. The game becomes available again when the door is closed at 20:52. If a medal retention error occurs at 21:02, a notification is issued that a medal retention error has occurred. Upon receiving this notification, an attendant at the game center opens the door at 21:04, eliminates the cause of the error, and operates the reset switch 82, which clears the medal retention error. The game becomes available again when the door is closed at 21:10.

Then, after the business hours of the game hall have ended, for example at 23:37, the game hall manager opens the front door 2, performs an operation to shift to the setting confirmation mode, and performs a predetermined operation in the setting confirmation mode. , the sub-control means 200 displays the system menu screen shown in FIG. 124(a) on the image display device 11. As a result, when the administrator selects the error history display mode on the displayed system menu screen and operates the enter button 55, the sub-control means 200 displays the image display device 11 in FIGS. 133(a-1) and (a). Display the error history display screen shown in -2). At this time, the sub-control means 200 displays the history of the aforementioned medal unauthorized passage error and paid-out medal retention error in the order of occurrence on the displayed error history display screen.

In a situation different from the example in FIG. 133(a), for example, as shown in FIG. 133(b), the administrator first opens the front door 2 at 21:12 and shifts to the setting confirmation mode, then at 21:00. Assume that an incorrect medal passage error occurs at 14:00, and a paid-out medal retention error occurs at 21:16. Here, it is assumed that the payout medal retention error is notified when the setting confirmation mode is ended. Further, it is assumed that the medal unauthorized passage error is notified when the reset switch 82 is operated after the setting confirmation mode is ended.

As a result, when the administrator first exits the settings confirmation mode, a payout medal retention error will be notified, and after the administrator recognizes this notification and removes the cause of the payout medal retention error, it will be reset to clear the payout medal retention error. When the switch 82 is operated, a medal unauthorized passage error is notified. Then, after the administrator removed the cause of the medal unauthorized passage error, he operated the reset switch 82 to cancel the medal unauthorized passage error, and after all errors were cleared, the front door 2 The player closes the door and allows the player to continue playing the game.

Then, after the business hours of the game hall have ended, for example at 23:37, the game hall manager opens the front door 2, performs an operation to shift to the setting confirmation mode, and then performs a predetermined operation, the sub control means 200 displays the system menu screen shown in FIG. 124(a) on the image display device 11. As a result, when the administrator selects the error history display mode on the displayed system menu screen and operates the enter button 55, the sub-control means 200 displays the error shown in FIG. 133(b-1) on the image display device 11. etc. Display the history display screen. At this time, the sub-control means 200 displays the aforementioned medal unauthorized passage errors and paid-out medal retention errors on the error history display screen, not in the order in which they occurred, but in the order in which the error notifications were made.

In this way, if multiple errors occur while playing or in the settings confirmation mode, these errors can be displayed on the error history display screen by displaying them in the order in which they were reported. This makes it easier to match the multiple errors detected by the administrator with the multiple errors known to the administrator. This makes it easier to identify the circumstances and causes of multiple errors displayed on the error history display screen based on the administrator's memory. , it is possible to reduce the risk of taking the wrong measures.

Note that in the examples shown in FIGS. 125 to 133, in order to display the error history display screen, it is necessary to shift to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode; , it is necessary to open the front door 2. Based on this premise, the opening/closing of doors and their occurrence times are displayed on the error history display screen. For this reason, for example, if the time from opening to closing the door is extremely long, or if the door opening history is arranged in the order of the time of occurrence, the closing of the door is recorded again after the closing of the door. If the door is recorded as being opened again after the door has been opened, it is extremely likely that the current time has been changed. Therefore, when the current time is changed, it is possible to check whether or not the current time has been changed based on the opening/closing of the door displayed on the error history display screen and the times at which these events occurred, even if the fact is not recorded in the history. can be judged.

Further, the events to be displayed on the error history display screen are not limited to those shown in FIGS. 125 to 133, and events indicated by control commands transmitted from the main control means 100 can be determined as appropriate. For example, the control commands sent from the main control means 100 include commands indicating transition to setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, and commands indicating the on/off state of the setting key type switch 83 and reset switch 82. If so, the events indicated by those commands may be displayed on the error history display screen along with the time of occurrence of the event. Furthermore, on the error history display screens shown in FIGS. 124(c) and (d), the time at which each event was detected or notified was displayed, but instead of displaying the time, The elapsed time may be displayed. Even in such a case, the display contents of the error history display screen can be changed to the "No." column and the "content" column in the same way as the error history display screen shown in FIGS. 124(c) and (d). and an "occurrence time" column (however, what is displayed is the elapsed time since the power was turned on).

In the above example, the opening and closing history of the front door 2 and the history related to errors are displayed on the error history display screen, but the opening and closing history of the front door 2 and the history related to errors may be displayed separately. For example, a door opening and closing history display screen may be added in addition to the error history display screen, and the opening and closing history of the front door 2 may be displayed on the door opening and closing history display screen, and the history related to errors may be displayed on the error history display screen. The history display screen to be displayed on the image display device 11 may be selected, for example, by adding an item called "door opening and closing history display mode" to the system menu screen, and when "door opening and closing history display mode" is selected, the door opening and closing history display screen is displayed on the image display device 11, and when "error history display mode" is selected, the error history display screen is displayed.

In addition, the opening/closing history of the front door 2 displayed on the error history display screen (or the above-mentioned door opening/closing history display screen when displaying the opening/closing history of the front door 2 independently) is set to "door open" (front door 2 It is also possible to record only "opening of the front door 2" in the history, and not record "door closing" (closing of the front door 2) in the history.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a slot machine (recurrence type gaming machine) that uses game medals as gaming value has been described as an example of a gaming machine to which the present invention is applied, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a drum-type game machine that uses game balls as a game value, a drum-type game machine that uses information recorded on an electronic recording medium as a game value, a mahjong ball game machine, and an arranged ball. The same effect can be obtained by applying the present invention to pachinko machines, pachinko machines, etc. Further, the present invention can be similarly applied to slot machines having four or more reels, and similar effects can be obtained.

[Fifth embodiment]
The gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment will be described below with additional reference to FIGS. 134 to 154. Below, the characteristic parts of the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment will be mainly explained. The characteristic parts described below are not limited to the fifth embodiment and can be combined with other embodiments. Note that FIGS. 134 and 135 show a slot machine SM as an example of the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment, and FIGS. 136 and 137 show another example of the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. , Pachinko gaming machine PM is shown. Before explaining the characteristic parts of the fifth embodiment, the general configurations of the slot machine SM and the pachinko gaming machine PM will be explained.

≪Schematic configuration of slot machine SM≫
The slot machine SM has a basic configuration common to or similar to the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, and the drawings referred to in the first embodiment are also referred to in this embodiment for those configurations. , detailed explanation will be omitted. Further, each control process such as the winning combination determination process and the reel control process described for the slot machine 1 can be applied to the slot machine SM in the same way or with some changes in the process contents. Note that in FIGS. 134 and 135, components similar to those of the slot machine 1 are labeled with the same symbols (numbers, alphanumeric characters, etc.) as used in the drawings referred to in the first embodiment.

As shown in Figures 134 and 135, the slot machine SM comprises a box-shaped housing 5 (main body member) with an open front (forward) and a front door 2 attached to the front opening of the housing 5 so as to be able to open and close. When viewed from the front, the front door 2 is attached to the front opening of the housing 5 so as to be able to open and close sideways using hinge mechanisms 6a to 6c arranged at the front of the left side plate 5a of the housing 5. Attached to the front of the front door 2, in order from the top, are an upper panel assembly 10, a middle panel assembly 20, a lower panel assembly 30 and a tray assembly 40.

The middle panel assembly 20, lower panel assembly 30, and tray assembly 40 in the slot machine SM have the same configuration as those in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment. On the other hand, the upper panel assembly 10 of the slot machine SM differs from that of the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment in the following points. That is, in the upper panel assembly 10 of the slot machine SM, in addition to the first presentation lamp 12, the second presentation lamps 13a, 13b, and the third presentation lamps 14a, 14b, the display screen 11a is provided with the first embodiment on both the left and right sides of the display screen 11a. Fourth effect lamps 16a and 16b, which are not present in the slot machine 1, are arranged. Further, the shapes and positions of the first performance lamp 12 and upper speakers 15a, 15b are different from the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 135, a hopper 50, an auxiliary storage 85, and a power supply device 80 are provided in the lower part of the housing 5 (on the bottom plate 5d). A middle plate 5f is provided in the center of the housing 5 so as to span the left and right side plates 5a, 5b, and a reel having three reels 3a, 3b, 3c is mounted on the middle plate 5f. A unit RU is provided.

A main control board case unit 160 having a main control board 60 (see FIG. 2) is mounted in the upper part of the housing 5 (inner surface of the upper part of the back plate 5e). It is movable. Furthermore, a sub-control board case unit (not shown) having a sub-control board 70 (see FIG. 2) is provided on the back side of the front door 2.

≪Schematic configuration of Pachinko machine PM≫
Next, the general configuration of the Pachinko gaming machine PM will be explained. In the following description, for convenience, the directions shown by the arrows in FIG. 136 will be referred to as the front-back direction, the left-right direction, and the up-down direction, respectively. As shown in FIG. 136, the pachinko game machine PM is mounted on the front opening of an outer frame 401, which is a vertically oriented fixed holding frame, and is configured to have a rectangular frame size that matches the outer frame size and can be opened and closed. A front frame 402 forming a frame is attached so that it can be opened and closed horizontally and can be attached and detached by upper and lower hinge mechanisms 403 arranged on the left side edge of each other's front side, and a lock called a double lock is provided on the right side edge of the front side. By using the device 404, it is always maintained in a closed state in which it is engaged and connected to the outer frame 401.

A rectangular glass frame 405 that matches the upper front area of the front frame 402 is attached to the front frame 402 so that it can be opened and closed horizontally using an upper and lower hinge mechanism 403 and can be attached and detached using a locking device 404. It is always kept in a closed state covering the front surface of the front frame 402. A game board 410 is detachably set and held in the front frame 402, and the game area PA in front of the game board 410 is visible through the double-glazed glass 405a of the glass frame 405, which is normally kept closed. ing.

At the bottom of the glass frame 405, upper and lower ball trays (upper and lower ball trays 406a and lower ball trays 406b) for storing game balls are provided, and on the front right side of the lower ball tray 406b is a firing handle 407 that performs a shooting operation of game balls. is provided. On the front side of the glass frame 405, there are provided an illuminated lamp 408 having a light emitting element such as a light emitting diode (LED), and a speaker 409 that generates sound effects depending on the state of the game.

Although detailed illustration is omitted in FIG. 136, the game board 410 is made of a decorative board formed by pasting cells with predetermined designs printed on rectangular laminated plywood that has been subjected to router processing, etc. A substantially circular game area PA is formed surrounded by upper and lower rail decorations. The gaming area PA includes gaming components (all not shown) such as a large number of gaming nails, a windmill, a central decoration, an effect image display section that displays a predetermined image according to the progress of the game, and various prize openings. is provided, and an output port (not shown) is formed at the lower end of the game area PA to penetrate the game board 410 back and forth for discharging game balls that have fallen without falling into the winning hole to the back side. ing.

As shown in FIG. 137, on the back side of the front frame 402, there is a back side that is based on a base frame body formed in the shape of a rectangular frame that is somewhat smaller than the front frame 402 and has a window in the center that communicates with the front and back. A set board 430 is connected to the rear of the front frame 402 via an upper and lower hinge mechanism 403 so that it can be opened and closed laterally and can be attached and detached. A back set cover 430C in the shape of a rectangular box with an open front is detachably attached to the back set board 430, and is normally disposed to cover the back side of the game board 410 attached to the front frame 402. ing.

Each part of the back set board 430 includes a ball storage tank 431 that stores a large number of game balls, a tank rail 432 that extends from the ball storage tank 431 to the right with a gentle downward slope, and a tank rail 432 at the right end of the tank rail 432. A ball supply passage member 433 that connects and extends downward, a prize ball payout unit 434 that pays out game balls guided by the ball supply passage member 433, and a prize ball payout unit 434 for guiding the game balls paid out from the prize ball payout unit 434 to the upper ball tray 406. A prize ball passage member 435 and the like are provided.

On the back side of the game board 410, there is a main control board case unit CU1 having a main control board (not shown) that centrally controls the operation of the pachinko machine PM, as well as image display, effect lighting, and effects according to the game development. A production control board case unit CU2 having a production control board (not shown) for controlling overall production such as sound, etc. is attached so as to be covered by a back set cover 430C. On the other hand, on the back side of the back set board 430, there is a payout control board case unit CU3 having a payout control board (not shown) that controls the firing and payout of game balls, and a payout control board case unit CU3 that receives power from the gaming facility side and performs various functions. A power supply board case unit CU4 and the like having a power supply board (not shown) that supplies power to the control board and electric/electronic components are attached. These control boards and electrical/electronic parts of each part of the pachinko game machine PM are connected by a harness (connector cable), so that the pachinko game machine PM is configured to be operable.

The pachinko game machine PM is played with the outer frame 401 fixed to the game island (installation frame stand) of the game facility, and the front frame 402, glass frame 405, etc., closed and locked. The game begins by storing game balls in the upper ball tray 406a and rotating the launch handle 407. When the launch handle 407 is rotated, the game balls stored in the upper ball tray 406a are sent one by one to the launch mechanism by a ball feed mechanism arranged on the back side of the glass frame 405, and the balls are shot into the game area PA by the launch mechanism, and the pachinko game then unfolds.

≪Characteristic configuration of this embodiment≫
Below, the content of the characteristic configuration of the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment will be explained. It should be noted that the content (characteristic configuration) described below is applicable to both the slot machine SM and the Pachinko gaming machine PM.

<LED board and light-emitting components>
First, the LED boards and light emitting components shown in these figures will be described with reference to Figures 138 to 145. For the sake of convenience, in the following description, these LED boards and light emitting components will be described as those for the performance lamps of the slot machine SM, but they are not limited to this.

(Component surface shape of LED board and configuration of light emitting components)
The LED board 310 shown in FIG. 138 is an example of an LED board used in the first effect lamp 12 of the slot machine SM (see FIG. 134). Similarly, LED boards 320 and 330 shown in FIG. 138 are examples of LED boards used for the fourth effect lamps 16a and 16b of the slot machine SM, respectively. The LED boards 310, 320, and 330 are arranged around the display section (here, the display screen 11a) that the player often pays attention to during the game.

The component surface 311 of the LED board 310, the component surface 321 of the LED board 320, and the component surface 331 of the LED board 330 are each formed into a curved shape when viewed from the front. That is, the component surface 311 of the LED board 310 has a shape in which the upper edge 312a and the lower edge 312b are curved as a whole, and the component surface 321 of the LED board 320 has a curved shape as a whole as it goes upward. It has a shape that curves to the right. Furthermore, the component surface 331 of the LED board 330 has a shape that curves to the left as a whole as it goes upward. Note that the curved shape of the component surface is not limited to the shapes of the component surfaces 311, 321, and 331 described above. For example, like the LED board 301 shown in FIG. 139(A), a bent part 303 or a curved part 304 as shown in the figure is formed on a part of the side edge of the component surface 302, or ), such as an LED board 306 whose component surface 307 is bent at one or more positions as a whole, is also considered to be an LED board whose component surface is formed in a curved shape.

A plurality of light emitting components 340 (only some of them are numbered) are mounted on the component surface 311 of the LED board 310, the component surface 311 of the LED board 320, and the component surface 331 of the LED board 330, respectively. As shown in FIG. 140, the light emitting component 340 includes a lamp house (molding frame) 341 formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape, a lead frame (electrode) 342 provided on the lamp house 341, and a cylinder formed on the lamp house 341. This is a surface-mounted PLCC (with molding frame) type LED device having three light emitting elements installed in a shaped recess 343. The three light emitting elements include a red LED element 344R, a green LED element 344G, and a blue LED element 344B, and are connected to the lead frame 342 by bonding wires (not shown). A resin is injected into the recess 343 of the lamp house 341 to seal three light emitting elements.

In the light emitting component 340, as shown in FIG. 140, three light emitting elements (a red LED element 344R, a green LED element 344G, and a blue LED element 344B) are located in an equilateral triangle shape, and are arranged clockwise from the red LED element 344R. A blue LED element 344B and a green LED element 344G are arranged in this order. In this way, the relative positions of the three light emitting elements are determined. Note that the arrangement of the three light emitting elements is not limited to this. For example, three light emitting elements (a red LED element 344R, a green LED element 344G, and a blue LED element 344B) may be arranged in a straight line like a light emitting component 340A shown in FIG. Three light emitting elements (a red LED element 344R, a green LED element 344G, and a blue LED element 344B) may be arranged in an L shape like a light emitting component 340B shown in (B). Furthermore, the arrangement of the red LED elements 344R, the green LED elements 344G, and the blue LED elements 344B may be different from the illustrated example (for example, in the illustrated example, the positions of the red LED elements 344R and the green LED elements 344G are swapped). or an arrangement in which the positions of the green LED elements 344G and the blue LED elements 344B are exchanged, etc.).

Here, we have explained a surface-mounted PLCC type LED device as an example, but other types of LED devices, such as surface-mounted PCB (substrate) type LED devices and pin insertion type (vertical) An LED device or the like may also be used. Furthermore, in addition to the light emitting elements of red, green, and blue, which constitute the three primary colors of light, an LED device may be used that includes light emitting elements of other colors (for example, white or yellow).

(Installation posture of light-emitting components and orientation of red LED element)
Each light emitting component 340 mounted on the component surface 311 of the LED board 310 is installed in the same attitude. Furthermore, each of the light emitting components 340 mounted on the component surface 321 of the LED board 320 is also installed in the same posture, and each of the light emitting components 340 mounted on the component surface 331 of the LED board 330 is also installed in the same posture. has been done. Specifically, on the component surface 311 of the LED board 310 disposed above the display screen 11a, as shown in FIG. (the red LED element 344R is biased towards the display screen 11a). The four arrows in FIG. 142(A) indicate the up, down, left, and right directions with respect to the component surface 311 when the LED board 310 is installed in the slot machine SM.

Furthermore, on the component surface 321 of the LED board 320 disposed on the left side of the display screen 11a, as shown in FIG. ) (an attitude in which the red LED element 344R is biased toward the display screen 11a). Furthermore, on the component surface 331 of the LED board 330 disposed on the right side of the display screen 11a, as shown in FIG. ) (an attitude in which the red LED element 344R is biased toward the display screen 11a). The four arrows in FIG. 142(B) indicate the up, down, left and right directions with respect to the component surface 321 when the LED board 320 is installed in the slot machine SM, and the four arrows in FIG. 142(C) indicate the directions of the LED It shows the up, down, left and right directions with respect to the component surface 331 when the board 330 is installed in the slot machine SM.

In this way, by arranging the light-emitting components mounted on the component surface of one LED board in the same posture, it is possible to equalize the way each light-emitting component illuminates, so that the lighting effect of each light-emitting component can be improved. It is possible to increase it. On the other hand, if the postures of the light-emitting components mounted on the component surface of one LED board are different, the way each light-emitting component lights will vary, such as when all the light-emitting components are illuminated in the same color all at once. There is a possibility that the production effect may be reduced. Note that on the component surface of one LED board, it is preferable that all the light-emitting components mounted thereon be aligned in the same orientation, but some of the light-emitting components may be installed in different orientations. It is preferable that the proportion of light-emitting components installed in the same posture be 70% or 80% or more of all the light-emitting components arranged on the component surface of one LED board, but if 50% or more of the light-emitting components are If they are installed in the same posture, it is possible to obtain some effect. This also applies to the effect of the orientation of the red LED element 344R, which will be described below.

Also, as described above, by installing each light-emitting component 340 so that the red LED element 344R is biased toward the display screen 11a, the following effect can be obtained. That is, the red light emitted by the red LED element 344R has a longer wavelength than green or blue light and is more likely to reach the human eye. Also, red is a color that attracts people's attention and stands out. On the other hand, the display screen 11a is often the focus of players during play. Therefore, by installing each light-emitting component 340 so that the red LED element 344R faces the display screen 11a, the red light can easily reach the eyes of the player looking at the display screen 11a, which visually enhances the glow of the light-emitting components 340, thereby enhancing the presentation effect of the lighting.

In the light emitting component 340, the posture in which the red LED element 344R is biased toward the display screen 11a means that the red LED element 344R is preferably closer to the display screen than the green LED element 344G and the blue LED element 344B. 142 (A) to (C)), but is not limited to this. For example, consider a case where the light emitting component 340 is installed in an attitude as shown in FIG. 143(A). At this time, it is assumed that the display screen 11a is placed on the right side. In this attitude, the green LED element 344G is located on the right side (closer to the display screen 11a) than the red LED element 344R. However, when an imaginary line L11 is set that bisects the light-emitting component 340 in the horizontal direction, the red LED element 344R is located in an area to the right of this imaginary line L11, and at that point, it faces toward the display screen 11a. It can be said that Therefore, the posture of the light-emitting component 340 is also such that the red LED element 344R is biased toward the display screen 11a (to the right).

Similarly, consider a case where the light-emitting component 340 is installed in an attitude as shown in FIG. 143(B). At this time, it is assumed that the display screen 11a is placed below. In this attitude, the blue LED element 344B is located lower (closer to the display screen 11a) than the red LED element 344R. However, when an imaginary line L12 is set that bisects the light-emitting component 340 in the vertical direction, the red LED element 344R is located in a region below this imaginary line L11, and in that respect, the display screen 11a is It can be said that it is suitable. Therefore, the posture of the light emitting component 340 is also such that the red LED element 344R is biased toward the display screen 11a (downward).

(Installation density of light emitting parts)
As shown in FIG. 138, the component surface 311 of the LED board 310 is divided into two regions, a region AR1 and a region AR2. The area AR1 is arranged on the lower side closer to the display screen 11a than the area AR2. The light-emitting component 340 is located in the area AR1, which is relatively close to the display screen 11a, than in the area AR2, which is relatively far away from the display screen 11a (for example, the distance from the center of the display screen 11a). The installation density (number of installations per unit area) is set to be high. That is, each light-emitting component 340 is installed such that the arrangement pitch (distance between adjacent light-emitting components 340) of the plurality of light-emitting components 340 in the area AR1 is shorter than the arrangement pitch of the plurality of light-emitting components 340 in the region AR2. has been done.

In this way, by setting the installation density of the light emitting components 340 to be higher in the area AR1 where the distance from the display screen 11a is relatively closer than in the area AR2 where the distance from the display screen 11a is relatively far, the following You can get an effect like this. That is, by increasing the installation density of the light-emitting components 340 in the region AR1, the intensity of light per unit area by each light-emitting component 340 in the region AR1 can be increased. Further, since the area AR1 is closer to the display screen 11a than the area AR2, the light from the light emitting component 340 in the area AR1 is likely to enter the eyes of the player looking at the display screen 11a. Therefore, by increasing the intensity of light per unit area from each light emitting component 340 in the region AR1, it is possible to enhance the lighting effect.

Regarding the installation density of the light-emitting components 340, the component surface 321 of the LED board 320 and the component surface 331 of the LED board 330 are configured in the same manner, and it is possible to obtain the same effect. That is, as shown in FIG. 138, the component surface 321 of the LED board 320 is divided into five regions, region AR11 to region R15. The area AR11 is arranged on the right side closer to the display screen 11a than the area AR12, and the installation density of the light emitting components 340 is set higher in the area AR11 than in the area AR12. Further, the area AR14 is arranged on the diagonally lower right side closer to the display screen 11a than the area AR15, and the area AR13 is arranged on the diagonally lower right side closer to the display screen 11a than the area AR14. The installation density of the light emitting components 340 is set higher in the area AR14 than in the area AR15, and higher in the area AR13 than in the area AR14.

Similarly, the component surface 331 of the LED board 330 is divided into five regions, region AR21 to region R25. The area AR21 is arranged on the left side closer to the display screen 11a than the area AR22, and the installation density of the light emitting components 340 is set higher in the area AR21 than in the area AR22. Further, the area AR24 is arranged on the lower left side closer to the display screen 11a than the area AR25, and the area AR13 is arranged on the lower left side closer to the display screen 11a than the area AR14. The installation density of the light emitting components 340 is set higher in the area AR24 than in the area AR25, and higher in the area AR23 than in the area AR24.

(Red LED elements are not close to each other)
On the component surface 311 of the LED board 310, the component surface 321 of the LED board 320, and the component surface 331 of the LED board 330, the light emitting components 340 are arranged such that the red LED elements 344R are not close to each other. Here, the state in which the red LED elements 344R are not close to each other means that on the component surface of one LED board, the red LED element 344R of one light-emitting component and the red LED element 344R of one of the two light-emitting components arranged closest to each other on the component surface of one LED board. This means that the two light emitting components are arranged such that an LED element of a different color than red (green LED element 344G or blue LED element 344B) is located between the red LED element 344R of the light emitting component. This point will be specifically explained below.

For example, in the region AR1 of the component surface 311, two light emitting components 340 arranged closest to each other in the left-right direction are arranged as shown in FIG. 144(A). At this time, there is a gap between the red LED element 344R of the light-emitting component 340 on the left side of the figure and the red LED element 344R of the light-emitting component 340 on the right side of the figure (more specifically, between the two red LED elements 344R and Within the vertical width of the two light-emitting components 340 (inside the rectangular region surrounded by the two-dot chain line in the figure), the green LED element 344G of the light-emitting component 340 on the left side in the figure, and the light-emitting component on the right side in the figure. 340 blue LED elements 344B are located. Therefore, the two light-emitting components 340 are arranged so that the respective red LED elements 344R are not close to each other.

As another example, in the region AR11 of the component surface 321, two light emitting components 340 that are arranged closest to each other in the vertical direction are arranged as shown in FIG. 144(B). At this time, there is a gap between the red LED element 344R of the light-emitting component 340 on the upper side of the figure and the red LED element 344R of the light-emitting component 340 on the lower side of the figure (more specifically, between the two red LED elements 344R). And within the width of the two light-emitting components 340 in the left-right direction (the rectangular region surrounded by the two-dot chain line in the figure), the blue LED element 344B of the light-emitting component 340 on the upper side in the figure, and the blue LED element 344B of the light-emitting component 340 on the lower side in the figure A green LED element 344G of the light emitting component 340 is located there. Therefore, the two light-emitting components 340 are arranged so that the respective red LED elements 344R are not close to each other.

Note that on the component surface of one LED board, there is a red LED element 344R between the red LED element 344R of one of the two light-emitting components arranged closest to each other and the red LED element 344R of the other light-emitting component. If no LED element of a different color is located, these two light-emitting components are arranged with their respective red LED elements 344R close to each other.

For example, consider a case where two light-emitting components 340 that are arranged closest to each other in the left-right direction on the component surface of one LED board are arranged as shown in FIG. 145(A). At this time, between the red LED element 344R of the light-emitting component 340 on the left side of the figure and the red LED element 344R of the light-emitting component 340 on the right side of the figure (between the two red LED elements 344R and the upper and lower sides of the two light-emitting components 340). Neither the green LED element 344G nor the blue LED element 344B is located within the width of the direction (within the rectangular area surrounded by the two-dot chain line in the figure). Therefore, these two light-emitting components 340 are arranged with their red LED elements 344R close to each other.

Note that another light emitting component 340 may be arranged, for example, as shown in FIG. 145(B) between two light emitting components 340 arranged as shown in FIG. 145(A). . In that case, between the red LED element 344R of the light-emitting component 340 on the left side of the figure and the red LED element 344R of the light-emitting component 340 on the right side of the figure (within the rectangular area surrounded by the two-dot chain line in the figure), This is where the green LED element 344G and blue LED element 344B of the side light emitting component 340 are located. Therefore, this eliminates the state in which the red LED elements 344R are arranged close to each other.

As described above, by arranging each light emitting component 340 so that the red LED elements 344R are not close to each other, the following effects can be obtained. That is, as mentioned above, the red color emitted by the red LED element 344R is a conspicuous color that attracts people's attention. Therefore, if the red LED elements 344R are close to each other, there is a risk that the red color will be biased in such close areas, resulting in visually uneven color. By not placing the red LED elements 344R in close proximity to each other, it is possible to eliminate the local deviation of the red color and make the color uniform, thereby making it possible to enhance the lighting effects.

In addition, on the component surface of one LED board, it is preferable that all the light emitting components mounted thereon be installed so that the respective red LED elements do not come close to each other. For some light-emitting components, the respective red LED elements may be installed in close proximity to each other. The proportion of light-emitting components installed such that red LED elements are not close to each other may be 70% or 80% or more of all light-emitting components arranged on the component surface of one LED board. Although it is preferable, if 50% or more of the light-emitting components are installed in such a manner that the respective red LED elements are not close to each other, it is possible to obtain a certain effect.

Here, we have explained the characteristic configurations related to the shape of the LED board and the arrangement of the mounted light-emitting components using the LED board 310 used in the first performance lamp 12 in the slot machine SM and the LED boards 320, 330 used in the fourth performance lamps 16a, 16b, respectively, as examples, but this is not limited to this and the above-mentioned characteristic configurations can be applied to any LED board and light-emitting components. In addition, the above-mentioned characteristic configurations of the LED board and light-emitting components can also be applied to any LED board and light-emitting components in the pachinko game machine PM.

Furthermore, although the display screen 11a in the slot machine SM has been described here as an example of the display section, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the display window W or the lower panel cover 31 may be used as the display section. Further, an area in which a specific character is displayed may be used as a display section. Examples of the display section in the Pachinko gaming machine PM include the game area PA, an effect image display section provided within the game area PA, or an area where a specific character is displayed.

<Board case unit>
Next, the board case unit 500 shown in these figures will be described with reference to Figures 146 to 154. In the following description, for convenience, the board case unit 500 will be described as equivalent to the main control board case unit CU1 (see Figure 137) of the pachinko game machine PM, but is not limited to this. In addition, in the following description, for convenience, the front, back, left, right, up and down directions are defined as directions when attached to the pachinko game machine PM, based on the state in Figure 146, and the directions of the arrows shown in Figure 146 will be described as front, back, left, right, up and down, respectively.

The main control board case unit 500 mainly includes, for example, a main control board 510 that plays a central role in controlling the pachinko gaming machine PM, and a substantially rectangular container-shaped board case 560 that houses the main control board 510 therein. Ru.

The main control board 510 is configured using a rectangular printed wiring board as a board, and as shown in FIG. 540, a performance display monitor 550, and a plurality of connectors (only connectors CN1 to CN5 are numbered in the figure). Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, electronic devices such as ROM and RAM, and electronic/electrical components such as resistors are also mounted on this component surface 511. Note that the CPU 520 is arranged on the component surface 511 so that its long side runs along the long side direction of the main control board 510 (left-right direction in FIG. 146). The main control board 510 has screw insertion holes 512a to 512d at its four corners, and screws (see screws 513 shown in FIG. It is fixed to the inner surface side of the top case 565).

As shown in FIG. 149, the setting change unit 530 is configured to have a setting key switch 531 and a setting change switch 536. The setting key switch 531 is a switch operated when checking and changing the setting of a setting value that determines the degree of advantage for the player, for example, the degree (rank) of the winning probability in a predetermined winning/losing lottery that affects the ball payout rate, such as a winning/losing lottery for a special pattern, and the setting change switch 536 is a switch for changing the setting value in multiple stages (six stages in this embodiment). The setting key switch 531 has a setting change key cylinder 532 that can be turned by inserting a setting change key (not shown) held by the gaming store clerk, and the setting key switch 531 is configured to be switched by turning the setting change key cylinder 532. The setting change switch 536 has a setting change button 537 that is pressed by the gaming store clerk, and is configured to be switched by pressing the setting change button 537. The setting change unit 530 (setting key switch 531, setting change switch 536) may be provided on a board other than the main control board 510, or may be provided in a location other than the board.

The setting change unit 530 is operated in a clockwise direction (also referred to as a "setting change key operation direction") when viewed from the rear with power not being supplied to the main control board 510 and a setting change key inserted into the setting change key cylinder 532. When power is supplied while the setting change switch 536 is turned on (setting change button 537 is pressed) and the setting change switch 536 is rotated approximately 90 degrees to the setting change mode (setting value mode) that allows changes to be made. In addition, in this setting change mode, each time the setting change switch 536 (setting change button 537) is pressed, the setting value is switched in six steps from 1 to 6, and the switched setting value is displayed on the setting value display monitor 540. . Then, when the setting change key is returned to its original position, the setting value is confirmed, the setting change mode is ended, and the normal mode is selected (the setting value display monitor 540 is in a non-lit state in a mode in which games can be played). to move to. Note that, in addition to the above-mentioned conditions, the condition that the front frame 402 is open to the outer frame 401 (also referred to as "front frame open state") may be added as a condition for activating the setting change mode. Further, if the front frame is not in the open state, the setting change mode may not be shifted to the normal mode. When changing from the setting change mode to the normal mode, a setting change sound is output from a predetermined speaker to notify that the setting change has been completed.

The setting change switch 536 in the setting change unit 600 is also configured to function as a RAM clear switch. That is, when the power is turned on while the setting change switch 536 (setting change button 537) is pressed to start the setting change mode, the main control board 510 clears at least the information about the game state (normal state, probability change state, time-saving state, latent probability change state, etc.) from all the information stored in the RAM. At this time, the setting value is updated to the setting value with the lowest ball payout rate (for example, setting 1). It is also possible to provide a dedicated RAM clear switch (RAM clear button) separately, without using the setting change switch 536 as a RAM clear switch. In this case, when the dedicated RAM clear switch is in the on state and power is supplied, the setting change mode may be started. Also, the setting value may be configured to have only one stage (for example, setting 1). In that case, the setting value is not updated even if the setting change switch 536 (setting change button 537) is pressed (for example, it remains unchanged at setting 1).

Further, the setting change unit 530 is rotated approximately 90 degrees in the setting change key operation direction when the main control board 510 is not supplied with power and the setting change key is inserted into the setting change key cylinder 532. When power is supplied in the set state (however, the setting change switch 536 is in the OFF state), a setting confirmation mode (a mode in which setting values can be confirmed) is started, and the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display monitor 540. indicate. Then, when the setting change key is returned to its original position, the setting confirmation mode is ended and the mode shifts to the normal mode. In addition to the above-mentioned conditions, the condition that the front frame is open may be added as a condition for activating the setting confirmation mode. In the pachinko gaming machine PM, even if the setting change key cylinder 532 is rotated by the setting change key and the setting key type switch 531 is turned on after power is supplied, the pachinko game machine PM does not enter either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. There is no transition, and no setting value is displayed on the setting value display monitor 540.

The board case 560 is configured with a bottom case 561 that is detachably attached to the back of the game board 20, and a top case 565 that is detachably attached to the bottom case 561, and an engagement connection mechanism 570 is provided on the right edge of the case that is aligned front to back when the bottom case 561 and the top case 565 are attached and closed. The bottom case 561 and the top case 565 are combined and integrated in a closed state with their openings facing each other. The bottom case 561 and the top case 565 are both formed by a molding method such as injection molding using a colorless and transparent resin material (e.g., polycarbonate, etc.), and are configured so that the inside of the board case 560 can be seen from the outside.

The bottom case 561 is generally formed in a rectangular box shape with an open rear, and the top case 565 is generally formed in a rectangular box shape with an open front. The top case 565 is configured to be slidably attached to the bottom case 561 in the left-right direction. That is, the top case 565 is slightly shifted to the left relative to the bottom case 561, and the two cases 561 and 565 are combined while facing each other in the front-rear direction, and the top case 565 is slid to the right (hereinafter also referred to as the "closing direction") to integrate the bottom case 561 and the top case 565 in a closed state with their openings facing each other. On the other hand, the integrated two cases 561 and 565 can be separated by sliding the top case 565 to the left (hereinafter also referred to as the "opening direction") a predetermined distance relative to the bottom case 561.

The engagement and connection mechanism 570 engages and connects the integrated bottom case 561 and top case 565 to each other using a caulking member 575, thereby causing the top case 565 to move in the opening direction with respect to the bottom case 561. Regulate it so that it cannot slide. That is, the engagement coupling mechanism 570 includes a bottom side lock portion 571 (see FIG. 148) provided on the right side edge of the bottom case 561 and a top side lock portion 573 (see FIG. 148) provided on the right side edge of the top case 565. (see FIG. 147), and a caulking member 575 (see FIG. 146) for engaging and connecting the bottom locking portion 571 and the top locking portion 573.

The bottom locking part 571 has a bottom locking hole (not shown) that opens toward the rear, and the top locking part 573 has upper and lower top locking holes 573a (see FIG. 146) that are formed in a position aligned with the bottom locking hole in the front-rear direction and penetrate the front and back. The crimping member 575 has a shaft part 575a that extends forward and backward, an operating part 575b that is formed in a disk shape with a larger diameter than the shaft part 575a, and a cylindrical locking pin 575c that is provided in a pin receiving hole (not shown) recessed in the shaft part 575b and is supported so as to be freely advanced and retreated in a direction perpendicular to the central axis of the shaft part 575a. The locking pin 575c is biased so that the pin tip protrudes outward from the shaft part 575a by the repulsive force of a spring (not shown) provided in the pin receiving hole.

In the engagement coupling mechanism 570 having such a configuration, when the bottom case 561 and the top case 565 are integrated in a closed state, the bottom side lock part 571 and the top side lock part 573 are in a state where they face each other and overlap each other in the front and back. Become. In this state, the shaft portion 575a of the caulking member 575 is inserted so as to straddle the bottom side lock hole and the top side lock hole 573a, and the caulking member 575 is engaged and connected to the bottom side lock portion 571 and the top side lock portion 573. As a result, the top case 565 is closed to the bottom case 561 and cannot be removed (cannot be opened).

The top case 565 is formed with connector insertion/extraction ports (not shown) that penetrate through the front and back, corresponding to the mounting positions of each connector (including connectors CN1 to CN5) on the main control board 510. When attached to the case 565, each connector of the main control board 510 is exposed to the outside through the connector insertion/extraction port (see Fig. 146), and the production control board, image control board, payout control board, etc. and harness (connector cable) Electrical connection is possible via

Furthermore, the top case 565 is formed with a setting change part corresponding opening (not shown) that penetrates the front and back, corresponding to the mounting position of the setting change part 530 (setting key type switch 531 and setting change switch 536) of the main control board 510. With the main control board 510 attached to the top case 565, the setting change section 530 is exposed to the outside through the setting change section corresponding opening (see FIG. 146). A small door 567 (see FIG. 147) that covers the setting change section 530 facing rearward from the setting change section corresponding opening is attached to the top case 565 so as to be able to swing open and close (not shown in FIG. 146). . When operating the setting change section 530 (setting key type switch 531 and setting change switch 536), the small door 567 is swung upward to expose the setting change section 530.

The board case unit 500 configured as above, housing the main control board 510 in the board case 560, is attached to the rear side of the game board 420 with the bottom case 561 on the front side and the top case 565 on the rear side. When the board case unit 500 is attached to the rear side of the game board 420, the right edge of the board case 560 (the side edge of the left and right side edges of the board case 560 on which the engagement connection mechanism 570 is provided) is located on the side of the open end side edge of the front frame 402 (the side edge of the left and right side edges of the front frame 402 on which the front frame 402 opens, opposite the side edge on which the hinge mechanisms 403a, 403b are provided).

(Difference in configuration of 7 segment LED)
The set value display monitor 540 described above is composed of a single-digit LED indicator light (7 segment LED with dots) 541, as shown in FIG. This LED indicator light 541 is composed of seven bar-shaped LED segments arranged in a figure-eight shape and one dot-shaped LED segment formed in a dot-point shape. Each LED segment of the LED indicator light 541 is configured to light up in red, and is configured to appear red even in a non-lit state (unlit state). For example, a red lighting LED element is used as a light emitting element of each LED segment, and a cover member (lamp cover) and a diffusion sheet covering the LED element are made of a red translucent member.

Note that the red color of an LED segment in a lit state and the red color of an LED segment in a non-lit state are not necessarily the same color. Specifically, for example, when expressing colors in a 256-level RGB color system, if the red color of an LED segment in a lit state is (R, G, B) = (255, 0, 0), the red color of an LED segment in a non-lit state is not necessarily (R, G, B) = (255, 0, 0). For example, in the case of a color in which the R component is "200" or more and the G and B components are "100" or less, specific examples such as (R, G, B) = (237, 26, 61) and (R, G, B) = (241, 91, 91) are also included in the red color. Note that the color of an LED segment in a non-lit state is the color when the LED segment in a non-lit state is illuminated with white light (including the light of indoor lighting in an amusement arcade). In addition, taking into consideration the exact color difference, in the following explanation, the color of the LED segment in the lit state will be referred to as "red," and the color of the LED segment in the unlit state will be referred to as "reddish color."

FIG. 150(A) shows a case where all the LED segments of the LED indicator light 541 are in a non-lit state, and FIG. 150(B) shows a case where all LED segments of the LED indicator light 541 are in a lit state. ing. Moreover, FIG. 150(C) shows the lighting/non-lighting state of each LED segment when the LED indicator light 541 displays the number "6". In these figures, for convenience, the LED segments in the lit state are shown in black (actual color is red) and the LED segments in the non-lit state are shown in gray (actual color is red) to distinguish between the two. Red is a conspicuous color that attracts people's attention and has high visibility. Therefore, by configuring each LED segment of the LED indicator light 541 to light up in red, it is possible to improve the visibility of the LED indicator light 541 in the lit state. Furthermore, the LED indicator light 541 of the set value display monitor 540 is configured so that each LED segment appears red (reddish color) even when it is not lit, so it is highly visible and easily noticeable even when it is not lit. ing.

On the other hand, the performance display monitor 550 is composed of four-digit LED indicator lights (7 segment LEDs with dots) 551 to 554, as shown in FIG. The LED indicator lights 551 to 554 of each digit are composed of seven bar-shaped LED segments arranged in a figure-eight shape and one dot-shaped LED segment formed in a dot-point shape. Each of the LED indicator lights 551 to 554 can display numbers from 0 to 9, alphabetical characters, hyphens, etc. by selectively lighting up eight LED segments. The LED indicator lights 551 and 552 of the upper two digits display, for example, an identification symbol (for example, "bL.") for identifying the type of gaming performance data of the pachinko machine PM. On the other hand, the lower two digit LED indicator lights 553 and 554 display numerical values (calculated values "00" to "99") indicating the calculation results of gaming performance data. In addition, each LED indicator light 551 to 554 blinks when the number of samples of the counting data (cumulative number of balls played) has not reached a preset number, and when the number of samples has reached the specified number. It will now be displayed lit. Further, each of the LED indicator lights 551 to 554 of the performance display monitor 550 is configured to display all LED segments including dotted LED segments blinking for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) from the time the power is turned on. . This is provided as a test pattern to visually confirm whether all LED segments can be lit. In addition, the blinking display will be displayed at predetermined intervals (for example, an error of 0.3 seconds ± 10%; a time within the range of 0.297 seconds or more and 0.33 seconds or less) depending on the interval at which the interrupt processing is executed. The light is then turned on and off in a pattern that alternates between turning on and off.

Each LED segment of the LED indicator lights 551 to 554 in the performance display monitor 550 is configured to light up in red (for example, (R, G, B) = (255, 0, 0)), and is in a non-lighting state. (in the off state), it is configured to appear white. For example, a red LED element is used as a light emitting element of each LED segment, and a cover member (lamp cover) and a diffusion sheet covering the LED element are made of a white-colored translucent member. Note that white colors basically include white (R, G, B) = (255, 255, 255), milky white (R, G, B) = (243, 243, 243), etc. An achromatic color that is relatively bright (e.g., brightness 7 or more) that contains R, G, and B components equally and evenly, but the ratio of R, G, and B components is relatively 10%. Colors that differ in degree, such as (R, G, B) = (250, 240, 230), are also included in white-based colors. Red is a conspicuous color that attracts people's attention and has high visibility. Therefore, by configuring each LED segment of the LED indicator light 541 to light up in red, it is possible to improve the visibility of each of the LED indicator lights 551 to 554 when lit. On the other hand, white colors are less conspicuous and have lower visibility than red (red colors). Therefore, the set value display monitor 540, which is configured so that each LED segment of the LED indicator lights 551 to 554 appears white in the non-lit state, has low visibility in the non-lit state and is inconspicuous.

FIG. 151(A) shows a case where all the LED segments of the LED indicator lights 551 to 554 are in a non-lit state, and FIG. 151(B) shows a case where all the LED segments of the LED indicator lights 551 to 554 are in a lit state. It shows a case. Further, FIG. 151(C) shows the lighting/non-lighting state of each LED segment when the LED indicator lights 551 to 554 display "bL.53". In these figures, for convenience, the LED segments in the lit state are shown in black (actual color is red) and the LED segments in the non-lit state are shown in white (actual color is white) to distinguish between the two.

Both the LED indicator light 541 of the set value display monitor 540 and the LED indicator lights 551 to 554 of the performance display monitor 550 light up red (or blink red) when each LED segment is lit, so visibility of both is low when the LED segment is not lit. equally high and conspicuous. On the other hand, each LED segment of the LED indicator light 541 of the set value display monitor 540 is configured to appear reddish even in the non-lighted state, whereas each of the LED segments of the LED indicator lights 551 to 554 of the performance display monitor 550 Since the segments are configured to appear white in the non-lit state, it is easy to distinguish between the two in the non-lit state. In addition, since the LED indicators 551 to 554 of the performance display monitor 550 may blink when they are lit, each LED segment should be configured so that it appears white when it is not lit and red when it is lit. This makes it easy to distinguish between LED segments that are lit intermittently during blinking and LED segments that are off. On the other hand, the LED indicator light 541 of the set value display monitor 540 does not blink when it is in the lit state.

In addition, so that each LED segment of the LED indicator light 541 of the set value display monitor 540 appears white in the non-lighted state, the cover member etc. of each segment is constructed of a white-colored translucent material so that it is relatively conspicuous. The cover member etc. of each LED segment is made of a reddish-colored translucent material so that each LED segment of the LED indicator lights 551 to 554 of the performance display monitor 550 appears reddish even when not lit. You may also make it relatively conspicuous by doing so. In this case, the LED indicator lights 551 to 554 of the performance display monitor 550 in the non-lit state are easier to see than the LED indicator lights 541 of the set value display monitor 540 in the non-lit state. Furthermore, since the LED indicator lights 551 to 554 of the performance display monitor 550 are lit or flashed more often than the LED indicator lights 541 of the set value display monitor 540, the LED indicator lights 551 to 554 of the performance display monitor 550 554 (LED element) is more likely to deteriorate over time. However, even if the luminous intensity of the LED indicator lights 551 to 554 decreases due to deterioration over time and the degree of red color weakens, it can be compensated for by using the red color of the cover member etc. in each LED segment. In addition, each LED segment of the LED indicator light 541 of the set value display monitor 540 and each LED segment of the LED indicator lights 551 to 554 of the performance display monitor 550 both appear reddish or whiteish in the non-lighted state. may be configured.

The set value display monitor 540 remains unlit and does not turn on when the power is turned on under a predetermined condition, whereas the performance display monitor 550 remains unlit even when the power is turned on under the same predetermined conditions. Transition from a non-lit state to a lit or blinking state. When the power is turned on in a predetermined situation, the power is turned on without any special processing or operation, for example, the power is turned on when the setting key type switch 531 of the setting change section 530 is not rotated. (also referred to as "normal power-on"), or when the power is turned off in an error state and the power is turned on with the setting key type switch 531 not being rotated (in this case, An error state occurs after the power is turned on). However, in the case of an error state that cannot be recovered, the performance display is not noticeable in the non-lighting state by making the transition from the non-lighting state to the lighting state or blinking state when the power is turned on under a specified situation. It is possible to make the LED indicator lights 551 to 554 of the monitor 550 stand out immediately after the power is turned on. Note that the LED indicator lights 551 to 554 of the performance display monitor 550 may be configured so that they can turn on or blink even when there is an error state or when the settings are being changed. However, the performance display monitor 550 may be configured to turn off when an error from which it is impossible to recover from the error state occurs.

Furthermore, the LED indicator light 541 of the set value display monitor 540 is configured to be larger than the LED indicator lights 551 to 554 of the performance display monitor 550 (see FIG. 149). It has higher visibility and is more conspicuous than the lights 551 to 554. Note that the LED indicator light 541 of the set value display monitor 540 and the LED indicator lights 551 to 554 of the performance display monitor 550 may be configured to have the same size, or the LED indicator light 541 of the set value display monitor 540 may be configured to have a larger size than the LED indicator light 541 of the performance display monitor 550. The LED indicator lights 551 to 554 of 550 may be configured to be larger. Further, the LED indicator light 541 of the set value display monitor 540 and/or the LED indicator lights 551 to 554 of the performance display monitor 550 may be configured with 7-segment LEDs without dots.

Here, the difference in the configuration of the LED indicator lamp (7-segment LED) is explained using the setting value display monitor 540 and the performance display monitor 550 in the pachinko game machine PM as an example, but it is not limited to this, and when any different 7-segment LED is used, it is possible to give them the above-mentioned difference in configuration. In addition, the above-mentioned difference in the configuration of the 7-segment LED can also be applied to the multiple LED indicator lamps used in the slot machine SM. For example, in the main control board 60 of the slot machine SM, a display monitor with a similar configuration to the performance display monitor 550 (for example, a role ratio display monitor that displays the role ratio) and a setting value display monitor with a similar configuration to the setting value display monitor 540 may be provided, and these display monitors may have the above-mentioned difference in the configuration of the 7-segment LED. In addition, the storage number display lamp 46h and the payout number display lamp 46j may have the above-mentioned difference in the configuration of the 7-segment LED.

(Colored caulking member)
As described above, the engagement and connection mechanism 570 is provided on the right edge of the board case 560 (see FIG. 146), and the engagement and connection mechanism 570 is provided with a caulking member 575. In this embodiment, the caulking member 575 is made of a colored member. The colored member refers to a member whose surface is painted or plated in a colored manner, a member formed from a colored material, and the like. As the material for forming the colored member, any material such as resin, wood, metal, etc. can be used. Note that colored means any color other than a colorless and transparent state, and includes achromatic colors such as white, gray, and black. As long as it is colored, it may be transparent (colored transparent) or opaque.

By configuring the caulking member 575 with a colored member, the following effects can be obtained. That is, when the board case unit 500 is attached to the back side of the game board 420, if you try to look into the board case 560 through the right edge of the board case 560 from the direction of arrow K in FIG. The line of sight is blocked by the member 575, making it difficult to see inside the board case 560. Therefore, for example, even if the front frame 402 is slightly opened and you look into the Pachinko gaming machine PM from the open end side edge, it will be difficult to see through the right side edge of the board case 560 into the board case 560. Fraudulent acts are less likely to be committed against case 560. Note that the removal and/or attachment of the board case unit 500 from the back side of the game board 420 (for example, a bracket member (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 420 to hold the board case unit 500) is not performed on the board. The process may be configured to be performed from a side edge other than the right side edge of the case 560 (upper edge, left side edge, or lower edge), or it may be performed from the right side of the board case 560. It may be configured as follows.

As shown in FIG. 147, the caulking member 575 has a diameter dimension (diameter dimension) D of the shaft portion 575a of the caulking member 575 that is longer than the width dimension W of the short side of the CPU 520 (vertical direction of the CPU 520 in FIG. 147). It is configured to be. Furthermore, when the component surface 511 of the main control board 510 is used as a reference plane for height (the position in the front-rear direction in FIG. 146), the height H12 of the caulking member 575 from the component surface 511 is as shown in FIG. is configured to be higher than the height H11 of the CPU 520 from the component surface 511. Further, as shown in FIG. 147, the lower crimping member 575 of the upper and lower crimping members 575 and the CPU 520 mounted on the main control board 510 are arranged in a straight line in the left-right direction (in the left-right direction). are arranged on the same imaginary straight line). That is, when board case 560 is viewed from the direction of arrow K in FIG. 147, CPU 520 is located at a position hidden behind caulking member 575. Therefore, when opening the front frame 402 a little and looking into the Pachinko gaming machine PM from the open end side edge and trying to see the inside of the board case 560 through the right edge of the board case 560, the CPU 520 It is hidden in the back and cannot be seen. Therefore, fraudulent acts targeting the CPU 520 inside the board case 560 are less likely to occur.

Here, the crimping member 575 has been described as an example of a colored member installed in the board case unit 500, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the same effect can be obtained by placing any colored member other than the crimping member on the right edge of the board case 560. For example, a test connector mounted on the main control board 510 for electrical connection with the test device during a type test of the pachinko game machine PM may be formed from a colored member, and the test connector and the CPU 520 may be placed in a position where they are lined up in a straight line in the left-right direction on the component surface 511 (for example, the position between the CPU 520 and the crimping member 575 in FIG. 147). In this case, it is preferable to configure the width dimension of the test connector (the vertical width dimension in FIG. 146) to be longer than the width dimension W of the short side of the CPU 520, and to configure the height of the test connector from the component surface 511 of the main control board 510 to be higher than the height of the CPU 520 from the component surface 511. This means that when you try to look inside the board case 560 through the right edge of the board case 560, the CPU 520 is hidden behind the test connector and is difficult to see.

Moreover, the colored member as described above may be provided on the side edges (the upper edge, the left edge, and the lower edge) of the board case 560 other than the right edge. For example, if a colored member is placed on the upper edge of the board case 560 with the board case unit 500 attached to the back side of the game board 420, the interior of the board case 560 can be inserted from above through the upper edge of the board case 560. When trying to look into the board case 560, the colored member blocks the user's line of sight, making it difficult to see inside the board case 560. Similar effects can be obtained when a colored member is arranged on the left side edge or lower side edge of the board case 560.

(Steps at the side edges of the board case)
As shown in Fig. 146 and Fig. 147, a step portion 580 is provided on the right edge of the board case 560. This step portion 580 is formed integrally with the top case 565, and as shown in Fig. 153, has three steps, a first step portion 581, a second step portion 582, and a third step portion 583, a first wall portion 584 connecting the first step portion 581 and the second step portion 582, a second wall portion 585 connecting the second step portion 582 and the third step portion 583, and a third wall portion 586. Fig. 153(A) shows the step portion 580 as viewed from the direction of the arrow L in Fig. 147, and Figs. 153(B) and (C) show the step portion 580 as viewed from the direction of the arrow K in Fig. 147.

By providing such a stepped portion 580 on the right side edge of the board case 560, the following effects can be obtained. That is, when the board case unit 500 is attached to the back side of the game board 420 and one attempts to look into the board case 560 from the direction of arrow K in FIG. 147 through the right edge of the board case 560, the board case 560 Since the interior appearance (scenery) is divided or distorted by the step portion 580 (mainly the second step portion 582 and the third step portion 583), visibility of the inside of the board case 560 is reduced. Therefore, for example, even if you open the front frame 402 a little and look into the Pachinko gaming machine PM from the edge of the open end, you will not be able to visually check the inside of the board case 560 through the right edge (step 580) of the board case 560. This makes it difficult for fraudulent acts to be carried out against the board case 560.

Note that the stepped portion 580 may be provided with a colored member as described above. For example, a test connector as described above may be placed in the stepped portion 580. By arranging the colored member on the step portion 580, when looking into the board case 560 through the right edge of the board case 560, the appearance (view) inside the board case 560 is only interrupted or distorted by the step portion 580. Instead, the colored member blocks the line of sight and makes it difficult to see through the inside of the board case 560, so that the visibility inside the board case 560 can be further reduced.

Here, the case where the stepped portion 580 is provided on the right edge of the board case 560 has been explained as an example, but the stepped portion as described above is It may be provided on the edge, lower edge). For example, if a stepped portion is provided at the lower edge of the board case 560 when the board case unit 500 is attached to the back side of the game board 420, the lower edge of the board case 560 can be passed from below to the board case 560. When attempting to look inside the board case 560, the appearance (scenery) inside the board case 560 is divided or distorted by the stepped portion, making it difficult to visually check the inside of the board case 560. Similar effects can be obtained when the stepped portion is directed toward the left edge or upper edge of the board case 560.

The step portion 580 described above is formed in the top case 565, but the step portion is formed by the bottom case 561 and the top case 565 (for example, a step portion is formed at the boundary between the bottom case 561 and the top case 565). may be formed). In addition, a stepped portion may be formed between the engaging and connecting mechanism 570 and the board case 560 (for example, a stepped portion may be formed at the boundary between the engaging and connecting mechanism 570 and the board case 560), and the game board 420 may have a stepped portion. A step may be formed between the above-mentioned bracket member provided on the back surface and the board case 560 (for example, a step may be formed at the boundary between the bracket member and the board case 560).

(Colored seal member)
As shown in FIGS. 146 and 147, a seal member SL may be attached to the step portion 580 described above. This sealing member SL is composed of a band-shaped colored sheet-like member, and is attached to the right side edge of the board case 560 along the stepped portion 580, as shown in FIG. 153(C). A colored sheet-like member refers to a member formed in a sheet-like shape whose surface is coated with colored painting or printing, a member formed in a sheet-like shape from a colored material, and the like. As the material for forming the colored sheet-like member, any material such as resin, paper, metal foil, etc. can be used. As mentioned above, colored means any color other than a colorless and transparent state, and includes achromatic colors such as white, gray, and black. As long as it is colored, it may be transparent (colored transparent) or opaque. Note that the sealing member SL may be any sealing member, such as a sealing seal indicating that the board case is sealed or an identification seal containing a one-dimensional or two-dimensional code (identifier) representing predetermined information. can do.

By attaching the colored seal member SL to the step portion 580 (the right edge of the board case 560), the following effect is obtained. That is, when the board case unit 500 is attached to the back side of the game board 420, if one tries to look into the board case 560 through the right edge of the board case 560 from the direction of arrow K in FIG. 147, the line of sight is blocked by the colored seal member SL, making it difficult to see inside the board case 560. Therefore, for example, even if the front frame 402 is opened slightly and one looks into the pachinko game machine PM from the open end side edge, it becomes difficult to see inside the board case 560 through the right edge of the board case 560, so that it becomes difficult to commit fraud against the board case 560. By providing the seal member SL on the step portion 580, the excellent effect of more effectively reducing visibility inside the substrate case 560 can be obtained through the synergistic effect of the seal member SL and the step portion 580, but the seal member SL may also be affixed to the portion of the right edge of the substrate case 560 where the step portion 580 is not formed.

Further, a colored seal member (sheet-like member) as described above may be provided on the side edges (upper edge, left edge, lower edge) of the board case 560 other than the right edge. For example, if a colored seal member is placed on the upper edge of the board case 560 with the board case unit 500 attached to the back side of the game board 420, the board case 560 can be inserted from above through the upper edge of the board case 560. When attempting to look inside the board case 560, the colored seal member blocks the line of sight, making it difficult to see inside the board case 560. Similar effects can be obtained when a colored seal member is arranged on the left side edge or lower side edge of the board case 560.

(Board mounting screws and connector)
As described above, the main control board 510 has screw insertion holes 512a to 512d at its four corners, as shown in FIG. Fixed on the inner side. FIG. 154 shows the relationship between the screw 513 inserted into the screw insertion hole 512b and the connector CN3. Among all the connectors mounted on the component surface 511 of the main control board 510, the connector CN3 is the connector disposed closest to the screw insertion hole 512b.

As shown in FIG. 154, a cylindrical screw receiving portion 566 perpendicular to the component surface 511 is integrally formed on the inner surface of the top case 565 (the surface facing the component surface 511). The screw 513 that penetrates from the solder surface 515 side of the main control board 510 to the component surface 511 side and is inserted into the screw insertion hole 512b enters the inside of the screw receiving portion 566 while being threadedly engaged with the inner peripheral surface of the screw receiving portion 566. The main control board 510 is fixed to the top case 565.

As shown in FIG. 154, when the main control board 510 is fixed to the top case 565 (the screws 513 are fixed to the screw receivers 566 via the main control board 510), the screws 513 from the component surface 511 The height of (the length of the portion of the screw 513 protruding from the component surface 511) is defined as H1. Further, the height of each terminal pin PN of the connector CN3 from the component surface 511 is defined as H2, and the height of the connector CN3 from the component surface 511 (the height of the housing surrounding each terminal pin PN) is defined as H3. At this time, the height H1 of the screw 513 is configured to be higher than the height H2 of each terminal pin PN of the connector CN3 and lower than the height H3 of the connector CN3.

By setting the height H1 of the screw 513, the height H2 of each terminal pin PN of the connector CN3, and the height H3 of the connector CN3 in this way, the following effect can be obtained. That is, when the board case unit 500 is attached to the rear side of the game board 420 and an attempt is made to insert a cheating device (e.g., a rod-shaped device) used for cheating into the board case 560 to cheat on the main control board 510, the height H1 of the screw 513 is higher than the height H2 of each terminal pin PN of the connector CN3, so that the screw 513 can block and prevent the cheating device from contacting or impacting the terminal pin PN.

On the other hand, if an unauthorized tool is inserted into the board case 560 and an impact is applied to the screw 513 in an attempt to damage it, the height H3 of the connector CN3 is greater than the height H1 of the screw 513, so the connector CN3 can block and prevent the unauthorized tool from impacting the screw 513, or the connector CN3 can mitigate the impact. This makes it difficult for the screw 513 (and the screw receiving portion 566) to be destroyed and the main control board 510 to be removed.

Here, we have explained the case where the height from the component surface 511 is set for the screw 513 and the connector CN3 as described above, but any screw for fixing the main control board 510 or the vicinity of the screw The height can be set as described above for any connector placed in the connector, and similar effects can be obtained.

The characteristic configuration of the board case unit 500 (board case 560 and main control board 510) described above is based on the main control board case unit CU1 in the pachinko gaming machine PM, such as the performance control board case unit CU2, the payout control board case The same effect can be obtained by applying the same to the unit CU3 and the power supply board case unit CU4. Further, it is also possible to apply the present invention to the main control board case unit 160 and the sub-control board case unit in the slot machine SM to obtain the same effect.

In each of the embodiments described above, examples of gaming machines to which the present invention is applied include a slot machine (reel type gaming machine) that uses game medals as a gaming value, and a pachinko game that uses game balls as a gaming value. Although the machine has been described as an example, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, a reel-type game machine that uses game balls as a game value, or a game machine that uses information recorded on an electronic recording medium as a game value. The present invention can be similarly applied to reel-type gaming machines, pachinko gaming machines, mahjong ball gaming machines, arranged ball machines, etc., and similar effects can be obtained. Further, the present invention can be similarly applied to slot machines having four or more reels, and similar effects can be obtained.

1 Slot machine 2 Front door 3a, 3b, 3c Reels (first embodiment)
25 Start lever 26a, 26b, 26c Stop switch (first embodiment)
60 Main control board 70 Sub control board 70A Sub main control board 70B Sub sub control board 100 Main control means 200 Sub control means 200A Sub main control means 200B Sub sub control means RE1, RE2, RE3 Reel (second embodiment)
SS1, SS2, SS3 stop switch (second embodiment)
W Display window DP Image display section SM Slot machine (fifth embodiment)
PM Pachinko gaming machine (fifth embodiment)

Claims (1)

A role ratio monitor that can display the role ratio,
Equipped with a set value display,
The surface color of each segment when the role ratio monitor is not lit is configured so that it can be recognized as a different color from the surface color of each segment when the set value display is not lit,
The surface color of the segment that is lit when the ratio monitor is lit can now be recognized as being approximately the same color as the surface color of the segment that is lit when the set value display is lit. It is configured,
The size of the predetermined number that can be displayed in each segment of the set value display is larger than the size of the predetermined number that can be displayed in each segment of the role ratio monitor.
slot machine.

Images